738713
680
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/698
Pagina verder
S60
T W I N E N G I N E
OWNER'S MANUAL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo.
The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and
your passengers. Volvo strives to design one of the safest cars in the
world. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and
environmental requirements.
To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you
read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's
manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo
Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and
other cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alco-
hol or medication – or have an impaired ability to drive in some
other way.
2
OWNER INFORMATION
Owner information
18
Owner's manual in centre display
19
Navigate in the owner's manual in
the centre display
21
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
23
Volvo Cars support site
23
Reading the owner's manual
24
The owner's manual and the envi-
ronment
26
YOUR VOLVO
Volvo ID
28
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
28
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
30
IntelliSafe – driver support and safety
33
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
34
Software updates
37
Recording data
37
Terms & Conditions for Services
38
Customer Privacy Policy
39
Important information on acces-
sories and auxiliary equipment
39
Installation of accessories
40
Connection of equipment to the
car's diagnostic socket
40
Showing the car's identification
number
41
Driver distraction
42
SAFETY
Safety
44
Safety during pregnancy
45
Whiplash Protection System
45
Pedestrian Protection System
47
Seatbelts
48
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
48
Seatbelt tensioner
50
Resetting the electric seatbelt
tensioner*
51
Door and seatbelt reminder
51
Airbags
53
Driver airbags
53
Passenger airbag
54
Activating and deactivating pas-
senger airbag*
56
Side airbags
58
Inflatable curtains
59
Safety mode
59
Starting and moving the car after
safety mode
60
Child safety
61
Child seats
62
Upper mounting points for child seats
62
Lower mounting points for child seats
63
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for
child seats
64
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
Child seat positioning
64
Child seat mounting
65
Overview table for location of
child seats
68
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
69
Table for location of i-Size child seats
71
Table for location of ISOFIX child
seats
72
Detail information for child seat
manufacturers
75
DISPLAYS AND VOICE
CONTROL
Displays and controls by the driver
in a left-hand drive car
78
Displays and controls by the driver
in a right-hand drive car
79
Driver display
81
Driver display settings
83
Fuel gauge
84
Hybrid gauge
84
Hybrid battery gauge
85
Trip computer
86
Show trip data in the driver display
88
Resetting the trip meter
89
Show trip statistics in the centre
display
89
Settings for trip statistics
90
Date and time
90
Outside temperature gauge
91
Indicator symbols in the driver display
91
Warning symbols in the driver display
94
License agreement for the driver
display
95
App menu in the driver display
101
Managing the app menu in the
driver display
102
Messages in the driver display
103
Managing messages in the driver
display
104
Handling a message saved from
the driver display
105
Overview of centre display
107
Managing the centre display
110
Activating and deactivating centre
display
113
Navigating in the centre display's
views
113
Managing subviews in centre display
117
Function view in centre display
120
Moving apps and buttons in cen-
tre display
122
Symbols in the centre display's
status bar
122
Keyboard in centre display
124
Changing keyboard language in
centre display
127
Enter the characters, letters and
words manually in the centre display
127
Changing the appearance in the
centre display
129
Switching off and changing the
volume of the system sound in the
centre display
129
Changing system units
130
Changing system language
130
4
Other settings in the centre dis-
play's top view
130
Open contextual setup in the cen-
tre display
131
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
132
Resetting settings in the centre
display
132
Table showing centre display settings
133
Driver profiles
134
Selecting driver profile
135
Renaming a driver profile
135
Protect driver profile
136
Linking remote control key to
driver profile
136
Resetting settings in the driver
profiles
138
Message in centre display
138
Managing messages in the centre
display
139
Handling a message saved from
the centre display
139
Head-up display*
140
Activating and deactivating the
head-up display*
142
Settings for head-up display*
142
Voice recognition
143
Using voice recognition
144
Controlling a telephone with voice
recognition
146
Voice control of radio and media
147
Settings for voice recognition
148
LIGHTING
Lighting control
150
Adjusting light functions via the
centre display
151
Adapting the headlamp pattern
from the headlamps
152
Position lamps
152
Daytime running lights
153
Dipped beam
153
Using main beam
154
Active main beam
155
Using direction indicators
156
Active bending lights*
157
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
158
Rear fog lamp
159
Brake lights
159
Emergency brake lights
160
Hazard warning flashers
160
Using home safe lighting
161
Approach light duration
161
Interior lighting
161
Adjusting interior lighting
163
5
WINDOWS, GLASS AND
MIRRORS
Windows, glass and mirrors
166
Pinch protection for windows and
sun blinds
166
Reset sequence for pinch protection
167
Power windows
167
Operating power windows
168
Using the sun blind*
169
Rearview and door mirrors
170
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
170
Angling adjustment of the door
mirrors
171
Panoramic roof*
173
Operating the panoramic roof*
174
Automatic closing of the panor-
amic roof's* sun blind
177
Wiper blades and washer fluid
177
Using windscreen wipers
178
Using the rain sensor
179
Using the rain sensor's memory
function
180
Using windscreen and headlamp
washers
180
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Manual front seat
184
Power* front seat
185
Adjusting the power* front seat
185
Storing position for seat, door mir-
rors and head-up display*
186
Using a stored position for seat,
door mirrors and head-up display*
187
Massage settings* in the front seat
188
Adjusting massage settings* in
the front seat
189
Adjusting* the length of the seat
cushion in the front seat
190
Adjusting the side support* in the
front seat
191
Adjusting the lumbar support* in
the front seat
192
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
193
Lowering the backrests in the rear
seat*
194
Adjusting the head restraints in
the rear seat
195
Steering wheel controls and horn
197
Steering lock
197
Adjusting the steering wheel
198
CLIMATE
Climate
200
Climate zones
200
Climate control - sensors
200
Perceived temperature
201
Controlling climate control with
voice recognition
201
Air quality
202
Clean Zone*
203
Clean Zone Interior Package*
204
Interior Air Quality System*
204
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
205
Passenger compartment filter
205
Air distribution
205
Changing air distribution
206
Opening, closing and aiming the
air vents
207
Table of air distribution options
208
Climate controls
211
Activating and deactivating
heated front seat*
212
Activating and deactivating auto-
matic start of heated front seat*
213
Activating and deactivating
heated rear seat*
213
Activating and deactivating venti-
lated front seat*
214
6
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
215
Activating and deactivating auto-
matic start of heated steering wheel*
215
Activating auto climate control
215
Activating and deactivating air
recirculation
216
Activating and deactivating time
setting for air recirculation
217
Activating and deactivating max
defroster
217
Activating and deactivating the
heated windscreen*
218
Activating and deactivating auto-
matic start of heated windscreen*
219
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door mirrors
219
Activating and deactivating auto-
matic starting of the heated rear
window and door mirrors
220
Regulating fan level for front seat
220
Regulating temperature for front seat
221
Synchronising temperature
222
Activating and deactivating air
conditioning
222
Parking climate
223
Preconditioning
223
Start and switch off preconditioning
224
Preconditioning time setting
225
Adding and editing time setting
for preconditioning
226
Activating and deactivating time
setting for preconditioning
227
Removing time setting for precon-
ditioning
228
Climate comfort when parking
229
Starting and switching off climate
comfort when parking
229
Symbols and messages for park-
ing climate control
231
Heater
233
Parking heater
234
Additional heater
235
Activating and deactivating auto-
matic start of auxiliary heater
236
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Lock confirmation
238
Lock indication setting
239
Remote control key
239
Locking and unlocking with the
remote control key
242
Settings for remotely controlled
and inside unlocking
243
Remote control key range
243
Replacing the battery in the
remote control key
244
Ordering more remote control keys
248
Red Key - restricted remote con-
trol key*
248
Settings for Red Key*
249
Detachable key blade
250
Locking and unlocking with the
detachable key blade
251
Immobiliser
253
Type approval for the remote con-
trol key system
254
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
267
Keyless locking and unlocking*
268
Settings for Keyless entry*
269
Antenna locations for the start
and lock systems
269
Locking and unlocking from inside
the car
270
7
Unlocking the boot lid from the
inside of the car
271
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
271
Automatic locking when driving
273
Operating the boot lid with foot
movement*
273
Private locking
274
Activating and deactivating pri-
vate locking
274
Alarm*
275
Activating and deactivating alarms*
277
Reduced alarm level*
278
Double lock*
278
Temporarily* deactivating double
locks
279
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driving support systems
282
Speed-dependent steering force
282
Electronic stability control
283
Electronic Stability Control in
sport mode
284
Activating or deactivating sport
mode for electronic stability control
285
Symbols and messages for elec-
tronic stability control
286
Connected Safety
287
Activating or deactivating
Connected Safety
288
Limitations of Connected Safety
289
City Safety
289
Subfunctions for City Safety
291
Setting the warning distance for
City Safety
292
Detection of obstacles with City
Safety
294
City Safety in cross traffic
296
Limitations for City Safety in cross
traffic
297
City Safety steering assistance for
evasive manoeuvre
297
Limitations of City Safety steering
assistance when taking evasive action
298
Automatic braking in the event of
an impeded evasive manoeuvre
with City Safety
298
City Safety brakes for oncoming
vehicles
299
Limitations of City Safety
300
Messages for City Safety
303
Road Sign Information*
304
Activating or deactivating road
sign information*
305
Display mode for road sign infor-
mation*
306
Road Sign Information and
Sensus Navigation*
308
Warning for speed limitation and
speed camera from road sign
information*
308
Activating or deactivating warn-
ings from road sign information*
309
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
310
Speed limiter
311
Selecting and activating speed limiter
312
Deactivating the speed limiter
313
Temporary deactivation of speed
limiter
314
Limitations for speed limiter
314
Automatic speed limiter
314
8
Activating or deactivating the
automatic speed limiter
316
Changing the tolerance for the
automatic speed limiter
317
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
317
Cruise control
318
Selecting and activating cruise control
319
Deactivating cruise control
320
Standby mode for cruise control
320
Adaptive cruise control*
321
Controls for adaptive cruise control*
322
Display mode for adaptive cruise
control*
323
Selecting and activating adaptive
cruise control*
324
Deactivating adaptive cruise control*
325
Standby mode for adaptive cruise
control*
326
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
327
Change between cruise control
and adaptive cruise control* in the
centre display
328
Symbols and messages for adap-
tive cruise control*
329
Pilot Assist*
330
Controls for Pilot Assist*
332
Display mode for Pilot Assist*
333
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
335
Deactivate Pilot Assist*
336
Standby mode for Pilot Assist*
336
Temporary disabling of steering
assistance with Pilot Assist*
337
Limitations of Pilot Assist*
338
Symbols and messages for
Pilot Assist*
340
Cornering support*
341
Activating or deactivating corner-
ing support*
342
Limitations for cornering support*
342
Overtaking Assistance*
343
Use Overtaking Assistance
343
Warning from driver support in
the event of a collision risk
344
Change of target with driver support
345
Set the stored speed for driver
support
346
Set time interval to vehicle ahead
347
Drive modes when using time
interval to vehicles
348
Automatic braking with driver support
348
Lane assistance
349
Activating or deactivating lane
assistance
351
Selecting assistance option for
lane assistance
352
Limitations of Lane assistance
352
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
353
Display mode for lane assistance
355
Steering assistance at risk of collision
356
Activating or deactivating steering
assistance in the event of a colli-
sion risk
357
Steering assistance upon risk of
run-off
357
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
358
Steering assistance upon risk of
rear-end collision*
359
Limitations for steering assistance
at risk of collision
360
Symbols and messages for steer-
ing assistance upon risk of collision
361
Rear Collision Warning*
362
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning*
362
BLIS*
363
Activating or deactivating BLIS
364
Limitations of BLIS
365
Messages for BLIS
366
Driver Alert Control
367
9
Activating or deactivating Driver
Alert Control
368
Select rest stop guidance in the
event of a warning from Driver
Alert Control
368
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
369
Distance Warning*
369
Activating or deactivating dis-
tance warning
370
Limitations of Distance Warning
370
Cross Traffic Alert*
371
Activating or deactivating Cross
Traffic Alert*
372
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert*
372
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert*
374
Park Assist*
375
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and
along the sides*
376
Activating or deactivating the
parking assistance system*
377
Limitations of Parking assistance
378
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot
380
Park assist camera*
381
Park assist camera locations and
surveillance areas*
382
Park assist lines for park assist
camera*
384
Sensor fields for parking assis-
tance system
386
Activate park assist camera
388
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera
389
Park Assist Pilot*
391
Parking variants with Park Assist
Pilot*
392
Using Park Assist Pilot*
393
Leaving parallel parking with Park
Assist Pilot*
396
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
396
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
399
Radar unit
400
Type approval for radar device
401
Camera unit
409
Limitations for camera and radar unit
409
Recommended maintenance for
camera and radar unit
412
Symbols and messages for cam-
era and radar unit
414
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND
CHARGING
General information about Twin
Engine
418
Charging the hybrid battery
419
Charging current
420
Charging cable
421
Ground fault breaker in the charg-
ing cable
423
Temperature monitoring of the
charging cable
424
Opening and closing the hatch for
the charging input socket
425
Start charging the hybrid battery
425
Charging status in the car's charg-
ing input socket
428
Charging status in the charging
cable's control unit
429
Charging status in the car's driver
display
432
Stop charging of hybrid battery
434
Symbols and messages relating to
Twin Engine in the driver display
436
Long-term storage of vehicles
with hybrid batteries
438
10
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the car
440
Switching off the car
441
Ignition positions
442
Selecting ignition mode
443
Alcohol lock*
444
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
444
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock*
445
Brake functions
445
Foot brake
445
Brake assistance
447
Braking on wet roads
447
Braking on gritted roads
447
Brake system maintenance
448
Parking brake
448
Activating and deactivating the
parking brake
449
Automatic parking brake activation
setting
450
Parking on a hill
450
In the event of a fault in the park-
ing brake
451
Automatic braking when stationary
451
Activating and deactivating the
automatic brake at a standstill
452
Help when starting on a hill
453
Auto braking after a collision
453
Regenerative braking*
453
Gearbox
454
Automatic gearbox
454
Changing gear with automatic gearbox
455
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
456
Gear selector inhibitor
458
Kick-down function
458
Symbols and messages for auto-
matic gearbox
458
Gear shift indicator
459
All-wheel drive
459
Drive systems
460
Starting and stopping the com-
bustion engine in Twin Engine
461
Drive modes
461
Changing drive mode
465
Energy distribution in hybrid drive
using map data*
466
Level control* and shock absorption
467
Adjusting the setting for damping
Polestar Engineered*
468
Economical driving
469
Factors that affect range when
running on electricity
471
Hold and Charge function
472
Preparations for a long trip
473
Winter driving
473
Driving in water
474
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
475
Filling fuel
476
Handling of fuel
477
Petrol
478
Petrol particle filter
479
Overheating in the engine and
drive system
480
Overloading the starter battery
481
Using jump starting with another
battery
481
Towbar*
483
Specifications for towbar*
484
Extendable and retractable towbar*
484
Driving with a trailer
486
Trailer stability assist*
488
Checking trailer lamps
489
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
490
Towing
491
Fitting and removing the towing eye
492
Recovery
493
HomeLink
®
*
493
11
Programming HomeLink
®
*
494
Using HomeLink
®
*
496
Type approval for HomeLink
®
*
497
Compass*
497
Activating and deactivating the
compass*
497
Calibrating the compass*
498
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sound, media and Internet
500
Audio settings
500
Sound experience*
501
Apps
502
Downloading apps
503
Updating apps
504
Deleting apps
504
Radio
505
Start radio
505
Changing radio band and radio station
506
Searching for radio stations
507
Save radio channels in the Radio
Favourites app
508
Settings for radio
508
RDS radio
510
Digital radio*
510
Link between FM and digital radio*
511
Media player
511
Media playback
512
Controlling and changing media
513
Searching media
514
Gracenote
®
515
CD player*
516
Video
516
Playing a video
516
Playing back DivX
®
517
Settings for video
517
Media via Bluetooth
®
517
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
518
Media via USB port
518
Connecting a device via USB port
518
Technical specifications for USB
devices
519
Compatible media formats
519
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
520
Using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
521
Settings for Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
523
Tips for using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
523
Android Auto*
524
Using Android Auto*
525
Settings for Android Auto*
525
Tips for using Android Auto*
526
Phone
527
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
528
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
529
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
530
12
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-con-
nected phone
530
Switch between Bluetooth-con-
nected phones
531
Removing devices connected to
Bluetooth
531
Managing phone calls
531
Managing text messages
532
Settings for text messages
533
Managing the phone book
534
Settings for phone
534
Settings for Bluetooth devices
535
Internet-connected car*
535
Connect the car to the Internet via
a Bluetooth-enabled phone
536
Connect the car to the Internet via
a phone (Wi-Fi)
537
Connect the car to the Internet via
car modem (SIM card)
538
Settings for car modem*
538
Sharing Internet access from the
car via a Wi-Fi hotspot
539
No or poor Internet connection
540
Remove Wi-Fi network
541
Wi-Fi technologies and security
541
User terms and conditions and
data sharing
541
Activating and deactivating data
sharing
542
Data sharing for services
542
Storage space on hard disk
543
License agreement for audio and media
544
ECALL
eCall
556
Automatic collision alarm with eCall
556
Emergency assistance with eCall
557
Roadside Assistance
557
13
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres
560
Dimension designation for tyre
562
Dimension designation for wheel rim
563
Tyres' rotation direction
563
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
564
Checking tyre pressure
564
Adjusting tyre pressure
565
Recommended tyre pressure
566
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
567
Saving a new tyre pressure in the
monitoring system*
568
See tyre pressure status in the
centre display*
569
Action in the event of warning for
low tyre pressure
570
Messages for tyre pressure moni-
toring*
571
Changing wheel
571
Tool kit
573
Jack*
574
Wheel bolts
574
Spare wheel*
575
Handling the spare wheel*
576
Winter tyres
577
Snow chains
577
Emergency puncture repair kit
578
Using a puncture repair kit
579
Inflating tyres with the compressor
from the puncture repair kit
583
LOADING, STORAGE AND
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Passenger compartment interior
586
Tunnel console
587
Electrical sockets
588
Using electrical sockets
590
Using the glovebox
591
Sun visors
593
Cargo area
593
Recommendations for loading
593
Roof load and loading on load carriers
594
Bag hooks
595
Load retaining eyelets
596
Through-load hatch in the rear seat*
596
First aid kit*
596
Warning triangle
597
14
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
600
Data transfer between car and
workshop via Wi-Fi
600
Download Center
601
Managing system updates via the
Download Centre
601
Car status
602
Book service and repair
603
Sending car information to a workshop
604
Raise the car
605
Servicing the climate control system
608
Head up display when replacing
the windscreen*
608
Opening and closing the bonnet
609
Engine compartment overview
610
Engine oil
611
Checking and filling with engine oil
613
Topping up coolant
614
Starter battery
616
Hybrid battery
618
Symbols on the batteries
618
Battery recycle
619
Fuses and central electrical units
619
Replacing a fuse
620
Fuses in engine compartment
621
Fuses under glovebox
628
Fuses in cargo area
633
Bulb replacement
638
Cleaning the interior
638
Cleaning the centre display
639
Cleaning the head up display*
640
Cleaning fabric upholstery and
headlining
640
Cleaning the seatbelts
641
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
641
Cleaning leather upholstery*
642
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
643
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood parts
643
Cleaning the exterior
644
Polishing and waxing
644
Handwashing
645
Automatic car wash
646
High-pressure washing
648
Cleaning the wiper blades
648
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber
and trim components
649
Cleaning wheel rims
650
Rustproofing
650
Car paintwork
650
Touching up minor paintwork damage
651
Colour codes
652
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
652
Set the wiper blades in service
position
653
Filling washer fluid
654
15
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
658
Dimensions
661
Weights
663
Towing capacity and towball load
664
Engine specifications
666
Engine oil – specifications
667
Adverse driving conditions for
engine oil
669
Coolant – specifications
670
Transmission fluid – specifications
670
Brake fluid – specifications
670
Fuel tank - volume
671
Air conditioning – specifications
671
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions
673
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
676
Minimum permitted tyre load
index and speed rating for tyres
677
Approved tyre pressures
678
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Alphabetical Index 679
OWNER INFORMATION
OWNER INFORMATION
18
Owner information
Owner's information is available in several
different product formats, both digital and
printed. The owner's manual is available in
the car's centre display, as a mobile app and
on the Volvo Cars support site. There is a
Quick Guide and a supplement to the
owner's manual available in the glovebox,
with specifications and fuse information,
amongst other things. A printed owner's
manual can be ordered.
The car's centre display
1
In the centre display, drag
down the top view and tap on
Owner's manual. Available
here are options for visual
navigation with exterior and
interior images of the car. The
information is searchable and
is also divided into categories.
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual",
download the app to your
smartphone or tablet and
select the car. Available in the
app are video tutorials and
options for visual navigation
with exterior and interior images of the car.
The content is searchable, and the various
sections are designed to facilitate navigation.
Volvo Cars support site
Go to https://
www.volvocars.com/intl/
support and choose your
country. Here you can find
owner's manuals, both online
and in PDF format. On the
Volvo Cars support site there
are also video tutorials and further information
and help regarding your Volvo and your car
ownership. The page is available for most mar-
kets.
Printed information
There is a supplement to the
owner's manual
1
in the glove-
box that contains information
on fuses and specifications,
as well as a summary of
important and practical infor-
mation.
There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
format that helps you to get started with the
most commonly used functions in the car.
Depending on equipment level selected, mar-
ket, etc. additional owner's information may
also be available in printed format in the car.
1
A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.
OWNER INFORMATION
}}
19
A printed owner's manual and associated sup-
plement can be ordered. Contact a Volvo
dealer to order.
IMPORTANT
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that
applicable laws and regulations are fol-
lowed. It is also important that the car is
maintained and handled in accordance
with Volvo's recommendations in the
owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the
information in the centre display and the
printed information then it is always the
printed information that applies.
NOTE
Changing the language in the centre dis-
play may mean that some owner's informa-
tion is not compliant with national or local
laws and regulations. Do not switch to a
language that is difficult to understand as
this may make it difficult to find your way
back through the screen structure.
Related information
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
(p. 23)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 23)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 24)
Owner's manual in centre display
A digital
2
version of the owner's manual is
available in the car's centre display.
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
from the top view, and in some cases the con-
textual owner's manual can also be accessed
from the top view.
NOTE
The digital owner's manual is not available
while driving.
||
OWNER INFORMATION
20
Owner's manual
Top view with button for owner's manual.
To open the owner's manual - drag down the
top view in the centre display and tap on
Owner's manual.
The information in the owner's manual can be
accessed directly via the owner's manual
homepage or its top menu.
Contextual owner's manual
Top view with button for contextual owner's manual.
The contextual owner's manual is a shortcut to
an article in the owner's manual that describes
the active function shown on the screen.
When the contextual owner's manual is availa-
ble, it is shown to the right of
Owner's
manual in the top view.
Tapping on the contextual owner's manual
therefore opens an article in the owner's man-
ual that is related to the content that is shown
on the screen. E.g. tap on
Navigation Manual
– an article that is related to navigation opens.
This only applies to some of the apps in the
car. For downloaded third party apps,
for example, it is not possible to access app-
specific articles.
Related information
Navigate in the owner's manual in the
centre display (p. 21)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
Downloading apps (p. 503)
2
Applies for most markets.
OWNER INFORMATION
}}
21
Navigate in the owner's manual in
the centre display
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
from the centre display top view in the car.
The content is searchable, and the various
sections are designed to facilitate navigation.
The owner's manual is accessed from the top view.
To open the owner's manual - drag down
the top view in the centre display and tap
on
Owner's manual.
There is a range of different options for finding
information in the owner's manual. The
options can be accessed from the owner's
manual homepage and from the top menu.
Opening the menu in the top menu
Press in the upper list in the owner's
manual.
> A menu with different options for find-
ing information is opened:
Homepage
Tap on the symbol to go back
to the start page in the
owner's manual.
Categories
The articles in the owner's
manual are structured into
main categories and subcate-
gories. The same article can
be found in several appropri-
ate categories so that it can
be found more easily.
1.
Press
Categories.
> The main categories are shown in a list.
2.
Tap on a main category (
).
>
A list of subcategories (
) and articles
(
) is shown.
3. Tap on an article to open it.
To go back, press the back arrow.
Featured articles
Press the symbol to access a
page with links to a selection
of articles that can be useful
to read in order to get to
know the more common
functions of the car. The arti-
cles can also be accessed via
categories, but are collected here for faster
access. Tap on an article in order to read it in
its entirety.
||
OWNER INFORMATION
22
Hotspots for exterior and interior
Exterior and interior overview
images of the car. Different
parts are designated with
hotspots that lead to articles
about those parts of the car.
1.
Press
Exterior or Interior.
> Exterior or interior images are shown
with so-called hotspots in place. The
hotspot leads to articles about the cor-
responding part of the car. Swipe hori-
zontally over the screen to browse
among the images.
2. Tap on a hotspot.
> The title of the article about the area is
shown.
3. Tap on the title to open the article.
To go back, press the back arrow.
Favourites
Press the symbol to access
the articles saved as favour-
ites. Tap on an article in order
to read it in its entirety.
Saving or deleting articles as favourites
Save an article as favourite by pressing at
the top right when an article is open. When an
article has been saved as a favourite the star is
filled in:
.
To remove an article as a favourite, press the
star again in the current article.
Video
Press the symbol to view
brief instruction videos for
various functions in the car.
Information
Tap on the symbol to obtain
information about which ver-
sion of the owner's manual is
available in the car as well as
other useful information.
Using the search function in the top
menu
1.
Tap on in the top menu of the owner's
manual. A keyboard appears in the lower
part of the screen.
2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt".
> Suggestions for articles and categories
are shown while letters are being
entered.
3. Tap on the article or category to access it.
Related information
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 124)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 24)
OWNER INFORMATION
}}
* Option/accessory.
23
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
The owner's manual is available as a mobile
app
3
from both the App Store and Google
Play. The app is adapted for smartphones and
tablets.
The owner's manual can be
downloaded as a mobile app
from the App Store or Google
Play. The QR code provided
here takes you directly to the
app. Alternatively, you can
search for "Volvo manual" in
the App Store or Google Play.
The app contains a video along with exterior
and interior images where different parts of
the car are highlighted with so-called hot-
spots, which lead to articles about the area in
question. The content is searchable, and the
various sections are designed to facilitate navi-
gation.
The mobile app is available from both the App Store
and Google Play.
Related information
Reading the owner's manual (p. 24)
Volvo Cars support site
More information on your car is available on
the Volvo Cars website and support site.
Support on the Internet
Go to https://www.volvocars.com/intl/
support to visit the page. The support site is
available for most markets.
It contains support for functions such as web-
based services and functions, Volvo On Call*,
the navigation system* and apps. Videos and
step-by-step instructions explain different pro-
cedures, e.g. how to connect the car to the
Internet via a mobile phone.
Downloadable information
Maps
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation
there is the facility to download maps from the
support page.
Owner's manuals as PDF
Owner's manuals are available for download in
PDF format. Select car model and model year
to download the manual as required.
Contact
The support site contains contact details to
customer support and your nearest Volvo
retailer.
3
For certain mobile devices.
||
OWNER INFORMATION
* Option/accessory.
24
Log in to Volvo Cars website
Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to
www.volvocars.com. When you have logged
in it is possible to get an overview of service,
agreements and warranties,
amongst other things. Here there is also infor-
mation about accessories and software adap-
ted for your car model.
Related information
Volvo ID (p. 28)
Reading the owner's manual
To help you get to know your new car, read
the Owner's Manual before you drive it for
the first time.
Reading the owner's manual is a way to
become familiar with new functions, get
advice on how to handle the car in different
situations and learn how to make use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the owner's
manual.
The intention of this owner's information is to
explain all possible functions, options and
accessories included in a Volvo vehicle. It is
not intended as an indication or guarantee that
all of these features, functions and options are
included in every vehicle. Some terminology
used may not exactly match terminology used
in sales, marketing and advertising materials.
Development work is constantly underway in
order to improve our product. Modifications
may mean that information, descriptions and
illustrations in the owner's manual differ from
the equipment in the car. We reserve the right
to make modifications without prior notice.
Do not remove this manual from the car - if
problems should arise then the necessary
information about where and how to seek pro-
fessional help will be missing.
© Volvo Car Corporation
Options/accessories
In addition to standard equipment, the
owner's manual also describes options (fac-
tory fitted equipment) and certain accessories
(retrofitted extra equipment).
All, at the time of publication known, options
and accessories are marked with an asterisk:
*.
The equipment described in the owner's man-
ual is not available in all cars - they have differ-
ent equipment depending on adaptations for
the needs of different markets and national or
local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is stand-
ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
OWNER INFORMATION
25
NOTE
Note texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of e.g. features and functions.
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a clear manner. The decals in the car have
the following descending degree of impor-
tance for the warning/information.
Warning of personal injury
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
serious personal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
damage to property.
Information
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact rep-
licas of those in the car. They are included
to show their approximate appearance and
location in the car. The information that
applies to your particular car is available on
the respective decals for your car.
Illustrations and video clips
Illustrations and video clips used in the
owner's manual are sometimes schematic and
are intended to provide an overall picture or
example of a certain function. They may devi-
ate from the car's appearance depending on
equipment level and market.
Related information
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 23)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 23)
OWNER INFORMATION
26
The owner's manual and the
environment
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper orig-
inating from controlled forests.
The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)
®
sym-
bol shows that the paper pulp in a printed
owner's manual comes from FSC
®
-certified
forests or other controlled sources.
Related information
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 30)
YOUR VOLVO
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
28
Volvo ID
Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives access to
a wide range of services via a single user-
name and password.
NOTE
The services available may vary over time
and depend on equipment level and mar-
ket.
Examples of services:
Volvo On Call app* – check the car with
your phone. For example, you can check
fuel level, show the nearest petrol station
and lock the car remotely.
Send to Car – send addresses from map
services on the Web, directly to the car.
Book service and repair – register a work-
shop/dealer at volvocars.com and book
service directly from the car.
NOTE
If the username/password for a service
(e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is
also changed automatically for other servi-
ces.
Volvo ID is created from the car,
volvocars.com or the Volvo On Call app
1
.
When a Volvo ID is registered in the car, sev-
eral services will be made available. Several
Volvo IDs can be used for the same car and
several cars can even be connected to the
same Volvo ID.
Related information
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
(p. 28)
Book service and repair (p. 603)
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different
ways. If the Volvo ID is created at
volvocars.com or with Volvo On Call app
2
, the
Volvo ID must also be registered to the car to
enable use of the various Volvo ID services.
Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo ID app
1. Download the Volvo ID app from
Download Centre in the centre display's
app view.
2. Start the app and register a personal email
address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automati-
cally sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created and
automatically registered to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars
website
1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in
3
using the icon at the top right. Select Cre-
ate Volvo ID.
2. Enter a personal email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automati-
cally sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
1
If you have Volvo On Call*.
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
29
Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo On Call
app
4
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo
On Call app to the phone
5
.
2. Select to create Volvo ID.
3. The web page for creating a Volvo ID
opens. Fill in the requested information.
4. Tick the box to accept the terms and con-
ditions.
5. Press the button that creates your Volvo
ID.
6. An e-mail message is sent to the address
given. Click on the link in the e-mail mes-
sage to activate Volvo ID.
> Now the Volvo ID is ready to use.
Registering your Volvo ID to the car
If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the
Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as fol-
lows:
1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID
app from
Download Centre in the centre
display's app view.
NOTE
To download apps, the car must be con-
nected to the Internet.
2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your
email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automati-
cally sent to the email address linked to
your Volvo ID.
> Your Volvo ID is now registered to the
car. Volvo ID services can now be used.
Related information
Volvo ID (p. 28)
Downloading apps (p. 503)
Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 601)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
2
Only applies to certain markets.
3
Available on certain markets.
4
Cars with Volvo On Call*.
5
Available to download via e.g. Apple App Store or Google Play.
YOUR VOLVO
30
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working
on the development of safer and more effi-
cient products and solutions in order to
reduce the negative impact on the environ-
ment.
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core
values and influences all operations. The envi-
ronmental work is based on the whole life
cycle of the car and takes into account the
environmental impact it has, from design to
scrapping and recycling. Volvo Cars' basic
principle is that every new product developed
must have less impact on the environment
than the product it replaces.
Volvo's environmental management work has
resulted in the development of more effective
and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal
environment is also important to Volvo - the
air inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than
the air outside thanks to the climate control
system.
Your Volvo complies with stringent interna-
tional environmental standards. All Volvo's
manufacturing units must be ISO 14001 certi-
fied, and this supports a systematic approach
to the operation's environmental issues, which
leads to continuous improvement with
reduced environmental impact. Holding the
ISO certificate also means that environmental
laws and regulations in force are complied
with. Volvo also requires that its partners must
also meet these requirements.
Fuel consumption
Since a large part of a car's total environmen-
tal impact stems from its use, the emphasis of
Volvo Cars' environmental work is on reducing
fuel consumption, carbon dioxide emissions
and other air pollutants. Volvo cars have com-
petitive fuel consumption in each of their
respective classes. Lower fuel consumption
generally results in lower emission of the
greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
YOUR VOLVO
}}
* Option/accessory.
31
Contributing to a better environment
An energy-efficient and economical car can
contribute to reduced environmental impact
and also involve reduced costs for the owner
of the car. As the driver, it is easy to reduce
fuel consumption and thereby save money and
contribute to a better environment - here is
some advice:
Plan for an effective average speed.
Speeds above approx. 80 km/h (approx.
50 mph) and below 50 km/h (approx.
30 mph) lead to increased energy con-
sumption.
Follow the Service and Warranty Book-
let's recommended intervals for service
and maintenance of the car.
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off
the engine when stationary for longer peri-
ods. Pay attention to local regulations.
Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary
stops and uneven speed contribute to
increased fuel consumption.
Use preconditioning – it can improve the
range of the hybrid battery and reduce the
energy requirement while driving.
Also remember to always dispose of environ-
mentally hazardous waste, such as batteries
and oil, in an environmentally safe manner.
Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty
about how this type of waste should be dis-
carded - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-
cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
An air filter helps prevent dust and pollen
entering the passenger compartment via the
air intake.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*
ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than
the air in the traffic outside.
The system cleans the air in the passenger
compartment from contaminants such as par-
ticles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and
ground-level ozone. If the outside air is conta-
minated then the air intake is closed and the
air is recirculated. Such a situation may arise
in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for exam-
ple.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack-
age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function
that allows the fan to start when the car is
unlocked with the remote control key.
Interior
The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
carefully selected and has been tested in order
to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the
details are hand-made, such as the seams of
the steering wheel that are sewn by hand. The
interior is monitored in order not to emit
strong odours or substances that cause dis-
comfort in the event of e.g. high heat and
bright light.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consump-
tion for your car. In this way you also contrib-
ute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's
workshops are entrusted with the service and
maintenance of your car it becomes part of
Volvo's system. Volvo makes clear demands
regarding the way in which workshop prem-
ises shall be designed in order to prevent spills
and discharges into the environment. The
workshop staff have the knowledge and the
tools required to guarantee good environmen-
tal care.
Recycling
Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspec-
tive, it is also important that the car is recycled
in an environmentally sound manner. Almost
all of the car can be recycled. The last owner
of the car is therefore requested to contact a
retailer for referral to a certified/approved
recycling facility.
||
YOUR VOLVO
32
Related information
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions
(p. 673)
Economical driving (p. 469)
Start and switch off preconditioning
(p. 224)
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 26)
Air quality (p. 202)
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
33
IntelliSafe – driver support and
safety
IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept for car
safety. IntelliSafe comprises a number of sys-
tems
6
, whose purpose is to make a car jour-
ney safer, to prevent injuries and to protect
passengers and other road users.
WARNING
The functions are supplementary aids -
they cannot handle all situations in all con-
ditions.
The driver always bears responsibility that
the vehicle is driven safely and that applica-
ble road traffic rules and regulations are fol-
lowed.
Support
With the aim of assisting the driver to drive
the car in a safer way, IntelliSafe has the fol-
lowing functions.
Active main beam
Tunnel detection
Pilot Assist
Cross Traffic Alert*
Blind Spot Information*
Park Assist*
Park Assist Pilot*
Park assist camera*
Road Sign Information*
Electronic stability control
Roll Stability Control
Speed limiter*
Cruise control
Adaptive cruise control*
Rear Collision Warning
Driver Alert Control
All-wheel drive
7
Prevention
With the aim of assisting the driver to avoid an
accident, IntelliSafe has the following func-
tions.
City Safety
Distance Warning*
Lane assistance
Collision Avoid. Assistance
Protection
With the aim of protecting the driver and pas-
sengers in certain situations in the event of an
accident, IntelliSafe has the following collabo-
rative functions.
Whiplash Protection System
Pedestrian Protection System
Seatbelts with seatbelt tensioners
Airbags
NOTE
Read the individual sections on each sys-
tem in order to fully understand the func-
tions and learn about important warnings.
Related information
Active main beam (p. 155)
Safety (p. 44)
Driving support systems (p. 282)
6
Some of the systems are fitted as standard, while others are options. This may vary depending on market, model year and car model.
7
All Wheel Drive
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
34
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
Sensus makes it possible to use different
types of apps and turn the car into a Wi-Fi
hotspot.
This is Sensus
Sensus offers an intelligent interface and
online connectivity with the digital world. An
intuitive navigation structure makes it possible
to receive relevant support, information and
entertainment when it is necessary, without
distracting the driver.
Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are
connected with entertainment, online connec-
tivity, navigation* and the user interface
between driver and car. It is Sensus that
makes communication possible between you,
the car and the outside world.
Information when it is needed, where
it is needed
The different displays in the car provide infor-
mation at the right time. The information is
shown in different locations based on how it
should be prioritised by the driver.
YOUR VOLVO
}}
* Option/accessory.
35
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.
Head-up display*
The head-up display shows selected informa-
tion that the driver should deal with as soon as
possible. Such information may, for example,
include traffic warnings, speed information
and navigation* information. Road Sign Infor-
mation and incoming phone calls are also
shown in the head-up display. The display is
operated via the right-hand steering wheel
keypad and via the centre display.
Driver display
The driver display shows information on speed
and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being
||
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
36
played. The display is operated via the two
steering wheel keypads.
Centre display
Many of the main functions of the car are con-
trolled from the centre display, a touch screen
which reacts to touch. The number of physical
buttons and controls in the car is therefore
minimal. The screen can even be operated
while wearing gloves.
From here, for example, you can control the
climate control system, the entertainment sys-
tem and seat position*. The information that is
shown in the centre display can be acted on
by the driver or someone else in the car when
the opportunity arises.
Voice recognition system
The voice recognition system
can be used without the
driver needing to take his/her
hands off the steering wheel.
The system can understand
natural speech. Use voice
recognition to, for example,
play back a song, call someone, increase the
temperature or read out a text message.
Related information
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Driver display (p. 81)
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 539)
YOUR VOLVO
}}
37
Software updates
So that you as a Volvo customer get the best
experience of your car, Volvo continuously
develops the systems in the cars and the ser-
vices that you are offered.
You can update the software in your Volvo to
the latest version when your car is serviced at
an authorised Volvo dealer. The latest soft-
ware update allows you to benefit from availa-
ble improvements, including improvements
from earlier software updates.
For more information about released updates
and answers to frequently asked questions,
please go to https://www.volvocars.com/intl/
support.
NOTE
Functionality after updating may vary
depending on market, model, model year
and options.
Related information
Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 34)
Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 601)
Recording data
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assur-
ance, certain information about the vehicle's
operation, functionality and incidents are
recorded in the car.
Vehicles equipped with VCM High
8
can col-
lect data on the vehicle's safety functions as
well as other functions in the vehicle. Data are
collected for product development, quality fol-
low-up and safety work, as well as to improve
and monitor the vehicle's quality and its safety
functions. The purpose of data collection is
also to manage Volvo Car Corporation's war-
ranty undertakings, as well as to meet legal
requirements related to engine emissions
data.
NOTE
In conjunction with data collection, Volvo
may use a small part of the vehicle's data
plan of up to 10 MB/month.
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to
register and record data related to traffic acci-
dents or collision-like situations, such as times
when the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes
an obstacle in the road. The data is recorded in
order to increase understanding of how vehi-
cle systems work in these types of situations.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short time, usually 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
data related to the following in the event of
traffic accidents or collision-like situations:
How the various systems in the car
worked
Whether the driver and passenger seat-
belts were fastened/tensioned
The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
pedal
The travel speed of the vehicle
This information can help us understand the
circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju-
ries and damage occur. The EDR only records
data when a non-trivial collision situation
occurs. The EDR does not record any data
during normal driving conditions. Similarly, the
system never registers who is driving the vehi-
cle or the geographic location of the accident
or near-miss situation. However, other parties,
such as the police, could use the recorded
data in combination with the type of person-
ally identifiable information routinely collected
after a traffic accident. Special equipment and
access to either the vehicle or the EDR is
required to be able to interpret the registered
data.
8
Vehicle Connectivity Module
YOUR VOLVO
38
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped
with a number of computers designed to con-
tinually check and monitor the function of the
car. They can record data during normal driv-
ing conditions, but in particular register faults
affecting the vehicle's operation and function-
ality, or upon activation of the vehicle's driver
support function (e.g. City Safety and the auto
brake function).
Some of the recorded data is required to ena-
ble service and maintenance technicians to
diagnose and remedy any faults that occurred
in the vehicle. The registered information is
also needed to enable Volvo to satisfy legal
requirements laid out in laws and by govern-
ment authorities. Information registered in the
vehicle is stored in its computer until the vehi-
cle is serviced or repaired.
In addition to the above, the registered infor-
mation can be used in aggregate form for
research and product development with the
aim of continuously improving the safety and
quality of Volvo cars.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri-
bed information being disclosed to third par-
ties without the vehicle owner's consent. To
comply with national legislation and regula-
tions, Volvo may be forced to disclose infor-
mation of this nature to the police or other
authorities who may assert a legal right to
access such. Special technical equipment
which Volvo and workshops that have entered
into agreements with Volvo have access to is
required to be able to read and interpret the
recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the
information, which is transferred to Volvo dur-
ing servicing and maintenance, is securely
stored and managed and that its management
complies with relevant legal requirements. For
further information - contact a Volvo retailer.
Terms & Conditions for Services
Volvo offers services that help to enhance car
safety and comfort.
These services include everything from assis-
tance in emergencies to navigation and vari-
ous maintenance services.
Before using the services, it is important for
you to read the support information for Terms
& Conditions for Services at
www.volvocars.com.
Related information
Customer Privacy Policy (p. 39)
YOUR VOLVO
39
Customer Privacy Policy
Volvo respects and safeguards the personal
integrity of everyone visiting our website.
This policy regards to the handling of cus-
tomer data and personal information. The pur-
pose is to give current, past and potential cus-
tomers a general understanding of:
The circumstances in which we gather
and process your personal data.
The types of personal data we gather.
The reason we gather your personal data.
How we handle your personal data.
For more information on the policy, search
support information at www.volvocars.com.
Related information
User terms and conditions and data shar-
ing (p. 541)
Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 38)
Recording data (p. 37)
Important information on
accessories and auxiliary
equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories and extra equipment can nega-
tively affect the car's electronic system.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
only install Volvo approved original accesso-
ries, and that installation of accessories is only
carried out by trained and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technicians. Certain accessories only func-
tion when associated software is installed in
the car's computer system.
The equipment described in the owner's man-
ual is not available in all cars - they have differ-
ent equipment depending on adaptations for
the needs of different markets and national or
local laws and regulations.
Options or accessories described in this man-
ual are marked with an asterisk. In the event of
uncertainty over what is standard or an
option/accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.
WARNING
The driver always bears the ultimate
responsibility that the car is used safely
and that laws and regulations in force are
followed.
It is also important that the car has mainte-
nance and service according to Volvo's rec-
ommendations, the owner's information
and the service and warranty booklet.
If the on-board information differs from the
printed owner's manual then the printed
information always has precedence.
Related information
Installation of accessories (p. 40)
Connection of equipment to the car's
diagnostic socket (p. 40)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 24)
YOUR VOLVO
40
Installation of accessories
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
only install Volvo approved original accesso-
ries, and that installation of accessories is
only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo
service technicians. Certain accessories only
function when associated software is instal-
led in the car's computer system.
Volvo original accessories are tested to
ensure that they function with the car sys-
tems for performance, safety and emis-
sions control. In addition, a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician knows
where accessories may or may not be
safely installed in your Volvo. Always seek
the advice of a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician before installing any
accessories in or on your car.
Accessories that are not approved by
Volvo may not have been specifically tes-
ted for use with your car.
Some of the car's performance or safety
systems can be negatively affected if you
install accessories that have not been tes-
ted by Volvo, or if you permit someone
without experience of the car to install
accessories.
Damage that is caused by accessories
installed in a non-approved or incorrect
way is not covered by any new car war-
ranty. More warranty information can be
found in the service and warranty booklet.
Volvo does not accept any liability for
deaths, personal injury or costs arising as
a result of the installation of non-original
accessories.
Related information
Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 39)
Connection of equipment to the
car's diagnostic socket
Incorrect connection and installation of soft-
ware or diagnostic tools may have a negative
effect on the car's electronic system.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
only install Volvo approved original accesso-
ries, and that installation of accessories is only
carried out by trained and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technicians. Certain accessories only func-
tion when associated software is installed in
the car's computer system.
Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is
under the instrument panel on the driver's side.
YOUR VOLVO
41
NOTE
Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the con-
sequences if unauthorised equipment is
connected to the On-board Diagnostic
socket (OBDII). This socket should only be
used by trained and qualified Volvo service
technicians.
Related information
Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 39)
Showing the car's identification
number
When contacting a Volvo dealer concerning
your Volvo On Call subscription, for example,
you will need the car's identification number
(VIN
9
).
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Continue to
System System
Information
Vehicle Identification
Number
.
> The car's identification number is
shown.
Another way of finding VIN is:
on the first page of the service and war-
ranty booklet
in the car's registration document
look on the dashboard through the car's
windscreen.
VIN is positioned in a similar place on all models.
9
Vehicle Identification Number
YOUR VOLVO
42
Driver distraction
The driver is responsible for doing everything
possible to ensure the safety of themselves,
their passengers and other road users. Part of
this responsibility is avoiding distractions
such as carrying out an activity that is not
related to operating the car in a driving envi-
ronment.
Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with
content-rich entertainment and communica-
tions systems. This could be mobile phones
with handsfree, navigation systems and audio
systems with lots of functions. You may also
have other portable electronic devices for your
own convenience. Used correctly, in a safe
way they can enrich the driving experience. If
they are used in the wrong way they could dis-
tract you.
We wish to give the following warnings regar-
ding such systems, to indicate Volvo's con-
cern for your safety. Never use a device or
function in the car in such a way that it will
distract you from the task of driving safely.
Distractions can lead to serious accidents.
Apart from these general warnings, we offer
the following advice regarding the new func-
tions that may be in the car:
WARNING
Never use a hand-held mobile phone
while driving. In some areas it is forbid-
den for the driver to use a mobile
phone while the car is moving.
If the car is equipped with a navigation
system you must only set and change
the itinerary when the car is parked.
Never program the audio system while
the car is moving. Program the radio's
presets when the car is parked and
then use the programmed presets for
faster and simpler use of the radio.
Never use laptops or hand-held com-
puters while the car is moving.
Related information
Sound, media and Internet (p. 500)
SAFETY
SAFETY
44
Safety
The vehicle is equipped with several safety
systems that work together to protect the
vehicle's driver and passengers in the event
of an accident.
The car is equipped with a number of sensors
that react in the event of an accident and acti-
vate different safety systems, such as different
types of airbags and seatbelt tensioners.
Depending on the specific accident situation,
such as collisions at different angles, roll-over
or driving off the road, the systems react in dif-
ferent ways to provide good protection.
There are also mechanical safety systems
such as Whiplash Protection System. The car
is also constructed so that a large part of the
force of a collision is distributed to beams, pil-
lars, floor, roof and other parts of the body.
The car's safety mode may be activated after a
collision if an important function in the car has
been damaged.
Warning symbol in driver display
The warning symbol is illuminated in
the driver display when the car's
electrical system is set in ignition
position II. The symbol is extin-
guished after approx. 6 seconds if the car's
safety system is fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol remains illuminated
or is switched on during driving and the
message
SRS airbag Service urgent
Drive to workshop is shown in the driver
display, it means that part of one of the
safety systems does not have full function-
ality. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted as
soon as possible.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the car's various
safety systems yourself. Defective work in
one of the systems can cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury. Volvo
recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
If the specific warning symbol is bro-
ken then the general warning symbol
is illuminated instead and the driver
display shows the same message.
Related information
Safety during pregnancy (p. 45)
Seatbelts (p. 48)
Airbags (p. 53)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 45)
Pedestrian Protection System (p. 47)
Safety mode (p. 59)
Child safety (p. 61)
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
45
Safety during pregnancy
It is important that the seatbelt is used cor-
rectly during pregnancy, and that pregnant
drivers adjust their seating position.
Seatbelt
The diagonal section should wrap over the
shoulder then be routed between the breasts
and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. –
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and
ensure that it fits as close to the body as pos-
sible. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
Seating position
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
must adjust the seat and steering wheel such
that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). The aim should be to
position the seat with as large a distance as
possible between abdomen and steering
wheel.
Related information
Safety (p. 44)
Seatbelts (p. 48)
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Whiplash Protection System
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)
reduces the risk of whiplash injuries. The sys-
tem consists of energy absorbing backrests
and seat cushion, as well as a specially
designed head restraint in the front seats.
WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the
collision and the nature of the colliding vehicle
all have an influence.
When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat
backrests are lowered backward and the seat
cushions move downward to change the seat-
ing position of the driver and front seat pas-
senger. Its movement helps to absorb some of
the forces that can arise and cause whiplash.
WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
46
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
yourself. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop should be con-
tacted.
If the front seats have been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the seats must be replaced. Some
of the seats' protective properties may
have been lost even if they do not appear
damaged.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under
the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent
WHIPS from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's back-
rest.
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered
then any load must be secured to prevent it
from sliding up to the front seat backrest in
the event of a collision.
WARNING
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a
rear-facing child seat is used in the rear
seat, the corresponding front seat must be
moved forward so that it does not make
contact with the lowered backrest or child
seat.
Seating position
For good protection from WHIPS the driver
and passenger must have the correct seating
position and make sure that the system's
function is not obstructed.
Set the correct seating position in the front
seat before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in
the centre of the seat with as little space as
possible between the head and the head
restraint.
WHIPS and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by WHIPS.
Related information
Safety (p. 44)
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 362)
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
47
Pedestrian Protection System
The Pedestrian Protection System (PPS) is a
system which, in certain frontal collisions,
contributes to mitigating a pedestrian's
impact with the car.
In certain frontal collisions with a pedestrian,
the sensors in the front of the car react and
the system is activated.
When PPS is activated, the following occur:
The rear section of the bonnet is raised.
An automatic alarm is sent via Volvo On
Call*.
The sensors are active at a speed of approx.
2550 km/h (1530 mph).
The sensors are designed to detect a collision
with an object that has similar properties to
those of the human leg.
NOTE
There may be objects in the traffic environ-
ment that prompt a signal to the sensors
that is similar to a collision with a pedes-
trian. It is possible that the system will be
activated in the event of a collision with
such an object.
WARNING
Do not fit any accessories or change any-
thing in the front. Incorrect intervention at
the front may cause incorrect function in
the system and lead to serious injury and
damage to the car.
Volvo recommends that genuine wiper
arms are used and that only genuine parts
are used for them.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the system yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted.
Defective work in the system could cause
malfunction and result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING
Volvo recommends contacting an author-
ised Volvo workshop in the event of any
damage to the front of the car in order to
ensure that the system is intact.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
PPS has been activated, or a
fault has occurred in the system.
Follow the recommendation
given.
Related information
Safety (p. 44)
SAFETY
48
Seatbelts
Heavy braking can have serious consequen-
ces if the seatbelts are not used.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide good protection. Do not
lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
designed to protect in a normal seating posi-
tion.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt
to hooks or other interior fittings, as this
prevents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a
seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly,
this may diminish the protection provided
by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-
self. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the entire seatbelt must be
replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective
properties may have been lost even if the
seatbelt does not appear damaged. The
seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows
signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt
must be type-approved and designed for
installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
Safety (p. 44)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
(p. 48)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 51)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
Make sure that all passengers have fastened
their seatbelts before starting to drive.
Putting on seatbelts
1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure
it is not twisted or damaged.
NOTE
The seatbelt is equipped with an inertia
reel that is locked in the following situa-
tions:
if the belt is extended too quickly.
during braking and acceleration.
if the car leans heavily.
when driving in bends.
SAFETY
}}
49
2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab
in the intended buckle.
> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has
locked.
WARNING
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt
into the buckle on the correct side. The
seatbelts and buckles would otherwise
possibly not function as intended in the
event of a collision. There is a risk of seri-
ous injury.
3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be
adjusted for height.
Press together the seat mounting and
move the seatbelt up or down.
Position the belt as high as possible with-
out it chafing against your throat.
The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down
over the arm).
4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pull-
ing the diagonal shoulder belt up towards
the shoulder.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over
the abdomen).
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
50
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-
son.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt
to hooks or other interior fittings, as this
prevents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor
insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The
seatbelts and buckles would then possibly
not function as intended in the event of a
collision. There is a risk of serous injury.
Taking off seatbelts
1. Press the red button on the seatbelt
buckle and then let the belt retract.
2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it
in by hand so that it does not hang loose.
Related information
Seatbelts (p. 48)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 51)
Seatbelt tensioner
The car is fitted with standard seatbelt ten-
sioners and electric* seatbelt tensioners that
can tension the seatbelts in critical situations
and collisions.
Standard seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with a standard
seatbelt tensioner.
The seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in
the event of a collision with sufficient force in
order to more effectively restrain the occu-
pant.
Electric seatbelt tensioner*
The driver and front passenger seatbelts are
equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.
The seatbelt tensioners work together and can
be activated together with the driver support
systems City Safety and Rear Collision
Warning. In critical situations, such as panic
braking, driving off the road (e.g. the car rolls
into a ditch, lifts off the ground or hits some-
thing in the terrain), skidding, or risk of colli-
sion, the seatbelt can be tensioned by the
seatbelt tensioner's electric motor.
The electric seatbelt tensioner helps to adjust
the occupant to a better position, reducing the
risk of striking the car's interior and improving
the effect of safety systems, such as the car's
airbags.
When the critical situation has come to an
end, the seatbelt and the electric seatbelt pre-
tensioner are restored automatically, but they
can also be restored manually.
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passen-
ger side will also be deactivated.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-
self. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the entire seatbelt must be
replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective
properties may have been lost even if the
seatbelt does not appear damaged. The
seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows
signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt
must be type-approved and designed for
installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
Seatbelts (p. 48)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 48)
Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner*
(p. 51)
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
51
Activating and deactivating passenger air-
bag* (p. 56)
City Safety (p. 289)
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 362)
Resetting the electric seatbelt
tensioner*
The electric seatbelt tensioner is designed to
be reset automatically, but the seatbelt ten-
sioner can be reset manually if the belt
remains extended.
1. Stop the car at a safe place.
2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.
> The seatbelt and electric seatbelt ten-
sioner are reset.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-
self. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the entire seatbelt must be
replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective
properties may have been lost even if the
seatbelt does not appear damaged. The
seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows
signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt
must be type-approved and designed for
installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50)
Seatbelts (p. 48)
Door and seatbelt reminder
The system reminds unbelted occupants to
wear a seatbelt, and also warns about an
open door, bonnet or lid.
Driver display graphics
Graphics in the driver display with different types of
warnings. The warning colour on the door and boot
lid is dependent on the speed of the car.
The driver display's graphics show which
seats in the car are occupied by belted and
unbelted passengers.
The same graphic also shows if the bonnet,
boot lid, fuel filler flap or any door is open.
The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing
the O button on the right-hand steering wheel
keypad.
||
SAFETY
52
Seatbelt reminder
Visual reminder in the roof console.
A visual reminder is given in the roof console
and by means of the warning symbol in the
driver display.
The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed,
driving time and distance.
The belt status of the driver and passengers is
shown in the driver display's graphic when a
belt is buckled or unbuckled.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Front seat
A visual and acoustic reminder remind the
driver and front seat passenger to use a seat-
belt if either of them is not wearing one.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
Provides information on which seatbelts
are being used in the rear seat. The driver
display's graphics are shown when the
seatbelts are in use.
Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat
is unfastened during a journey by means
of a visual and acoustic reminder. The
reminder will cease once the seatbelt has
been put on again.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, boot lid
and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, boot lid, fuel filler flap or any
door is not closed properly, the graphic in the
driver display shows what is open. Stop the
car in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the source of the warning.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then
the driver display's information sym-
bol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then
the driver display's warning symbol
illuminates.
Related information
Seatbelts (p. 48)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 48)
SAFETY
}}
53
Airbags
The car is equipped with airbags and inflat-
able curtains for driver and passengers.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending
on the nature of the collision and whether
or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies
to all belt positions.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-
sion. The detectors sense the force of the
collision on the vehicle and the action is
adapted accordingly so that none, one or
more airbags are deployed.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is
located in the centre console. If the centre
console is drenched with water or other liq-
uid, disconnect the cables to the starter
battery. Do not attempt to start the car
since the airbags may deploy. Recovering
the car. Volvo recommends that it is trans-
ported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Deployed airbags
If any of the airbags have deployed, the follow-
ing is recommended:
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that it is transported to an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
Volvo recommends engaging an author-
ised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
Always contact a doctor.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The smoke
and dust created when the airbags are
deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/
injury after intensive exposure. In case of
irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid
deployment sequence and airbag fabric
may cause friction and skin burns.
Related information
Safety (p. 44)
Driver airbags (p. 53)
Passenger airbag (p. 54)
Side airbags (p. 58)
Inflatable curtains (p. 59)
Driver airbags
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the car is
equipped with steering wheel airbag and
knee airbag
1
on the driver's side.
Steering wheel airbag and knee airbag
1
on the driv-
er's side in the front seat.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags
help to protect the head, neck, face and chest
of the driver as well as the knees and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag
cushions the initial collision impact for the
occupant. The airbag deflates when com-
pressed by the collision. When this occurs,
smoke escapes into the car. This is completely
normal. The entire process, including inflation
and deflation of the airbag, occurs within
tenths of a second.
||
SAFETY
54
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair. Defective work in the airbag system
could cause malfunction and result in seri-
ous personal injury.
Steering wheel airbag location
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the
steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
AIRBAG.
Knee airbag
1
location
The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the
instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover
panel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
Do not place or attach any object on the
top or front of the panel where the knee
airbag is stowed.
Related information
Airbags (p. 53)
Passenger airbag (p. 54)
Passenger airbag
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle
is equipped with an airbag on the passenger
side in the front seat.
Passenger side front airbag.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbag
helps to protect the head, neck, face and
chest of the passenger as well as the knees
and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag is inflated. The airbag cushions
the initial collision impact for the occupant.
The airbag deflates when compressed by the
collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes
into the car. This is completely normal. The
entire process, including inflation and deflation
1
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
55
of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a sec-
ond.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair. Defective work in the airbag system
could cause malfunction and result in seri-
ous personal injury.
Passenger airbag location
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
WARNING
If the car is not equipped with a switch to
activate/deactivate the passenger airbag,
the airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat if the airbag is acti-
vated.
Front-facing passengers (children and
adults) must never sit on the front passen-
ger seat if the passenger airbag is deacti-
vated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life or lead to serious per-
sonal injury.
Related information
Airbags (p. 53)
Driver airbags (p. 53)
Activating and deactivating passenger air-
bag* (p. 56)
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
56
Activating and deactivating
passenger airbag*
The passenger airbag can be deactivated if
the car is equipped with a switch, Passenger
Airbag Cut Off Switch (PACOS).
The switch for the passenger airbag is located
on the passenger end of the instrument panel
and is accessible when the passenger door is
open.
Check that the switch is in the required posi-
tion.
ON - The airbag is activated and all front-
facing passengers (children and adults)
can sit safely on the passenger seat.
OFF - The airbag is deactivated and chil-
dren in rear-facing child seats can sit
safely on the passenger seat.
WARNING
If the car is not equipped with a switch to
activate/deactivate the passenger airbag,
the airbag will always be activated.
Activating passenger airbag
Pull the switch outward and turn from
OFF to ON.
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag on Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position
I or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the
roof console approx. 6 seconds after the
car's electrical system has been set in igni-
tion position II.
SAFETY
}}
57
2. Confirm the message by pressing the
right-hand steering wheel keypad's O but-
ton.
> A text message and a warning symbol
in the roof console indicate that the air-
bag for the front passenger seat is acti-
vated.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat when the airbag is
activated.
The passenger airbag must always be acti-
vated when front-facing passengers (chil-
dren and adults) are sitting in the front pas-
senger seat.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life or lead to serious per-
sonal injury.
Deactivating passenger airbag
Pull the switch outward and turn from ON
to OFF.
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag off Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position
I or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the
roof console approx. 6 seconds after the
car's electrical system has been set in igni-
tion position II.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the
right-hand steering wheel keypad's O but-
ton.
> A text message and a symbol in the roof
console indicate that the airbag for the
front passenger seat is deactivated.
WARNING
Front-facing passengers (children and
adults) must never sit on the passenger
seat when the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life or lead to serious per-
sonal injury.
||
SAFETY
58
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passen-
ger side will also be deactivated.
Related information
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50)
Child seats (p. 62)
Side airbags
The side airbags on the driver's and passen-
ger seats act to protect the chest and hips in
the event of a collision.
The side airbags are fitted in the outer back-
rest frames of the front seats and help to pro-
tect the driver and passengers in the front
seat.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact.
The airbag deflates when compressed by the
collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair. Defective work in the side airbag
system could cause malfunction and result
in serious personal injury.
WARNING
Do not put objects in the area between the
outside of the seat and the door panel,
since this area is required by the side air-
bag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat
covers approved by Volvo. Other seat cov-
ers may impede the operation of the side
airbags.
WARNING
Side airbags are a supplement the seat-
belts. Always use a seatbelt.
Side airbags and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
Related information
Airbags (p. 53)
SAFETY
}}
59
Inflatable curtains
The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC),
helps to prevent the driver and passengers
from striking their heads on the inside of the
car during a collision.
The inflatable curtain is mounted along both
sides of the headlining and helps protect the
driver and outer seat passengers of the car.
The panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair. Defective work in the inflatable cur-
tain system can cause malfunction and
result in serious personal injury.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hooks are only
designed for light coats and jackets (not for
solid objects such as umbrellas).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could compromise the intended pro-
tection. Volvo recommends only using
Volvo genuine parts that are approved for
fitting within these areas.
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loa-
ded to above the top edge of the door win-
dows. Otherwise, the intended protection
of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed
in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to
the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
Airbags (p. 53)
Safety mode
Safety mode is a protective state that is trig-
gered when a collision may have damaged
any of the car's vital functions, such as the
fuel lines, sensors for any of the safety sys-
tems, or the brake system.
If the car has been in a collision, the message
Safety mode See Owner's manual may be
shown on the driver display with a warning
symbol as long as the display is not damaged
and the car's electrical system is still in work-
ing order. This message means that the car
has reduced functionality.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt
to restart the car if it smells of fuel when
the
Safety mode See Owner's manual
message is shown in the driver display.
Leave the car at once.
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start
and move the car for a short distance, if in a
dangerous traffic situation for example.
||
SAFETY
60
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset
the electronics yourself if the car has been
in safety mode. This could result in per-
sonal injury or the car not functioning as
normal. Volvo recommends engaging an
authorised Volvo workshop to check and
restore the car to normal status after
Safety mode See Owner's manual has
been shown.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its
location. Volvo recommends that it is
transported to an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Related information
Safety (p. 44)
Starting and moving the car after safety
mode (p. 60)
Recovery (p. 493)
Starting and moving the car after
safety mode
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start
and move the car for a short distance, if in a
dangerous traffic situation for example.
Starting the car after safety mode
1. Check the general damage situation of the
car and whether any fuel has been leaking.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If there is only minor damage and a check
has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be
attempted.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt
to restart the car if it smells of fuel when
the
Safety mode See Owner's manual
message is shown in the driver display.
Leave the car at once.
2. Switch off the car.
3. Then try to start the car.
> The car's electronics carry out a sys-
tems check and then try to resume nor-
mal status. The driver display shows
the message
Car start System check,
wait during this time. This can take up
to one minute.
4. Then try to start the car again when the
message
Car start System check, wait
is no longer shown in the driver's display.
IMPORTANT
If the message Safety mode See
Owner's manual is still shown on the dis-
play the car must not be driven or towed
but a vehicle recovery service must then be
used instead. Even if the car appears to be
driveable, hidden damage may make the
car impossible to control once moving.
Moving the car after safety mode
1. If the driver display shows the message
Normal mode The car is now in normal
mode after a start attempt, the car can be
carefully moved if standing in a dangerous
position.
2. Do not move the car further than neces-
sary.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its
location. Volvo recommends that it is
transported to an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
SAFETY
61
Related information
Safety mode (p. 59)
Starting the car (p. 440)
Recovery (p. 493)
Child safety
Children must always sit secure while travel-
ling in the car.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats
and attachment devices) which is designed for
fitting in this particular car. Using Volvo's child
safety equipment, you obtain good conditions
for a child to travel safely in the car. In addi-
tion, the child safety equipment fits in well and
is simple to use.
The equipment that should be used is selected
taking account of the weight and size of the
child.
Volvo recommends that children travel in a
rear-facing child seat until as late an age as
possible, at least until 34 years of age, and
then in a front-facing child seat until the child
is 140 cm (4 feet 7 inches) tall.
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child
seat that must be used for children of dif-
ferent ages and heights vary from country
to country. Check what does apply.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instruc-
tions included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufac-
turer for clearer instructions.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a
child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Related information
Safety (p. 44)
Child seats (p. 62)
Activating and deactivating child safety
locks (p. 271)
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
62
Child seats
Suitable child seats should always be used
when children are travelling in the car.
Children should sit comfortably and safely.
Make sure that the child seat is positioned,
mounted and used correctly.
Look in the installation instructions for the
child seat for the correct fitting.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instruc-
tions included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufac-
turer for clearer instructions.
NOTE
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
Always secure it according to the instruc-
tions for the child seat, even when it is not
in use.
NOTE
Long-term installation and use of child
seats may cause wear and tear on the car's
fittings. Volvo recommends using the kick
guard accessory to protect the car's fit-
tings.
Related information
Child safety (p. 61)
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 62)
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 63)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 64)
Child seat positioning (p. 64)
Activating and deactivating passenger air-
bag* (p. 56)
Upper mounting points for child
seats
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for child seats on the rear seat's outer
seats.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the upper mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
The location of the mounting points is indicated by
symbols on the parcel shelf behind the rear seat.
The mounting points are located on the parcel
shelf behind the rear seat's outer seats.
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
63
WARNING
The child seat's upper straps must be
routed through the hole in the head
restraint leg before they are tensioned at
the mounting point. If this is not possible,
follow the recommendations from the child
seat manufacturer.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facili-
tate fitting this type of child seat in cars
with folding head restraints on the outer
seats.
Related information
Child seats (p. 62)
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 63)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 64)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 68)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 69)
Lower mounting points for child
seats
The car is equipped with lower mounting
points for child seats in the front seat* and
the rear seat.
The lower mounting points are designed to be
used in conjunction with certain rear-facing
child seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the lower mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations in the front seat.
The mounting points in the front seat are
located on the sides of the passenger seat's
legroom.
The mounting points in the front seat are only
mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a
switch to activate/deactivate the passenger
airbag*.
Mounting point locations in the rear seat.
The mounting points in the rear seat are
located on the rear section of the front seat's
floor rails.
Related information
Child seats (p. 62)
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 62)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 64)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 68)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 69)
SAFETY
64
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for
child seats
The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX
mounting points for child seats in the rear
seat.
i-Size/ISOFIX
2
is a fixture system for car child
seats that is based on an international stand-
ard.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols
2
on the upholstery of the backrest.
The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are
located behind covers in the lower section of
the rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats.
Lift the covers in order to access the mounting
points.
Related information
Child seats (p. 62)
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 62)
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 63)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 68)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 71)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 72)
Child seat positioning
It is important to position the child seat in the
right place in the car. The choice of location
depends, amongst other things, on the type
of child seat and whether the passenger air-
bag is activated.
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.
Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear
seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If a
child is sitting on the front passenger seat
then he/she could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then
rear-facing child seats can be fitted on the
front passenger seat.
2
Names and symbols change depending on market.
SAFETY
}}
65
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat if the airbag is acti-
vated.
Front-facing passengers (children and
adults) must never sit on the front passen-
ger seat if the passenger airbag is deacti-
vated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life or lead to serious per-
sonal injury.
Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
Related information
Child seats (p. 62)
Child seat mounting (p. 65)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 68)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 69)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 71)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 72)
Child seat mounting
It is important to remember a number of
things when a child restraint system is moun-
ted and used, which depend on where the
child restraint system is positioned.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could
rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening but-
ton must not be used, as they could cause
the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not secure the straps for the child seat
into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or
in springs, rails or beams under the seat.
Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instruc-
tions included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufac-
turer for clearer instructions.
||
SAFETY
66
NOTE
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
Always secure it according to the instruc-
tions for the child seat, even when it is not
in use.
NOTE
Long-term installation and use of child
seats may cause wear and tear on the car's
fittings. Volvo recommends using the kick
guard accessory to protect the car's fit-
tings.
Installation in the front seat
When fitting rear-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
When fitting front-facing child seats,
check that the passenger airbag is acti-
vated.
Only use child seats that are recom-
mended by Volvo, are universally approved
or are semi-universal, and where the car is
included on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when
the car is equipped with the ISOFIX con-
sole
3
accessory.
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, Volvo recommends that the lower
mounting points are used with these
3
.
If the child seat is equipped with support
legs, always fit the support leg/support
legs directly to the floor. Never fit a sup-
port leg to a footrest or other object.
Installation in the rear seat
Only use child seats that are recom-
mended by Volvo, are universally
approved
4
or are semi-universal, and
where the car is included on the manufac-
turer's vehicle list.
A child seat with support legs must not be
fitted in the centre seat.
The outer seats are equipped with the
ISOFIX fixture system and are approved
for i-Size
5
.
The outer seats are equipped with upper
mounting points. Volvo recommends that
child seat's upper straps should be pulled
through the hole in the head restraint
before being tensioned at the mounting
point. If this is not possible, follow the rec-
ommendations from the child seat manu-
facturer.
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, never adjust the position of the
seat in front after the straps have been fit-
ted in the lower mounting points. Always
remember to remove the lower straps
when the child seat is not installed.
If the child seat is equipped with support
legs, always fit the support leg/support
legs directly to the floor. Never fit a sup-
port leg to a footrest or other object.
With the installation of an infant seat in the rear seat,
Volvo recommends a distance of at least 50 mm
(2 tum) from the front part of the infant seat to the
rearmost part of the seat in front.
3
The accessory range varies depending on market.
4
Does not apply to the centre seat.
5
Varies depending on market.
SAFETY
67
Related information
Child seat positioning (p. 64)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 68)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 69)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 71)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 72)
SAFETY
68
Overview table for location of child
seats
The table gives an overview of the types of
child seats suitable for the car's seats.
Seat positions in left-hand drive cars.
Seat positions in right-hand drive cars.
i-Size child seats Universally approved child seats secured using the car's seatbelt
Other child seat categories
A
Seat position
B
3, 5
2
C
, 3, 5 2
C
, 3, 4, 5
A
For more information, contact the child seat manufacturer.
B
According to the numbering above.
C
Activated airbag for front-facing child seats. Deactivated airbag for rear-facing child seats.
Related information
Child seat positioning (p. 64)
Child seat mounting (p. 65)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 69)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 71)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 72)
SAFETY
}}
69
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
The table gives a recommendation for which
child seats suit which locations, and for what
size of child.
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section
on installing a child seat before installing
one in the car.
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only
rear-facing child seats)
A
Front seat (with activated airbag, only
front-facing child seats)
A
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
U
B, C
X
U
C
L
C
Group 0+
max 13 kg
U
B, C
X
U
C
L
C
Group 1
918 kg
L
D
UF
B, E
U
E
, L
D
L
E
Group 2
1525 kg
L
D
UF
B, F
U
F
, L
D
L
F
||
SAFETY
70
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only
rear-facing child seats)
A
Front seat (with activated airbag, only
front-facing child seats)
A
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 3
2236 kg
X
UF
B, F
U
F
L
F
U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.
A
The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats.
B
Adjust the backrest to a more upright position.
C
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146).
D
Volvo recommends: Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212).
E
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
F
Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat if the passenger air-
bag is activated.
Related information
Child seat positioning (p. 64)
Child seat mounting (p. 65)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 68)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 71)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 72)
Seatbelts (p. 48)
SAFETY
71
Table for location of i-Size child
seats
The table gives a recommendation for which
i-Size child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
The child seat must be approved in accord-
ance with UN Reg R129.
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section
on installing a child seat before installing
one in the car.
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag,
only rear-facing child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only
front-facing child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
i-Size child seats X X
i-U
A, B
X
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.
X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.
A
Volvo recommends that children travel in a rear-facing child seat until as late an age as possible, at least until 34 years of age.
B
Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X2 i-Size (type approval E4129R000002).
Related information
Child seat positioning (p. 64)
Child seat mounting (p. 65)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 68)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 69)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 72)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 64)
SAFETY
72
Table for location of ISOFIX child
seats
The table gives a recommendation for which
ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and
for what size of child.
The child seat must be approved in accord-
ance with UN Reg R44 and the car model
must be included in the manufacturer's vehicle
list.
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section
on installing a child seat before installing
one in the car.
Weight
Size class
A
Type of child seat Front seat (with deacti-
vated airbag, only rear-
facing child seats)
B, C
Front seat (with acti-
vated airbag, only
front-facing child
seats)
B, C
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
E Rear-facing infant seat
IL
B, D
, X
E
X
IL
D
X
Group 0+
max 13 kg
E Rear-facing infant seat
IL
B, D, F
, X
E
X
IL
D
XC Rear-facing child seat
D Rear-facing child seat
SAFETY
}}
73
Weight
Size class
A
Type of child seat Front seat (with deacti-
vated airbag, only rear-
facing child seats)
B, C
Front seat (with acti-
vated airbag, only
front-facing child
seats)
B, C
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 1
918 kg
A Front-facing child seat
X
IL
B, F, G
, X
E
IL
G
, IUF
G
XB Front-facing child seat
B1 Front-facing child seat
C Rear-facing child seat
IL
B, F
, X
E
X IL X
D Rear-facing child seat
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal
categories.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.
A
For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label.
B
Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market).
There are no upper mounting points for child seats here.
C
The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats.
D
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146).
E
Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket.
F
Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not interfere with the child seat.
G
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat if the passenger air-
bag is activated.
NOTE
If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size
classification, the car model must be
included on the vehicle list for the child
seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends contacting an author-
ised Volvo dealer for information about
which i-Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo rec-
ommends.
||
SAFETY
74
Related information
Child seat positioning (p. 64)
Child seat mounting (p. 65)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 68)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 69)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 71)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 64)
SAFETY
}}
75
Detail information for child seat
manufacturers
The table provides detailed information for
child seat manufacturers on which locations
in the car are appropriate for which types of
child seat.
Seat positions in left-hand drive cars.
Seat positions in right-hand drive cars.
Seat position
A
1 2 (with deactivated
airbag, only rear-fac-
ing child seats)
B, C
2 (with activated air-
bag, only front-facing
child seats)
B, C
3
4
D
5
Seat position suitable for universal category restraints which are
attached using the car's seatbelt (Yes/No).
No
Yes
E
Yes
E
Yes No Yes
Seat position for i-Size (Yes/No) No No No Yes No Yes
Seat position lateral fixture (L1/L2/No) No No No No No No
Largest suitable rearward facing fixture (R1/R2/R3/No) No
R3
F
No R3 No R3
||
SAFETY
76
Seat position
A
1 2 (with deactivated
airbag, only rear-fac-
ing child seats)
B, C
2 (with activated air-
bag, only front-facing
child seats)
B, C
3
4
D
5
Largest suitable forward facing fixture (F1/F2/F2x/F3/No) No No F3 F3 No F3
Largest suitable booster fixture (B2/B3/No) No No B3 B3 No B3
A
In accordance with illustration.
B
The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats.
C
A child seat with support legs can be used on this seat.
D
A child seat with support legs cannot be used on this seat.
E
Adjust the backrest to a more upright position.
F
Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market).
Upper mounting points for child seats are not available for this seat.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
78
Displays and controls by the driver
in a left-hand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indi-
cators, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip
meter
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
Head-up display*
Driver display
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Steering wheel adjustment
Horn
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Bonnet opening
Display lighting, boot lid unlocking/open-
ing, halogen headlamp levelling
Roof console
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panoramic roof*
Display in roof console, ON CALL button*
Manual dimming of interior rearview mir-
ror
Centre and tunnel console
Centre display
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting,
media
Gear selector
Start knob
Drive mode control
Parking brake
Automatic braking when stationary
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
79
Driver's door
Memories for power front seat*, door mir-
ror and head-up display* settings
Central locking
Power windows, door mirrors, electric
child safety lock*
Adjusting front seat
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Lighting control (p. 150)
Starting the car (p. 440)
Driver display (p. 81)
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Gearbox (p. 454)
Displays and controls by the driver
in a right-hand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indi-
cators, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip
meter
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
Head-up display*
Driver display
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Display lighting, boot lid unlocking/open-
ing, halogen headlamp levelling
Bonnet opening
Horn
Steering wheel adjustment
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Roof console
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panoramic roof*
Display in roof console, ON CALL button*
Manual dimming of interior rearview mir-
ror
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
80
Centre and tunnel console
Centre display
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting,
media
Gear selector
Start knob
Drive mode control
Parking brake
Automatic braking when stationary
Driver's door
Memories for power front seat*, door mir-
ror and head-up display* settings
Central locking
Power windows, door mirrors, electric
child safety lock*
Adjusting front seat
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Lighting control (p. 150)
Starting the car (p. 440)
Driver display (p. 81)
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Gearbox (p. 454)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
81
Driver display
The driver display shows information about
the car and driving.
The driver display contains gauges, indicators
and indicator and warning symbols. The con-
tent of the driver display depends on the car's
equipment, settings and which functions are
active at that time.
The driver display is activated as soon as a
door is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The
driver display extinguishes after a while if it is
not used. To reactivate it, proceed with one of
the following:
Depress the brake pedal.
Activate ignition position I.
Open one of the doors.
WARNING
If the driver display should extinguish, not
illuminate on activation/start or be fully or
partially illegible, the car must not be used.
You should visit a workshop immediately.
Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the driver display
the information on e.g. brakes, airbags or
other safety systems may not be shown. In
which case, the driver cannot check the
status of the car's systems or receive cur-
rent warnings and information.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
Location in the driver display:
On the left In the middle On the right
Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols
Tachometer/Hybrid gauge
A
Trip meter Outside temperature gauge Gear shift indicator
Odometer
B
Clock Drive mode
Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Fuel gauge
Road Sign Information*
Door and seatbelt information Hybrid battery gauge
Charging status Distance to empty tank
Media player Distance to empty battery
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
82
On the left In the middle On the right
Navigation map*
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Phone App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
Voice recognition
A
Depends on drive mode selected.
B
Accumulated mileage.
Dynamic symbol
The dynamic symbol in its
basic form.
The centre of the driver display contains a
dynamic symbol that changes appearance for
different types of message. An amber or red
marker around the symbol indicates the
degree of severity of a control or warning mes-
sage.
Examples of indicator symbol.
With an animation, the basic shape can be
turned into a graphic showing where a prob-
lem is situated, or in order to clarify informa-
tion.
Related information
Driver display settings (p. 83)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 94)
Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 91)
Trip computer (p. 86)
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
Managing the app menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 102)
Drive modes (p. 461)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
83
Driver display settings
Settings for the driver display's display
options can be made via the driver display's
app menu and via the centre display's set-
tings menu.
Settings via the driver display's app
menu
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
The app menu is opened and controlled using
the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel.
In the app menu, you can choose which infor-
mation is shown on the driver display from:
trip computer
media player
phone
navigation system*.
Settings via the centre display
Selecting information type
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
My Car Displays Driver
Display Information
.
3. Select what should be shown in the back-
ground:
Show no information in background
Show information for current
playing media
Show navigation even if no route is
set
Selecting theme
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Tap on
My Car Displays Display
Themes
3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver
display:
Glass
Minimalistic
Performance
Chrome Rings
Selecting language
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Tap on
System System Languages
and Units
System Language to select
language.
> A change will affect the language in all
displays.
These settings are personal and are saved
automatically to the active driver profile.
Related information
Driver display (p. 81)
Managing the app menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 102)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
84
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the
fuel level in the tank.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the
quantity of fuel in the tank.
When the fuel level is low, the fuel pump sym-
bol illuminates and turns amber colour. The
trip computer also shows the distance to
empty tank.
Related information
Driver display (p. 81)
Hybrid battery gauge (p. 85)
Filling fuel (p. 476)
Fuel tank - volume (p. 671)
Hybrid gauge
In drive modes Hybrid and Pure, the driver
display shows a hybrid gauge that can help
the driver to drive the car in a more energy-
efficient way.
The hybrid gauge shows in different ways the
relationship between how much power is
being taken from the electric motor and how
much power is available.
Symbols in the hybrid gauge
Indicates current level for available
electric motor power. If the symbol
is filled in, it means that the electric
motor is in use.
If the symbol is not filled in, it means
that the electric motor is not in use.
Indicates the power level when the
combustion engine starts. If the
symbol is filled in, it means that the
combustion engine is in use.
Indicates the power level when the
internal combustion engine is due to
start. If the symbol is not filled in, it
means that the combustion engine is
not in use.
Indicator that shows that the hybrid
battery is being charged e.g. if the
brake pedal is gently depressed.
Driver-requested power
The pointer in the hybrid gauge indicates the
amount of engine power requested by the
driver by regulating the accelerator pedal. The
higher the reading on the scale, the more
power is requested by the driver in the current
gear. The marker between the lightning flash
and the drop shows the point at which the
internal combustion engine starts.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
85
Example:
The car is started but stationary, no power is reques-
ted.
The electric motor cannot supply the amount of
engine power requested and the internal combustion
engine starts.
The car generates current to the battery, the battery
is charged, e.g. when the brake pedal is pressed
lightly or during engine braking down a hill.
Related information
Drive modes (p. 461)
Driver display (p. 81)
Foot brake (p. 445)
Starting and stopping the combustion
engine in Twin Engine (p. 461)
Hybrid battery gauge
The hybrid battery gauge shows how much
energy there is in the hybrid battery.
The energy in the hybrid battery is used for the
electric motor, but also to cool or heat the car.
The trip computer calculates an approximate
distance for the energy left in the hybrid bat-
tery.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
86
Symbols in the hybrid battery gauge
The symbol in the hybrid battery gauge
indicates that the
Hold function is activated,
and the symbol indicates that the Charge
function is activated.
Related information
Driver display (p. 81)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 419)
Hold and Charge function (p. 472)
Trip computer
The car's trip computer records vales such as
e.g. distance, fuel consumption and average
speed whilst driving.
In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, infor-
mation is recorded about both instantaneous
and average fuel consumption. The informa-
tion from the trip computer can be shown in
the driver display.
Examples of trip computer information in the driver
display. The figure is schematic - parts may vary
depending on car model.
The following meters are included in the trip
computer:
Trip meter
Odometer
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Distance to empty tank
Distance to empty battery
Tourist - alternative speedometer
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed
via system settings in the centre display.
Trip meter
There are two trip meters, TM and TA.
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset
automatically if the car is not used for at least
four hours.
The following information is registered while
driving:
Mileage
Driving time
Average speed
Average fuel consumption
The values apply from the trip meter's latest
reset.
Odometer
The odometer records the car's total mileage.
This value cannot be reset to zero.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
This gauge shows the fuel consumption that
the car has at the moment. The value is upda-
ted approximately every second.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
87
Distance to empty tank
The trip computer calculates the
remaining mileage with the fuel
available in the tank.
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km (20 miles)
and the remaining drivable fuel quantity.
When the gauge shows "----", there is not
enough fuel left to be able to calculate the
remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driv-
ing style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance.
Distance to empty battery
The approximate distance that can
be driven with the remaining amount
of energy in the hybrid battery is
indicated adjacent to this symbol.
The calculation is based on the average con-
sumption of normally loaded vehicle, during
normal driving and taking into account
whether the air conditioning (AC) is switched
on or off. When changing between the
Hybrid
and Pure drive modes, the calculated distance
increases since the Pure mode has reduced
climate settings (ECO climate).
No guaranteed range on electric power
remains when the gauge shows "----".
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driv-
ing style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance.
Start value for fully charged hybrid battery
Since it is difficult to anticipate driving style
and other factors that affect the range for
electric operation, Volvo has decided to use a
start value when the car is fully charged. The
start value indicates an up-to figure instead of
a forecast for the range for electric operation.
The difference in start value between
Hybrid
and Pure is due to the car being allowed to
use more energy from the hybrid battery in
Pure mode, as well as that the car changes
over to ECO climate.
Mileage for electric operation
In order to achieve the longest possible mile-
age for electric operation, the driver of an elec-
trically powered car also has to think about
energy conservation. The more consumers
there are (stereo, electric heating in windows/
mirrors/seats, very cold air from the climate
control system, etc.) that are active - the
shorter the potential mileage.
NOTE
In addition to high current take-off in the
passenger compartment, sudden accelera-
tion and braking, high speed, heavy loads,
low outside temperature and uphill gradi-
ents also reduce the possible driving dis-
tance.
Tourist - alternative speedometer
The alternative digital speedometer makes it
easier to drive in countries where speed limit
signs are in a different unit than that shown in
the car's instruments.
The digital speed is then shown in the oppo-
site unit to that shown in the analogue speed-
ometer. If the analogue speedometer is gradu-
ated in mph, the digital speedometer shows
the corresponding speed in km/h and vice
versa.
Related information
Show trip data in the driver display
(p. 88)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 89)
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 89)
Driver display (p. 81)
Changing system units (p. 130)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
88
Show trip data in the driver display
The trip computer's recorded and calculated
values can be shown in the driver display.
The values are saved in a trip computer app.
Via the app menu, you can choose which
information is shown on the driver display.
Open and navigate in the app menu
1
using the right-
hand steering wheel keypad.
App menu
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
1. Open the app menu in the driver display
by pressing (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged mes-
sage in the driver display. The message
first has to be confirmed by pressing the O
button (4) before the app menu can be
opened.)
2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left
or right with (2).
> The top four menu rows show meas-
ured values for trip meter TM. The next
four menu rows show measured values
for trip meter TA. Scroll up or down in
the list with (3).
3. Scroll down to the option buttons to
select which information to show in the
driver display:
Odometer
Distance to empty tank
Distance to empty battery
Tourist (alternative speedometer)
Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no
display of mileage
Instantaneous fuel consumption, aver-
age consumption for TM or TA, alterna-
tively, no display of fuel consumption
Select or deselect an option with the O
button (4). The change is made immedi-
ately.
Related information
Trip computer (p. 86)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 89)
1
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
89
Resetting the trip meter
Reset the trip meter using the left-hand stalk
switch.
Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e.
mileage, average consumption, average
speed and driving time) with a long press
on the RESET button on the left-hand
stalk switch.
Pressing the RESET button resets only
the mileage.
The trip meter TA can only be reset automati-
cally when the car has not been used for four
or more hours.
Related information
Trip computer (p. 86)
Show trip statistics in the centre
display
Trip statistics from the trip computer are dis-
played graphically in the centre display and
provide an overview that facilitates more fuel-
efficient driving.
Open the Driver
performance app in app
view in order to show the trip
statistics.
Each bar in the diagram sym-
bolises a distance of 1, 10 or
100 km, alternatively miles. The bars are filled
in from the right as driving progresses. The bar
on the far right shows the value for the current
distance.
The average fuel consumption and total driv-
ing time are calculated since the last time the
trip statistics were reset.
Fuel and electricity consumption are shown in
separate graphs. Electricity consumption is
"net" consumption, i.e. energy consumed
minus regenerated energy created during
braking.
Trip statistics from the trip computer
2
.
NOTE
When driving with electric operation, fuel
consumption can be indicated in the trip
statistics if the additional heater
3
is run-
ning.
Related information
Settings for trip statistics (p. 90)
Trip computer (p. 86)
2
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
3
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
90
Settings for trip statistics
Reset or adjust settings for trip statistics.
1.
Open the
Driver performance app in app
view in order to show the trip statistics.
2.
Press
Preferences to
change graph scale. Select resolution 1,
10 or 100 km/miles for the bar.
reset data after every trip. Performed
when the car has been stationary for
more than 4 hours.
reset data for the current trip.
Trip statistics, calculated average con-
sumption and total driving time are always
reset simultaneously.
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed
via system settings in the centre display.
Related information
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 89)
Trip computer (p. 86)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 89)
Date and time
The clock is shown in both the driver display
and the centre display.
Clock location
In certain situations, messages and informa-
tion may cover the clock in the driver display.
In the centre display, the clock is located at
the top right of the status bar.
Date and time settings
Select Settings System Date and
Time
in the centre display's top view to
change settings for time and date format.
Adjust the date and time by pressing the
up or down arrow on the touch screen.
Automatic time for cars with GPS
When the car is equipped with a navigation
system,
Auto Time can be selected. The time
zone is then adjusted automatically based on
the location of the car. For certain types of
navigation systems, the current location
(country) must also be set to obtain the right
time zone. If
Auto Time is not selected, time
and data are adjusted with arrow up or arrow
down on the touch screen.
Summer time
In certain countries, it is possible to select the
Auto Daylight Saving Time setting for auto-
matic setting of summer time. For other coun-
tries, the Daylight Saving Time setting can
be selected manually.
Related information
Driver display (p. 81)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
91
Outside temperature gauge
The outside temperature is shown in the
driver display.
A sensor detects the temperature outside of
the car.
If the car has been stationary, the gauge may
display a temperature reading that is too high.
When the outside temperature is in
the range –5 °C to +2 °C (23 °F to
36 °F), a snowflake symbol lights up
that warns of potentially slippery
conditions.
The symbol is also illuminated briefly in the
head-up display*, if the car is equipped with
one.
Change the unit for the temperature gauge,
etc. via system settings in the centre display's
top view.
Related information
Driver display (p. 81)
Changing system units (p. 130)
Indicator symbols in the driver
display
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a
function is activated, that a system is operat-
ing, or that a fault or abnormal condition has
occurred.
Symbol Specification
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems
does not behave as intended,
this information symbol illumi-
nates and a text appears on the
driver display. The information
symbol can also illuminate in
conjunction with other symbols.
Fault in brake system
The symbol lights up when there
is a fault in the parking brake.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then
the system is not working. The
car's regular brake system con-
tinues to work, but without the
ABS function.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
92
Symbol Specification
Automatic brake on
The symbol illuminates when the
function is activated and the foot
brake or parking brake is acting.
The brake holds the car station-
ary when it has stopped.
Tyre pressure system
The symbol illuminates when tyre
pressure is too low. If there is a
fault in the tyre pressure system,
the symbol will flash for approx. 1
minute and then illuminate with a
constant glow. This may be
because the system cannot
detect or warn of low tyre pres-
sure as intended.
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates after the
engine has been started then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Drive to a
workshop for checking. Volvo
recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop is contacted.
Symbol Specification
Left and right-hand direction
indicator
The symbol flashes when the
direction indicators are used.
Position lamps
The symbol lights up when the
position lamps are switched on.
Fault in the headlamp system
The symbol illuminates if a fault
has occurred in the ABL function
(Active Bending Lights) or if
another fault has occurred in the
headlamp system.
Active main beam on
The symbol lights up blue when
active main beam is on.
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
active main beam is off.
Symbol Specification
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when
main beam is on and with main
beam flash.
Active main beam on
The symbol lights up blue when
active main beam is on. Position
lamps are switched on.
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
active main beam is off. Position
lamps are switched on.
Main beam On
The symbol lights up when main
beam and the position lamps are
switched on.
Front fog lamps on
This symbol illuminates when the
front fog lamp is switched on.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the
rear fog lamp is switched on.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
93
Symbol Specification
Rain sensor on
This symbol illuminates when the
rain sensor is on.
Preconditioning on
The symbol illuminates when the
engine block and passenger
compartment heater/air condi-
tioning are preconditioning the
car.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that
the stability system is operating.
If the symbol illuminates with
constant glow then there is a
fault in the system.
Symbol Specification
Stability system, sport mode
The symbol illuminates when the
sport mode is activated. Sport
mode allows for a more active
driving experience. The system
then detects whether the accel-
erator pedal, steering wheel
movements and cornering are
more active than in normal driv-
ing and then allows controlled
skidding of the rear section up to
a certain level before it inter-
venes and stabilises the car.
Lane assistance
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is
on but road lines are not
detected.
Amber symbol: Lane assistance
warns/intervenes.
Symbol Specification
Lane assistance and rain sen-
sor
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Rain sensor is on.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is
on but road lines are not
detected. Rain sensor is on.
Reduced performance
In the event of a temporary pow-
ertrain fault, the car can go into a
Limp home mode with reduced
engine power to prevent damage
to the powertrain.
Related information
Driver display (p. 81)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 94)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
94
Warning symbols in the driver
display
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated or that a seri-
ous fault or condition exists.
Symbol Specification
Warning
The red warning symbol illumi-
nates when a fault has been indi-
cated which could affect the
safety or drivability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the
driver display at the same time.
The warning symbol can also illu-
minate in conjunction with other
symbols.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates or
flashes if someone in a front seat
has not put on their seatbelt or if
someone in a rear seat has taken
off their seatbelt.
Symbol Specification
Airbags
If the symbol remains illuminated
or illuminates while driving, a
fault has been detected in one of
the car's safety systems. Read
the message in the driver display.
Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop is
contacted.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the
brake fluid level may be too low.
Visit the nearest authorised
workshop to have the brake fluid
level checked and rectified.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a
constant glow when the parking
brake is applied.
A flashing symbol means that a
fault has arisen. Read the mes-
sage in the driver display.
Symbol Specification
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates while
driving when the engine's oil
pressure is too low. Stop the
engine immediately and check
the engine oil level, top up if nec-
essary. If the symbol illuminates
and the oil level is normal, con-
tact a workshop. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during
driving if a fault has occurred in
the electrical system. Visit a
workshop. Volvo recommends
that an authorised Volvo work-
shop is contacted.
Collision risk
City Safety warns of a risk of col-
lision with other vehicles, pedes-
trians, cyclists or large animals.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
95
Symbol Specification
System malfunction
The symbol illuminates while
driving if there is something
wrong in the drive system. An
explanatory text is shown on the
driver display at the same time.
High engine temperature
The symbol switches on while
driving when the temperature of
the engine is too high. An explan-
atory text is shown on the driver
display at the same time.
Related information
Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 91)
Driver display (p. 81)
License agreement for the driver
display
A license is an agreement for the right to
operate a certain activity or the right to use
someone else's entitlement according to the
terms and conditions in the agreement. The
following text is Volvo's agreement with the
manufacturer or developer.
Boost Software License 1.0
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person or organization obtaining a copy
of the software and accompanying
documentation covered by this license (the
"Software") to use, reproduce, display,
distribute, execute, and transmit the Software,
and to prepare derivative works of the
Software, and to permit third-parties to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, all subject
to the following: The copyright notices in the
Software and this entire statement, including
the above license grant, this restriction and
the following disclaimer, must be included in
all copies of the Software, in whole or in part,
and all derivative works of the Software,
unless such copies or derivative works are
solely in the form of machine-executable
object code generated by a source language
processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON
INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE
DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
96
BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993
The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning
features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed
by the University of California, Berkeley
and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License
Copyright (c) 20112014, Yann Collet.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. Neither the name of the organisation nor
the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derive
from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
97
BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license
Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The views and conclusions contained in the
software and documentation are those of the
authors and should not be interpreted as
representing official policies, either expressed
or implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
FreeType Project License
1. 1 Copyright 19961999 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction The FreeType Project is
distributed in several archive packages;
some of them may contain, in addition to
the FreeType font engine, various tools
and contributions which rely on, or relate
to, the FreeType Project. This license
applies to all files found in such packages,
and which do not fall under their own
explicit license. The license affects thus
the FreeType font engine, the test
programs, documentation and makefiles,
at the very least. This license was inspired
by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses,
which all encourage inclusion and use of
free software in commercial and freeware
products alike. As a consequence, its main
points are that: o We don't promise that
this software works. However, we are be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as
is' distribution) o You can use this
software for whatever you want, in parts
or full form, without having to pay us.
(`royalty-free' usage) o You may not
pretend that you wrote this software. If
you use it, or only parts of it, in a program,
you must acknowledge somewhere in
your documentation that you've used the
FreeType code. (`credits') We specifically
permit and encourage the inclusion of this
software, with or without modifications, in
commercial products, provided that all
warranty or liability claims are assumed by
the product vendor. Legal Terms 0.
Definitions Throughout this license, the
terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
originally distributed by the authors (David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be
they named as alpha, beta or final release.
`You' refers to the licensee, or person
using the project, where `using' is a
generic term including compiling the
project's source code as well as linking it
to form a `program' or `executable'. This
program is referred to as `a program using
the FreeType engine'. This license applies
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
98
to all files distributed in the original
FreeType archive, including all source
code, binaries and documentation, unless
otherwise stated in the file in its original,
unmodified form as distributed in the
original archive. If you are unsure whether
or not a particular file is covered by this
license, you must contact us to verify this.
The FreeType project is copyright (C)
19961999 by David Turner, Robert
Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights
reserved except as specified below. 1. No
Warranty THE FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS
PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT
WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE
OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE
FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not
signed this license, you are not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType
project is copyrighted material, only this
license, or another one contracted with
the authors, grants you the right to use,
distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by
using, distributing, or modifying the
FreeType project, you indicate that you
understand and accept all the terms of
this license.
2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met: o
Redistribution of source code must retain
this license file (`licence.txt') unaltered;
any additions, deletions or changes to the
original files must be clearly indicated in
accompanying documentation. The
copyright notices of the unaltered, original
files must be preserved in all copies of
source files. o Redistribution in binary
form must provide a disclaimer that states
that the software is based in part of the
work of the FreeType Team, in the
distribution documentation. We also
encourage you to put an URL to the
FreeType web page in your
documentation, though this isn't
mandatory. These conditions apply to any
software derived from or based on the
FreeType code, not just the unmodified
files. If you use our work, you must
acknowledge us. However, no fee need be
paid to us.
3. Advertising The names of FreeType's
authors and contributors may not be used
to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior
written permission. We suggest, but do
not require, that you use one or more of
the following phrases to refer to this
software in your documentation or
advertising materials: `FreeType Project',
`FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or
`FreeType Distribution'.
4. Contacts There are two mailing lists
related to FreeType: o
freetype@freetype.org Discusses general
use and applications of FreeType, as well
as future and wanted additions to the
library and distribution. If you are looking
for support, start in this list if you haven't
found anything to help you in the
documentation. o devel@freetype.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine
internals, design issues, specific licenses,
porting, etc. o http://www.freetype.org
Holds the current FreeType web page,
which will allow you to download our
latest development version and read
online documentation. You can also
contact us individually at: David Turner
<david.turner@freetype.org> Robert
Wilhelm <robert.wilhelm@freetype.org>
Werner Lemberg
<werner.lemberg@freetype.org>
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
99
Libpng License
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy
between this copy and the notices in the file
png.h that is included in the libpng
distribution, the latter shall prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and
LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional
notices immediately following this sentence.
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through
1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c)
20002002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer
and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the
disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with
your enjoyment of the library or against
infringement. There is no warranty that our
efforts or the library will fulfill any of your
particular purposes or needs. This library is
provided with all faults, and the entire risk of
satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy,
and effort is with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through
1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c)
1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer
and license as libpng-0.96, with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through
0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the
same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88,
with the following individuals added to the list
of Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996
Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors" is defined as the
following set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS
IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42,
Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or
implied, including, without limitation, the
warranties of merchantability and of fitness for
any purpose. The Contributing Authors and
Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct,
indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or
consequential damages, which may result
from the use of the PNG Reference Library,
even if advised of the possibility of such
damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this source code, or
portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee,
subject to the following restrictions:
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
100
1. The origin of this source code must not be
misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked
as such and must not be misrepresented
as being the original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed
or altered from any source or altered
source distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage
the use of this source code as a component to
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this source code in a
product, acknowledgment is not required but
would be appreciated.
A "png_get_copyright" function is available,
for convenient use in "about" boxes and the
like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course)
is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and
"pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png"
(98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source
Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a
certification mark of the Open Source
Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson randeg@alum.rpi.edu
April 15, 2002
MIT License
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this
permission notice shall be included in all
copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
zlib License
The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year>
<copyright holders>
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will
the authors be held liable for any damages
arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including
commercial applications, and to alter it and
redistribute it freely, subject to the following
restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that
you wrote the original software. If you use
this software in a product, an
acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but
is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly
marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original
software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered
from any source distribution.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
101
SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0.
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version
2.0, Sept. 18, 2008)
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to the following conditions: The
above copyright notice including the dates of
first publication and either this permission
notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/
projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale,
use or other dealings in this Software without
prior written authorization from Silicon
Graphics, Inc.
Related information
Driver display (p. 81)
App menu in the driver display
The app menu in the driver display provides
quick access to commonly used functions for
certain apps.
The figure is schematic.
The app menu in the driver display can be
used instead of the centre display and is con-
trolled using the right-hand keypad on the
steering wheel. The app menu makes it easier
to switch between different apps or functions
within the apps without having to let go of the
steering wheel.
App menu functions
Different apps give access to different types of
functions. The following apps and their associ-
ated functions can be controlled from the app
menu:
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
102
App Functions
Trip com-
puter
Selection of trip meter, selec-
tion of what to show in the
driver display, etc.
Media
player
Selection of active source for
the media player.
Phone Calling a contact from the call
list.
Navigation Guide to destination, etc.
Related information
Driver display (p. 81)
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Managing the app menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 102)
Managing the app menu in the
driver display
The app menu in the driver display is oper-
ated with the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad. The figure is schematic.
Open/close
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
Opening/closing the app menu
Press on open/close (1).
> The app menu opens/closes.
NOTE
It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged mes-
sage in the driver display. The message has
to be confirmed first before the app menu
can be opened.
The app menu closes automatically after a
period of inactivity or after certain options
have been selected.
Navigating and selecting in the app
menu
1. Navigate between the apps by pressing
on the left or right (2).
> Functions for previous/next app are
shown in the app menu.
2. Browse through the functions for the
selected app by tapping on up or down
(3).
3. Confirm or highlight an option for the
function by pressing on confirm (4).
> The function is activated and for some
options the app menu then closes.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
103
If the app menu is opened again, the functions
of the most recently selected app are shown
first.
Related information
App menu in the driver display (p. 101)
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
Messages in the driver display
The driver display can show messages to
inform or assist the driver in the event of dif-
ferent events.
Examples of messages in the driver display. The fig-
ure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car
model.
The driver display shows messages that are of
high priority for the driver.
Messages can be shown in different parts of
the driver display depending on what other
information is currently being displayed. After
a while, or when the message has been
acknowledged/action taken if required, the
message disappears from the driver display. If
a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the
Car Status app, which is opened from the
app view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can
be shown together with graphics, symbols or
buttons for acknowledging the message or
accepting a request, for example.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
104
Service messages
Shown below is a selection of important serv-
ice messages and their meanings.
Message Specification
Stop safely
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a work-
shop
B
.
Turn off
engine
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a work-
shop
B
.
Service urgent
Drive to work-
shop
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car immedi-
ately.
Service
required
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Regular main-
tenance
Book time for
maintenance
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
.
Shown before the next
service date.
Regular main-
tenance
Time for main-
tenance
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
.
Shown at the next serv-
ice date.
Message Specification
Regular main-
tenance
Maintenance
overdue
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
.
Shown when the service
date has passed.
Temporarily
off
A
A function has been tem-
porarily switched off and
is reset automatically
while driving or after
starting again.
A
Part of message, shown together with information on
where the problem has arisen.
B
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 104)
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 105)
Message in centre display (p. 138)
Managing messages in the driver
display
Messages in the driver display are handled
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Examples of messages in the driver display and the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad. The figure is
schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
Left/right
Confirm
Some messages in the driver display contain
one or more buttons for acknowledging the
message or accepting a request, for example.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
105
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
1. Navigate between the buttons by pressing
on the left or right (1).
2. Confirm the selection by pressing on con-
firm (2).
> The message disappears from the
driver display.
For messages without buttons:
Close the message by pressing on confirm
(2), or allow the message to close auto-
matically after a while.
> The message disappears from the
driver display.
If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the
Car Status app, which is opened from the
app view in the centre display. The message
Car message stored in Car Status
application is shown in the centre display in
conjunction with this.
Related information
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 105)
Message in centre display (p. 138)
Handling a message saved from
the driver display
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app.
Messages that are shown in
the driver display and that
need to be saved are added
in the
Car Status app in the
centre display. The message
Car message stored in Car
Status application is shown
in the centre display in conjunction with this.
Reading a saved message
To read a saved message immediately:
Press the button to the right of the Car
message stored in Car Status
application message in the centre dis-
play.
>
The saved message is shown in the
Car
Status app.
To read a saved message later:
1.
Open the
Car Status app from the app
view in the centre display.
> The app is opened in the bottom sub-
view of the home view.
2.
Select the
Messages tab in the app.
> A list of saved messages is shown.
3. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the
left in the app shows information about
the message graphically.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
106
Managing a saved message
In maximised mode, some messages have
two buttons available to book service or read
the owner's manual.
To book service for a saved message:
In maximised mode for the message,
press
Request appoint.Call to make
Appointment
4
for help in booking service.
>
With
Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab opens in the app
and creates a request to book service
and repair work.
With
Call to make Appointment: The
phone app is initiated and calls a serv-
ice centre to book service and repair
work.
To read the owner's manual for a saved mes-
sage:
In maximised mode for the message,
press
Owner's manual to read about the
message in the owner's manual.
> The owner's manual opens in the cen-
tre display and shows information
linked to the message.
Saved messages in the app are deleted auto-
matically each time the engine is started.
Related information
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 104)
Message in centre display (p. 138)
4
Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
107
Overview of centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled
from the centre display. Presented here is the
centre display and its options.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
108
Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively
5
.
Function view - car functions that are acti-
vated or deactivated with a press. Certain
functions are also so-called trigger func-
tions, which means they open a window
with setting options. Examples of these
include Camera. Settings for the head-up
5
The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
109
display* are also made from the function
view, but adjustments are made using the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Home view - the first view that is shown
when the screen is started.
App view – apps that have been downloa-
ded (third-party apps) and apps for
embedded functions, such as FM radio.
Tap on an app icon to open the app.
Status bar - the activities in the car are
shown right at the top of the screen. Net-
work and connection information is shown
on the left-hand side of the status bar,
while media-related information, the clock
and indication about on-going background
activity are shown on the right.
Top view - drag the tab down in order to
access the top view. Settings, Owner's
manual, Profile and the car's saved mes-
sages are accessed from here. In some
cases contextual settings (e.g. Navigation
Settings) and the contextual owner's
manual (e.g. Navigation Manual) can also
be accessed in the top view.
Navigation - leads to map navigation, with
e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the sub-
view to expand it.
Media - recently used apps associated
with media. Tap on the subview to expand
it.
Phone - the phone function can be
reached from here. Tap on the subview to
expand it.
Extra subview - recently used apps or car
functions that do not belong in any of the
other subviews. Tap on the subview to
expand it.
Climate row - information and direct inter-
action to set temperature and seat heating
for example*. Tap on the symbol in the
centre of the climate row in order to open
the climate view with more setting
options.
Related information
Managing the centre display (p. 110)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
Function view in centre display (p. 120)
Apps (p. 502)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 122)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Open contextual setup in the centre dis-
play (p. 131)
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)
Media player (p. 511)
Phone (p. 527)
Climate controls (p. 211)
Switching off and changing the volume of
the system sound in the centre display
(p. 129)
Changing the appearance in the centre
display (p. 129)
Changing system language (p. 130)
Changing system units (p. 130)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 639)
Message in centre display (p. 138)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
110
Managing the centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled and
regulated from the centre display. The centre
display is a touch screen that reacts to touch.
Using the touch screen functionality in
the centre display
The screen reacts differently depending on
whether you press, drag or swipe across it.
Actions such as browsing between different
views, marking objects and scrolling in a list
can be performed by touching the screen in
different ways.
An infrared light curtain just above the surface
of the screen enables the screen to detect a
finger that is just in front of the screen. This
technology makes it possible to use the
screen even with gloves on.
Two people can interact with the screen at the
same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the
driver and passenger side respectively.
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
The table below presents the different proce-
dures for operating the screen:
Procedure Execution Result
Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Press twice in quick suc-
cession.
Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map.
Press and hold. Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map. Press and hold your finger
against the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.
Tap once with two fin-
gers.
Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
111
Procedure Execution Result
Drag. Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to
move apps or map points on the map. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Swipe/drag quickly. Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the
screen.
Note that touching the upper section of the screen may cause the top view to open.
Drag apart. Zooms in.
Drag together. Zooms out.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
112
Returning to home view from another
view
1. Briefly press the home button below the
centre display.
> The last position of the home view is
shown.
2. Briefly press again.
> All subviews of the home view are set
to their default mode.
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that
describes access to the different views is
shown on the screen.
Scrolling in a list, article or view
When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen,
it is possible to scroll downward or upward in
the view. Swipe downwards/upwards any-
where in the view.
The scroll indicator appears in the centre display
when it is possible to scroll in the view.
Using the controls in the centre
display
Temperature control.
The control is used for many of the car's func-
tions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of
one of the following:
drag the control to the desired tempera-
ture,
tap on
+ or in order to raise or lower the
temperature gradually, or
tap on the desired temperature on the
control.
Related information
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 113)
Moving apps and buttons in centre display
(p. 122)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 124)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
113
Activating and deactivating centre
display
The centre display can be dimmed and reacti-
vated using the home button beneath the
screen.
Home button for the centre display.
The effect of using the home button that the
screen dims and the touchscreen no longer
reacts to touch. The climate row will still be
shown. All functions connected to the screen
are still running, such as climate, audio, guid-
ance* and apps. When the centre display is
dimmed, it is a good opportunity to clean the
screen. The dimming function can also be
used to fade the screen so that it does not dis-
turb while driving.
1. Give a long press on the physical home
button below the screen.
> The screen goes dark except for the cli-
mate row, which continues to be
shown. All functions connected to the
screen are still running.
2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the
home button.
> The view that was displayed before the
screen was switched off will be shown
again.
NOTE
The screen cannot be deactivated when a
prompt to perform an action is shown on
the screen.
NOTE
The centre display deactivates automati-
cally when the engine is off and the driver's
door is opened.
Related information
Cleaning the centre display (p. 639)
Changing the appearance in the centre
display (p. 129)
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Navigating in the centre display's
views
There are five different basic views in the cen-
tre display: home view, top view, climate
view, app view and function view. The screen
is started automatically when the driver's
door is opened.
Home view
Home view is the view that is shown when the
screen is started. It consists of four subviews:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra sub-
view.
An app or car function selected from the app
or function view starts in the respective sub-
view of the home view. E.g. FM radio starts in
the Media tile.
The extra tile shows the last used app or car
function that is not associated with any of the
other three areas.
The subviews show brief information about
each different app.
NOTE
When the car is started, the home view's
various sub-views show information on the
current status of apps.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
114
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that
describes access to the different views is
shown on the screen.
Status bar
The activities in the car are shown at the top of
the screen. Network and connection informa-
tion is shown on the left-hand side of the sta-
tus bar, while media-related information, the
clock and indication that background activity
is in progress are shown on the right.
Top view
Top view dragged down.
A tab is located in the centre of the status bar
at the top of the screen. Open the top view by
pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping
from the top downwards across the screen.
In the top view, access is always available to:
Settings
Owner's manual
Profile
The car's saved messages.
In the top view, access is given to the follow-
ing in some cases:
Contextual setting (e.g.
Navigation
Settings). Change settings directly in the
top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is
running.
Contextual Owner's Manual (e.g.
Navigation Manual). Gain access directly
in the top view to articles in the digital
owner's manual that are related to the
content displayed on screen.
Exit the top view - press outside the top view,
on the home button or at the bottom of the
top view and drag upward. The underlying
view is then visible and available for use again.
NOTE
The top view is not available during star-
ting/shutdown or when a message is
shown on the screen. It is also not availa-
ble when climate view is shown.
Climate view
The climate row is always visible at the bot-
tom of the screen. The most common climate
settings can be made directly there, such as
setting temperature and seat heating*.
Press the symbol in the centre of the
climate row to open the climate view
and gain access to more climate set-
tings.
Press the symbol to close the cli-
mate view and return to the previous
view.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
115
App view
App view with the car's apps.
Swipe from right to left
6
across the screen in
order to access the app view from the home
view. Apps that have been downloaded (third-
party apps) and apps for embedded functions,
such as
FM radio, are found here. Certain
apps show brief information directly in the app
view, such as the number of unread text mes-
sages for
Messages.
Tap on an app to open it. The app then opens
in the tile to which it belongs, e.g.
Media.
You can scroll down in the app view, depend-
ing on the number of apps. Do this by swip-
ing/dragging from the bottom and up.
Go back to the home view again by swiping
from left to right
6
across the screen, or by
pressing the home button.
Function view
The function view with buttons for different car func-
tions.
Swipe from left to right
6
across the screen in
order to access the function view from the
home view. From here you can activate or
deactivate different car functions, e.g.
BLIS*,
Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.
6
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
116
Depending on the amount of functions, it is
also possible here to scroll downward in the
view. Do this by swiping/dragging from the
bottom and up.
Unlike in app view, where an app is opened
with a press, a function is activated or deacti-
vated by pressing the relevant function button.
Some functions (trigger functions) open in a
new window when pressed.
Go back to the home view again by swiping
from right to left
6
across the screen, or by
pressing the home button.
Related information
Managing subviews in centre display
(p. 117)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 122)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Open contextual setup in the centre dis-
play (p. 131)
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)
Driver profiles (p. 134)
Climate controls (p. 211)
Apps (p. 502)
Function view in centre display (p. 120)
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
6
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
117
Managing subviews in centre
display
Home view consists of four subviews:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra sub-
view. These views can be expanded.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
118
Expanding a subview from default mode
Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
119
Expanding a subview:
For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone:
Press anywhere on the subview. When a
tile is expanded, the extra tile in the home
view is temporarily forced away. The other
two tiles are minimised and only certain
information is shown. When the extra tile
is tapped, the other three tiles are mini-
mised and only certain information is dis-
played.
The expanded view provides access to the
basic functions of the app.
Closing an expanded subview:
The subview can be closed in three differ-
ent ways.
Tap on the upper part of the expanded
subview.
Tap on another tile (this tile will then
open in expanded mode instead).
Briefly press the physical home button
below the centre display.
Opening or closing a subview in full
screen mode
The extra tile
7
and the tile for Navigation can
be opened out in full screen mode, with even
more information and more setting options.
When a new subview is opened in full-screen
mode, no information from the other subviews
is shown.
In expanded mode, open the
app in full screen - press on
the symbol.
Press on the symbol to go
back to the expanded mode,
or press the home button at
the bottom of the screen.
Home button for the centre display.
There is always the option to go back to home
view by pressing the home button. To go back
to the home view's standard view from full
screen mode – press twice on the home but-
ton.
Related information
Managing the centre display (p. 110)
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 113)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
7
Does not apply to all apps or car functions opened via the extra tile.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
120
Function view in centre display
All the buttons for car functions are located in
the function view, one of the centre display's
basic views. Navigate to the function view
from home view by swiping from left to right
across the screen
8
.
Different types of buttons
There are three different types of buttons for
car functions; see below:
Type of button Property Affects car function
Function buttons Have on/off positions.
When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the but-
ton. Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.
Most buttons in function view are
function buttons.
Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions.
When a trigger button is depressed, a window for the function is opened. For example, it
may be a window to change seat position.
Camera
Headrest Fold
Head-up Display Adjust-
ments
Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes.
Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning.
Park In
Park Out
8
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
121
The buttons' different modes
When the LED indicator illuminates in green
on a function or parking button, the function is
activated. When a function is activated, extra
text with an explanation for certain functions is
shown. The text is shown for a few seconds
and then the button is shown with the LED
indicator illuminated.
For
Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only
at certain speeds is shown, for example,
when the button is depressed.
Press the button once briefly to activate or
deactivate the function.
The function is deactivated when the LED
indicator is extinguished.
When a warning triangle is shown in the right-
hand section of the button there is something
not working as intended.
Related information
Managing the centre display (p. 110)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
122
Moving apps and buttons in centre
display
The apps and buttons for car functions in the
app view and function view respectively can
be moved and organised as desired.
1. Swipe from right to left
9
to access the app
view, or swipe from left to right
9
to access
the function view.
2. Tap on an app or button and hold it down.
> The app or button changes size and
becomes slightly transparent. It is then
possible to move it.
3. Drag the app or button to a vacant space
in the view.
The maximum number of rows available for
use in order to position apps or buttons is 48.
To move an app or button outside the visible
view, drag it to the bottom of the view. New
rows are then added, where the app or button
can be located.
An app or button can thus be located further
down and is then not visible in the normal
mode for the view.
Swipe across the screen to scroll up or down
in the view.
NOTE
Hide the apps that you rarely or never use
by moving them to the bottom, off the visi-
ble screen. This way it will be easier to find
the apps you use more often.
NOTE
Apps and car function buttons cannot be
added to locations that are already occu-
pied.
Related information
Function view in centre display (p. 120)
Apps (p. 502)
Managing the centre display (p. 110)
Symbols in the centre display's
status bar
Overview of the symbols that can be shown
in the centre display's status bar.
The status bar shows activities in progress
and, in some cases, their status. Not all sym-
bols are shown all the time due to the limited
space in the status bar.
Symbol Specification
Connected to the Internet.
Roaming activated.
Signal strength in mobile phone
network.
Bluetooth device connected.
Bluetooth activated but no
device connected.
Information sent to and from
GPS.
Connected to Wi-Fi network.
Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hot-
spot). The car then shares the
available connection.
9
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
123
Symbol Specification
Car modem activated.
USB sharing active.
Process in progress.
Timer for preconditioning active.
Audio source being played back.
Audio source stopped.
Phone call in progress.
Audio source muted.
News is received from the radio
channel.
Traffic information is received.
Clock.
Related information
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
Message in centre display (p. 138)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Connecting a device via USB port
(p. 518)
Phone (p. 527)
Date and time (p. 90)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
124
Keyboard in centre display
The centre display keyboard makes it possi-
ble make entries using keys. It is also possi-
ble to "draw in" letters and characters on the
screen by hand.
The keyboard can be used to enter characters,
letters and numbers, e.g. to write text mes-
sages from the car, enter passwords or search
for articles in the digital owner's manual.
The keyboard is only shown when entries can
be made on the screen.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
125
The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in
which the keyboard is being used.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
126
Row of suggested words or characters
10
.
The suggested words are adjusted as new
letters are being entered. Browse among
the suggestions by pressing on the right
and left arrows. Tap on a suggestion to
select it. Note that this function is not sup-
ported by all language selections. If not
available, the row will not be shown on the
keyboard.
The characters available on the keyboard
depend on which language was selected
(see point 7). Tap on a character to enter
it.
The button works in different ways,
depending on the context in which the
keyboard is used - either to enter @ (when
an email address is entered) or to create a
new row (for normal text input).
Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible,
the button is not shown.
Used to enter capital letters. Press again
to enter one capital letter and then con-
tinue with lower-case letters. Another
press makes all letters capital letters. The
next press restores the keyboard to lower-
case letters. In this mode, the first letter
after a full stop, exclamation mark or ques-
tion mark is a capital letter. The first letter
in the text field is also a capital letter. In
text fields intended for names or
addresses, each word automatically starts
with a capital letter. In text fields for pass-
word, web address or email address entry,
all letters are automatically lower case
unless otherwise set with the button.
Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then
shown with numbers. Press
, which
in number mode is shown instead of
, to return to the letter keyboard, or
to open the keyboard with special
characters.
Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The
available characters and word suggestions
(1) vary depending on the selected lan-
guage. To make it possible to change lan-
guages for the keyboard, the languages
must first be added under Settings.
Space.
Undoes entered text. Pressing briefly dele-
tes one character at a time. Hold the but-
ton depressed to delete characters more
quickly.
Changes keyboard mode to write letters
and characters by hand instead.
Pressing the confirmation button above the
keypad (not visible in the illustration) confirms
the entered text. The appearance of the button
differs depending on context.
Variants of a letter or character
Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can
be entered by holding down the letter or char-
acter. A box is displayed showing possible
variants of letters or characters. Press the
required variant. If no variant is selected, the
original letter/character is entered.
Related information
Changing keyboard language in centre
display (p. 127)
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 127)
Managing the centre display (p. 110)
Managing text messages (p. 532)
10
Applies to Asiatic languages.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
127
Changing keyboard language in
centre display
To make it possible to switch between differ-
ent languages for the keyboard, the lan-
guages must first be added under
Settings.
Adding or deleting languages in
settings
The keyboard is automatically set to the same
languages as the system language. The key-
board language can be manually adapted
without affecting the system language.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press
System System Languages and
Units
Keyboard Layouts.
3. Select one or more languages from the
list.
> It is now possible to switch between
the selected languages directly from
the keyboard for text input.
If no languages have been actively selected
under
Settings, the keyboard retains the
same language as the car's system language.
Switching between different
languages in the keyboard
When a number of languages
have been selected in
Settings, the button in the
keyboard is used to switch
between the different lan-
guages.
To change keyboard language with list:
1. Give a long press on the button.
> A list opens.
2. Select the required language. If more than
four languages have been selected under
Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list
from the keyboard.
> The keyboard is adapted to the
selected language and other word sug-
gestions are given.
To change the keyboard language without dis-
playing the list:
One short press of the button.
> The keyboard is adapted to the next
language in the list without displaying
the list.
Related information
Changing system language (p. 130)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 124)
Enter the characters, letters and
words manually in the centre
display
The centre display keyboard allows you to
enter characters, letters and words on the
screen by "drawing" by hand.
Press the button on the key-
board to change from typing
with the keys to entering let-
ters and characters by hand.
Area for writing characters/letters/words/
parts of word.
The text field where the characters or
word suggestions
11
appear as they are
written on screen (1).
11
Applies to certain system languages.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
128
Suggestions for characters/letters/word/
part of word. It is possible to scroll
through the list.
Space. A space can also be created by
entering a dash (-) in the area for hand-
written letters (1). See the heading "Enter-
ing a space in the free text field with hand-
writing recognition" below.
Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete
one character/one letter at a time. Wait a
moment before pressing again to delete
the next character/letter, etc.
Return to the keyboard with regular char-
acter input.
Switch off/on sound when entering.
Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible,
the button is not shown.
Change text input language.
Writing characters/letters/words by hand
1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts
of a word in the area for hand-written let-
ters (1). Write a word or parts of a word
above each other or on a line.
> A number of suggested characters, let-
ters or words is shown (3). The most
likely choice is found at the top of the
list.
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
2. Enter the character/letters/word by wait-
ing a moment.
> The character/letter/word at the top of
the list is entered. It is also possible to
select a different character by pressing
the required character, letter or word in
the list.
Deleting/changing characters/letters
written by hand
Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping
across the handwriting field (1).
There are several options for deleting/
changing characters/letters:
Press the intended letter or word in the
list (3).
Press the text undo button (5) to delete
the letter and begin again.
Swipe horizontally from right to left
12
over the area for handwritten letters (1).
Delete multiple letters by swiping over
the area several times.
Pressing the X in the text field (2) dele-
tes all of the entered text.
12
For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
129
Changing row in the free text field with
handwriting
Change row by hand by drawing the above character
in the handwriting field
13
.
Entering a space in the free text field with
handwriting recognition
Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right
14
.
Related information
Keyboard in centre display (p. 124)
Changing the appearance in the
centre display
The appearance of the screen in the centre
display can be changed by selecting a theme.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
My Car Displays Display
Themes
.
3.
Then select a theme, e.g.
Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.
As a supplement to these appearances, it is
possible to choose between
Normal and
Bright. With Normal, the screen background
is dark and the text is light. This alternative is
the default for all themes. A light variant can
also be selected, in which the background is
light and the text is dark. This alternative can
be useful in e.g. strong daylight.
This alternative is always available for the user
and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.
Related information
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 113)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 639)
Switching off and changing the
volume of the system sound in the
centre display
The centre display can be used to change the
volume of the system sound or switch off the
system sound altogether.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press
Sound System Volumes.
3.
Under
Touch Sounds, drag the control to
change the volume/switch off screen
touch sounds. Drag the control to the
desired volume.
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Audio settings (p. 500)
13
For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.
14
For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
130
Changing system units
Units settings are defined in the centre dis-
play's
Settings menu.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Continue to
System System
Languages and Units
Units of
Measurement
.
3. Select a unit standard:
Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees
Celsius.
Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees
Celsius.
US - miles, gallons and degrees Fah-
renheit.
> The units in the driver display, centre
display and head-up display are
changed.
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Changing system language (p. 130)
Changing system language
Language settings are defined in the centre
display menu
Settings.
NOTE
Changing the language in the centre dis-
play may mean that some owner's informa-
tion is not compliant with national or local
laws and regulations. Do not switch to a
language that is difficult to understand as
this may make it difficult to find your way
back through the screen structure.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Continue to
System System
Languages and Units
.
3.
Select
System Language.
Languages that support voice recognition
have a voice recognition symbol.
> The language in the driver display, cen-
tre display and head-up display is
changed.
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Changing system units (p. 130)
Other settings in the centre
display's top view
You can change settings and information for
many of the car's functions via the centre dis-
play.
1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab
at the top or by dragging/swiping from the
top downwards across the screen.
2.
Press
Settings to open the settings menu.
Top view with button for Settings.
3. Press on one of the categories and the
subcategories to navigate to the required
setting.
4. Change one or more settings. Different
types of setting are changed in different
ways.
> The changes are saved immediately.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
131
A subcategory in the settings menu with different
types of settings (here, a multi-selector button and
radio buttons).
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 133)
Open contextual setup in the
centre display
It is possible to use contextual setup for most
of the car's basic apps so that you can
change settings directly in the top view in the
centre display.
Top view with button for contextual setting.
Contextual setting is a shortcut for accessing
a specific setting relating to the active function
shown on screen. The apps installed in the car
from the beginning, e.g.
FM radio and USB,
are a part of Sensus and are part of the car's
embedded functions. The settings for these
apps can be changed directly via contextual
setting in the top view.
When contextual setup is available:
1. Drag down top view when an app is in
expanded mode, e.g.
Navigation.
2.
Press
Navigation Settings.
> A navigation settings page opens.
3. Change settings as desired and confirm
the selections.
Press
Close or the physical home button
beneath the centre display to close setup
view.
Most of the car's basic apps have this contex-
tual setting option, but not all.
Third party apps
Third party apps are not included in the car's
system from the beginning, but are the type
that can be downloaded e.g.
Volvo ID. Here
the settings are always made inside the app
and not from the top view.
Related information
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
Downloading apps (p. 503)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
132
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
In the event of a change of ownership, user
data and system settings should be restored
to factory settings.
The settings in the car can be reset at different
levels. Restore all user data and system set-
tings to the original factory settings in the
event of a change of ownership. In the event
of a change of ownership it is also important
to change the owner of the Volvo On Call*
service.
Related information
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
(p. 138)
Resetting settings in the centre
display
It is possible to reset the defaults for all set-
tings defined in the centre display settings
menu.
Two types of reset
There are two different types of restore opera-
tion in the settings menu:
Factory reset - clears all data and files
and resets all settings to their default val-
ues.
Reset Personal Settings - clears per-
sonal data and resets personal settings to
their default values.
Resetting settings
Follow these instructions to reset your set-
tings.
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the
car is stationary.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Continue to
System Factory reset.
3. Select the required reset type.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4.
Press
OK to confirm the reset.
For Reset Personal Settings, the reset
must be confirmed by pressing Reset for
the active profile or Reset for all
profiles.
> Selected settings are reset.
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 133)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
133
Table showing centre display
settings
The settings menu in the centre display has a
number of main categories and subcategories
where settings and information for many of
the car's functions are collected.
There are seven main categories: My Car,
Sound, Navigation, Media,
Communication, Climate and System.
In turn, each category contains a number of
subcategories and setting options. The tables
below show the first level of subcategories.
The setting options for a function or area are
described in more detail in the corresponding
section of the owner's manual.
Some settings are personal, which means that
they can be saved to
Driver Profiles. Other
settings are global, which means they are not
linked to a driver profile.
My Car
Subcategories
Displays
IntelliSafe
Drive Preferences
/Individual Drive
Mode
*
Lights and Lighting
Mirrors and Convenience
Subcategories
Locking
Parking Brake and Suspension
Wipers
Sound
Subcategories
Tone
Balance
System Volumes
Navigation
Subcategories
Map
Route and Guidance
Traffic
Media
Subcategories
AMFM radio
DAB*
Gracenote®
Subcategories
TV*
Video
Communication
Subcategories
Phone
Text Messages
Android Auto
*
Apple CarPlay*
Bluetooth Devices
Wi-Fi
Car Wi-Fi Hotspot
Car Modem Internet
*
Volvo On Call*
Volvo Service Networks
Climate
The main category Climate has no subcatego-
ries.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
134
System
Subcategories
Driver Profile
Date and Time
System Languages and Units
Privacy and Data
Keyboard Layouts
Voice Control
*
Factory reset
System Information
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 107)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
Driver profiles
Many of the settings made in the car can be
adapted according to the driver's personal
preferences and can be saved in one or more
driver profiles.
The personal settings are automatically saved
in the active driver profile. Each key can be
linked to a driver profile. When the linked key
is used, the car is adapted to the settings of
that specific driver profile.
What settings are saved in the driver
profiles?
Many of the settings defined in the car will be
saved automatically in the active driver profile
unless the profile is protected. In the car, the
settings defined are either personal or global.
Only personal settings are saved in driver pro-
files.
Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
include, amongst other things, screens, mir-
rors, front seats, navigation*, audio and media
system, language and voice control.
Some settings, referred to as global settings,
can be changed but are not saved to a specific
driver profile. Changes to global settings affect
all profiles.
Global settings
The global settings and parameters are not
changed when changing between driver pro-
files. They remain the same regardless of
which driver profile is active.
Keyboard layout settings are an example of
global settings. If driver profile X is used to
add additional languages to the keyboard,
these remain available for use even if driver
profile Y is used. The keyboard layout settings
are not saved to a specific driver profile - the
settings are global.
Personal preferences
If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre
display brightness, driver profile Y is not affec-
ted by this setting. It has been saved to driver
profile X - the brightness setting is a personal
setting.
Related information
Selecting driver profile (p. 135)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 135)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 136)
Protect driver profile (p. 136)
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
(p. 138)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 133)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
135
Selecting driver profile
When the centre display has been started,
the selected driver profile is shown at the top
of the screen. The driver profile last used is
the one that will be active next time the car is
unlocked. It is possible to change to another
driver profile after the car has been unlocked.
However, if the remote control key has been
linked to a driver profile then this is what is
selected when the car is started.
There are two options for changing to another
driver profile.
Option 1:
1. Tap on the name of the driver profile
shown in the top of the centre display
when the display has been started.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is
shown.
2. Select the driver profile required.
3.
Press
Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the
system loads the settings for the new
driver profile.
Option 2:
1. Drag down the top view in the centre dis-
play.
2.
Press
Profile.
> The same list as for Option 1 is shown.
3. Select the driver profile required.
4.
Press
Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the
system loads the settings for the new
driver profile.
Option 3:
1. Drag down the top view in the centre dis-
play.
2.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
3. Press
System Driver Profiles.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is
shown.
4. Select the driver profile required.
> The driver profile is selected and the
system loads the settings for the new
driver profile.
Related information
Driver profiles (p. 134)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 135)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 136)
Renaming a driver profile
It is possible to change the name of the dif-
ferent driver profiles used in the car.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press
System Driver Profiles.
3.
Select
Edit Profile.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
edited.
4.
Tap in the box
Profile Name.
> A keyboard appears, and it is possible
to change the name. Tap on
to
close the keyboard.
5.
Save the name change by pressing Back
or Close.
> The name has now been changed.
NOTE
A profile name cannot start with a space,
as the profile name will not then be saved.
Related information
Selecting driver profile (p. 135)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 124)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
136
Protect driver profile
In some cases it is preferable not to save vari-
ous settings defined in the car to the active
driver profile. In this case, it is possible to
protect the driver profile.
NOTE
Protecting a driver profile is only possible
when the car is stationary.
To protect a driver profile:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press
System Driver Profiles.
3.
Select
Edit Profile.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
edited.
4.
Select
Protect Profile to protect the pro-
file.
5. Save your profile protection option by
pressing
Back/Close.
> When the profile is protected, settings
defined in the car will not be saved
automatically to the profile. Instead,
your changes must be saved manually
under
Settings System Driver
Profiles
Edit Profile by pressing
Save current settings to the profile.
When the profile is unprotected, on the
other hand, your settings will be saved
automatically to the profile.
Related information
Driver profiles (p. 134)
Linking remote control key to
driver profile
It is possible to link your key to a driver pro-
file. The driver profile along with all of its set-
tings will then be automatically selected
every time the car is used with that specific
remote control key.
The first time the remote control key is used, it
is not linked to any specific driver profile.
When the car is started, the
Guest profile will
automatically be activated.
A driver profile can be selected manually with-
out linking it to the key. When the car is
unlocked, the last active driver profile is acti-
vated. Once the key has been linked to a driver
profile, a driver profile does not need to be
selected when that specific key is used.
Linking a remote control key to a
driver profile
NOTE
Connecting a remote control key to a driver
profile is only possible when the car is sta-
tionary.
First select the profile to be linked to the key,
if the profile to be linked is not already active.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
137
The active profile can then be linked to the
key.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press
System Driver Profiles.
3. Select the desired profile. The display
returns to the home view. The
Guest pro-
file cannot be linked to a key.
4. Drag down the top view again and tap on
Settings System Driver Profiles
Edit Profile.
5.
Select
Connect key to link the profile with
the key. It is not possible to link a driver
profile to a different key than the one cur-
rently being used in the car. If there are
multiple keys in the car, the message
More than one key is found, put the key
you want to connect on backup reader
will be displayed.
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
>
When the message
Profile connected
to key is shown, the key and the driver
profile are linked.
6.
Press OK.
> This key is now linked to the driver pro-
file and will remain linked as long as the
Connect key box is not unticked.
Related information
Driver profiles (p. 134)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 135)
Remote control key (p. 239)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
138
Resetting settings in the driver
profiles
Settings that have been saved to one or more
driver profiles can be reset if the car is sta-
tionary.
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the
car is stationary.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press System Factory reset Reset
Personal Settings
.
3.
Select one of the options
Reset for the
active profile, Reset for all profiles or
Cancel.
Related information
Driver profiles (p. 134)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
Message in centre display
The centre display can show messages to
inform or assist the driver in the event of dif-
ferent events.
Example of a message in the centre display's top
view.
The centre display shows messages that are
of lower priority for the driver.
Most messages are shown above the centre
display's status bar. After a while, or when any
required action related to the message has
been taken, the message disappears from the
status bar. If a message needs to be saved, it
is positioned in the top view in the centre dis-
play.
Message composition may vary and they can
be shown together with graphics, symbols or
a button for activating/deactivating a function
linked to the message.
Pop-up messages
In some cases, a message is shown in the
form of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages
have higher priority than messages shown in
the status bar and require acknowledgement/
action before they disappear.
Related information
Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 139)
Handling a message saved from the cen-
tre display (p. 139)
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
139
Managing messages in the centre
display
Messages in the centre display are handled in
centre display views.
Example of a message in the centre display's top
view.
Some messages in the centre display have a
button (or several buttons in pop-up mes-
sages) for e.g. activating/deactivating a func-
tion linked to the message.
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
Press the button to perform the action or
allow the message to close automatically
after a while.
> The message disappears from the sta-
tus bar.
For messages without buttons:
Close the message by tapping on it, or
allow the message to close automatically
after a while.
> The message disappears from the sta-
tus bar.
If a message needs to be saved, it is posi-
tioned in the top view in the centre display.
Related information
Message in centre display (p. 138)
Handling a message saved from the cen-
tre display (p. 139)
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
Handling a message saved from
the centre display
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
Examples of saved messages and possible options in
the top view.
Messages that are shown in the centre display
that need to be saved are added in the top
view of the centre display.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
140
Reading a saved message
1. Open the top view in the centre display.
> A list of saved messages is shown.
Messages with an arrow to the right
can be maximised.
2. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the
left in the app shows information about
the message graphically.
Managing a saved message
Some messages have a button for e.g. activat-
ing/deactivating a function linked to the mes-
sage.
Press the button to perform the action.
Saved messages in the top view are deleted
automatically when the car is switched off.
Related information
Message in centre display (p. 138)
Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 139)
Messages in the driver display (p. 103)
Head-up display*
The head-up display supplements the car's
driver display and projects information from
the driver display onto the windscreen. The
projected image can only be seen from the
driver position.
The head-up display shows warnings and
information relating to speed, cruise control
functions, navigation, etc. in the driver's field
of vision. Road Sign Information and incoming
phone calls can also be shown in the head up
display.
NOTE
The driver's ability to see the information in
the head-up display is impaired by the fol-
lowing
use of polarising sunglasses
a driving position which means that
the driver is not sitting centred in the
seat
objects on the display unit's cover
glass
unfavourable light conditions.
IMPORTANT
The display unit from which the informa-
tion is projected is located in the instru-
ment panel. To avoid damage to the dis-
play unit's cover glass - do not store any
objects on the cover glass and make sure
that no objects fall down onto it.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
141
Examples of what can be shown in the display.
Speed
Cruise control
Navigation
Road signs
A number of symbols can be shown temporar-
ily in the head-up display e.g.:
If the warning symbol illuminates -
read the warning message in the
driver display.
If the information symbol illuminates
- read the message in the driver dis-
play.
The snowflake symbol illuminates in
the event of a risk of icy conditions.
NOTE
Certain visual defects may cause head-
aches and a feeling of stress during the use
of the head-up display.
City Safety in the head-up display
In the event of a collision warning, the infor-
mation in the head-up display is replaced by
the warning symbol for City Safety. This
graphic is illuminated even if the head-up dis-
play is switched off.
The warning symbol for City Safety flashes in order
to attract the driver's attention if there is a risk of col-
lision.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the head-up
display* (p. 142)
Cleaning the head up display* (p. 640)
Head up display when replacing the wind-
screen* (p. 608)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
142
Activating and deactivating the
head-up display*
The head-up display can be activated and
deactivated when the car has been started.
Press the Head-up Display
button in the centre display
function view. An indicator in
the button illuminates when
the function is activated.
Related information
Settings for head-up display* (p. 142)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Settings for head-up display*
Adjust the settings for the head-up display's
projection onto the windscreen.
Settings can be defined when the car has
been started and a projected image is shown
on the windscreen.
Selecting display options
Select which functions are to be shown in the
head-up display.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options
.
3. Select one or more functions:
Show Navigation
Show Road Sign Information
Show Driver Support
Show Phone
The setting is saved as a personal setting in
the driver profile.
Adjusting brightness and vertical
position
1.
Press the
Head-up Display Adjustments
button in the centre display function view.
2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position
of the projected image in the driver's field
of vision using the steering wheel's right-
hand keypad.
Reducing the brightness
Increasing the brightness
Raising the position
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
143
Lowering the position
Confirm
The brightness of the graphics is automatically
adapted to their background light conditions.
The brightness is also affected by the adjust-
ment of the brightness in the car's other dis-
plays.
The height position can be stored in the mem-
ory function for the power* front seat using the
keypad in the driver's door.
Calibrate the horizontal position
The head-up display's horizontal position may
need to be calibrated if the windscreen or dis-
play unit is replaced. Calibration means that
the projected image is rotated clockwise or
anticlockwise.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Select
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options
Head-Up Display
Calibration
.
3. Calibrate the image's horizontal position
with the steering wheel's right keypad.
Rotate anticlockwise
Rotate clockwise
Confirm
Related information
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Activating and deactivating the head-up
display* (p. 142)
Driver profiles (p. 134)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Voice recognition
Voice control
15
allows you to control func-
tions in the car, e.g. climate system, radio or
a Bluetooth-connected phone with spoken
commands. In cars equipped with Sensus
Navigation*, the navigation system can also
be controlled with voice recognition.
What is voice control?
Voice control is an aid that can facilitate the
use of different commands in your car. In prin-
ciple, it works like a normal application in
which you enter information in a fixed
sequence in order to perform a task, but
instead of typing on a keyboard you use voice
commands. It may therefore be a good idea to
learn how, and in what order, a voice com-
mand should be spoken in order to achieve the
desired result.
The voice control system allows you to control
certain infotainment and climate functions
using voice commands. The system can
respond with speech and by showing informa-
tion in the driver display.
15
Applies to certain markets.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
144
WARNING
The driver always holds overall responsibil-
ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner
and complying with all applicable rules of
the road.
Voice control system microphone
System updating
The voice recognition system is continuously
improved. It is recommended to always have
the latest version installed.
Download updates at www.volvocars.com/
intl/support.
NOTE
Not all system languages support voice
recognition. The ones that do are high-
lighted with the
symbol in the list of
available system languages. Read more
about where the information can be found
in the section on settings for voice recogni-
tion.
Related information
Using voice recognition (p. 144)
Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 146)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Controlling climate control with voice rec-
ognition (p. 201)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 148)
Using voice recognition
Start voice control
16
To give commands via the
voice control system, you
have a "dialogue" with the
system. Depress the steering
wheel button for voice recog-
nition
to activate the sys-
tem and initiate a dialogue
using voice commands. After you have
pressed the button, a beep tone can be heard
and the voice control symbol is shown in the
driver display.
This shows that the system has started to lis-
ten and you can start to say the commands.
As soon as you start to talk, the system is
trained to recognise and understand your
voice. This takes several seconds and is done
automatically, which means that you do not
need to start any voice training manually.
16
Applies to certain markets.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
145
Remember the following:
Speak after the tone with a normal voice
at a normal tempo.
Do not speak while the system is replying
(the system cannot understand com-
mands during this time).
Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment by having the doors, win-
dows and panoramic roof* closed.
NOTE
Not all system languages support voice
recognition. The ones that do are high-
lighted with the
symbol in the list of
available system languages. Read more
about where the information can be found
in the section on settings for voice recogni-
tion.
In general, the system works by listening for a
basic command which is followed by more
detailed commands that specify what you
want the system to do.
To change the system audio volume, turn the
rotary volume knob when the voice speaks. It
is possible to use other buttons during voice
control. However, other sounds will be
silenced during dialogue with the system,
which means that it is not possible to execute
any functions linked with audio using the but-
tons.
Cancel voice control
Voice control can be cancelled in different
ways:
Tap briefly on
and say "Cancel".
Give a long press on the steering wheel
button for voice control
until you hear
two beeps. This stops voice recognition
even when the system is speaking.
Voice control is also cancelled if you do not
reply during a dialogue. The system will first
ask for a reply three times and if there is still
no response then voice control will be cancel-
led automatically.
To speed up communication and skip the
prompts from the system, press the steering
wheel button for voice control
. This can-
cels the system voice and you can say the next
command.
Example of voice recognition control
1.
Press .
2.
Say "
Call [Forename] [Surname]
[number category]", e.g. "Call Robin
Smith Mobile".
> The system dials the selected contact
from the phonebook. If the contact has
several phone numbers (e.g. home,
mobile, work), the right category must
be referred to.
Commands/phrases
The following commands can generally be
used, regardless of the situation:
"
Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruc-
tion in the ongoing dialogue.
"
Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.
17
"
Help" - starts a help dialogue. The sys-
tem replies with the commands available
in the current situation, a prompt or an
example.
Commands for specific functions such as
phone and radio are described in specific sec-
tions.
17
Note that this only stops the dialogue when the system is not speaking. To do that, give a long press on
until two beep tones are heard.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
146
Digits
The number commands are stated differently
depending on the function to be controlled:
Phone numbers and postcodes must be
spoken individually, number by number,
e.g. "zero, three, one, two, two, four, four,
three" (03122443).
House numbers can be spoken individu-
ally or in groups, e.g. "two, two" or
"twenty-two" (22). For English and Dutch,
several groups can be said in sequence,
e.g. "twenty-two, twenty-two" (22 22).
For English, double or triple can be used,
e.g. "double zero" (00). Numbers can be
given within the range 02300.
Frequencies can be spoken as "ninety
eight point eight" (98.8), "a hundred and
four point two" or "hundred four point
two" (104.2).
Speed and repetition mode
It is possible to adjust the speed if the system
is speaking too quickly.
Repetition mode can be enabled so that the
system repeats what you have said.
To change the speed or activate/deactivate
repetition mode:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press System Voice Control and
select settings.
Repeat Voice Command
Speech Rate
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 146)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Controlling climate control with voice rec-
ognition (p. 201)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 148)
Controlling a telephone with voice
recognition
18
Call a contact, have messages read aloud or
dictate brief messages with voice control
commands to a Bluetooth connected tele-
phone.
To specify a contact in the phone book, the
voice recognition command must include con-
tact information that is entered in the phone
book. If a contact, e.g.
Robyn Smith, has sev-
eral phone numbers then the number category
can also be stated, e.g.
Home or Mobile:
"Call Robin Smith Mobile".
Press
and say one of the following com-
mands:
"
Call [contact]" - dials the selected con-
tact from the phone book.
"
Call [phone number]" - dials the phone
number.
"
Recent calls" - displays the call list.
"
Read message" - message is read out. If
there are several messages - select which
message should be read out.
"
Message to [contact]" – the user is
requested to say a brief message. The
message is then repeated aloud and the
user can choose to send
19
or revise the
18
Applies to certain markets.
19
Only certain phones can send messages via the car. For information on which phones are compatible, see www.volvocars.com/intl/support.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
147
message. For this function to work, the
car must be connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Not all system languages support voice
recognition. The ones that do are high-
lighted with the
symbol in the list of
available system languages. Read more
about where the information can be found
in the section on settings for voice recogni-
tion.
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Using voice recognition (p. 144)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Controlling climate control with voice rec-
ognition (p. 201)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 148)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Voice control of radio and media
20
Commands for radio and media player device
control are shown below.
Tap on and say one of the following com-
mands:
"
Media" - starts a dialogue for media and
radio and shows examples of commands.
"
Play [artist]" - plays back music by the
selected artist.
"
Play [song title]" - plays back the
selected song.
"
Play [song title] from [album]" - plays
back the selected song from the selected
album.
"
Play [radio station]" - starts playing
back the selected radio channel.
"
Tune to [frequency]" - starts the
selected radio frequency in the current fre-
quency band. If no radio source is active,
the FM band is started by default.
"
Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" -
starts the selected radio frequency in the
selected frequency band.
"
Radio" - starts FM radio.
"
Radio FM" - starts FM radio.
"
DAB " - starts DAB radio*.
"
CD" - starts playback from CD*.
"
USB" - starts playback from USB.
"
iPod" - starts playback from iPod.
"
Bluetooth" - starts playback from a
Bluetooth-connected media source.
"
Similar music" — plays back music sim-
ilar to the music currently playing back
from USB devices.
NOTE
Not all system languages support voice
recognition. The ones that do are high-
lighted with the
symbol in the list of
available system languages. Read more
about where the information can be found
in the section on settings for voice recogni-
tion.
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Using voice recognition (p. 144)
Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 146)
Controlling climate control with voice rec-
ognition (p. 201)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 148)
20
Applies to certain markets.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
148
Settings for voice recognition
21
Settings for the voice control system are
selected here.
Settings System Voice Control
Settings can be made within the following
areas:
Repeat Voice Command
Gender
Speech Rate
Audio settings
Select audio settings under:
Settings Sound System Volumes
Voice Control
Language settings
Voice recognition is not possible for all lan-
guages. Languages available for voice recogni-
tion are marked with an icon in the language
list -
.
Changing the language also affects menu,
message and help texts.
Settings System System Languages
and Units
System Language
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Using voice recognition (p. 144)
Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 146)
Controlling climate control with voice rec-
ognition (p. 201)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Audio settings (p. 500)
Changing system language (p. 130)
21
Applies to certain markets.
LIGHTING
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
150
Lighting control
The different lighting controls are used to
control both exterior and interior lighting. The
left-hand stalk switch activates and adjusts
the exterior lighting. The interior brightness is
adjusted using a thumbwheel on the instru-
ment panel.
Exterior lighting
Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch.
When the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II, the following functions are availa-
ble for the rotating ring's different positions:
Position Specification
Daytime running lights.
Main beam flash can be used.
Daytime running lights and posi-
tion lamps.
Position lamps when the car is
parked.
A
Main beam flash can be used.
Dipped beam and position
lamps.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
Position Specification
Daytime running lights and posi-
tion lamps in daylight.
Dipped beam and position
lamps in weak daylight or dark-
ness, or when the front fog
lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are
activated.
The Active main beam function
can be activated.
Main beam can be activated
when dipped beam is switched
on.
Main beam flash can be used.
Active main beam on/off.
A
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be
moved to
position from another position to switch
on only the position lamps instead of other lighting.
Volvo recommends that mode is used
when the vehicle is driven.
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
151
WARNING
The car's lighting system is not able to
determine when daylight is too weak or
sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all
situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensur-
ing that the car is driven with a beam pat-
tern suitable for the traffic situation and in
accordance with applicable traffic regula-
tions.
Thumbwheel in instrument panel
Thumbwheel (to left) for adjusting interior brightness.
Related information
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 151)
Interior lighting (p. 161)
Position lamps (p. 152)
Using direction indicators (p. 156)
Using main beam (p. 154)
Dipped beam (p. 153)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 158)
Rear fog lamp (p. 159)
Active bending lights* (p. 157)
Brake lights (p. 159)
Emergency brake lights (p. 160)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 160)
Adjusting light functions via the
centre display
Several light functions can be adjusted and
activated via the centre display. This applies
to active main beam, home safe lighting and
approach light, for example.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Select
Exterior Lights or Interior
Lighting and then select the function that
needs to be adjusted.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 150)
Active main beam (p. 155)
Using home safe lighting (p. 161)
Approach light duration (p. 161)
Using direction indicators (p. 156)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Function view in centre display (p. 120)
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
152
Adapting the headlamp pattern
from the headlamps
The headlamp pattern can be reset when
changing from right to left-hand traffic, and
vice versa. This function adapts the light from
the headlamps to reduce the risk of dazzling
oncoming traffic.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Exterior Lights.
3.
Select
Temporary Right Hand Traffic/
Temporary Left Hand Traffic.
NOTE
Active bending lights are not available
when the headlamp pattern is temporarily
adapted from left to right-hand traffic, or
vice-versa.
Related information
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 130)
Function view in centre display (p. 120)
Active bending lights* (p. 157)
Position lamps
Position lamps can be used so that other road
users can see the car if it stops or is parked.
The position lamp is switched on with the
rotating ring on the stalk switch.
Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.
Turn the rotating ring to the position -
the position lamps are switched on (number
plate lighting is switched on at the same
time).
If the car's electrical system is in ignition posi-
tion II then the daytime running lights are
switched on instead of the front position
lamps. When the rotating ring is in this posi-
tion, the position lamps are switched on
regardless of the ignition position of the car's
electrical system.
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating
ring can be moved to the position lamp
position from another position to switch on
only the position lamps instead of other light-
ing.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at
max. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed
exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime
running lights are switched on. The driver
should turn to a position other than
.
If the boot lid is opened when it is dark out-
side, the rear position lamps are switched on
(if not already switched on) to warn road users
approaching from behind. This takes place
irrespective of the position of the rotating ring
or the ignition position of the car's electrical
system.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 150)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
LIGHTING
}}
* Option/accessory.
153
Daytime running lights
The car has sensors that detect the light con-
ditions in the surroundings. The daytime run-
ning lights are switched on when the rotating
ring on the stalk switch is in position
,
or as well as when the car's elec-
trical system is in ignition position II. In posi-
tion
, the headlamps change automati-
cally to dipped beam in weak daylight or
darkness.
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the
position, the daytime running lights (DRL
1
) are
switched on when the car is driven in daylight.
The car automatically changes lighting from
daytime running light to dipped beam in weak
daylight or darkness. Changing to dipped
beam also takes place if the front fog lamp*
and/or rear fog lamp are activated.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is
too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensur-
ing that the car is driven with the correct
beam pattern for the traffic situation and in
accordance with applicable traffic regula-
tions.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 150)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Dipped beam (p. 153)
Dipped beam
When driving with the stalk switch's rotating
ring in the
position, dipped beam is
activated automatically in weak daylight or
darkness or when the car's electrical system
is in ignition position II.
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in
position, dipped beam is also activated auto-
matically if the rear fog lamp is activated.
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in the
position, dipped beam is always acti-
vated when the car's electrical system is in
ignition position II.
1
Daytime Running Lights
||
LIGHTING
154
Tunnel detection
The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel
and switches from daytime running lights to
dipped beam.
Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand
stalk switch must be in
mode for tunnel
detection to work.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 150)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Daytime running lights (p. 153)
Using main beam
Main beam is operated with the left-hand
stalk switch. Main beam is the car's stron-
gest lighting and should be used when driv-
ing in the dark for better visibility, as long as
it does not dazzle other road users.
Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch backwards slightly
to main beam flash position. Main beam
comes on until the stalk switch is
released.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the
steering wheel stalk switch's rotating ring
is in position
2
or . Activate
main beam by moving the stalk switch for-
wards.
Deactivate by moving the stalk switch
backwards.
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the driver display.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 150)
Active main beam (p. 155)
2
When dipped beam is activated.
LIGHTING
}}
* Option/accessory.
155
Active main beam
Active main beam is a function which uses a
camera sensor at the top edge of the wind-
screen to detect the headlamp beams from
oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles
in front, and then switches from main beam
to dipped beam.
The symbol represents active main beam.
The function can start while driving in the dark
when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h
(approx. 12 mph) or higher. The function can
also take streetlights into account. When the
camera sensor no longer detects any oncom-
ing car or car in front, main beam is switched
on again after about a second.
Activate active main beam
Active main beam is activated and deactivated
by turning the left-hand stalk switch to posi-
tion
. The rotating ring then returns to
position
. When active main beam is
activated, the symbol
illuminates with a
white glow in the driver display. When main
beam is activated, the symbol shines blue.
If active main beam is deactivated while main
beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to
dipped beam.
Active main beam does not need to be reacti-
vated every time the car is started.
Adaptive functionality
For cars with LED
3
headlamps*, active main
beam has adaptive functionality
4
. In this case,
unlike what happens during conventional dim-
ming, the light beam continues to illuminate
with main beam on both sides of oncoming
traffic or vehicles ahead – only the part of the
light beam that points directly to the vehicle is
dimmed.
Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards
oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both
sides of the vehicle.
The main beam is partly dimmed, i.e. if the
light beam shines with slightly more than
dipped beam, the symbol
in the driver
display shines blue.
Limitations for active main beam
The camera sensor on which the function is
based has limitations.
3
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
4
Depending on the car's equipment level.
||
LIGHTING
156
If this symbol is shown in the driver
display, together with the message
Active High Beam Temporarily
unavailable, then switching
between main and dipped beam must be per-
formed manually. The
symbol extin-
guishes when these message are shown.
The same applies if this symbol is
shown together with the message
Windscreen sensor Sensor
blocked, see Owner's manual.
Active main beam may be temporarily unavail-
able e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy
rain. When active main beam becomes availa-
ble again, or the windscreen sensors are no
longer blocked, the message goes out and the
symbol illuminates.
WARNING
Active main beam is an aid for using the
optimum beam pattern when conditions
are favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for
manually switching between main and
dipped beam when traffic situations or
weather conditions so require.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 150)
Using main beam (p. 154)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Using direction indicators
The car's direction indicators are operated
with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction
indicator lamps flash three times or continu-
ously, depending on how far up or down the
stalk switch is moved.
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicator lamps flash three times. If the
function is deactivated via the centre dis-
play, the lamps will flash once.
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
157
NOTE
This automatic flashing sequence can
be stopped by moving the stalk switch
immediately in the opposite direction.
If the symbol for direction indicators in
the driver display flashes more quickly
than normal - see the message in the
driver display.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to its
end position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Related information
Hazard warning flashers (p. 160)
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 151)
Active bending lights*
Active bending lights are designed to provide
additional illumination in bends and junctions.
Cars with LED
5
headlamps* can have active
bending lights, depending on the car's equip-
ment level.
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
Active bending lights follow steering wheel
movements to provide additional illumination
in bends and junctions and can thereby pro-
vide the driver with improved visibility.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started. In the event of a fault in the
function, the
symbol illuminates in the
driver display at the same time as the driver
display shows an explanatory text.
The function is only active in weak daylight or
darkness and only when the car is moving and
dipped beam is switched on.
Deactivating/activating the function
The function is activated when the car is sup-
plied from the factory and can be deactivated/
activated via the centre display's function
view.
Press the
Active Bending
Lights button.
Related information
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 151)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 158)
5
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
158
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
The fog lights are activated manually when
driving in fog and automatically when revers-
ing in order to complement the reversing
light.
If the car is fitted with cornering lights*, the
fog lights come on automatically in dull day-
light or darkness in order to light up the area
diagonally in front of the car.
Button for front fog lamps.
The rear fog lamps can only be switched on
when the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II and the rotating ring on the stalk
switch is in position
, or .
Press the button to activate and deactivate.
The
symbol illuminates in the driver dis-
play when the front fog lamps are switched
on.
The front fog lamps switch off automatically
when the car is switched off or when the
rotating ring on the stalk switch is set to the
position.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Cornering lights*
The front fog lamps can include the cornering
lights function, which temporarily illuminates
the area diagonally in front of the car in the
direction the steering wheel is turned on a
sharp bend, or in the direction shown by the
direction indicators.
The function is activated in weak daylight or
darkness when the stalk switch's rotating ring
is in the
or position and the speed
of the car is lower than approx. 30 km/h
(approx. 20 mph).
In addition, both cornering lights are switched
on as a supplement to the reversing lamp dur-
ing reversing.
The function is activated when the car is sup-
plied from the factory and can be activated
and deactivated via the centre display.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 150)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Rear fog lamp (p. 159)
Active bending lights* (p. 157)
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 151)
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
159
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger
than the normal rear lights and should only be
used in reduced visibility due to fog, snow,
smoke or dust so that other road users have
an early warning of a vehicle ahead.
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp is a lamp at the rear of the
car, on the driver's side.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on
when ignition position II is active and the
rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position
or .
Press the button to switch the lights on/off.
The symbol in the driver display illumi-
nates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamp switches off automatically
when the car is switched off or when the
rotating ring on the stalk switch is set to the
or position.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps
vary from country to country.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 150)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 158)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on dur-
ing braking.
The brake light is illuminated when the brake
pedal is depressed and when the car is braked
automatically by one of the driver support sys-
tems.
Related information
Emergency brake lights (p. 160)
Brake functions (p. 445)
Driving support systems (p. 282)
LIGHTING
160
Emergency brake lights
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about heavy braking.
The function means that the brake light
flashes instead of - as in normal braking -
shining with a constant glow.
The emergency brake lights are activated dur-
ing heavy braking or if the ABS system is acti-
vated at high speeds.
After the driver brakes to a low speed and
then releases the brake, the brake light returns
to normal glow.
The car's hazard warning flashers are acti-
vated at the same time. These flash until the
driver accelerates the car to a higher speed
again or switches off the car's hazard warning
flashers.
Related information
Brake lights (p. 159)
Foot brake (p. 445)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 160)
Hazard warning flashers
Hazard warning flashers warn other road
users by means of all of the car's direction
indicators being activated simultaneously.
The function can be used to give a warning in
the event of traffic hazards.
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
The hazard warning flashers are automatically
activated when the car brakes so powerfully
that the emergency brake lights are activated
and the speed is low. The hazard warning
flashers start to flash after the emergency
brake lights have stopped flashing and are
then deactivated automatically when the car
drives away again or are deactivated if the but-
ton is depressed.
NOTE
Regulations for the use of hazard warning
flashers may vary between countries.
Related information
Emergency brake lights (p. 160)
Using direction indicators (p. 156)
LIGHTING
}}
* Option/accessory.
161
Using home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting
after the car has been locked.
To activate the function:
1. Switch off the car.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward
toward the instrument panel and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
> A symbol in the driver display is illumi-
nated to indicate that the function is
activated and outer lighting is switched
on: Position lamps, headlamp beams,
number plate lighting and lighting in
outer handles*.
The length of time that home safe lighting
remains on can be set via the centre display.
Related information
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 151)
Approach light duration (p. 161)
Approach light duration
Approach lighting is switched on when the
car is unlocked and is used to switch on the
car's lighting at a distance.
The function is activated when the remote
control key is used for unlocking. In daylight,
position lamps, interior roof lamps, floor lights
and cargo area lighting are activated. In weak
daylight or darkness, number plate lighting
and lighting in the outer handles are also acti-
vated* with their light source aimed towards
the ground.
The lighting stays on for approx. 2 minutes if
no doors are opened. If a door is opened
within the activation time, the time for the
interior lighting and lighting in the outer han-
dles* will be extended.
The function can be activated and deactivated
via the centre display.
Related information
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 151)
Using home safe lighting (p. 161)
Remote control key (p. 239)
Interior lighting
The passenger compartment is equipped
with several types of lighting, e.g. general
interior lighting, adjustable decor illumination
and reading lighting.
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on and off manually at least
5 minutes from when:
the car has been switched off and its elec-
trical system is in ignition position 0
the car has been unlocked but it has not
yet been started.
Front roof lighting
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps
and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Passenger compartment lighting
||
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
162
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Reading lighting
The reading lamps on the right and left-hand
sides can be turned on and off by briefly press-
ing the buttons in the roof console. Brightness
is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Passenger compartment lighting
The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are
switched on or off with a short press on the
button in the roof console.
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
The automatic function is activated by a short
press on the AUTO button in the roof console.
With the automatic system activated, the light
indicator in the button illuminates and the pas-
senger compartment lighting is switched on
and off according to the following.
The passenger compartment lighting comes
on when:
The car is unlocked
The car is switched off
A side door is opened.
The passenger compartment lighting goes off
when:
The car is locked
The car is started
A side door is closed
A side door has remained open for approx.
2 minutes.
Rear roof lighting
The rear area of the car has reading lighting,
which is also used as passenger compartment
lighting.
Reading lamps above the rear seat.
In cars with panoramic roof* there are two lamp
units, one on each side of the roof.
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
briefly pressing the button on the lamp.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button
pressed in.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Sun visor mirror lighting*
The lighting for the mirror in the sun visor is
switched on and off respectively when the
cover is opened or closed.
Ground lighting*
The ground lighting is switched on or off when
the corresponding door is opened or closed.
LIGHTING
}}
* Option/accessory.
163
Door sill lighting
The door sill lighting is switched on or off
when a door is opened or closed.
Lighting in cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on or
off when the boot lid is opened or closed.
Decor lighting
The ambient light is switched on when you
open the doors and is switched off when the
car is locked. The intensity of the decor light-
ing can be adapted in the centre display and
also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel
in the instrument panel.
Ambience lights*
The car is equipped with LEDs that make it
possible to change the colour of the light.
These lights are switched on when the car is
running. The ambience light can be adapted in
the centre display and also precisely adjusted
using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Lighting in storage compartments in
doors
The lighting in the storage compartments in
the doors is switched on when you open the
doors and is switched off when the car is
locked. The brightness can be precisely
adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instru-
ment panel.
Lighting in the tunnel console's front
cup holder
The lighting in the front cup holders is
switched on when the car is unlocked and is
switched off when the car is locked. The
brightness can be precisely adjusted using the
thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Related information
Adjusting interior lighting (p. 163)
Lighting control (p. 150)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 586)
Adjusting interior lighting
The lamps inside the car come on differently
depending on the ignition position used. The
interior lighting can be adjusted with a
thumbwheel in the instrument panel, and cer-
tain light functions can also be adjusted via
the centre display.
The thumbwheel on the
instrument panel, to the left
of the steering wheel, is used
to adjust the brightness of
the display lighting, controls
lighting, ambient decor illumi-
nation and ambience light*.
Adjusting ambient decor illumination
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting.
3. Choose between the following settings:
Under
Ambient Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
Under
Ambient Light Level, select
from Reduced and Full.
Adjusting ambience light*
The car is equipped with a number of LEDs
that make it possible to change the colour of
the light. These lights are switched on when
the car is running.
||
LIGHTING
164
Changing the brightness of the lights
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood
Lighting
.
3.
Under
Interior Mood Light Intensity,
select from Off, Low and High.
Changing the colour of the light
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood
Lighting
.
3.
Choose between
By Temperature and
By Colour in order to change the colour of
the light.
With the
By Temperature option, the
light changes according to the set passen-
ger compartment temperature.
With the
By Colour option, the Theme
Colours subcategory can be used to
adjust further.
Related information
Interior lighting (p. 161)
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 151)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
166
Windows, glass and mirrors
The car contains several different windows,
glass panes and mirrors. Some of the win-
dows in the car are laminated.
The windscreen has laminated glass, and lami-
nated glass is available as an option for certain
other glass areas. Laminated glass is rein-
forced, which provides better protection
against break-ins and improved sound insula-
tion in the passenger compartment.
The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass.
The symbol is shown on the windows where the
glass is laminated
1
Related information
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
Panoramic roof* (p. 173)
Power windows (p. 167)
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 170)
Using the sun blind* (p. 169)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 178)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
Activating and deactivating the heated
windscreen* (p. 218)
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 219)
Pinch protection for windows and
sun blinds
All power windows and sun blinds* have
pinch protection which is deployed if they are
blocked by any object while opening or clos-
ing.
In the event of blocking, the movement stops
and then reverses automatically to approx.
50 mm (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked
position (or to full ventilation position).
It is possible to force pinch protection when
closing has been cancelled, e.g. when ice is
formed, by continuing to press the control in
one and the same direction.
If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a
reset sequence can be tested.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function
must be reset to work properly. A reset
must take place for pinch protection to
work.
Related information
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 167)
Operating power windows (p. 168)
1
Does not apply to the windscreen or panoramic roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
167
Using the sun blind* (p. 169)
Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 174)
Reset sequence for pinch
protection
If a problem occurs with the electrical func-
tions for the electric windows, a reset
sequence can be tested.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function
must be reset to work properly. A reset
must take place for pinch protection to
work.
If a problem persists, or if it concerns the pan-
oramic roof, contact a workshop
2
.
Reset the power window
1. Start with the window in closed position.
2. Then operate the controls in the manual
position 3 times upwards to closed posi-
tion.
> The system is initialised automatically.
Related information
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
Operating power windows (p. 168)
Using the sun blind* (p. 169)
Power windows
Each door has a control panel for the electri-
cally-driven power windows. The driver's
door has controls for operating all windows
and also to activate the child safety locks.
Driver's door control panel.
Electric child safety locks* that deactivate
the controls in the rear doors to prevent
doors or windows from being opened
from the inside.
Controls for rear windows.
Controls for front windows.
2
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
168
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may
be trapped by the moving parts.
Always operate the windows with cau-
tion.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows
by setting the car's electrical system in
ignition position 0, and then take the
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
Related information
Operating power windows (p. 168)
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 167)
Operating power windows
Using the driver's door control panel, all
power windows can be operated - using the
control panels in the other doors operates the
power window in the individual door.
The power windows are equipped with pinch
protection. If any fault arises with the pinch
protection, a reset sequence can be tested.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may
be trapped by the moving parts.
Always operate the windows with cau-
tion.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows
by setting the car's electrical system in
ignition position 0, and then take the
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto. Move one of the
controls gently up or down. The power
windows move up or down as long as the
control is held in position.
Operating with auto. Move one of the con-
trols up or down to the end position and
release it. The window runs automatically
to its end position.
In order for the power windows to be used,
the ignition position must be I or II. The power
windows can be operated for a few minutes
after the car has been switched off and after
the ignition has been switched off - although
not after a door has been opened. It is only
possible to operate one control at a time.
It can also be operated using a remote control
key or keyless opening* with the door handle.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
169
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers
are not at risk of crushing when all the win-
dows are closed with a remote control key
or keyless opening* with a door handle.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind
noise when the rear windows are open is
to also open the front windows slightly.
NOTE
The windows cannot be opened at speeds
above approx. 180 km/h (approx.
112 mph), but they can be closed.
The driver always bears responsibility for
following traffic regulations in force.
NOTE
It may not be possible to operate windows
at low temperatures.
Related information
Power windows (p. 167)
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 167)
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 268)
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 242)
Using the sun blind*
There is a sun blind in the rear parcel shelf.
Pull up the sun blind and hook it onto the
roof clip using the two hooks for the blind.
> The spring force in the blind keeps the
hooks in position.
When the sun blind is not in use, unhook it,
hold onto the tag and allow the blind to roll up
slowly.
Related information
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 167)
Power windows (p. 167)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
170
Rearview and door mirrors
The rearview mirrors and door mirrors can be
used to give the driver better visibility to the
rear.
Interior rearview mirror
The interior rearview mirror is equipped with
HomeLink*, automatic dimming* and com-
pass*.
The interior rearview mirror is adjusted by
angling it manually.
Door mirrors
WARNING
Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal
vision. Objects may appear to be further
away than they actually are.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with
the joystick in the driver's door control panel.
There are also a number of automatic settings
that can be linked to the memory function but-
tons for the power seat*.
Related information
HomeLink
®
* (p. 493)
Compass* (p. 497)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
(p. 170)
Angling adjustment of the door mirrors
(p. 171)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 219)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirrors and dazzle the driver.
Use dimming when disturbed by light from
behind.
Manual dimming
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed
with a control in the mirror's lower edge.
Control for manual dimming.
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal mode by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
The control for manual dimming is not availa-
ble on mirrors with automatic dimming.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
171
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the interior rearview and door mir-
rors. Automatic dimming is always active
while driving, apart from when gearbox
reverse position is selected.
NOTE
When sensitivity is changed there is no
immediately noticeable change in dim-
ming, but the change takes place gradu-
ally.
Dimming sensitivity will affect both the interior
rearview mirror and the door mirrors.
To change dimming sensitivity:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press
My Car Mirrors and
Convenience
.
3.
Under
Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
The interior rearview mirror contains two sen-
sors - one forward facing and one rearward
facing - that work together to identify and
eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing
sensor detects ambient light, while the rear-
ward facing sensor detects the light from vehi-
cle headlights behind.
For the door mirrors to be equipped with auto-
matic dimming, the interior rearview mirror
must also be equipped with automatic dim-
ming.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or
objects in the seats or on the parcel shelf in
such a way that light is prevented from
reaching the sensors, then the dimming
function of the interior rearview and door
mirrors is reduced.
Related information
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 170)
Angling adjustment of the door mirrors
(p. 171)
Angling adjustment of the door
mirrors
To ensure better visibility to the rear, the door
mirrors need to be set to the preferences of
the driver.
There are a number of automatic settings that
can also be linked to the memory function
buttons for the power seat*.
Using controls for door mirrors
Controls for door mirrors.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with
the joystick in the driver's door control panel.
Ignition position must be at least I.
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illumi-
nates.
||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
172
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
Folding in rearview mirrors
electrically*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv-
ing in narrow spaces.
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultane-
ously.
2. Release them after approximately 1 sec-
ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the
fully retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the extended position
with the previous setting.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to their original position for electric retracting/
extending* to work correctly.
1. Fold in the door mirrors by pressing down
the L and R buttons simultaneously.
2. Fold them out again by pressing the L
and R buttons simultaneously.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are returned to the original posi-
tion.
Angling during parking
3
A door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when park-
ing, for example.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
Note that the button may need to be pressed
twice, depending on whether it was already
preselected. The button flashes when the door
mirror is angled down. When reverse gear is
disengaged, the door mirror automatically
starts to return after approx. 3 seconds and
then reaches its original position after approx.
8 seconds.
Automatic angling during parking
3
With this setting, the door mirror is automati-
cally angled down when reverse gear is
selected. The folded position is preset and
cannot be adjusted.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
My Car Mirrors and
Convenience
.
3.
Under
Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse,
select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and to select which
review mirror should be angled.
You can make the door mirror return to its
original position by pressing the L or R button
twice.
Automatic retraction when locking*
In the centre display, you can set all the rear-
view and door mirrors to retract/extend auto-
matically when the car is locked/unlocked
using the key.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
My Car Mirrors and
Convenience
.
3.
Select
Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
vate/deactivate.
However, if the mirrors have been folded in
using the L and R buttons, they have to be
folded out manually as well.
Related information
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 170)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
(p. 170)
3
Only in combination with power seat with memory buttons*.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
173
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 219)
Panoramic roof*
The panoramic roof is divided into two glass
sections. The front section can be opened
vertically at the rear edge (ventilation posi-
tion) or horizontally (open position). The rear
section is fixed roof glass.
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and
a sun blind made of perforated fabric and
located under the glass roof to provide extra
protection from factors such as strong sun-
light.
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated
with a control located in the roof.
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun
blind can be operated, the car's electrical sys-
tem must be in ignition position I or II.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may
be trapped by the moving parts.
Always operate the windows with cau-
tion.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows
by setting the car's electrical system in
ignition position 0, and then take the
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
174
IMPORTANT
Remove ice and snow before opening
the panoramic roof. Take care not to
scratch surfaces or damage strips.
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
Wind deflector
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector that
is raised when the panoramic roof is in the
open position.
Related information
Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 174)
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 177)
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 268)
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 242)
Operating the panoramic roof*
The panoramic roof and sun blind are oper-
ated with a control in the roof panel and both
are equipped with pinch protection.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may
be trapped by the moving parts.
Always operate the windows with cau-
tion.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows
by setting the car's electrical system in
ignition position 0, and then take the
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
175
IMPORTANT
Remove ice and snow before opening
the panoramic roof. Take care not to
scratch surfaces or damage strips.
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun
blind can be operated, the car's electrical sys-
tem must be in ignition position I or II.
It can also be operated using a remote control
key or keyless opening* with the door handle.
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers
are not at risk of crushing when all the win-
dows are closed with a remote control key
or keyless opening* with a door handle.
IMPORTANT
Check that the panoramic roof is properly
closed when closing.
The movement of the roof is stopped if the
control is released during manual operation, or
when the glass reaches the comfort position
4
or the maximum opening or closing position.
The movement of both panoramic roof and
sun blind are also stopped if the roof control is
operated again in the opposite direction to the
current direction of movement.
The panoramic roof and the sun blind are also
equipped with pinch protection. If any fault
arises with the pinch protection, a reset
sequence can be tested.
NOTE
For manual opening, the sun blind must be
fully open before the panoramic roof can
be opened. When the procedure is
reversed, the panoramic roof must be fully
closed before the sun blind can be fully
closed.
NOTE
It may not be possible to operate windows
at low temperatures.
Open and close ventilation position
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the control upward
once.
Close by pressing the control downward
once.
When the ventilation position is selected the
front glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If
the sun blind is fully closed when ventilation
position is selected, then it opens automati-
cally approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
The sun blind follows automatically if the pan-
oramic roof is closed from ventilation position.
4
Comfort position is a position where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.
||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
176
Fully open and close the panoramic
roof using the roof control
Operation, manual mode
Operation, automatic mode
Manual operation
1. To open the sun blind - press the control
backwards to the position for manual
opening.
2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort posi-
tion - press the control backwards a sec-
ond time to the position for manual open-
ing.
3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum
position - press the control backwards a
third time to the position for manual open-
ing.
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in
reverse order - press the control forward/
downward to the manual closing position
instead.
Automatic operation
1. Open the sun blind to maximum position -
press the control backward to the position
for automatic opening and release.
2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort posi-
tion - press the control backwards a sec-
ond time to the position for automatic
opening and release.
3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum
position - press the control backwards a
third time to the position for automatic
opening and release.
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in
reverse order - press the control forward/
downward to the automatic closing position
instead.
Automatic operation - rapid opening or
closing
The panoramic roof and sun blind can be
opened or closed simultaneously:
To open - press the control rearward to
the automatic operation position twice
and release.
To close - press the control forward/
downward to the automatic operation
position twice and release.
Related information
Panoramic roof* (p. 173)
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 177)
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 268)
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 242)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
177
Automatic closing of the
panoramic roof's* sun blind
With this function, the sun blind is closed
automatically 15 minutes after the car has
been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This
is in order to lower the passenger compart-
ment temperature and protect the car's
upholstery from sun-fading.
The function is deactivated when the car is
supplied from the factory and can be activated
or deactivated in the centre display.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press
My Car Locking.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
activate/deactivate.
NOTE
The sun blind is also closed when all win-
dows are closed using the remote control
key or keyless opening* with a door handle.
Related information
Panoramic roof* (p. 173)
Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 174)
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 166)
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 268)
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 242)
Wiper blades and washer fluid
Together with the washer fluid, the wipers
aim to improve visibility as well as headlamp
pattern.
Washer fluid direct from the wiper blades and
heating* of the wiper blades gives improved
vision.
Information indicating that the washer fluid
needs topping up appears in the driver display
when there is approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer
fluid remaining.
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 179)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 180)
Filling washer fluid (p. 654)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 653)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 652)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 178)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
178
Using windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers are designed to clean
the windscreen. Different settings for the
windscreen wipers are set using the right-
hand stalk switch.
Right-hand stalk switch.
The thumbwheel is used to set rain sensor
sensitivity and wiper swipe frequency.
Single sweep
Lower the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Intermittent wiping
Move the lever up to switch the wipers
to intermittent wiping. Set the number
of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel
when intermittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to
sweep at normal speed.
Raise the stalk switch further for the
wipers to sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers - ensure that
the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that
any snow or ice on the windscreen is scra-
ped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The wind-
screen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 179)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 177)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 180)
Filling washer fluid (p. 654)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 653)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 652)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
179
Using the rain sensor
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sen-
sitivity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel
on the right-hand stalk switch.
Right-hand stalk switch.
Rain sensor button
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
When the rain sensor is activated, the rain
sensor symbol
is shown in the driver
display.
Activating the rain sensor
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or in ignition position I or II while
the windscreen wiper stalk switch is in posi-
tion 0 or in the position for a single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button
.
Move the lever down to make the wipers
move.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi-
tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. An
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upward.
Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button
or moving the stalk
switch up to another wiper program.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in
ignition position 0 or when the engine is
switched off.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically
when wiper blades are set in service position.
The rain sensor is reactivated when service
mode has been deactivated.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac-
tivate the rain sensor while the car is run-
ning or when the car's electrical system is
in ignition position I or II. The symbol in the
driver display extinguishes.
Related information
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 177)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 180)
Filling washer fluid (p. 654)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 653)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 652)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 178)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
180
Using the rain sensor's memory
function
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen.
Activating/deactivating the memory
function
The memory function for the rain sensor can
be activated in such a way that the rain sensor
button does not need to be depressed each
time the car is started:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press
My Car Wipers.
3.
Select
Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
deactivate the memory function.
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 179)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 177)
Filling washer fluid (p. 654)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 653)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 652)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 178)
Using windscreen and headlamp
washers
Windscreen and headlamp washers are
designed to clean the windscreen and head-
lamps. Windscreen and headlamp washers
are started using the right-hand stalk switch.
Starting windscreen and headlamp
washers
Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.
Move the right-hand stalk switch toward
the steering wheel to start the windscreen
and headlamp washers.
> The windscreen wipers will make sev-
eral more sweeps once the stalk switch
has been released.
IMPORTANT
Avoid activating the washer system when
it is frozen or the washer reservoir is
empty, otherwise there is a risk of damag-
ing the pump.
Headlamp washing*
To save fluid, the headlamps are washed auto-
matically at a defined interval when the head-
lamps are switched on.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir and the message
Washer fluid Level low, refill, together with
the symbol, is shown in the driver dis-
play, then the supply of washer fluid to the
headlamps is switched off. This is to prioritise
cleaning the windscreen and the visibility
through it. The headlamps are only washed if
main or dipped beam is switched on.
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 179)
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 177)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 180)
Filling washer fluid (p. 654)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 653)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
181
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 652)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 178)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
184
Manual front seat
The car's front seats have a range of setting
options in order to enhance comfort.
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat
cushion* by pumping up/down.
1
Change the length* of the seat cushion by
pulling the lever up and moving the seat
cushion forward/backward by hand.
Adjust the seat forward/backward by lift-
ing the handle and adjusting the distance
to the steering wheel and pedals. Check
that the seat is locked after the position
has been adjusted.
Change the lumbar support* by pressing
the button upward/downward/forward/
back
2
.
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjust-
ing the control up/down.
Change the backrest inclination by turning
the control knob.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving.
Make sure that the seat is in locked posi-
tion in order to avoid personal injury in the
event of heavy braking or an accident.
Related information
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Using a stored position for seat, door mir-
rors and head-up display* (p. 187)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
1
Only applies to the driver's seat.
2
Applicable to four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forwards/backwards.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
185
Power* front seat
The car's front seats have a range of setting
options in order to enhance comfort. The
power seat can be moved forwards/back-
wards and upwards/downwards. The front
edge of the seat cushion can be raised/
lowered as well as adjusted in length* and the
backrest inclination can be changed. The
lumbar support* can be adjusted upward/
downward/forward/backward.
3
Seat setup can take place when the engine is
running and within a certain time after unlock-
ing the door without the engine running.
Adjustment can also be performed within a
certain time after the engine has been
switched off.
IMPORTANT
The power seats have overload protection
that is triggered if any seat is blocked by an
object. If this happens, remove the object
and then move the seat again.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Using a stored position for seat, door mir-
rors and head-up display* (p. 187)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
Adjusting the power* front seat
Set the preferred seat position using the con-
trol on the front seat's seating section. To set
the various comfort functions, turn the multi-
function control
4
up/down.
The illustration shows the controls from a car with
four-way lumbar support*. Cars with two-way lumbar
support* do not have the rotatable multifunction con-
trol.
In cars with four-way lumbar support*,
turn the multifunction control
4
up/down to
set the different comfort functions. In cars
with two-way lumbar support*, use the
round button to adjust the lumbar support
forward/backward.
Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge
by adjusting the control up/down.
3
Applicable to four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forwards/backwards.
4
Not available in cars with two-way lumbar support*.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
186
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjust-
ing the control up/down.
Move the seat forward/backward by
adjusting the control forward/backward.
Change the backrest inclination by adjust-
ing the control forward/backward.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
The backrests of the front seats cannot be
lowered fully forward.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Using a stored position for seat, door mir-
rors and head-up display* (p. 187)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
Storing position for seat, door
mirrors and head-up display*
You can store the position for power* seat,
door mirrors and head-up display* in the
memory buttons.
Store two different positions for the power*
seat, the door mirrors and the head-up dis-
play* using the memory buttons. The buttons
are located on the inside of one of the front
doors or both*.
Button M for storing settings.
Memory button.
Memory button.
Storing a position
1. Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up dis-
play to the desired position.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
187
2. Press and hold the M button depressed.
The light indicator in the button illumi-
nates.
3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1
or 2 button.
> When the position has been stored in
the selected memory button, an acous-
tic signal can be heard and the light
indicator in the M button extinguishes.
If none of the memory buttons is depressed
within three seconds then the M button extin-
guishes and no storing takes place.
The seat, the door mirrors or the head-up-dis-
play must be readjusted before a new memory
can be set.
NOTE
All driver profiles need to be set in Protect
Profile mode in order for the stored posi-
tions to work.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Using a stored position for seat, door mir-
rors and head-up display* (p. 187)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
Angling adjustment of the door mirrors
(p. 171)
Settings for head-up display* (p. 142)
Protect driver profile (p. 136)
Using a stored position for seat,
door mirrors and head-up display*
If the positions for the power* seat, the door
mirrors and the head-up display* have been
stored, they can be activated by using the
memory buttons.
Using a stored setting
A stored setting can be used with the front
door either open or closed:
Open front door
Depress one of the memory buttons 1 ( )
or 2 (
) with a short press. Power seat,
door mirrors and head-up display move
and then stop at the positions stored in
the selected memory button.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
188
Closed front door
Hold one of the memory buttons 1 ( ) or
2 (
) depressed until seat, door mirrors
and head-up display stop in the positions
that are stored in the selected memory
button.
If the memory button is released, the move-
ment of the seat, door mirrors and head-up
display will be stopped.
WARNING
Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children
should never be left unattended in the
vehicle.
Movement of the seat can be STOP-
PED at any time by pressing any but-
ton on the power seat control panel.
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
Make sure there is nothing under the
seats when they are being adjusted.
NOTE
All driver profiles need to be set in Protect
Profile
mode in order for the stored posi-
tions to work.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat
*
(p. 193)
Angling adjustment of the door mirrors
(p. 171)
Settings for head-up display* (p. 142)
Massage settings* in the front seat
Both the multi-function control on the side of
the seat and the centre display can be used in
order to change the settings. The range of
settings is shown in the centre display.
Multi-function control, located on the side of the
seat's seating section.
Settings for massage
The following setting options are available for
massage:
On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch
on/off the massage function.
Programs 15: There are 5 preset mas-
sage programs. Select between Swell,
Tread, Advanced, Lumbar and
Shoulder.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
189
Intensity: Select between Low, Normal
and High.
Speed: Select between Slow, Normal
and Fast.
Restarting massage
The massage function is deactivated automat-
ically after 20 minutes. Reactivation of the
function is performed manually.
Tap on Restart, which is shown in the
centre display, to restart the selected mas-
sage program.
> The massage program restarts. If no
action is taken, the message remains
shown in the top view.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Using a stored position for seat, door mir-
rors and head-up display* (p. 187)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
Adjusting massage settings* in the
front seat
Both the multi-function control on the seat
and the centre display can be used in order to
change the settings. The range of settings is
shown in the centre display.
Adjusting massage settings in the
front seat
The front seat has massage in the backrest.
The massage is performed by air cushions that
can massage with different settings.
The massage function can only be activated
when the car's engine is running.
1. Activate the multi-function control by turn-
ing the control
upwards/downwards.
The seat settings view will be shown in
the centre display.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
190
2.
Select
Massage in the seat settings view.
3. To choose between the different massage
functions, select either directly in the cen-
tre display or by moving the cursor up/
down using the multi-function control's
upper
/lower button. Change the
setting in the selected function directly in
the centre display, by pressing the arrows,
or by using the multi-function control's
front
/rear button.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Using a stored position for seat, door mir-
rors and head-up display* (p. 187)
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
Adjusting* the length of the seat
cushion in the front seat
Depending on equipment level selected, seat
cushion length is adjusted either using the
multifunction control* on the side of the
seat's seat cushion, or manually using a con-
trol on the front of the seat cushion.
Adjusting the length of the seat
cushion using the multifunction
control
Multifunction control, located on the side of the seat
cushion.
1. Activate the multi-function control by turn-
ing the control
upwards/downwards.
The seat settings view will be shown in
the centre display.
2.
Select
Cushion extension in the seat set-
tings view.
Press the front section of the four-way
button
to extend the seat cushion.
Press the rear section of the four-way
button
to retract the seat cushion.
Adjusting the length of the seat
cushion manually
Control for seat cushion adjustment.
1.
Grip the handle on the front of the seat
and pull upwards.
2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion.
3. Release the handle and make sure that the
seat cushion has reached the correct posi-
tion.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
191
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Using a stored position for seat, door mir-
rors and head-up display* (p. 187)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat
*
(p. 193)
Adjusting the side support* in the
front seat
Increase comfort in the front seat by adjust-
ing the sides of the backrest.
Multi-function control, located on the side of the
seat's seating section.
The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to
provide side support. Both the multi-function
control on the seat and the centre display can
be used in order to change the settings. The
range of settings is shown in the centre dis-
play.
To adjust the side support:
1. Activate the multi-function control by turn-
ing the it up/down . The seat settings
view will be shown in the centre display.
2.
Select
Side bolsters in the seat settings
view.
Press the front section of the four-way
button to increase side support
.
Press the rear section of the four-way
button to decrease side support
.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Using a stored position for seat, door mir-
rors and head-up display* (p. 187)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 193)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
192
Adjusting the lumbar support* in
the front seat
The lumbar support is adjusted using a con-
trol on the side of the seat cushion.
Multifunction control in cars with four-way lumbar
support*.
Control in cars with two-way lumbar support*.
The lumbar support is adjusted using the mul-
tifunction control in cars with four-way lumbar
support*, or using the round button in cars
with two-way lumbar support*. The control is
located on the side of the seat's seating sec-
tion. Depending on the equipment level
selected, the lumbar support can be adjusted
forward/back and up/down (four-way lumbar
support) or forward/back (two-way lumbar
support).
Adjust the lumbar support in the car
using the four-way lumbar support
1. Activate the multi-function control by turn-
ing the control
upwards/downwards.
The seat settings view will be shown in
the centre display.
2.
Select
Lumbar in the seat settings view.
Press the round button up
/down
to move the lumbar support upwards/
downwards.
Press the front section
of the button
to increase lumbar support.
Press the rear section
of the button
to decrease lumbar support.
Adjust the lumbar support in the car
using the two-way lumbar support
1.
Press the front section of the round
button to increase lumbar support.
2.
Press the rear section
of the round but-
ton to decrease lumbar support.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
193
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Using a stored position for seat, door mir-
rors and head-up display* (p. 187)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat
*
(p. 193)
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
The front passenger seat can be adjusted
from the driver's seat.
Activating the function
The function is activated via the function view
in the centre display:
Press the
Adjust Passenger
Seat button to activate.
Adjust passenger seat
From activation of the function, the driver
must adjust the passenger seat within 10 sec-
onds. If no adjustment is made within this
time the function is deactivated.
The driver adjusts the passenger seat using
the controls on the driver's seat:
Move the passenger seat forward/back-
ward by adjusting the control forward/
backward.
Change the passenger seat's backrest
inclination by adjusting the control for-
ward/backward.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 184)
Power* front seat (p. 185)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 186)
Using a stored position for seat, door mir-
rors and head-up display* (p. 187)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front
seat (p. 189)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
194
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 190)
Massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 188)
Adjusting the side support* in the front
seat (p. 191)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 192)
Lowering the backrests in the rear
seat*
The rear seat's backrest is divided into two
parts. The two parts can be folded forward
individually.
WARNING
Adjust the seat and fix it before driving
away. Take care when adjusting the
seat. Uncontrolled or careless adjust-
ment can lead to trapping injuries.
When loading long objects, they must
always be strapped in securely to avoid
injury and damage during sudden brak-
ing.
Always switch off the engine and apply
the parking brake when loading and
unloading the car.
For cars with automatic gearbox, set
the gear selector in P to prevent it from
being moved by mistake.
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down.
The seat belts must not be connected
either. Otherwise there is a risk of damag-
ing the rear seat upholstery.
IMPORTANT
The armrest* for the centre seat must be
raised before lowering the seat.
The through-load hatch* in the rear seat
must be closed before lowering.
NOTE
When private locking is activated, the rear
seat must be in upright position for locking
to work. With the rear seat in lowered
position, locking will not work.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
wards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests
can be fully folded forward.
Lowering the backrest
To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car
must be stationary and at least one rear door
open.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
195
Buttons for seat folding, located on the upper section
of the rear seat.
1. Ensure that there are no occupants or
objects in the rear seat.
2. Lower the centre seat's head restraint
manually.
3. Press and hold one of the buttons located
in the parcel shelf on the left-hand side of
the car.
4. The seat is released from the lock but
remains in the same position. The head
restraints are lowered automatically.
5. Lower the backrest manually to the hori-
zontal position.
Raising the backrest
Raising the backrest to upright position is car-
ried out manually:
1. Move the backrest up/back.
2. Press the backrest until the lock engages.
3. Raise the head restraints manually.
4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head
restraint.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head
restraints in the rear seat are locked prop-
erly after being folded up.
The head restraints of the outer seats must
always be raised when there are passen-
gers on any of the rear seats.
Related information
Adjusting the head restraints in the rear
seat (p. 195)
Private locking (p. 274)
Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 274)
Adjusting the head restraints in the
rear seat
Adjust the centre seat head restraint accord-
ing to the height of the passenger. Fold down
the outer seat head restraints* to improve
rearward visibility.
Adjust the head restraint for the
centre seat
The centre seat's head restraint must be
adjusted according to the passenger's height
so that, if possible, the whole of the back of
the head is covered. Slide it up manually as
required.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
196
To lower the head restraint, the button (see
illustration) must be depressed while the
restraint is carefully moved down.
WARNING
The centre seat head restraint must be in
its lowest position when the centre seat is
not used. When the centre seat is used, the
head restraint must be correctly adjusted
to the height of the passenger so that it
covers the whole of the back of the head if
possible.
Fold down the rear seat's outer head
restraints via the centre display*
The outer head restraints can be retracted via
the centre display's function view. You can
lower the head restraints in ignition position 0.
Press the Headrest Fold
button to activate/deactivate
lowering.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if
there are passengers in any of the outer
rear seats.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked posi-
tion after being folded up.
Related information
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat*
(p. 194)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
197
Steering wheel controls and horn
The steering wheel houses the horn and con-
trols for e.g. the driver support systems and
voice recognition.
Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.
Controls for driver support systems
5
.
Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing
in an automatic gearbox.
Controls for voice recognition and menu,
message and phone handling.
Horn
The horn is located in the centre of the steering
wheel.
Related information
Steering lock (p. 197)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Steering lock
The steering wheel lock makes it difficult to
steer the car if it is stolen, for example. A
mechanical noise can be perceived when the
steering lock is locked or unlocked.
Activating the steering lock
The steering lock is activated when the car is
locked from the outside and the engine is
switched off. If the car is left unlocked then
the steering lock will be activated automati-
cally after a while.
Deactivating the steering lock
The steering lock is deactivated when the car
is unlocked from outside. If the car is not
locked, the steering wheel lock will be deacti-
vated as long as the remote control key is in
the passenger compartment and the car is
started.
Related information
Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 197)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
5
Speed Limiter, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
198
Adjusting the steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted in differ-
ent positions.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for
depth.
The steering wheel is adjusted in different
ways depending on whether or not the car is
equipped with knee airbag
6
.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away. The steering wheel must
never be adjusted while driving.
With speed related power steering the level of
steering force can be adjusted. Steering force
is regulated according to the car's speed in
order to give the driver enhanced road respon-
siveness.
Adjusting the steering wheel in a car with a
knee airbag
Lever for steering wheel adjustment.
1. Push the lever forwards to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press
the steering wheel lightly at the same time
as you move the lever back.
Adjusting the steering wheel in a car
without a knee airbag
Lever for steering wheel adjustment.
1. Pull the lever backwards to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
3. Push the lever forwards to secure the
steering wheel. If the lever is stiff, press
the steering wheel lightly at the same time
as you move the lever back.
Related information
Steering lock (p. 197)
Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 197)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 185)
6
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
CLIMATE
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
200
Climate
The car is equipped with electronic climate
control. The climate control system cools or
heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the
passenger compartment.
All climate control system functions are con-
trolled from the centre display and physical
buttons in the centre console.
Some functions for the rear seat can also be
controlled from the climate controls* at the
rear of the tunnel console.
Related information
Climate zones (p. 200)
Climate control - sensors (p. 200)
Perceived temperature (p. 201)
Controlling climate control with voice rec-
ognition (p. 201)
Parking climate (p. 223)
Heater (p. 233)
Air quality (p. 202)
Air distribution (p. 205)
Climate controls (p. 211)
Climate zones
The number of climate zones that the car is
divided into governs the options for setting
different temperatures for different parts of
the passenger compartment.
2-zone climate
Climate zones with 2-zone climate.
With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the
passenger compartment can be set separately
for the left and right-hand sides.
Related information
Climate (p. 200)
Climate control - sensors
The climate control system has a number of
sensors to help control the climate in the car.
Sensor location
Sun sensor - on the upper side of the
instrument panel.
Moisture sensor - in the casing by the
interior rearview mirror.
Outside temperature sensor - in the right-
hand door mirror.
Temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment - by the physical buttons in
the centre console.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
201
With the Interior Air Quality System* there is
also an air quality sensor that is fitted into the
climate control system air intake.
Related information
Climate (p. 200)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204)
Perceived temperature
The climate control system regulates the cli-
mate in the passenger compartment based
on the perceived temperature, not on actual
temperature.
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physically
perceived temperature as affected by factors
such as the ambient temperature, air speed,
humidity, solar radiation, etc. in and around
the car at the time.
The system includes a sun sensor which
detects on which side the sun is shining into
the passenger compartment. This means that
the temperature can differ between the right
and left-hand side's air vents despite the con-
trols being set for the same temperature on
both sides.
Related information
Climate (p. 200)
Controlling climate control with
voice recognition
1
Voice recognition commands for the climate
control system to e.g. change temperature,
activate a heated seat* or change fan level.
Press and say one of the following com-
mands:
"
Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate
control and shows examples of com-
mands.
"
Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
the desired temperature.
"
Raise temperature"/"Lower
temperature" - raise/lower the tempera-
ture setting one step.
"
Sync temperature" - synchronises the
temperature for all climate zones in the car
with the temperature set for the driver's
side.
"
Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the
desired air flow.
"
Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" -
closes the desired air flow.
"
Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" -
changes the air flow to Max/Off.
"
Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" -
raises/lowers the fan level one step.
1
Applies to certain markets.
||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
202
"
Turn on auto" - activates automatic reg-
ulation of the climate control.
"
Air condition on"/"Air condition off" -
activates/deactivates the air conditioning.
"
Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" -
activates/deactivates the air circulation.
"
Turn on defroster "/"Turn off
defroster" - activates/deactivates defrost-
ing of windows and door mirrors.
"
Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max
defroster off" - activates/deactivates the
max defroster.
"
Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
electric defroster" - activates/deacti-
vates the heated windscreen*.
"
Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
defroster" - activates/deactivates the
heated rear window and door mirrors.
"
Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
steering wheel heat off" - activates/
deactivates the heated steering wheel*.
"
Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
setting for the heated steering wheel* one
step.
"
Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
- activates/deactivates the heated seat*.
"
Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" -
raises/lowers the setting for the heated
seat* one step.
"
Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off
seat ventilation" - activates/deactivates
the seat ventilation*.
"
Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat
ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for
the ventilated seat* one step.
NOTE
Not all system languages support voice
recognition. The ones that do are high-
lighted with the
symbol in the list of
available system languages. Read more
about where the information can be found
in the section on settings for voice recogni-
tion.
Related information
Climate (p. 200)
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Using voice recognition (p. 144)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 148)
Air quality
The materials selected for the passenger
compartment and the air cleaning system
ensure that the air quality in the passenger
compartment is high.
Materials in the passenger
compartment
The interior of the passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable,
even for people with contact allergies and for
asthma sufferers.
Tested materials have been developed in order
to reduce the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and to contribute to making the
passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
The carpets in both the passenger compart-
ment and the cargo area are removable and
easy to remove and clean.
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo to clean the interior.
Air cleaning system
In addition to the passenger compartment fil-
ter, the car is equipped with an air cleaning
system that helps to maintain high air quality
in the passenger compartment.
Related information
Climate (p. 200)
Clean Zone* (p. 203)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
203
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 205)
Clean Zone*
The Clean Zone function checks and indi-
cates whether or not all conditions have been
met for good air quality in the passenger
compartment.
The indicator is visible in the climate view
in the centre display.
The indicator is visible in the climate row
when the climate view is not open.
If the conditions have not been met then the
Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions
have been met, this is indicated by the text
changing colour to blue.
Conditions that need to be met:
That all doors and the boot lid are closed.
That all side windows and the panoramic
roof* are closed.
That the air quality system Interior Air
Quality System* is activated.
That the ventilation fan is activated.
That the air recirculation is deactivated.
NOTE
Clean Zone does not indicate that the air
quality is good. It only indicates that the
conditions for good air quality have been
met.
Related information
Air quality (p. 202)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 205)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
204
Clean Zone Interior Package*
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) compri-
ses a series of modifications that keep the
passenger compartment even clearer from
allergy and asthma-inducing substances,
among other things.
The following is included:
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is unlocked
with the remote control key. The fan fills
the passenger compartment with fresh air.
The function starts when required and is
disengaged automatically after a time or
when one of the passenger compartment
doors is opened. The amount of time the
fan runs is reduced gradually due to
reduced need up until the car is 4 years
old.
The fully automatic air quality system
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS).
Related information
Air quality (p. 202)
Clean Zone* (p. 203)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 205)
Interior Air Quality System*
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully
automatic air quality system that separates
gases and particles to reduce the levels of
odours and contaminants in the passenger
compartment.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the pas-
senger compartment from contaminants such
as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and
ground-level ozone.
If the air quality sensor senses that the outside
air is contaminated, the air intake is closed
and air recirculation is activated.
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be ena-
bled to ensure the best air in the passenger
compartment.
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so
as to prevent misting.
In the event of misting, the defrost func-
tions for windscreen, side windows and
rear window should be used.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the air quality
sensor* (p. 205)
Air quality (p. 202)
Clean Zone* (p. 203)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 205)
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
205
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
The air quality sensor is part of the fully auto-
matic air quality system Interior Air Quality
System (IAQS).
It is possible to set whether the air quality sen-
sor should be activated/deactivated.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select
Air Quality Sensor to activate/
deactivate the air quality sensor.
Related information
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204)
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compart-
ment is cleaned with a filter.
Replacing the passenger
compartment filter
To maintain high climate system performance,
the filter must be changed at regular intervals.
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the
recommended replacement intervals. If the car
is used in a severely contaminated environ-
ment, it may be necessary to replace the filter
more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger
compartment filter. Make sure that the cor-
rect filter is fitted.
Related information
Air quality (p. 202)
Clean Zone* (p. 203)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204)
Air distribution
The climate control system distributes the
incoming air via a number of different vents in
the passenger compartment.
Automatic and manual air distribution
With auto-regulated climate control running
the air distribution takes place automatically. If
necessary, the air distribution can be con-
trolled manually.
Adjustable air vents
Some of the air vents in the car are adjustable,
which means that you can open/close the vent
to aim the air flow.
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger
compartment.
Four on the instrument panel and one on
each of the door pillars between the front
and rear doors.
||
CLIMATE
206
Related information
Climate (p. 200)
Changing air distribution (p. 206)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 207)
Table of air distribution options (p. 208)
Changing air distribution
The air distribution can be changed manually
if required.
1. Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
The air distribution buttons in the climate view.
Air distribution - windscreen defroster
vents
Air distribution - air vents in instrument
panel and centre console
Air distribution - air vents in the floor
2.
Press one or more of the air distribution
buttons in order to open/close the corres-
ponding air flow.
> The air distribution is changed and the
buttons illuminate/extinguish.
Related information
Air distribution (p. 205)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 207)
Table of air distribution options (p. 208)
CLIMATE
207
Opening, closing and aiming the
air vents
Some air vents in the passenger compart-
ment can be opened, closed and aimed indi-
vidually.
If the car's outer vents are aimed at the side
windows then misting can be eliminated.
If the car's outer vents are aimed inwards
then, in a hot climate, a comfortable environ-
ment is obtained in the passenger compart-
ment.
Opening and closing the air vents
Air vents on the instrument panel:
Turn the rotary knob in the middle of the
air vent to open/close the air flow from the
vent.
The air flow is at maximum when the
marking on the knob is in vertical position.
Air vents in the door pillars:
Move the lever in the middle of the air vent
up/down to open/close the air flow from
the vent.
The air flow is switched off in the bottom
position, while it is constant in other posi-
tions.
Aiming the air vents
Move the lever in the middle of the air vent
horizontally/vertically to direct the air flow
from the vent.
Related information
Air distribution (p. 205)
Changing air distribution (p. 206)
Table of air distribution options (p. 208)
CLIMATE
208
Table of air distribution options
The air distribution can be changed manually
if required. The following options are available
for setting.
Air distribution Purpose
If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate
control.
Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air
vents.
Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid cli-
mate (to achieve this, fan level must not be low).
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows
from other air vents.
Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.
Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other
air vents.
Provides heat or cooling to the floor.
CLIMATE
}}
209
Air distribution Purpose
Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel.
Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.
Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some
air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or
humid climate.
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at
the floor. Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool out-
door temperatures.
Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instru-
ment panel and air vents at the floor.
Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compart-
ment.
||
CLIMATE
210
Related information
Air distribution (p. 205)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 207)
Changing air distribution (p. 206)
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
211
Climate controls
The climate control system's functions are
controlled from physical buttons in the centre
console, the centre display and the climate
controls at the rear of the tunnel console*.
Physical buttons in centre console
Button for heated windscreen* and max
defroster.
Button for heated rear window and door
mirrors.
Climate row in centre display
The most common climate functions can be
regulated from the climate row.
Temperature controls for driver and pas-
senger side.
Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver
and front passenger seat, as well as
heated steering wheel*.
Button for access to the climate view. The
graphic on the button shows activated cli-
mate settings.
Climate view in centre display
Open climate view by pressing the
symbol in the middle of the climate
row.
Depending on equipment level, the
climate view can be divided into several tabs.
Change between the tabs by swiping left/right
or by pressing the respective heading.
Main climate
In addition to the climate row's functions,
other main climate functions can also be con-
trolled in the
Main climate tab.
Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrost-
ing the windows and door mirrors.
AC - Controls for air conditioning.
Recirc - Controls for air recirculation.
Controls for air distribution.
||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
212
Fan control.
AUTO - Auto regulating the climate.
Parking climate
The car's parking climate control can be regu-
lated in the
Parking climate tab.
Climate controls at rear of tunnel
console*
If the car is equipped with heated rear seats*
there are physical buttons at the rear of the
tunnel console for controlling this function.
Related information
Climate (p. 200)
Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 212)
Activating and deactivating heated rear
seat* (p. 213)
Activating and deactivating ventilated
front seat* (p. 214)
Activating and deactivating the heated
steering wheel* (p. 215)
Activating auto climate control (p. 215)
Activating and deactivating air recircula-
tion (p. 216)
Activating and deactivating max defroster
(p. 217)
Activating and deactivating the heated
windscreen* (p. 218)
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 219)
Regulating fan level for front seat (p. 220)
Synchronising temperature (p. 222)
Activating and deactivating air condition-
ing (p. 222)
Activating and deactivating heated
front seat*
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row
in the centre display in order to open the
controls for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with ventilated
seats or heated steering wheel (for the
driver's side), the button for heated seats
is immediately available in the climate
row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated
seats in order to change between the four
levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button
shows the set level.
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
213
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation or
who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Other-
wise they may suffer burn injuries.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated front seat* (p. 213)
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated front
seat*
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated seats should be activated/deactivated
when the engine is started. With automatic
start activated, heating will start in the event
of low ambient temperature.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Driver Seat Heating Level
and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level
to activate/deactivate automatic start of
heated driver's and passenger seat.
> An "A" is shown at each button for
heated front seats in the climate row
when automatic starting has been acti-
vated.
4.
Select
Low, Medium or High to select
level after the function has been activated.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 212)
Activating and deactivating heated
rear seat*
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear seat from the rear seat
Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel
console.
Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's physical buttons for heated seats at
the rear of the tunnel console to switch
between the four levels:
Off, High,
Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the LEDs in the
button show the set level.
||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
214
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation or
who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Other-
wise they may suffer burn injuries.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating
ventilated front seat*
The seats can be ventilated to provide
increased comfort in a hot climate, for exam-
ple.
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases
the cooler the passenger compartment air
becomes. The system can be activated when
the engine is running.
1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row
in the centre display in order to open the
controls for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated
seats or heated steering wheel (for the
driver's side), the button for ventilated
seats is immediately available in the cli-
mate row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated
seats in order to change between the four
levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button
shows the set level.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
215
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is
cold.
1. Press the driver's side steering wheel and
seat button in the climate row of the cen-
tre display in order to open the controls for
seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated
seats or ventilated seats, the button for
heated steering wheel is immediately
available in the climate row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated
steering wheel in order to change
between the four levels:
Off, High,
Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button
shows the set level.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated steering wheel* (p. 215)
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated steering
wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is
cold.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated steering wheel should be activated/
deactivated when the engine is started. With
automatic start activated, heating will start in
the event of low ambient temperature.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level to activate/deactivate automatic
start of heated steering wheel.
> An "A" is shown at the button for
heated steering wheel in the climate
row when automatic starting has been
activated.
4.
Select
Low, Medium or High to select
level after the function has been activated.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the heated
steering wheel* (p. 215)
Activating auto climate control
With auto climate control activated, multiple
climate functions are controlled automati-
cally.
1. Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2.
Give a short or long press on
AUTO
Climate.
Short press - air recirculation, air condi-
tioning and air distribution are con-
trolled automatically.
Long press - air recirculation, air condi-
tioning and air distribution are con-
trolled automatically, temperature and
fan speed are changed to standard set-
tings: 22 °C (72 °F) and level
3.
> Auto-regulation of the climate is acti-
vated and the button illuminates.
||
CLIMATE
216
NOTE
Temperature and fan speed can be
changed without deactivating the automat-
ically-regulated climate control system.
The automatically-regulated climate con-
trol system is deactivated when the air dis-
tribution is changed manually or when
maximum defroster is activated.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating air
recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
gases, etc. from outside the car by the cli-
mate control system reusing the air in the
passenger compartment.
1. Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2.
Press
Recirc.
> Air recirculation is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car is recirculated for too
long then there is a risk of misting on the
insides of the windows.
NOTE
It is not possible to activate air recircula-
tion when max defroster is activated.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating time setting
for air recirculation (p. 217)
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
217
Activating and deactivating time
setting for air recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
gases, etc. from outside the car by the cli-
mate control system reusing the air in the
passenger compartment.
It is possible set whether the air recirculation
timer should be activated/deactivated. When
the timer is activated, air recirculation is auto-
matically switched off after 20 minutes.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Recirculation Timer to activate/
deactivate the air recirculation timer.
Related information
Activating and deactivating air recircula-
tion (p. 216)
Activating and deactivating max
defroster
Max defroster is used to quickly remove mist
and ice from windows.
Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation of
the climate and air recirculation, activates air
conditioning and changes the fan level to
5
and the temperature to HI.
NOTE
Changing the fan level to 5 increases the
noise level.
When max defroster is deactivated, the cli-
mate control system returns to the previous
settings.
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from centre console
There is a physical button in the centre con-
sole for quick access to max defroster.
With heated windscreen* the max defroster
can only be activated individually from the cli-
mate view in the centre display.
Physical button in the centre console.
Cars without heated windscreen:
Press the button.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
Cars with heated windscreen:
Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
Activated heated windscreen
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster
are activated/deactivated and the but-
ton illuminates/extinguishes.
||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
218
NOTE
Max defroster starts with a certain delay in
order to avoid a short increase in fan level if
the heated windscreen is deactivated by
two quick presses of the button.
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from centre display
1. Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2.
Press
Max.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating the
heated windscreen*
A heated windscreen is used to quickly
remove mist and ice from the window.
Activating and deactivating heated
windscreen from centre console
In the centre console is a physical button for
rapid access to the heated windscreen.
Physical button in the centre console.
Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
Activated heated windscreen
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster
are activated/deactivated and the but-
ton illuminates/extinguishes.
Activating and deactivating heated
windscreen from centre display
1. Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2.
Press
Electric.
> Heated windscreen is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
NOTE
The heated windscreen may affect the per-
formance of transponders and other com-
munication equipment.
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
219
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated windscreen* (p. 219)
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated
windscreen*
A heated windscreen is used to quickly
remove mist and ice from the window.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated windscreen should be activated/deac-
tivated when the engine is started. With auto-
matic start activated, heating will start when
there is a risk of ice or misting on the wind-
screen/window. The heating switches off
automatically when the windscreen/window is
sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is
gone.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Front Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated wind-
screen.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the heated
windscreen* (p. 218)
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door
mirrors
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
windows and mirrors.
Activating and deactivating heated
rear window and door mirrors from
centre console
In the centre console is a physical button for
rapid access to the heated rear window and
door mirrors.
Physical button in the centre console.
Press the button.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors
are activated/deactivated and the but-
ton illuminates/extinguishes.
||
CLIMATE
220
Activating and deactivating heated
rear window and door mirrors from
centre display
1. Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2.
Press
Rear.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors
are activated/deactivated and the but-
ton illuminates/extinguishes.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating automatic
starting of the heated rear window and
door mirrors (p. 220)
Activating and deactivating
automatic starting of the heated
rear window and door mirrors
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
windows and mirrors.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated rear window and door mirrors should
be activated/deactivated when the engine is
started. With automatic start activated, heat-
ing will start when there is a risk of ice or mist-
ing on the windscreen/window. The heating
switches off automatically when the wind-
screen/window is sufficiently warm and the
ice or misting is gone.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Rear Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated rear
window and door mirrors.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 219)
Regulating fan level for front seat
2
The fan can be set to several different auto-
matically controlled fan speeds for the front
seat.
1. Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
Fan control buttons in the climate view.
2.
Tap on the desired fan level,
Off, 1-5 or
Max.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons
for the selected level illuminate.
2
For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
CLIMATE
221
IMPORTANT
If the fan is fully switched off then the air
conditioning is not engaged, which results
in a risk of misting on the insides of the
windows.
NOTE
The climate control system automatically
adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
level based on requirements. This means
that the fan speed may change even
though the fan level is the same.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
Regulating temperature for front
seat
3
The temperature can be set to the desired
number of degrees for the front seat's climate
zones.
Temperature buttons in the climate row.
1. Press the left or right-hand side tempera-
ture button in the centre display's climate
row to open the controls.
Temperature control.
2. Regulate the temperature by either of the
following:
drag the control to the desired tem-
perature, or
press
+/ to raise/lower the tempera-
ture gradually.
> The temperature changes and the but-
ton shows the set temperature.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature
than the actual desired temperature.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
3
For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
222
Synchronising temperature
The temperature in the car's different climate
zones can be synchronised with the tempera-
ture set on the driver's side.
Synchronisation button on the driver's side tempera-
ture controls.
1. Press the driver's side temperature button
in the centre display's climate row in order
to open the controls.
2.
Press
Synchronise temperature.
> The temperature for all zones in the car
is synchronised with the temperature
set for the driver's side and the syn-
chronisation symbol is shown adjacent
to the temperature button.
The synchronisation is stopped by means of a
further press on
Synchronise temperature or
by means of changing the temperature set-
tings for a climate zone other than the driver's.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
Activating and deactivating air
conditioning
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as required.
When the air conditioning is activated, the cli-
mate control system automatically controls
starting and switching off as required.
1. Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2.
Press
AC.
> The air conditioning is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
NOTE
Close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* so that the air conditioning should
work as well as possible.
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
223
NOTE
It is not possible to activate the air condi-
tioning when the fan control is in
Off posi-
tion.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 211)
Parking climate
Parking climate control is a generic term for
various functions that improve the passenger
compartment climate when the car is parked,
e.g. preconditioning.
Functions belonging to the parking
climate control are controlled from
the
Parking climate in climate view
in the centre display. Open climate
view by pressing the symbol in the middle of
the climate row.
Related information
Climate (p. 200)
Preconditioning (p. 223)
Climate comfort when parking (p. 229)
Symbols and messages for parking cli-
mate control (p. 231)
Preconditioning
Preconditioning is a climate function which, if
possible, attempts to reach comfort tempera-
ture in the passenger compartment before
departure.
Preconditioning can use direct start or be set
via the timer.
The function utilises several systems in differ-
ent cases:
In a cold climate, the parking heater
warms up the passenger compartment to
a comfortable temperature.
The air conditioning, in a hot climate, cools
the passenger compartment to the com-
fort temperature.
Activation of heated steering wheel* and
heated seats* for driver and passenger can
be selected.
Heated windscreen, rear window and door
mirrors are automatically activated as
required.
During preconditioning in a hot climate, con-
densation from the air conditioning may drip
under the car. This is normal.
||
CLIMATE
224
NOTE
Preconditioning is available only when the
car is connected to an electrical socket
4
. A
charging station which is not always
active, e.g. on account of a timer, may
cause preconditioning to malfunction.
If the car is not connected to an electrical
socket, it is still possible to cool the pas-
senger compartment briefly in a warm cli-
mate by starting preconditioning directly.
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach com-
fort temperature and not the temperature
set in the climate control system.
Related information
Parking climate (p. 223)
Start and switch off preconditioning
(p. 224)
Preconditioning time setting (p. 225)
Start and switch off
preconditioning
Preconditioning heats or cools the passenger
compartment, if possible, prior to driving. The
function can use direct start from the centre
display or a mobile phone.
Start and switch off from car
1. Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3. Select whether seat heating and steering
wheel heating should be activated during
preconditioning by ticking/unticking the
boxes for the respective function.
4.
Press
Preconditioning.
> Preconditioning is started/switched off
and the button is illuminated/extin-
guished.
NOTE
Preconditioning is available only when the
car is connected to an electrical socket
5
. A
charging station which is not always
active, e.g. on account of a timer, may
cause preconditioning to malfunction.
If the car is not connected to an electrical
socket, it is still possible to cool the pas-
senger compartment briefly in a warm cli-
mate by starting preconditioning directly.
NOTE
The car's doors and windows should be
closed during the preconditioning of the
passenger compartment.
4
Applicable to electric heater.
5
Applicable to electric heater.
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
225
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning
6
:
In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater
starts.
In locations with combustible or flam-
mable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long
grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For
example, deep snow inside the front
right-hand wheel housing can obstruct
the heater’s ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a
long time in advance.
Starting from the app*
Start of preconditioning and information about
the selected settings can be managed from a
device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Pre-
conditioning heats or cools the passenger
compartment (using the car's air conditioning)
to comfort temperature.
The passenger compartment can also be pre-
conditioned with the car remote start function
(Engine Remote Start - ERS)
7
via the Volvo
On Call* app.
Related information
Parking climate (p. 223)
Preconditioning (p. 223)
Preconditioning time setting (p. 225)
Preconditioning time setting
The timer can be set so that the precondition-
ing is finished at a predetermined time.
The timer can handle up to 8 different settings
for:
A time on a single date
A time on one or more days of the week,
with or without repetition.
NOTE
Preconditioning is available only when the
car is connected to an electrical socket
8
. A
charging station which is not always
active, e.g. on account of a timer, may
cause preconditioning to malfunction.
If the car is not connected to an electrical
socket, it is still possible to cool the pas-
senger compartment briefly in a warm cli-
mate by starting preconditioning directly.
Related information
Preconditioning (p. 223)
Adding and editing time setting for pre-
conditioning (p. 226)
6
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
7
Certain markets.
CLIMATE
226
Activating and deactivating time setting
for preconditioning (p. 227)
Removing time setting for preconditioning
(p. 228)
Adding and editing time setting for
preconditioning
The timer for preconditioning can manage up
to 8 time settings.
Adding a time setting
The button to add a time setting in the Parking
climate tab in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre dis-
play.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Press
Add timer.
> A pop-up window is shown.
NOTE
It is not possible to add a time setting if
there already are 8 settings entered for the
timer. Delete a time setting in order to be
able to add a new one.
4.
Tap on
Date to set the time for a single
date.
Tap on
Days to set the time for one or
more days of the week.
With
Days: Activate/deactivate repetition
by ticking/unticking the box for Repeat
weekly.
5.
With
Date: Select the date for precondi-
tioning by scrolling the date list with the
arrows.
With
Days: Select the days of the week
for preconditioning by tapping on the but-
tons for the days of the week.
6. Set the time when the preconditioning
should be finished by scrolling with the
arrows.
8
Applicable to electric heater.
CLIMATE
}}
227
7.
Tap on
Confirm in order to add the time
setting.
> The time setting is added to the list and
is activated.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning
9
:
In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater
starts.
In locations with combustible or flam-
mable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long
grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For
example, deep snow inside the front
right-hand wheel housing can obstruct
the heater’s ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a
long time in advance.
Editing a time setting
1. Open the climate view in the centre dis-
play.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3. Press the time setting that is to be
changed.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4. Edit the time setting in the same way as
described in "Adding a time setting"
above.
Related information
Preconditioning (p. 223)
Preconditioning time setting (p. 225)
Activating and deactivating time setting
for preconditioning (p. 227)
Removing time setting for preconditioning
(p. 228)
Activating and deactivating time
setting for preconditioning
A time setting in the timer for preconditioning
can be activated or deactivated based on
need.
The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the
climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre dis-
play.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tap-
ping on the timer button to the right of the
setting.
> The time setting is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
9
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
||
CLIMATE
228
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning
10
:
In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater
starts.
In locations with combustible or flam-
mable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long
grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For
example, deep snow inside the front
right-hand wheel housing can obstruct
the heater’s ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a
long time in advance.
Related information
Preconditioning (p. 223)
Preconditioning time setting (p. 225)
Adding and editing time setting for pre-
conditioning (p. 226)
Removing time setting for preconditioning
(p. 228)
Removing time setting for
preconditioning
A time setting for preconditioning that is no
longer required can be deleted.
The button for editing the list/deleting the time set-
ting in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre dis-
play.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Press
Edit list.
4. Press the delete icon to the right in the
list.
>
The icon changes to the text
Delete.
5.
Press
Delete to confirm.
> The time setting is removed from the
list.
Related information
Preconditioning (p. 223)
Preconditioning time setting (p. 225)
Adding and editing time setting for pre-
conditioning (p. 226)
Activating and deactivating time setting
for preconditioning (p. 227)
10
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
CLIMATE
}}
229
Climate comfort when parking
The climate in the car's passenger compart-
ment can be maintained while the car is
parked, e.g. if the engine needs to be
switched off but the driver or passenger(s)
wants to remain in the car and maintain the
level of climate comfort.
Starting climate comfort retention is only pos-
sible via direct start.
The function utilises several systems in differ-
ent cases:
Residual heat from the engine, in a cold
climate, heats the passenger compart-
ment to comfort temperature.
When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily.
Use of the function is intended to maintain
climate comfort when driver or passengers
remain inside the car.
There is a limit to how long climate com-
fort can be maintained in a cold climate,
which depends on the amount of residual
heat available.
Related information
Parking climate (p. 223)
Starting and switching off climate comfort
when parking (p. 229)
Starting and switching off climate
comfort when parking
Climate comfort retention maintains the cli-
mate in the passenger compartment after
driving. The function can use direct start from
the centre display.
1. Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Press
Keep climate comfort.
> Climate comfort retention is started/
switched off and the button illumi-
nates/extinguishes.
NOTE
It is not possible to start climate comfort
retention if there is not enough residual
heat in the engine to maintain the passen-
ger compartment climate, or if the outside
temperature is above approx. 20°C (68°F).
||
CLIMATE
230
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily.
Use of the function is intended to maintain
climate comfort when driver or passengers
remain inside the car.
There is a limit to how long climate com-
fort can be maintained in a cold climate,
which depends on the amount of residual
heat available.
Related information
Climate comfort when parking (p. 229)
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
231
Symbols and messages for parking
climate control
A number of symbols and messages regar-
ding parking climate control can be shown in
the driver display.
Messages relating to parking climate control
can also be displayed in a device which has
the Volvo On Call* app.
This symbol illuminates in the driver
display
11
when the parking heater is
active.
Symbol Message Specification
Parking climate
Service required
Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshop
A
to check the function as soon as
possible.
Parking climate
Temporarily unavailable
Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, con-
tact a workshop
A
to check the function.
Parking climate
Unavailable Fuel level too low
B
Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking
heater. Fill the vehicle's fuel tank.
Parking climate
Unavailable Charge level too low
Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the hybrid battery is too low
to start the parking heater. Start the car.
11
Applies to fuel-driven heater.
||
CLIMATE
232
Symbol Message Specification
Parking climate
Unavailable, not connected to the
mains
C
The parking climate control cannot be activated if the charging cable is not connected. Con-
nect the charging cable.
Parking climate
Limited Charge level too low
The running time for parking climate control is limited when the state of charge in the hybrid
battery is low. Start the car.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
B
Applies to fuel-driven heater.
C
Applies to electric heater.
Related information
Parking climate (p. 223)
CLIMATE
233
Heater
The heater has two subfunctions that help to
heat the passenger compartment or engine in
different situations.
The heater has two subfunctions:
Parking heater - heats the passenger com-
partment, if necessary, when the parking
climate control's preconditioning is acti-
vated.
Additional heater - heats the passenger
compartment and engine, if necessary,
during driving.
Either a fuel-driven heater or an electric heater
is used, depending on the market
12
.
The heater is fitted in the front right-hand
wheel housing.
NOTE
When the heater is running
13
, smoke may
be emitted from the right-hand front wheel
housing and a low hum may be heard. A
ticking sound from the fuel pump may also
be heard from the rear section of the car.
This is perfectly normal.
Battery and charging
The heater is powered by the car's hybrid bat-
tery. If the charge level of the hybrid battery is
too low, then the heater is switched off auto-
matically and the driver display shows a mes-
sage.
NOTE
Make sure that there is enough charge in
the battery if the heater needs to be used.
Fuel and refuelling
14
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel
tank.
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the heater.
If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the
heater is switched off automatically and the
driver display shows a message.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
fuel tank if the heater needs to be used.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
Check in the driver display that
the heater is switched off. This
symbol is lit when it is working as
a parking heater.
Related information
Climate (p. 200)
Parking heater (p. 234)
Additional heater (p. 235)
12
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding which markets use which type of heater.
13
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
14
Applies to fuel-driven heater.
CLIMATE
234
Parking heater
The parking heater heats the passenger com-
partment as necessary before driving if the
car's preconditioning is activated.
The parking heater is one of two subfunctions
of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the
front right-hand wheel housing.
When this symbol illuminates in the
driver display, the parking heater
may be active
15
.
NOTE
When the heater is running
16
, smoke may
be emitted from the right-hand front wheel
housing and a low hum may be heard. A
ticking sound from the fuel pump may also
be heard from the rear section of the car.
This is perfectly normal.
The parking heater starts automatically if the
parking climate's preconditioning is activated
and the passenger compartment needs to be
heated up.
Depending on factors such as battery level,
passenger compartment temperature and
ambient temperature, the heater has different
running times, but never longer than 40
minutes.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
fuel tank if the parking heater needs to be
used
17
.
Make sure that there is enough charge in
the hybrid battery if the parking heater
needs to be used.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning
18
:
In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater
starts.
In locations with combustible or flam-
mable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long
grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For
example, deep snow inside the front
right-hand wheel housing can obstruct
the heater’s ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a
long time in advance.
WARNING
If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts
of smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds
coming from the parking heater
19
, switch
off the heater and, if possible, pull out its
fuse. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair.
15
Applies to fuel-driven heater.
16
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
17
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
18
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
19
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
CLIMATE
235
Related information
Heater (p. 233)
Additional heater (p. 235)
Additional heater
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passen-
ger compartment and engine while driving.
The additional heater is one of two subfunc-
tions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in
the front right-hand wheel housing.
NOTE
When the heater is running
20
, smoke may
be emitted from the right-hand front wheel
housing and a low hum may be heard. A
ticking sound from the fuel pump may also
be heard from the rear section of the car.
This is perfectly normal.
The additional heater starts and is controlled
automatically when heating is required while
the car is being driven.
It switches off automatically when the car is
switched off.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs to be
used
21
.
Related information
Heater (p. 233)
Parking heater (p. 234)
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of auxiliary heater (p. 236)
20
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
21
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
CLIMATE
236
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of auxiliary heater
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passen-
ger compartment and engine while driving.
It is possible to set whether automatic start
for the additional heater should be activated/
deactivated.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Additional Heater to activate/
deactivate automatic start of the addi-
tional heater.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the automatic
start for the additional heater should be
switched off for short driving distances
22
.
NOTE
If the auxiliary heater's automatic starting
is deactivated, this may impede comfort in
the passenger compartment as the climate
control system will then have no heat
source during electrical operation.
Related information
Additional heater (p. 235)
22
Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
238
Lock confirmation
The car indicates with hazard warning flash-
ers when the car is locked or unlocked.
Exterior indication
Locking
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
locking by flashing and retracting the door
mirrors
1
.
Unlocking
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
unlocking by two flashes and extending
the door mirrors
1
.
All doors, the boot lid and the bonnet must be
closed for the car to indicate that it is locked.
If locking takes place with just the driver door
closed
2
, locking will take place but the lock
indication with hazard warning flashers will
only take place when all doors, the boot lid
and the bonnet have been closed.
Lock and alarm indicator on the
instrument panel
The lock and alarm indicator shows the status
of the locking system:
A long flash indicates locking.
Short flashes indicate that the car is
locked.
Rapid flashes after disarming the alarm*
indicate that the alarm has been triggered.
Indication in lock buttons
Front door
Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock but-
ton of either front door indicates that all doors
are locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will
extinguish in both doors.
1
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
2
Not applicable to with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
239
Rear door*
Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock but-
ton for one of the doors indicates that the door
in question is locked. If any door is unlocked,
its lamp will extinguish while the others will
continue to illuminate.
Other indication
The home safe lighting and approach light
functions can also be activated when locking
and unlocking.
Related information
Lock indication setting (p. 239)
Approach light duration (p. 161)
Using home safe lighting (p. 161)
Lock indication setting
It is possible to select various options for how
the car confirms locking and unlocking in the
settings menu in the centre display.
To change the locking response setting:
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
My Car Locking.
3.
Press
Visible Locking Feedback to
select when the car is to give a visible
response:
Lock
Unlock
Both
Or switch off the function by selecting
Off .
To change the setting for retractable rearview
mirrors* when locking:
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
My Car Mirrors and
Convenience
.
3.
Select
Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
vate or deactivate the function.
Related information
Lock confirmation (p. 238)
Remote control key
The remote control key locks and unlocks the
doors and boot lid. The remote control key
needs to be inside the car for it to be started.
Remote control key
3
or key tag (Key Tag)*.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting since the car is equipped with
support for keyless starting (Passive Start) as
standard. You simply need to have the key in
the front part of the passenger compartment.
For cars equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking (Passive Entry)* the key can be any-
where in the car to start the car. In this case, a
slightly smaller, lighter key tag (Key Tag) is
also supplied.
The remote control keys can be linked to dif-
ferent driver profiles to save personal preferen-
ces in the car.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
240
WARNING
The remote control key contains a button
cell battery. Keep new and used batteries
out of the reach of children. If someone
swallows a battery it may cause serious
injury.
If damage is discovered, e.g. if the battery
cover cannot be closed properly, then the
product should not be used. Keep defec-
tive products out of the reach of children.
Remote control key buttons
The remote control key has four buttons - one on the
left-hand side and three on the right-hand side.
Locking - Pressing the button locks the
doors, boot lid and fuel filler flap and also
arms the alarm*.
Press and hold to close all of the windows
and the panoramic roof* simultaneously.
Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks
the doors and boot lid and also deacti-
vates the alarm.
A longer press opens all windows simulta-
neously. This total airing function can be
used, for example, to quickly air the car in
hot weather.
Boot lid - Unlocks and disarms the alarm
for the boot lid only. The boot lid is opened
mechanically, by spring pressure, using a
long press.
Panic function - Used to attract atten-
tion in an emergency. Press and hold the
button for at least 3 seconds or press it
twice within 3 seconds to activate the
direction indicators and the horn. The
function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function
switches off automatically after 3 minutes.
WARNING
If anyone is left in the car, make sure the
power windows and panoramic roof* are
de-energised by always taking the remote
control key with you when you leave the
car.
3
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
241
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
A remote control key or key tag left in
the car will be deactivated when the
car is locked and the alarm is armed
using another valid key. The "Double
lock" function is also deactivated. The
key left behind is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
A Red Key left in the car will be deacti-
vated even when the car is locked
using Volvo On Call, and reactivated
when the car is unlocked using Volvo
On Call or with another valid key.
Button-less key (Key Tag)*
The key tag provided with the keyless locking
and unlocking function works in the same way
as the standard remote control key as regards
keyless starting and locking and unlocking.
The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10
metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes. It has
no detachable key blade and the battery can-
not be replaced.
Red Key - restricted remote control
key*
A Red Key is a key that makes it possible to
set restrictions for some of the car's properties
e.g. the car's maximum speed and the loud-
speaker system's maximum volume. A key for
any car owner who wants their car to be
driven responsibly even when someone else is
driving it.
Interference
Remote control key functions for keyless star-
ting and keyless locking and unlocking* can be
disrupted by electromagnetic fields and
screening.
NOTE
Avoid storing the remote control key close
to metal objects or electronic apparatus,
e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or
chargers - preferably no closer than
1015 cm (46 inches).
If there is still interference - use the remote
control key's detachable key blade to unlock
and then place the key in the backup reader in
the cup holder to disarm the car and allow the
car to be started.
NOTE
When the remote control key is placed in
the cup holder, make sure that no other car
keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus
(e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or
chargers) are in the cup holder. Several car
keys close to each other in the cup holder
can cause interference with each other.
Related information
Starting the car (p. 440)
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 242)
Remote control key range (p. 243)
Replacing the battery in the remote con-
trol key (p. 244)
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
Immobiliser (p. 253)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 136)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
242
Locking and unlocking with the
remote control key
The buttons on the remote control key can be
used to lock and unlock all doors and the
boot lid simultaneously.
Locking with the remote control key
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
Press the remote control key button to
lock the car.
For the lock sequence to be activated, the
driver door must be closed
4
. If any of the other
doors or the boot lid are open, these are
locked and alarmed* only when they are
closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are
activated when all the doors and the boot lid
are closed and locked.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
A remote control key or key tag left in
the car will be deactivated when the
car is locked and the alarm is armed
using another valid key. The "Double
lock" function is also deactivated. The
key left behind is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
A Red Key left in the car will be deacti-
vated even when the car is locked
using Volvo On Call, and reactivated
when the car is unlocked using Volvo
On Call or with another valid key.
Locking when the boot lid is open
NOTE
If the car has been locked while the boot
lid is open, be careful not to leave the
remote control key in the cargo area when
the boot lid is closed and the car is com-
pletely locked
5
.
Unlocking with the remote control key
Press the remote control key button to
unlock the car.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car
from being left unlocked unintentionally.
When the remote control key does not
work
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and
making another unlock attempt.
If it is not possible to lock or unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be dis-
charged - in which case, lock or unlock the
driver's door with the detachable key blade.
Related information
Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 243)
Remote control key (p. 239)
4
If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking* then all side doors must be closed.
5
If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the car, the boot lid will not lock when it is closed.*
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
243
Replacing the battery in the remote con-
trol key (p. 244)
Locking and unlocking with the detacha-
ble key blade (p. 251)
Settings for remotely controlled
and inside unlocking
It is possible to select different sequences for
remotely controlled unlocking.
To change setting:
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
My Car Locking Remote and
Interior Unlock
.
3. Select option:
All Doors - unlocks all doors simultane-
ously.
Single Door - unlocks the driver's
door. Unlocking all of the doors
requires two presses on the remote
control key's unlock button.
The settings made here also affect central
unlocking via opening handles from the inside.
Related information
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 242)
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 270)
Remote control key range
In order for the remote control key to work
properly it needs to be within a certain dis-
tance from the car.
For manual use
The remote control key's functions for e.g.
locking/unlocking that are activated by press-
ing on
or have a range that extends
approx. 20 metres (65 feet) from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being
pressed - move closer and try again.
For keyless* use
The marked area in the illustration shows areas cov-
ered by the system's antennas.
For keyless use, a remote control key or the
button-less key (Key Tag) must be within a
semicircular area with a radius of approx.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
244
1.5 metres (5 feet) on both long sides and
approx. 1 metre (3 feet) from the boot lid.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
The car can always be locked/unlocked
with the key blade.
If the remote control key is removed
from the car
If the remote control key is removed
from the car when the engine is run-
ning, the warning message
Car key
not found Removed from car is
shown in the driver display and an acoustic
reminder sounds when the last door is closed.
The message extinguishes when the key is
returned to the car, followed by a press of the
right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last
door is closed.
Related information
Remote control key (p. 239)
Antenna locations for the start and lock
systems (p. 269)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 267)
Replacing the battery in the
remote control key
The battery in the remote control key needs
to be replaced when it has become dis-
charged.
NOTE
All batteries have a limited service life and
must eventually be replaced (does not
apply to Key Tag). The service life of the
battery varies depending on how often the
vehicle/key is used.
The battery for the remote control key should
be replaced if
the information symbol illuminates and the
message
Car key battery low is shown in
the driver display
the locks repeatedly do not react to sig-
nals from the remote control key within
20 metres (65 feet) of the car.
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and
making another unlock attempt.
The battery in the button-less key
6
(Key Tag)
cannot be replaced - a new key can be
ordered from an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT
A discharged Key Tag must be handed
over to an authorised Volvo workshop. The
key must be deleted from the car since it is
still possible to use it to start the car via
back-up start.
6
Supplied with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
245
Opening the key and changing the
battery
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom
edge by the key ring to the right. Slide the
front side's shell a few millimetres
upwards.
The shell will then come free and can
be lifted off the key.
Turn the key, move the button to the
side and slide the back shell a few milli-
metres upwards.
The shell will then come free and can
be lifted off the key.
Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the
battery cover anticlockwise until the mark-
ings meet at the OPEN text.
Carefully lift away the battery cover by
pressing e.g. a fingernail into the recess.
Then prize the battery cover upwards.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
246
The battery (+) side is facing upwards.
Then carefully prize loose the battery as
illustrated.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their
contact surfaces with your fingers as this
may impair their function.
Install a new battery with the (+) side up.
Avoid touching the remote control key's
battery contacts with your fingers.
Place the battery in the holder with the
edge down. Then slide the battery for-
wards so that it fastens under the two
plastic catches.
Press the battery down so that it fas-
tens under the upper black plastic catch.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation
CR2032, 3 V.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-
section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory
or replaced by an authorised Volvo work-
shop fulfil the above criteria.
Refit the battery cover and turn it clock-
wise until the marking aligns with the
CLOSE text.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
247
Reposition the rear side's shell and
press it down until a clicking sound can be
heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the
shell is properly positioned and securely
attached.
Turn the remote control key over and
refit the front side's shell by pressing it
down until a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the
shell is securely attached.
WARNING
Check that the battery is fitted correctly
with the correct polarity. If the remote con-
trol key shall not been used for a long time,
remove the battery to avoid battery leakage
and damage. Batteries with damage or
leaks may cause corrosive injury on contact
with the skin. Therefore, use protective
gloves when handling damaged batteries.
Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-
dren.
Do not leave batteries lying around
since they can be swallowed by chil-
dren or pets.
Batteries must not: be dismantled,
short-circuited or thrown into open
flames.
Do not charge non-rechargeable bat-
teries, this may cause an explosion.
Before use, the remote control key should
be checked to avoid causing damage. If
damage is discovered, e.g. if the battery
cover cannot be closed properly, then the
product should not be used. Keep defec-
tive products out of the reach of children.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis-
posed of in a manner which is kind to the
environment.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
248
Related information
Locking and unlocking with the detacha-
ble key blade (p. 251)
Starting the car (p. 440)
Remote control key (p. 239)
Ordering more remote control keys
The car is supplied with two remote control
keys. A button-less key is supplied if the car
is equipped with keyless locking and unlock-
ing*. Additional keys can be ordered.
A total of twelve keys can be programmed and
used for one single car. If additional keys are
ordered, additional driver profiles are added -
one per new remote control key. This also
applies for the key tag.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then a new
one can be ordered at a workshop - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended. The
remaining remote control keys must be taken
to the workshop. The code of the missing key
must be erased from the system as a theft
prevention measure.
The current number of keys registered to the
car can be checked via driver profiles in the
centre display's top view, select
Settings
System Driver Profiles.
Related information
Remote control key (p. 239)
Red Key - restricted remote
control key*
A Red Key makes it possible for the car's
owner to set limitations for certain of the
car's properties. The limitations are intended
to encourage the car to be driven in a safe
manner, e.g. when being loaned out.
For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's
maximum speed, set speed reminders and
determine the loudspeaker system's maxi-
mum volume. In addition, some of the car's
driver support systems will always be active.
Other functions of the key are the same as
those of a normal remote control key.
The restrictions are intended to act as meas-
ures to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby
making it feel safer to hand over the car to e.g.
young drivers, valet parking or a workshop.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
249
Driver profile for Red Key
A Red Key is connected to a special Red Key
driver profile, and when it is active, the key's
settings cannot be changed. It is not possible
to change to another driver profile either; this
requires a normal remote control key.
The Red Key driver profile is activated when
the car is unlocked with a Red Key without a
normal remote control key in the vicinity.
NOTE
In the event of a change of driver, the car
must be locked and unlocked in order to
activate a new driver profile.
Ordering Red Key
One or more Red Key can be ordered from a
Volvo dealer. A total of eleven keys with
restrictions can be programmed and used for
a single car - at least one must be a normal
remote control key.
Related information
Settings for Red Key* (p. 249)
Remote control key (p. 239)
Settings for Red Key*
The holder of a regular remote control key
can change settings for a Red Key. However,
certain driver support functions are always
active.
To change setting:
1. Unlock the car with the normal remote
control key.
2.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
3. Press
System Driver Profiles Red
Key
.
> The following settings can be defined:
Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise
Control*
Reduced Maximum Volume
Max Speed Limit
Speed Limit Warning
Details and settings on first use
Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise Control
Set the time gap (1 is the shortest and 5 is
the longest gap).
On first use, the setting is
5.0.
Reduced Maximum Volume
Lower maximum volume for media
sources.
On first use, the function is "On".
Max Speed Limit
Set a maximum speed for this key.
On first use, the function is "On" and the
speed is 120 km/h (75 mph).
Setting interval: 50250 km/h
(30160 mph)
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
Speed restriction symbol.
Speed Limit Warning
Warns when car moves above set values.
On first use, the function is "On" and the val-
ues are 50, 70 and 90 km/h (30, 45 and
55 mph).
Setting interval: 0250 km/h (0160 mph)
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
Max. number of simultaneous reminders:
6
Driver support functions
The following driver support functions will
always be active for the user of a Red Key:
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
Lane assistance (LKA)*
Distance Warning*
City Safety
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
250
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
Road Sign Information*
Related information
Red Key - restricted remote control key*
(p. 248)
Detachable key blade
The remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which a number of
functions can be activated and some opera-
tions carried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-
ommended when ordering new key blades.
The key blade's application areas
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade
the left-hand
7
front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be acti-
vated with the remote control key
all doors are emergency-locked
the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated and deactivated.
The button-less key
8
does not have a detacha-
ble key blade. If necessary, use the detachable
key blade from the normal remote control key.
Detaching the key blade
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom
edge by the key ring to the right. Guide
the front side's shell a few millimetres
upwards.
The shell will then come free and can
be lifted off the key.
7
This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive.
8
Supplied with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
251
Detach the key blade by angling it up.
Return the key blade to its intended posi-
tion in the remote control key after use.
Refit the shell by pressing it downward
until a clicking sound is heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the
shell is securely attached.
Related information
Locking and unlocking with the detacha-
ble key blade (p. 251)
Remote control key (p. 239)
Locking and unlocking with the
detachable key blade
Amongst other things, the detachable key
blade can be used to unlock the car from the
outside - e.g. if the remote control key's bat-
tery has become discharged.
Unlocking
Pull out the front door handle on the left-
hand side
9
to its end position so that the
lock cylinder become visible.
Insert the key in the lock cylinder.
Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key
blade is pointing straight back.
Turn the key back 45 degrees to its star-
ting position. Remove the key from the
lock cylinder and release the handle so
that the rear section of the handle is rest-
ing against the car again.
9
This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
252
5. Pull out the handle.
> The door opens.
Locking will be performed in the same way,
but with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees
instead of clockwise in step (3).
Switch off the alarm and start the car*
NOTE
When the door is unlocked using the key
blade and is then opened, the alarm is trig-
gered.
The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
Deactivate the alarm as follows:
1. Place the remote control key on the key
symbol in the backup reader in the bottom
of the cup holder in the tunnel console.
2. Then turn the start knob clockwise and
release it.
> The alarm signal stops sounding and
the alarm is switched off.
Locking
It is also possible to lock the car with the
remote control key's detachable key blade e.g.
in the event of a loss of power or if the key's
battery has become discharged.
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and
instead have a lock switch on the end of each
door which must be depressed using the key
blade - they are then mechanically locked/
blocked to prevent them being opened from
outside.
The doors can still be opened from the inside.
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with
the child safety locks.
Remove the detachable key blade from
the remote control key. Insert the key
blade in the hole for lock reset and press
the key in until it bottoms, approx. 12 mm
(0.5 inches).
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside. To return to position A, the
inner door handle must be opened.
The doors can also be unlocked with the
unlock button on the remote control key or
with the central locking button on the driver's
door.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
253
NOTE
A door's lock reset only locks that par-
ticular door - not all doors simultane-
ously.
A manually locked rear door with acti-
vated manual or electric child safety
locks cannot be opened from either the
outside or the inside. A rear door that is
locked in this way can only be
unlocked with the remote control key,
central locking button or via Volvo On
Call*.
Related information
Starting the car (p. 440)
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
Activating and deactivating alarms*
(p. 277)
Replacing the battery in the remote con-
trol key (p. 244)
Remote control key (p. 239)
Immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protec-
tion system that prevents an unauthorised
person from starting the car.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key.
The following error message in the driver dis-
play is related to the electronic immobiliser:
Symbol Message Specification
Car key not
found
See
Owner's
manual
Error reading the
remote control
key during star-
ting - place the
key on the key
symbol in the cup
holder and try
again.
Related information
Remote control key (p. 239)
Ordering more remote control keys
(p. 248)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
254
Type approval for the remote
control key system
Type approval for the car's remote key sys-
tem can be seen in the following tables.
For detailed information on type approval, go
to www.volvocars.com/intl/support.
Lock system keyless start (Passive
Start) and keyless locking/unlocking
(Passive Entry*)
CEM marking for the remote control key system. For
supplementary type approval numbers, see following
tables.
Country/Area Type approval
Europe Delphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367 Wuppertal hereby declares that
this VO3134TRX conforms to the essential property requirements
and other relevant provisions contained in directive 201453EU
(RED).
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
www.volvocars.com/intl/support
Jordan TRCLPD2014250
Serbia P1614120100
Argentina CNC ID: C14771
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
255
Country/Area Type approval
Brazil MT32452015
Indonesia Nomor: 38301SDPPI2015
Malaysia RAAT37A1215S(155198)
Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEVO150396
Russia
The United Arab Emi-
rates
ER3784715
DA006243711
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
256
Country/Area Type approval
Namibia TA201602
South Africa TA20141868
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
257
Remote control key
Country/
Area
Type approval
Europe Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8423 conforms to directive 201453EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
www.volvocars.com/intl/support
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551
Velbert, Germany
Argentina
H15532
Brazil Anatel: 055681606643
Modelo: HUF8423
Este equipomento opera em caráter secundário isto é não tem direito a proteção
contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode
causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
258
Country/
Area
Type approval
CU
(Customs
Union)
Belarus,
Kazakhstan,
Russia
Indonesia [41005SDPPI2015]
[5149]
Jordan TRCLPD2015104
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24072015
Moldova
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
259
Country/
Area
Type approval
Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8423
NOM121SCT12009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es
posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este
equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda
causar su operación no deseada.
Nigeria Connection and use of this communication equipment is permitted by the
Nigerian Communications Commission
Oman
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
260
Country/
Area
Type approval
Philippines
Serbia
Singapore Complies with IMDA Standards
DA103787
South Africa TA2015432
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
261
Country/
Area
Type approval
Taiwan 本產品符合低󰀦率電波輻射性電機管理辦法 第十二條第十四條等條文規定 1.
型式認證合格之低󰀦率射頻電機,非經許可,公司商號或使用者均不得擅自變更
率󰀧大󰀦率或變更原設計之特性及󰀦能 2. 低󰀦率射頻電機之使用不得影響
飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應立即停用,並改善至無干擾時
方得繼續使用 前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信 低󰀦率射頻
電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾
The United
Arab Emi-
rates
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
262
Key Tag
Country/
Area
Type approval
Europe Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8432 conforms to directive 201453EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
www.volvocars.com/intl/support.
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551
Velbert, Germany
Argentina
H15029
Brazil Anatel: 043621606643
Modelo: HUF8432
Este equipo opera em caráter secundário isto é não tem direito a proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar
interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
263
Country/
Area
Type approval
CU
(Customs
Union)
Belarus,
Kazakhstan,
Russia
Indonesia [41006SDPPI2015]
[5149]
Jordan TRCLPD2015107
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24072015
Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8432
NOM121SCT12009
IFT: RLVHUHU150972
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es
posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este
equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda
causar su operación no deseada.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
264
Country/
Area
Type approval
Moldova
Nigeria Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the
Nigerian Communications Commission
Oman
Philippines ESD1511501C
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
265
Country/
Area
Type approval
Serbia
Singapore Complies with IMDA Standards
DA103787
South Africa TA2015414
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
266
Country/
Area
Type approval
Taiwan 本產品符合低󰀦率電波輻射性電機管理辦法 第十二條第十四條等條文規定 1.
型式認證合格之低󰀦率射頻電機,非經許可,公司商號或使用者均不得擅自變更
率󰀧大󰀦率或變更原設計之特性及󰀦能 2. 低󰀦率射頻電機之使用不得影響
飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應立即停用,並改善至無干擾時
方得繼續使用 前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信 低󰀦率射頻
電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾
The United
Arab Emi-
rates
Related information
Remote control key (p. 239)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
267
Keyless and touch-sensitive
surfaces*
With the keyless locking and unlocking func-
tion, carrying the remote control key in a
pocket or bag will suffice. The car is locked or
unlocked via a touch-sensitive surface on the
door handle.
Touch-sensitive surfaces
Door handle
The outside of the door handles contains a
recess for locking, while the inside contains a
touch-sensitive surface for unlocking.
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
NOTE
It is important that only one touch-sensi-
tive surface is activated at a time. Gripping
the handle while touching the lock surface
risks giving double commands. This means
that the requested activity (locking/unlock-
ing) will not be executed, or will be execu-
ted with a delay.
Boot lid handle
The boot lid handle has a rubberised pressure
plate that is only used for unlocking.
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated
in connection with car washing if the
remote control key is in range.
Related information
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 268)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
268
Keyless locking and unlocking*
With keyless locking and unlocking, it is suffi-
cient to touch the door handle's touch-sensi-
tive surface to lock or unlock the car.
NOTE
One of the car's remote control keys must
be within range for locking and unlocking
to work.
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated
in connection with car washing if the
remote control key is in range.
Keyless locking
All side doors must be closed to be able to
lock the car. The boot lid, on the other hand,
can be open when locking the car with a side
door handle.
Touch the marked surface towards the
rear on the outside of a door handle after
the door has been closed.
> The lock indicator on the instrument
panel starts to flash to indicate the car
is locked.
To close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* simultaneously - place a finger against
the touch-sensitive recess on the outside of
the door handle and hold it there until all of the
side windows and the panoramic roof have
been closed.
Locking when the boot lid is open
If the car has been locked and the boot lid is
still open, make sure that the remote control
key is not left in the cargo area when the boot
lid is closed.
NOTE
If the key is detected inside the car, the
boot lid will not lock when it is closed.
Keyless unlocking
Grasp a door handle or gently press the
rubberised pressure plate beneath the
boot lid handle to unlock the car.
> The lock indicator on the instrument
panel stops flashing to indicate that the
car is unlocked.
Rubberised pressure plate on the boot lid can only be
used for unlocking.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car
from being left unlocked unintentionally.
Related information
Settings for Keyless entry* (p. 269)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 267)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
269
Settings for Keyless entry*
It is possible to select different sequences for
Keyless entry.
To change setting:
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Tap on
My Car Locking Keyless
Unlock
.
3. Select option:
All Doors - unlocks all doors simultane-
ously.
Single Door - unlocks selected door.
Related information
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 268)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 267)
Antenna locations for the start and
lock systems
An antenna for the keyless starting system
and antennas for the keyless locking system*
are built into the car.
Antenna locations:
Under the cup holder in the front section
of the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the left-hand
rear door
10
In the upper front section of the right-hand
rear door
10
In the cargo area
10
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should
not come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to
the keyless system's antennas with their
pacemaker. This is to prevent interference
between the pacemaker and the keyless
system.
Related information
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 267)
Remote control key range (p. 243)
10
Only in cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
270
Locking and unlocking from inside
the car
The doors and boot lid can be locked and
unlocked from inside using the central lock-
ing controls in the front doors.
Central locking
Locking and unlocking button with indicator lamp in
the front door.
Unlocking using a button in the front
door
Press the button to unlock all side
doors and the boot lid.
Alternative unlocking method
Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the side
door
11
.
Pull the opening handle on one of the side
doors and release.
> Depending on the settings in the
remote control key, either all doors will
be unlocked or only the selected door
will be unlocked and opened.
To change this setting, tap on
Settings
My Car Locking Remote and
Interior Unlock
in the centre display's
top view.
Locking using a button in the front
door
Press the button - both front doors
must be closed.
> All doors and the boot lid are locked.
Locking using a button in the rear
door*
Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
The rear door lock buttons lock their respec-
tive rear door.
Unlocking the rear door
Pull the opening handle.
>
The rear door is unlocked and opened
12
.
11
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
12
Provided that the child safety lock is not activated.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
271
Related information
Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 243)
Unlocking the boot lid from the inside of
the car (p. 271)
Activating and deactivating child safety
locks (p. 271)
Unlocking the boot lid from the
inside of the car
The boot lid can be unlocked from inside by
pressing the button on the instrument panel.
Brief press on the button on the
instrument panel.
> The boot lid can be unlocked and
opened from the outside by grasping
the rubberised pressure plate.
Related information
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 270)
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
The child safety locks prevent the rear doors
being opened from inside.
The child safety locks may be either manual or
electric*.
Activating and deactivating manual
child safety locks
Manual child safety locks. Not to be confused with
manual door locks.
Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
272
NOTE
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
Cars with an electric child safety lock
do not have a manual child lock.
Activating and deactivating electric*
child safety locks
The electric child safety locks can be activated
and deactivated in all ignition positions higher
than 0. Activation and deactivation can be
performed up to 2 minutes after switching off
the car, provided that no door is opened.
Button for electric activation and deactivation.
1. Start the car or choose an ignition position
higher than 0.
2. Press the button in the driver's door con-
trol panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Activated and the but-
ton's lamp illuminates - the locks are
active.
When the electric child safety lock is active
then the rear
windows can only be opened with the
driver's door control panel
doors cannot be opened from inside.
To deactivate the locks:
Press the button in the driver's door con-
trol panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Deactivated and the
button's lamp goes out - the locks are
deactivated.
When the car is switched off, the current set-
ting is stored – if the child safety locks are
activated when the car is switched off, the
function will continue to be activated next
time the car is started.
Symbol Message Specification
Rear child
lock Acti-
vated
Child safety
locks are acti-
vated.
Rear child
lock Deacti-
vated
Child safety
locks are deacti-
vated.
Related information
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 270)
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
273
Automatic locking when driving
The doors and boot lid are locked automati-
cally when the car starts to move.
To change this setting:
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
My Car Locking.
3.
Select
Auto Lock Doors While Driving
to deactivate or activate this function.
Related information
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 270)
Operating the boot lid with foot
movement*
A function which allows the boot lid to open
by moving a foot under the rear bumper
makes life easier when your hands are full.
Opening the boot lid with foot
movement
Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation
area.
Make one forward kicking motion under
the left part of the rear bumper. Then take
a step back. The bumper must not be
touched.
> A short acoustic signal sounds when
opening is activated – the boot lid is
opened.
If several kicking motions take place without
an approved remote control key being located
behind the car, opening will not be possible
until after a certain delay.
Do not leave your foot positioned under the
car during the kicking motion. This could
cause activation to fail.
The boot lid is closed by pressing it down
manually.
NOTE
Pay attention to the possibility that the sys-
tem may be activated in a car wash or sim-
ilar if the remote key is within range.
Related information
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 267)
Remote control key range (p. 243)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
274
Private locking
The boot lid and rear seat backrest can be
locked with the private locking function when
the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or
similar. The function prevents the boot lid
from being opened and locks the rear seat
backrest in upright position.
The private locking function
button is located in the cen-
tre display function view.
Depending on the current
status of the lock,
Private
Locking Unlocked or
Private Locking Locked is
shown.
Related information
Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 274)
Activating and deactivating private
locking
Private locking is activated with a function
button in the centre display and an optional
PIN code.
NOTE
The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a
minimum for the private locking function to
be activated.
Private locking has two codes:
A security code is created the first time
the function is used.
A new PIN code is selected every time the
function is activated.
Enter the security code before using
for the first time
A security code needs to be selected during
the first time the function is used. It can then
be used to deactivate private locking if the
selected PIN code has been forgotten or lost.
The security code acts as a PUK code for all
subsequent PIN codes set for the private lock-
ing function.
Save the security code in a safe place.
To create a security code:
1. Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the preferred security code and
press
Confirm.
> The security code is saved. The private
locking function is now ready for activa-
tion.
Activate private locking
NOTE
When private locking is activated, the rear
seat must be in upright position for locking
to work.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
275
1. Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the code to be used in order to
unlock the boot lid and rear seat after
locking and tap on
Confirm.
> The boot lid and rear seat are locked.
Confirmation of locking takes place by
means of a green indicator being
shown by the button in the function
view.
Deactivate private locking
1. Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the code that was used for locking
and tap on
Confirm.
> The boot lid and rear seat are unlocked.
Confirmation of unlocking takes place
by means of the green indicator by the
button in the function view extinguish-
ing.
Forgotten PIN code
If the PIN code has been forgotten or the
wrong PIN code has been entered more than
three times, the security code can be used to
deactivate private locking.
If the car is unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the
Volvo On Call app, private locking will be
deactivated automatically.
Forgotten security code
If the security code has also been forgotten,
contact an authorised Volvo dealer for help
with deactivating private locking.
Related information
Private locking (p. 274)
Alarm*
The alarm provides audible and visual warn-
ings if anyone enters the car without a valid
remote control key or manipulates the starter
battery or alarm siren.
When armed, the alarm is triggered if:
a door, the bonnet or the boot lid is
opened
13
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
the starter battery's cable is disconnected
the siren is disconnected.
Alarm signals
When the alarm has been triggered, the fol-
lowing happens:
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off.
Hazard warning flashers flash for
5 minutes or until the alarm is switched
off.
If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified,
the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times
13
.
13
Applies to certain markets.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
276
Alarm indicator
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
LED not lit – alarm not armed.
The LED flashes once every other second
– alarm is armed.
After the alarm has been disarmed, the
LED flashes rapidly for a maximum of
30 seconds or until ignition position I has
been activated - the alarm has been trig-
gered.
Movement and tilt sensors*
Movement and tilt sensors react to move-
ments inside the car, if the window is broken
or if anyone tries to steal the wheels or tow
the vehicle away.
The movement sensor triggers an alarm in the
event of movement in the passenger compart-
ment - air currents are also registered. For this
reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left
with a window or the panoramic roof* open or
if the passenger compartment heater is used.
To avoid this:
Close the window and panoramic roof
when leaving the car.
If the passenger compartment or parking
heater is to be used – direct the airflow
from the air vents so that they do not point
upwards in the passenger compartment.
Alternatively, use a reduced alarm level to
temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt
sensors.
Also switch off the movement and tilt sensors
when the car is being transported on a ferry or
train as these movements may affect the car
and trigger the alarm.
In the event of an alarm system fault
If there is a fault in the alarm system,
the driver display shows the symbol
and the message
Alarm system
failure Service required. In which
case, contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter compo-
nents in the alarm system yourself. Any
such attempts may affect the terms of the
insurance.
Related information
Activating and deactivating alarms*
(p. 277)
Reduced alarm level* (p. 278)
Double lock* (p. 278)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
277
Activating and deactivating
alarms*
The alarm is armed when the car is locked.
Arming the alarm
Lock and arm the car alarm as follows
press the remote control key's lock button
touch the marked surface on the outside
of the door handles or the boot lid's rub-
berised pressure plate
14
.
A red LED on the instrument panel flashes once
every two seconds when the car is locked and the
alarm is armed.
Deactivate the alarm
Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows
press the remote control key's unlock but-
ton
.
grip one of the door handles or press gen-
tly on the boot lid's rubberised pressure
plate
14
.
Deactivate the alarm without a functioning
remote control key
The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if
the remote control key does not work e.g. if
the remote control key's battery is dead.
1. Open the driver's door with the detacha-
ble key blade.
> The alarm is triggered.
The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
2. Place the remote control key on the key
symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel
console's cup holder.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release
it.
> The alarm is deactivated.
Switching off a triggered alarm
Press the remote control key's unlock but-
ton or set the car in ignition position I by
turning the start knob clockwise and then
releasing.
Automatic arming and rearming of the
alarm
Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the
car being left with the alarm disarmed unin-
tentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (which disarms the alarm) but none of the
doors or the boot lid is opened within two
minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-
armed. The car is relocked at the same time.
In certain markets, the alarm is armed auto-
matically after a certain delay after the driver's
door has been opened and closed without
being locked.
To change this setting:
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
My Car Locking.
14
Applies to cars with keyless locking and unlocking*.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
278
3.
Select
Passive Arming Deactivation to
deactivate the function temporarily.
Related information
Alarm* (p. 275)
Reduced alarm level*
A reduced alarm level means that the move-
ment and tilt sensors are temporarily
switched off.
Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in
order to avoid accidental triggering of the
alarm - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or
during transport on a car train or car ferry.
Press the
Reduced Guard
button in the centre display
function view to switch off
the movement and tilt sen-
sors when subsequently lock-
ing the car.
At the same time, the double lock function is
deactivated, i.e. unlocking from inside is possi-
ble.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again,
the reduced alarm level must be reactivated.
Related information
Alarm* (p. 275)
Double lock* (p. 278)
Double lock*
Double lock means that all opening handles
are released mechanically when locking from
the outside, which makes it impossible to
open the doors from the inside.
Double lock is activated when locking with a
remote control key or with keyless locking*,
and takes place with a delay of approx.
10 seconds after the doors have locked. If a
door is opened within the delay time then the
sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deac-
tivated.
The car can only be unlocked with a remote
control key, keyless unlocking* or the Volvo
On Call* app when double lock is activated.
The front left door can also be unlocked with
the detachable key blade. If the car is
unlocked with the detachable key blade, the
alarm will be triggered.
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
The alarm is triggered if anyone
attempts to open the doors from
inside.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
279
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the function in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
Related information
Temporarily* deactivating double locks
(p. 279)
Alarm* (p. 275)
Temporarily* deactivating double
locks
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the double lock function should be deacti-
vated, to allow unlocking from the inside.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the function in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
Press the
Reduced Guard
button in the centre display's
function view in order to
deactivate the double lock
function temporarily.
This also means that the alarm's movement
and tilt detectors* are switched off.
After this,
Reduced Guard is shown in the
centre display and double locks are temporar-
ily deactivated in the subsequent locking of
the car.
In conventional locking, the electrical sockets
are deactivated immediately, but when double
locks are temporarily deactivated, they will be
active for a maximum of 10 minutes after lock-
ing.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again,
the double lock function must be deactivated
again.
The system is reset the next time the engine is
started.
Related information
Double lock* (p. 278)
Alarm* (p. 275)
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
282
Driving support systems
The car is equipped with different driver sup-
port systems which can assist the driver in
different situations, either actively or pas-
sively.
For example, the systems can help the driver
to:
maintain a set speed
maintain a certain time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead
prevent a collision by giving a warning to
the driver and braking the car
help the driver to park.
Some of the systems are fitted as standard
while others are options – which alternative
applies is market dependent.
Related information
IntelliSafe – driver support and safety
(p. 33)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
Connected Safety (p. 287)
City Safety (p. 289)
Road Sign Information* (p. 304)
Speed limiter (p. 311)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 314)
Cruise control (p. 318)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Cornering support* (p. 341)
Overtaking Assistance* (p. 343)
Lane assistance (p. 349)
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 356)
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 362)
BLIS* (p. 363)
Driver Alert Control (p. 367)
Distance Warning* (p. 369)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 371)
Park Assist* (p. 375)
Park assist camera* (p. 381)
Radar unit (p. 400)
Camera unit (p. 409)
Speed-dependent steering force
Speed related power steering causes the
steering wheel force to increase with the
speed of the car so as to be able to give the
driver enhanced sensitivity. On motorways
the steering is firmer. When parking and at
low speed steering is light and requires less
effort.
Reduced power
In rare situations, the power steering may
need to work at reduced power, and turning
the steering wheel may then seem slightly
heavier. This may occur when the power steer-
ing becomes too hot and then needs tempo-
rary cooling. It may also occur if the power
supply is disrupted.
In the event of reduced
power, the message
Power
steering Assistance
temporarily reduced is
shown, as well as this symbol
in the driver display.
While the power steering is working at
reduced power, the driver support functions
and steering assistance systems are not avail-
able.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
283
WARNING
If the temperature increases too much, the
servo may be forced to switch off com-
pletely. In such a situation, the driver dis-
play shows the
Power steering failure
Stop safely message, combined with a
symbol.
Change the steering force level*
Steering wheel resistance can be adjusted
when using INDIVIDUAL drive mode.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Select
My Car Drive Modes
Steering Force.
Steering wheel resistance selection can only
be accessed if the car is stationary or is mov-
ing at low speed and in a straight line.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Drive modes (p. 461)
Electronic stability control
Electronic Stability Control (ESC
1
) helps the
driver to avoid skidding and improves the
car's traction.
The driver display shows this
symbol when the system is
engaged.
Braking from the system may
be heard as a pulsing sound,
and the car may accelerate
more slowly than expected when applying the
throttle.
The system consists of the following subfunc-
tions:
Stability function
2
Spin control and traction control system
Engine Drag Control
Trailer stability assist
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Stability function
2
The function checks the driving and brake
force of the wheels individually in order to sta-
bilise the car.
1
Electronic Stability Control
2
Also known as Active Yaw Control.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
284
Spin control and traction control
system
The function is active at low speed and brakes
the drive wheels that spin so that additional
traction shall be transferred from the drive
wheels that are not spinning.
The function can also prevent the driving
wheels from spinning against the road surface
during acceleration.
Engine Drag Control
Engine Drag Control (EDC
3
) can prevent invol-
untary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down
or engine braking when driving in low gear on
slippery road surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's abil-
ity to steer the car.
Trailer stability assist*
4
Trailer stability assist (TSA
5
) stabilises a car
towing a trailer in situations where they begin
snaking.
NOTE
Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if ESC
Sport Mode
is activated.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating sport mode for
electronic stability control (p. 285)
Symbols and messages for electronic sta-
bility control (p. 286)
Trailer stability assist* (p. 488)
Electronic Stability Control in sport
mode
The stability system (ESC
6
) is always acti-
vated – it cannot be switched off. However,
the driver can select
ESC Sport Mode,
which allows for a more active driving experi-
ence.
With the ESC Sport Mode subfunction
selected, intervention from the system is
reduced and the car is allowed to skid more
and greater control than normal is thus trans-
ferred to the driver.
When
ESC Sport Mode is selected, the func-
tion can be considered as deactivated, despite
the function continuing to help the driver in
many cases.
NOTE
With ESC Sport Mode selected, Trailer
Stability Assist (TSA
7
) is deactivated.
ESC Sport Mode also provides more traction
even if the car has become bogged down or is
driving on a loose surface, such as in sand or
deep snow.
3
Engine Drag Control
4
Trailer stability assist is included when the Volvo genuine towbar is installed.
5
Trailer Stability Assist
6
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
285
Related information
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
Activating or deactivating sport mode for
electronic stability control (p. 285)
Trailer stability assist* (p. 488)
Activating or deactivating sport
mode for electronic stability
control
The stability system (ESC
8
) is always acti-
vated – it cannot be switched off. However,
the driver can select sport mode, which
allows for a more active driving experience.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
The driver display indicates
activated
ESC Sport Mode
by displaying this symbol
with a constant glow until the
function is deactivated or the
engine is switched off. The
next time the engine is
started, the system is back in its normal mode
again.
The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be
selected when one of the following functions
is activated:
Speed limiter
Cruise control
Adaptive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
Related information
Electronic Stability Control in sport mode
(p. 284)
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
7
Trailer Stability Assist
8
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
286
Symbols and messages for
electronic stability control
A number of symbols and messages regar-
ding electronic stability control (ESC
9
) can be
shown on the driver display. Here are some
examples.
Symbol Message Specification
Constant glow for approx. 2 seconds System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light The system is being activated.
Constant glow Sport mode is activated. NOTE: The system is not deactivated in this mode – it is partly reduced.
ESC
Temporarily off
The system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is
reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
ESC
Service required
The system is disengaged. Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Related information
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
9
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
287
Connected Safety
10
Connected Safety communicates information
between your own car and other vehicles via
the Internet
11
. The function is intended to
make a driver aware that there may be a
potentially dangerous traffic situation further
ahead on the same road.
The function can inform the driver whether
another vehicle further ahead on the same
road has activated its hazard warning flashers
or detected slippery driving conditions. Infor-
mation about slippery driving conditions is
also given if your own car detects slippery sur-
faces.
Connected Safety can help the driver with the
following:
Alarm on hazard warning flashers
Alarm on slippery driving conditions
Connected Safety communication between
vehicles only works for vehicles equipped with
the function and which have it activated.
Alarm on hazard warning flashers
If your own car's hazard warning flashers are
activated, information about this can be sent
to vehicles approaching your own car's posi-
tion.
When your own car is
approaching a vehicle with
flashing hazard warning
flashers, this symbol is
shown on the driver display.
When your own car is close to a vehicle with
flashing hazard warning flashers, the symbol
doubles in size.
In vehicles with head-up display, the warning
symbols for Connected Safety are also shown
there.
Alarm on slippery driving conditions
If your own car detects reduced friction
between your tyres and the road, information
on this can be sent to vehicles approaching
your own car's position.
If an ice alert is triggered, this
symbol is displayed on the
Driver display when a vehicle
approaches the slippery road
section, both in your own car
and in other vehicles that
have received the information
via Connected Safety.
When the approaching vehicle is close to the
slippery section of road, the symbol doubles in
size.
In vehicles with head-up display, the warning
symbols for Connected Safety are also shown
there.
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
10
Not available on all markets.
11
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
288
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating Connected
Safety (p. 288)
Limitations of Connected Safety (p. 289)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Activating or deactivating
Connected Safety
For Connected Safety to be able to share
information on road conditions with other
vehicles, the function needs to be activated.
The function can be deactivated if you do not
want to share information.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
When activated, special terms and conditions
that appear on the display must be acknowl-
edged by the driver before a connection to the
Internet
12
can be made. For example, a situa-
tion where the driver must accept data being
sent from the car using his/her mobile phone.
If there is no Internet connection, your own car
will still inform you, the driver, that slippery
driving conditions have been detected by your
own car. For Connected Safety to work fully,
your own car needs to be connected to the
Internet.
Related information
Connected Safety (p. 287)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
User terms and conditions and data shar-
ing (p. 541)
Limitations of Connected Safety (p. 289)
12
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
289
Limitations of Connected Safety
Information about vehicles with activated
hazard warning flashers or which have
detected slippery driving conditions is not
always communicated between all vehicles
within the same area.
This can be because for example:
Poor or no contact with the Internet.
Vehicles on slippery surfaces make
manoeuvres that are too weak for friction
between tyres and road surface to be
detectable, e.g. steering wheel movement,
acceleration or braking.
Vehicles that have detected slippery surfa-
ces, or have activated their hazard warn-
ing flashers, do not have the function acti-
vated.
Vehicles that have detected slippery surfa-
ces, or have activated their hazard warn-
ing flashers, are not equipped with the
function.
There may be no warning due to missing
or defective global positioning/satellite
navigation.
Detection of slippery surfaces or activation
of hazard warning flashers has taken place
on a minor road which is missing in Volvo
Cars database.
Connected Safety is not available in all
markets and does not cover all areas - a
retailer for Volvo has information on cur-
rent areas.
WARNING
In certain situations, the function may
give incorrect warnings for slippery
driving conditions.
The function cannot always detect
other vehicles with activated hazard
warning flashers or detect all sections
of road with slippery surfaces.
Related information
Connected Safety (p. 287)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
City Safety
City Safety
13
can use lights, sound and a
brake pulse warning to alert the driver to
pedestrians, cyclists, larger animals and vehi-
cles.
Function overview
Acoustic signal in the event of a risk of col-
lision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of col-
lision
Distance measurement with the camera
and radar unit
The function can help the driver avoid a colli-
sion when, for example, driving in heavy traf-
fic, where changes in the traffic ahead coupled
with inattentiveness can lead to an incident.
City Safety then activates brief, heavy braking
and the car normally stops just behind the
vehicle in front.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
290
The function helps the driver by automatically
braking the car in the event of an imminent
risk of collision if the driver does not react in
time by braking and/or swerving.
City Safety is activated in situations where the
driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation. The function is designed to be acti-
vated as late as possible in order to avoid
unnecessary intervention. Automatic braking
takes place only after or at the same time as
the collision warning.
The driver or passengers are not normally
aware of City Safety - it only intervenes in a
situation where a collision is immediately
imminent.
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Subfunctions for City Safety (p. 291)
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety (p. 292)
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 294)
City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles
(p. 299)
Automatic braking in the event of an impe-
ded evasive manoeuvre with City Safety
(p. 298)
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 296)
City Safety steering assistance for evasive
manoeuvre (p. 297)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 300)
Messages for City Safety (p. 303)
13
The function is not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
291
Subfunctions for City Safety
City Safety
14
can help to prevent a collision or
reduce the collision speed. The function con-
sists of several subfunctions.
Ability to reduce speed
If the speed difference between the driver's
car and the obstacle is greater than the follow-
ing specified speeds, the City Safety auto-
brake function cannot prevent a collision but it
can mitigate the consequences of a collision.
Vehicles
For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce
the speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).
Cyclists
For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed
by up to 50 km/h (30 mph).
Pedestrians
For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed
by up to 45 km/h (28 mph).
Large animals
In the event of a risk of a collision with a large
animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed
by up to 15 km/h (9 mph).
The brake function for large animals is primar-
ily intended to reduce the force of the impact
at higher speeds and is most effective at
speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less
effective at lower speed.
The steps of City Safety
City Safety carries out three steps in the fol-
lowing order:
1. Collision warning
2. Brake support
3. Auto Brake
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially immi-
nent collision.
In cars equipped with a head up display*, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a
flashing symbol.
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may
make the visual warning signal in the wind-
screen difficult to recognise.
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
vehicles that are stationary or moving in the
same direction as the car and are ahead. City
Safety can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or
large animals that are crossing the road in
front of the car.
In the event of a risk of collision with a pedes-
trian, larger animal, cyclist or vehicle, the
driver is alerted by means of a visual, acoustic
and brake pulse warning. There is no brake
pulse warning at lower speeds, sudden driver
braking or acceleration. The brake pulse fre-
quency varies according to the car's speed.
2 - Brake support
If the risk of collision has increased further
after the collision warning then the brake sup-
port is activated.
Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking
action if the system considers that the braking
is not sufficient to avoid a collision.
14
The function is not available in all markets.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
292
3 - Auto Brake
The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started
to take evasive action and the risk of collision
is imminent then the automatic braking func-
tion is deployed - this takes place irrespective
of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking
then takes place with full brake force in order
to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake
force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
The seatbelt tensioner can be activated in con-
nection with the engagement of the automatic
brake function.
In some situations, the action of Auto-brake
may begin with light braking and then pro-
gress to full brake action.
When City Safety has prevented a collision
with a stationary object, the car remains sta-
tionary in anticipation of positive action by the
driver. If the car has been braked to avoid colli-
sion with a slower vehicle in front, its speed is
reduced to match that of the vehicle in front.
NOTE
On cars with manual gearbox, the engine
stops when the Auto-brake function has
stopped the car, unless the driver has man-
aged to depress the clutch pedal before-
hand.
The driver can always interrupt a braking inter-
vention by firmly depressing the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE
When City Safety brakes, the brake lights
come on.
When City Safety is activated and brakes the
vehicle, the driver display shows a text mes-
sage to the effect that the function is/has
been active.
WARNING
City Safety must not be used by the driver
to change his/her driving style - the driver
must not rely on City Safety alone and
allow it to do the braking.
Related information
City Safety (p. 289)
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 296)
City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles
(p. 299)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 300)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 50)
Setting the warning distance for
City Safety
City Safety
15
is always activated but the
driver can select the warning distance for the
function.
NOTE
The City Safety function cannot be deacti-
vated. It is activated automatically when
the engine/electric operation is started and
remains switched on until the engine/elec-
tric operation is switched off.
The warning distance determines the sensitiv-
ity of the system and regulates the distance at
which a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warn-
ing should be deployed.
To select warning distance:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
in the centre display's top view.
2.
Under
City Safety Warning, select either
Late, Normal or Early to set the desired
warning distance.
If the
Early setting produces too many warn-
ings, which could be perceived as irritating in
certain situations, the
Normal or Late warn-
ing distance can be selected.
When warnings are perceived as being too
frequent or disturbing, the warning distance
can be reduced, which reduces the total num-
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
293
ber of warnings and instead leads to City
Safety giving a warning at a later stage.
The
Late warning distance should therefore
only be used in exceptional cases, as in
dynamic driving.
WARNING
No automatic system can guarantee
100% correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never test City Safety by
driving at people, animals or vehicles -
this may cause severe damage and
injury and risk lives.
City Safety warns the driver when
there is a risk of a collision, but it can-
not shorten the driver’s reaction time.
Even if the warning distance has been
set to
Early warnings could be per-
ceived as being late in certain situa-
tions, e.g. when there are large differ-
ences in speed or if vehicles ahead
suddenly brake heavily.
With the warning distance set at
Early,
the warnings will come more in
advance. This may mean that the warn-
ings come more frequently than at the
warning distance Normal, but it is rec-
ommended since it can make City
Safety more effective.
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for
Rear Collision Warning* is deactivated if
the warning distance for collision warning
in the City Safety function is set at the low-
est level "
Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
Related information
City Safety (p. 289)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 300)
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 362)
15
The function is not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
294
Detection of obstacles with City
Safety
City Safety
16
can help the driver to detect
vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedes-
trians.
Vehicles
City Safety detect most vehicles that are sta-
tionary or moving in the same direction as the
driver's own car. This function can also detect
oncoming vehicles and cross traffic in certain
cases.
In order that City Safety shall be able to detect
a vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and
rear lights must be working and clearly illumi-
nated.
Cyclists
Examples of what City Safety interprets as a cyclist
— with clear body outline and bicycle outline.
Good performance requires that the system
function that detects a cyclist must receive the
clearest possible information about the body
and bicycle outline, requiring the ability to
identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders,
legs, upper and lower body plus a normal
human pattern of movement.
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle
are not visible to the function's camera then
the system cannot detect a cyclist.
For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle
designed for adults.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver sup-
port, but it cannot detect all cyclists in all
situations and, for example, cannot see:
partially obscured cyclists.
cyclists if the background contrast for
the cyclists is poor.
cyclists wearing clothing that obscures
the body outline.
bicycles loaded with large objects.
Warnings and brake interventions could be
late or not occur at all. The driver is always
responsible that the vehicle is driven cor-
rectly and with a safety distance adapted
to the speed.
16
The function is not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
295
Pedestrians
Examples of what the system regards as pedestrians
with clear body outlines.
Good performance requires that the system
function that detects a pedestrian must
receive the clearest possible information about
the body outline, requiring the ability to iden-
tify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and
lower body plus a normal human pattern of
movement.
In order that it shall be possible to detect a
pedestrian there must be a contrast with the
background and this will be affected by such
things as clothes, the background and the
weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian
may either be detected late or not at all, which
may mean that warnings and braking are late
or omitted.
City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's head-
lamps.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver sup-
port, but it cannot detect all pedestrians in
all situations and, for example, cannot see:
partially obscured pedestrians, people
in clothing that hides their body con-
tour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm
(32 in.).
pedestrians if the background contrast
for the pedestrians is poor.
pedestrians who are carrying larger
objects.
Warnings and brake interventions could be
late or not occur at all. The driver is always
responsible that the vehicle is driven cor-
rectly and with a safety distance adapted
to the speed.
Large animals
Examples of what City Safety interprets as large ani-
mals - standing still or walking slowly and with clear
body outline.
Good performance requires that the system
function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk
and horse) must receive the clearest possible
information about the body outline, requiring
the ability to identify the animal directly from
the side in combination with what is a normal
pattern of movement for the animal.
If parts of the animal's body are not visible to
the function's camera then the system cannot
detect the animal.
City Safety can also detect large animals in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's head-
lamps.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
296
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver sup-
port, but it cannot detect all large animals
in all situations and, for example, cannot
see:
partially obscured large animals.
larger animals seen from the front or
from behind.
large animals that run or move quickly.
large animals if the background con-
trast for the animals is poor.
small animals such as dogs and cats,
for example.
Warnings and brake interventions could be
late or not occur at all. The driver is always
responsible that the vehicle is driven cor-
rectly and with a safety distance adapted
to the speed.
Related information
City Safety (p. 289)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 300)
City Safety in cross traffic
City Safety
17
can help the driver when turning
and crossing the path of another oncoming
vehicle at an intersection.
Sector in which City Safety can detect
oncoming crossing vehicles.
For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle
on a collision course, the oncoming vehicle
must first enter the sector in which City Safety
can analyse the situation.
The following further criteria must also be ful-
filled:
your car must be travelling at no less than
4 km/h (3 mph)
your car must turn to the left in markets
with right-hand traffic (or to the right in
left-hand traffic)
the oncoming vehicle must have its head-
lamps switched on.
Related information
City Safety (p. 289)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 300)
17
The function is not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
297
Limitations for City Safety in cross
traffic
In some cases City Safety may have difficulty
helping the driver deal with collision risks due
to oncoming cross traffic.
Examples are:
Stability control ESC intervenes in the
event of slippery driving conditions.
If the oncoming vehicle is detected too
late.
If the oncoming vehicle is obscured by
something.
If the oncoming vehicle has headlamps
switched off.
If the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpre-
dictable manner, for example, abruptly
changes lanes at a late stage.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general lim-
itations.
Related information
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 296)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 300)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
City Safety steering assistance for
evasive manoeuvre
City Safety steering assistance can help the
driver to steer away from a vehicle/obstacle
when it is not possible to avoid a collision
simply by braking. City Safety steering assis-
tance cannot be switched off, it is always
activated.
Your car steers away.
Slow moving/stationary vehicles or obsta-
cles.
City Safety engages by amplifying the driver's
steering input, which only occurs after the
driver has begun an evasive manoeuvre - and
then only if the driver is not steering enough to
avoid a collision.
In parallel with the amplified steering input,
the brake system is also used to further
amplify the steering input. The function also
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
298
helps to straighten the car again after passing
the obstacle.
City Safety steering assistance can detect:
vehicles
cyclists
pedestrians
larger animals.
Related information
City Safety (p. 289)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 300)
Limitations of City Safety steering
assistance when taking evasive
action
City Safety may have limited functionality in
certain situations and fail to intervene e.g.:
outside the speed range 50100 km/h
(3062 mph)
if the driver initiates an evasive manoeuvre
if the steering servo creating speed-
dependent steering wheel resistance is
working at reduced power – e.g. when
cooling due to overheating.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general lim-
itations.
Related information
City Safety steering assistance for evasive
manoeuvre (p. 297)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 300)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Automatic braking in the event of
an impeded evasive manoeuvre
with City Safety
City Safety
18
has the facility to assist the
driver by automatically braking the car earlier
when it is not possible to avoid a collision by
only steering away.
City Safety assists the driver by continuously
attempting to anticipate whether there are
"escape routes" to the side in case a slow or
stationary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late
stage.
Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle
ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier.
Your car
Slow/stationary vehicle
18
The function is not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
299
City Safety does not intervene with the auto-
brake function as long as the driver him/
herself has the opportunity to avoid a collision
via a steering manoeuvre.
However, if City Safety anticipates that an
evasive manoeuvre is not possible due to traf-
fic in an adjacent lane, the function can assist
the driver by automatically starting to brake at
an earlier stage.
Related information
City Safety (p. 289)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 300)
City Safety brakes for oncoming
vehicles
City Safety can assist the driver to use emer-
gency braking for an oncoming vehicle in
your car's lane.
If an oncoming vehicle enters your car's lane
and a collision is unavoidable, City Safety can
reduce the car's speed with a view to reducing
the violence of the impact.
Your car
Oncoming vehicles
For this function to work, the following criteria
must be met:
your car must be travelling at more than
4 km/h (3 mph)
the road section must be straight
your car's lane must have clear lane mark-
ings
your car must be positioned straight in its
own lane
the oncoming vehicle must be within your
car's lane markings
the oncoming vehicle must have its head-
lamps switched on
this function can only handle "front to
front" collisions
this function can only detect vehicles with
four wheels.
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions due to
an impending collision with an oncoming
vehicle always come very late.
Related information
City Safety (p. 289)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 300)
DRIVER SUPPORT
300
Limitations of City Safety
The City Safety
19
function may have limita-
tions in certain situations.
Surroundings
Low objects
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxili-
ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than
the bonnet limit the function.
Skidding
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance
is extended, which may reduce the capacity of
City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situa-
tions, the anti-lock brakes and the stability
control ESC
20
are designed to give the best
possible braking force with maintained stabil-
ity.
Oncoming light
The visual warning signal in the windscreen
may be difficult to notice in the event of strong
sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are
being worn or if the driver is not looking
straight ahead.
Heat
In the event of high passenger compartment
temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight,
the visual warning signal in the windscreen
may be temporarily disengaged.
The camera and radar unit's field of view
The camera's field of vision is limited, which is
why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and
vehicles in some situations cannot be
detected, or they are detected later than
anticipated.
Dirty vehicles may be detected later than oth-
ers and if it is dark, motorcycles may be
detected late or not at all.
If a text message in the driver display indicates
that the camera or radar unit is obstructed,
City Safety may be unable to detect pedes-
trians, large animals, cyclists, vehicles or road
lines ahead of the car. This means that the
functionality of City Safety may be reduced.
However, an error message is not shown in all
situations where the windscreen sensors are
obstructed. The driver must therefore take
care to keep the area of windscreen in front of
the camera and radar unit clear.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components
must only be performed at a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Driver intervention
Reversing
When your own car is reversing, City Safety is
temporarily deactivated.
Low speed
City Safety is not activated at very low speeds
- below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system
therefore does not intervene in situations
where your car is approaching a vehicle ahead
very slowly, e.g. when parking.
Active driver
Driver commands are always prioritised,
which is why City Safety does not intervene or
postpone warning/intervention in situations
where the driver is steering and accelerating in
a decisive manner, even if a collision is
unavoidable.
Active and aware driving behaviour can there-
fore delay a collision warning and intervention
in order to minimise unnecessary warnings.
19
The function is not available in all markets.
20
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
301
Important warnings
WARNING
Driver supports only warn of obstacles
which their radar unit has detected –
hence a warning may not be given, or it
may be given with a certain delay.
Never wait for a warning or interven-
tion. Apply the brakes when the situa-
tion requires.
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions
could be implemented late or not at all
if a traffic situation or external influ-
ences mean that the camera and radar
unit cannot detect pedestrians,
cyclists, large animals or vehicles cor-
rectly.
For vehicles to be detected at night,
their headlamps and rear lamp cluster
must be switched on and shining
clearly.
The camera and radar unit has a limited
range for pedestrians and cyclists. The
system can provide effective warnings
and brake interventions as long as the
relative speed is below 50 km/h
(30 mph). For stationary or slow-mov-
ing vehicles, warnings and brake inter-
ventions are effective at vehicle speeds
up to 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduc-
tion for large animals is less than 15
km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved at
vehicle speeds above 70 km/h
(43 mph). The warning and brake inter-
vention for large animals is less effec-
tive at lower speeds.
Warnings for stationary or slow-mov-
ing vehicles as well as large animals
may be disengaged due to darkness or
poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deacti-
vated at vehicle speeds exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
Do not place, stick or mount anything
on the outside or inside of the wind-
screen in front of or around the camera
and radar unit — this can interfere with
camera-dependent functions.
Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of
the camera sensor may reduce its func-
tionality, fully deactivate it or give
incorrect function response.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
302
WARNING
The City Safety auto-brake function
can prevent a collision or reduce colli-
sion speed, but to ensure full brake
performance the driver should always
depress the brake pedal – even when
the car auto-brakes.
The warning and steering assistance
are only activated if there is a high risk
of collision – you must therefore never
wait for a collision warning or for City
Safety to intervene.
The warning and brake intervention for
pedestrians and cyclists are deacti-
vated at vehicle speeds exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
City Safety does not activates any
auto-brake functions in the event of
heavy acceleration.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general lim-
itations.
Market limitation
City Safety is not available in all countries. If
City Safety does not appear in the centre dis-
play's
Settings menu, the car is not equipped
with this function.
Search path in the top view of the centre dis-
play:
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Related information
City Safety (p. 289)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
DRIVER SUPPORT
303
Messages for City Safety
A number of messages regarding City Safety
can be shown in the driver display. Here are
some examples.
Message Specification
City Safety
Automatic intervention
When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be
illuminated in connection with a text message being shown.
City Safety
Reduced functionality Service
required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted
A
.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshop
A
.
Related information
City Safety (p. 289)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
304
Road Sign Information*
The Road Sign Information function (RSI
21
)
can help the driver to observe speed-related
road signs and certain prohibition signs.
Examples of readable signs
22
.
RSI can provide information about such things
as current speed, when a motorway or road is
starting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited
or when the direction of travel is one-way.
If the car passes a speed limit sign, it will be
shown on the driver's display and the head-up
display*.
Road sign information (RSI
23
) also includes
subfunctions that can warn the driver if a
speed limit has been exceeded or in connec-
tion with speed cameras.
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa-
tion function* is only available in combina-
tion with Sensus Navigation*.
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating road sign infor-
mation* (p. 305)
21
Road Sign Information
22
Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
23
Road Sign Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
305
Display mode for road sign information*
(p. 306)
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation* (p. 308)
Warning for speed limitation and speed
camera from road sign information*
(p. 308)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 310)
Activating or deactivating road
sign information*
The Road Sign Information function (RSI
24
) is
optional – the driver can choose to activate or
deactivate this function.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
Road Sign Information is activated automati-
cally each time the engine is started.
NOTE
If the automatic speed limiter function
is activated, road sign information is
shown in the driver display even if the
Road Sign Information function is not
activated.
To remove road sign information from
the driver display, you must deactivate
both the automatic speed limiter and
Road Sign Information.
When the automatic speed limiter
function is activated but Road Sign
Information is deactivated, no warn-
ings are given from Road Sign Infor-
mation. Road Sign Information must
also be activated in order to receive
warnings.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 304)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 314)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 310)
24
RSI: Road Sign Information.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
306
Display mode for road sign
information*
The Road Sign Information function (RSI
25
)
shows road signs in different ways depend-
ing on the sign and the situation.
Example
26
of detected speed information.
When the function detects a road sign with an
imposed speed limit, the driver display shows
the sign as a symbol combined with a col-
oured indication on the speedometer.
If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*,
speed-related information is also obtained
from map data, which means that the driver
display can show or change information on
the speed limit without having passed a
speed-related sign.
An additional sign, such as
"no overtaking", may be
shown together with the
speed limit symbol.
If the driver enters a road
marked with a no-entry sign
at the roadside, the symbol
for this sign flashes on and
off on the driver display as a
warning.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
information from map data is used to deter-
mine whether the car is being driven in the
wrong direction.
The driver can also get an acoustic warning
when driving towards a road marked with a
no-entry sign if the
Road Sign Audio
Warning function is activated.
Speed limit or end of motorway
When the function detects an "indirect speed
limit sign" stating the end of the current speed
limit – e.g. at the end of a motorway – a sym-
bol appears with the corresponding road sign
in the driver's display.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
direct speed limit signs are normally displayed
– indirect speed limit signs are only displayed
if map data has no information on the speed
limit for the road section in question.
Example of indirect speed limit sign:
End of all restrictions.
End of motorway.
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
1030 seconds and remains so until the next
speed related sign is passed.
Changed speed limit
When passing a direct speed limit sign when a
speed limit changes, a symbol with the corres-
ponding road sign appears in the driver's dis-
play.
25
Road Sign Information
26
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
307
Example of direct speed limit
sign.
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
about 5 minutes until the next speed-related
sign is passed.
If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*,
speed limit signs are shown in the driver dis-
play when map data contains information on
the speed limit for the road section in ques-
tion, even if no direct sign has been passed. If
there is no information in map data, the sign is
extinguished approx. 3 minutes after the last
passing of a speed limit sign.
Additional signs
Examples of additional signs.
Sometimes different speed limits are signed
for the same road - an additional sign then
indicates the circumstances under which the
different speeds apply. The road section may
be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain
and/or fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
If a trailer is connected to the car's electrical
system and you pass a speed sign with the
additional sign "trailer", the indicated speed
will appear on the driver display.
Some speed limits only apply
after a certain distance or at a
certain time of day. The driv-
er's attention is drawn to this
fact by means of a symbol for
an additional sign below the
speed symbol. The additional
symbol in the driver display will show either
“DIST” or “TIME”.
A symbol for additional sign
in the form of an empty frame
under the driver display's
speed symbol
26
means that
the function has detected an
additional sign with supple-
mentary information for the
current speed limit.
Sign for "School" and "Children at
play"
If a warning sign for "School"
or "Children at play" is
included in the satellite navi-
gator's map data
27
, the driver
display shows a sign of this
type.
26
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
27
Only in cars with Sensus Navigation*.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
308
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 304)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 310)
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation*
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
speed information is read from the navigation
unit in the following cases:
On detection of signs that indirectly indi-
cate a speed limit, such as motorway, dual
carriageway and city limit signs.
If a previously detected speed sign is
assumed not to apply any longer, but no
new sign has been detected.
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa-
tion function* is only available in combina-
tion with Sensus Navigation*.
NOTE
If a downloaded third-party app is used for
navigation then there is no support for
speed-related information.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 304)
Warning for speed limitation and
speed camera from road sign
information*
Road sign information (RSI
28
) includes sub-
functions that can warn the driver if a speed
limit has been exceeded or in connection with
speed cameras.
Examples of information on speed camera and speed
limit in the driver display
Warning for speed limit
The speed warning is given
by the driver display symbol
29
showing the applicable maxi-
mum permitted speed tem-
porarily flashing when this
speed is exceeded.
28
Road Sign Information
29
Road signs are customised for each market – the one shown here is just an example.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
309
A speed warning is always given if the speed
limit is exceeded in connection with speed
camera information.
Speed Limit Warning warns the driver when
the applicable speed limit or stored maximum
speed is exceeded – this warning is repeated
once after approx. 30 seconds within the
same speed limit area unless the driver
reduces the speed.
Another warning is available only when the
driver has reduced the speed by at least
5 km/h (3 mph) and then exceeds the speed
limit again, or when the car reaches a new/
different speed limit area.
NOTE
To get an acoustic warning if you exceed
the required speed, the
Speed Limit
Warning function must be activated and
the Road Sign Audio Warning subfunc-
tion must be set to On. An acoustic warn-
ing is then given if the car's speed exceeds
the speed indicated by the Road Sign
Information function in the driver display.
Warning for speed camera
A car equipped with road
sign information and Sensus
Navigation can provide infor-
mation on an upcoming
speed camera in the driver
display
30
If the car exceeds a detected speed limit with
the
Speed Limit Warning function activated,
a speed warning is given when the car
approaches a speed camera, provided that the
navigation map for the area in question con-
tains information on speed cameras.
NOTE
An option is available to receive an acous-
tic warning for speed cameras independ-
ently of the car's speed and exceeded
speed limit, and even if the
Road Sign
Audio Warning function is deactivated.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 304)
Activating or deactivating warnings from
road sign information* (p. 309)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 310)
Activating or deactivating
warnings from road sign
information*
The subfunction
Speed Limit Warning for
Road Sign Information (RSI
31
) is optional –
the driver can choose to activate or deacti-
vate this subfunction.
Activating speed warning
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select
Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed
limit selector appears.
Adjust the limit for Speed Warning
The driver can select to receive a warning at a
higher speed than the signed speed.
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select
Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed
limit selector appears.
30
Information on speed cameras on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas.
31
Road Sign Information
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
310
3. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by
pressing the up/down arrows on the
screen.
Note that the function does
not give any consideration to
selected limit adjustment
when the driver display
shows the speed camera
symbol.
Activating acoustic warning in
connection with speed warning
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select/deselect Road Sign Audio
Warning to activate/switch off the acous-
tic warning.
With the
Road Sign Audio Warning function
activated, the driver is also warned when driv-
ing towards one-way traffic/no-entry entrance.
Activate speed camera warning
If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation* and
map data contains information on speed cam-
eras, the driver can opt to receive an audible
warning when approaching a speed camera.
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select/deselect
Speed Camera Audio
Warning to activate/switch off the audi-
ble speed camera warning.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 304)
Warning for speed limitation and speed
camera from road sign information*
(p. 308)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 310)
Limitations of Road Sign
Information*
The Road Sign Information (RSI
32
) function
may have limitations in certain situations.
Examples of what can reduce the function are
as follows:
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Signs positioned high above the roadway
Fully/partially obscured or poorly posi-
tioned signs
Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt
Digital road maps
33
are out-of-date, inac-
curate or have no speed information
34
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa-
tion function* is only available in combina-
tion with Sensus Navigation*.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
311
NOTE
The RSI function may interpret some types
of bicycle rack, connected to the electrical
socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In
such cases, the driver display may show
incorrect speed information.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general lim-
itations.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 304)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Speed limiter
A speed limiter (SL
35
) can be likened to a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-
selected/set maximum speed by the speed
limiter.
Buttons and symbols for the function.
: Activates the speed limiter from
standby mode and resumes stored maxi-
mum speed
: Increases the stored maximum
speed
: From standby mode – activates the
speed limiter and stores current speed
: From active mode – deactivates/
changes the speed limiter to standby
mode
: Reduces stored maximum speed
Marker for stored max speed
The car's current speed
Stored maximum speed
32
Road Sign Information
33
In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*.
34
Map data with speed information does not exist for all areas.
35
Speed Limiter
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
312
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Limitations for speed limiter (p. 314)
Selecting and activating speed limiter
(p. 312)
Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 313)
Temporary deactivation of speed limiter
(p. 314)
Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 346)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 314)
Selecting and activating speed
limiter
The speed limiter function (SL
36
) must first
be selected and activated in order to be able
to regulate the speed.
The speed limiter cannot be activated until
after the engine has been started. The lowest
maximum speed that can be stored is
30 km/h (20 mph).
1. Press (1) or (3) to scroll to the symbol
for the speed limiter
(4).
> The symbol is grey – the speed limiter
is in standby mode.
2. When speed limiter is selected – press the
steering wheel button
(2) to activate.
> The symbol is white – the speed limiter
is started and the current speed is
stored as maximum speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
313
Related information
Speed limiter (p. 311)
Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 313)
Temporary deactivation of speed limiter
(p. 314)
Deactivating the speed limiter
The speed limiter (SL
37
) can be deactivated
and switched off.
1.
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The symbol and indicators turn grey –
the speed limiter is set in standby mode
and the driver can exceed the set speed
limit.
2. Press the steering wheel button (1) or
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indica-
tor for speed limiter (4) are switched off
– which deletes the stored maximum
speed.
Related information
Speed limiter (p. 311)
Selecting and activating speed limiter
(p. 312)
Temporary deactivation of speed limiter
(p. 314)
36
Speed Limiter
37
Speed Limiter
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
314
Temporary deactivation of speed
limiter
The speed limiter (SL
38
) can be temporarily
deactivated and set in standby mode.
The speed limiter can also be temporarily
deactivated and overridden with the accelera-
tor pedal without the speed limiter first having
to be set in standby mode - e.g. to be able to
quickly accelerate the car out of a situation.
In which case, proceed as follows:
1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
release it to interrupt acceleration when
the desired speed has been reached.
> In this mode, the speed limiter is still
activated and the driver display's sym-
bol is therefore WHITE.
2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when
the temporary acceleration is finished.
> The car is then engine-braked automat-
ically to below the last stored maximum
speed.
Related information
Speed limiter (p. 311)
Selecting and activating speed limiter
(p. 312)
Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 313)
Limitations for speed limiter
Speed limiter (SL
39
) has certain general limi-
tations.
On steep downhill gradients the speed limit-
er’s braking effect may be inadequate and
hence the stored maximum speed may be
exceeded. In this case, the driver is alerted by
the message
Speed limit exceeded in the
driver display.
NOTE
A text message that the maximum speed is
exceeded will be activated if the speed has
been exceeded by at least 3 km/h
(approx. 2 mph).
Related information
Speed limiter (p. 311)
Automatic speed limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL
40
) func-
tion helps the driver to adapt the car's maxi-
mum speed to the speed shown on the road
signs.
The Speed Limiter function (SL
41
) can be
changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL).
The automatic speed limiter uses speed infor-
mation from the Road Sign Information*
(RSI
42
) function to automatically adapt the
car's maximum speed.
WARNING
Even if the driver clearly sees the speed-
related road sign, the speed information
from the Road Sign Information* (RSI)
function to ASL may be incorrect – in such
cases the driver must intervene him/herself
and accelerate or brake to a suitable speed.
38
Speed Limiter
39
Speed Limiter
40
Automatic Speed Limiter
41
Speed Limiter
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
315
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Symbol for automatic speed limiter
The sign symbol (displayed along-
side the stored speed, "70", in the
centre of the speedometer) can be
shown in three colours with the fol-
lowing meanings:
Colour of
sign symbol
Meaning
Greenish yel-
low
The automatic speed limiter
is active.
Grey The automatic speed limiter
is set in standby mode.
Orange Automatic speed limiter is
in temporary standby mode
- e.g. due to a road sign not
being read.
Symbol for which speed limiter
function is active
The symbol display in the driver display
changes depending on whether it is cruise
control or automatic cruise control that is
active.
Symbol SL ASL
WHITE symbol: Function active,
GREY symbol: Standby mode.
Sign symbol after "70" = Automatic
Speed Limiter is activated.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating the automatic
speed limiter (p. 316)
Changing the tolerance for the automatic
speed limiter (p. 317)
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 317)
Speed limiter (p. 311)
Road Sign Information* (p. 304)
42
Road Sign Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
316
Activating or deactivating the
automatic speed limiter
The automatic speed limiter function (ASL
43
)
can be activated and deactivated as a supple-
ment to the speed limiter (SL
44
).
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated. Press the steering wheel button
to start the automatic speed limiter
with the current speed.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated. Normal speed limiter is acti-
vated instead.
NOTE
If the automatic speed limiter function
is activated, road sign information
(RSI
45
) is shown in the driver display
even if the Road Sign Information is
not activated.
To remove road sign information from
the driver display, you must deactivate
both the automatic speed limiter and
Road Sign Information.
When the automatic speed limiter
function is activated but Road Sign
Information is deactivated, no warn-
ings are given from Road Sign Infor-
mation. Road Sign Information must
also be activated in order to receive
warnings.
Deactivating the automatic speed
limiter
To deactivate the automatic speed limiter:
Tap on the button in the function view.
> GREY button indication – ASL is
switched off and SL is activated
instead.
WARNING
After switching from ASL to SL the car will
no longer follow the signed speed limit but
only the stored maximum speed.
Related information
Speed limiter (p. 311)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 314)
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 317)
Road Sign Information* (p. 304)
43
Automatic Speed Limiter
44
Speed Limiter
45
Road Sign Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
317
Changing the tolerance for the
automatic speed limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter function
(ASL
46
) can be set for different tolerance lev-
els. The tolerance is adjusted in the same way
as the speed setting is in the speed limiter.
If, for example, the car follows a signed speed
limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the driver can
instead choose to allow the car to maintain
75 km/h (47 mph).
Buttons and symbols for the function
Press the steering wheel button (1)
until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of
the speedometer (2) changes to 75 km/h
(47 mph).
> After which, the car uses the selected
tolerance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as
signs passed are showing 70 km/h
(43 mph).
The tolerance is followed until a road sign with
a lower or higher speed is passed - then the
car follows the new signed speed limit instead
and the tolerance is deleted from the memory.
NOTE
The maximum selectable tolerance is
+/- 10 km/h (5 mph).
Related information
Automatic speed limiter (p. 314)
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 317)
Road Sign Information* (p. 304)
Limitations for automatic speed
limiter
Automatic speed limitation (ASL
47
) takes
place using speed information from the Road
Sign Information function* (RSI
48
) – not from
the speed limit road signs that the car
passes.
If road sign information cannot interpret and
provide speed information to the driver sup-
port systems, the automatic speed limiter is
set in standby mode and changes to normal
speed limiter. In such cases the driver must
intervene and brake to a suitable speed.
The automatic speed limiter will be reactivated
when road sign information can once again
interpret and provide speed information.
Related information
Speed limiter (p. 311)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 314)
Road Sign Information* (p. 304)
46
Automatic Speed Limiter
47
Automatic Speed Limiter
48
Road Sign Information – RSI
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
318
Cruise control
The cruise control (CC
49
) helps the driver
maintain an even speed, which can result in
more relaxed driving on motorways and long,
straight roads in regular traffic flows.
Buttons and symbols for the function
: Activates cruise control from standby
mode and resumes stored speed
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode – activates
cruise control and stores current speed
: From active mode – deactivates/
changes cruise control to standby mode
: Reduces stored speed
Marker for stored speed
The car's current speed
Stored speed
NOTE
In cars equipped with adaptive cruise con-
trol* (ACC
50
), it is possible to switch
between cruise control and adaptive cruise
control.
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Using engine braking instead of the
foot brake
With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with
less frequent application of the foot brake. On
a downhill gradient it may sometimes be
desirable to start moving a little faster and
49
Cruise Control
50
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
319
limit the acceleration by engine braking. In this
case the driver can temporarily disable foot
brake application by Cruise Control.
To do so, proceed as follows:
Depress the accelerator pedal about half-
way down and release.
> Cruise Control will disengage its auto-
matic foot braking and then uses
engine braking only.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 319)
Deactivating cruise control (p. 320)
Standby mode for cruise control (p. 320)
Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 346)
Change between cruise control and adap-
tive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 328)
Selecting and activating cruise
control
The cruise control function (CC
51
) must first
be selected and activated in order to be able
to regulate the speed.
In order to start the cruise control from the
standby mode, the car's current speed must
be 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher.
1. Press (1) or (3) to scroll to the symbol
for cruise control
(4).
> The symbol is grey – cruise control is in
standby mode.
2. When cruise control is selected – press
the steering wheel button
(2) to acti-
vate.
> The symbol is white – cruise control is
started and the current speed is stored
as maximum speed. The lowest speed
that can be stored is 30 km/h
(20 mph).
Reactivating cruise control to the last
stored speed
When cruise control is selected – press
the steering wheel button
to activate.
> The cruise control markings and sym-
bols in the driver display change colour
from GREY to WHITE — the car will
now follow the most recently stored
speed again.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
Cruise control (p. 318)
Deactivating cruise control (p. 320)
Standby mode for cruise control (p. 320)
51
Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
320
Deactivating cruise control
Cruise control (CC
52
) can be deactivated and
switched off.
1.
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The symbol and indicators turn grey –
cruise control is set in standby mode.
2. Press the steering wheel button (1) or
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indica-
tor for cruise control (4) are switched
off – which deletes the stored maxi-
mum speed.
Related information
Cruise control (p. 318)
Change between cruise control and adap-
tive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 328)
Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 319)
Standby mode for cruise control (p. 320)
Standby mode for cruise control
Cruise control (CC
53
) can be deactivated and
set in standby mode. This can take place due
to driver intervention or automatically.
Standby mode means that the function is
selected in the driver display but not activated.
In this case, cruise control does not regulate
speed.
Standby mode on driver intervention
Cruise control is deactivated and set to
standby mode if any of the following occur:
The foot brake is used.
The gear selector is moved to N position.
The clutch pedal is held depressed for
longer than 1 minute.
The driver maintains a speed higher than
the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then control the speed him-
self/herself.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the setting - the car returns to the last
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
52
Cruise Control
53
Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
321
Automatic standby mode
Activation of automatic standby mode can be
due to one of the following:
The wheels are losing traction.
The engine speed is too low/high.
Brake temperature is too high.
Speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then control the speed him-
self/herself.
Related information
Cruise control (p. 318)
Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 319)
Deactivating cruise control (p. 320)
Adaptive cruise control*
54
The adaptive cruise control (ACC
55
) can help
the driver to maintain a constant speed, com-
bined with a preset time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead.
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to
the vehicle ahead.
An adaptive cruise control can provide a more
relaxing driving experience on long journeys on
motorways and long straight main roads in
smooth traffic flows.
The driver selects the desired speed and a
time interval to the vehicle ahead. If the cam-
era and radar unit detects a slower vehicle in
front of the car, the speed is adapted automat-
ically via the preset time interval to the vehicle.
When the road is clear again the car returns to
the selected speed.
If the cornering support* function is activated,
this may also affect the speed of the car.
The adaptive cruise control aims to:
regulate the speed smoothly. In situations
that demand sudden braking the driver
must brake himself/herself. This applies in
cases of large speed differences or if the
vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to
the limitations of the radar unit, braking
may come unexpectedly or not at all.
follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane
at a time interval set by the driver. If the
radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front
then the car will instead maintain the
speed set and stored by the driver. This
also takes place if the speed of the vehicle
ahead increases and exceeds the stored
speed.
54
This function can come as either standard or an option depending on the market.
55
Adaptive Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
322
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components
must only be performed at a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Controls for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 322)
Display mode for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 323)
Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 324)
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 327)
Symbols and messages for adaptive
cruise control* (p. 329)
Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 344)
Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 347)
Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 346)
Automatic braking with driver support
(p. 348)
Change of target with driver support
(p. 345)
Overtaking Assistance* (p. 343)
Controls for adaptive cruise
control*
56
A summary of how adaptive cruise control
(ACC
57
) is controlled using the left-hand key-
pad on the steering wheel and how the func-
tion is shown in the display.
: From standby mode - activates and
stores the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes to standby mode
: Activates the function from standby
mode and resumes stored speed
: Increases the stored speed
: Reduces stored speed
56
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
57
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
323
Increases the time interval to vehicles
ahead
Reduces the time interval to vehicles
ahead
Target vehicle indicator: The function has
detected and is following a target vehicle
at the preset time interval
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 327)
Display mode for adaptive cruise
control*
58
The following image example shows how
Adaptive cruise control (ACC
59
) can be
shown in the display in the different context.
Speed
Indication of speeds
Stored speed
Speed of vehicle ahead
Current speed of your car
Time interval
The time interval is only
adjusted to the vehicle ahead
by the Adaptive cruise control
when the distance symbol
shows two vehicles. At the
same time a speed range is
marked.
When driving
In the following illustrative example, the road
sign information* (RSI
60
) function informs the
driver that the maximum permitted speed is
130 km/h (80 mph).
58
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
59
Adaptive Cruise Control
60
Road Sign Information
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
324
The previous illustration shows that the adap-
tive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to
follow.
The previous illustration shows that the adap-
tive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and at the same time is following a
vehicle ahead which is keeping the same
speed.
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 327)
Selecting and activating adaptive
cruise control*
61
Adaptive cruise control (ACC
62
) must first be
selected and then activated to enable it to
control speed and distance.
To start the function requires the following:
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehi-
cle") within reasonable distance in front of
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
325
the car, or the current speed must be at
least 15 km/h (9 mph).
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed
must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
1. Press the steering wheel button (2) or
(3) to scroll to the adaptive cruise control
symbol
(4).
> The symbol is grey – the adaptive
cruise control is in standby mode.
2. When speed limiter is selected – press the
steering wheel button
(1) to activate.
> The symbol is white – the speed limiter
is started and the current speed is
stored as maximum speed.
Reactivating adaptive cruise control to
the last stored speed
When the adaptive cruise control is
selected – press the steering wheel but-
ton
to activate.
> The cruise control markings and sym-
bols in the driver display change colour
from GREY to WHITE — the car will
now follow the most recently stored
speed again.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Deactivating adaptive cruise control*
(p. 325)
Change between cruise control and adap-
tive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 328)
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 327)
Deactivating adaptive cruise
control*
63
The adaptive cruise control (ACC
64
) can be
deactivated and switched off.
1.
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The symbol and indicators turn grey –
the adaptive cruise control is set in
standby mode. The indicator for time
interval and symbol for target vehicle, if
activated, are also switched off.
61
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
62
Adaptive Cruise Control
63
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
64
Adaptive Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
326
2. Press the steering wheel button (1) or
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indica-
tor for adaptive cruise control (4) are
switched off – which deletes the stored
maximum speed.
WARNING
With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must inter-
vene and regulate both speed and dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead.
When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too
close to a vehicle ahead, the driver may
be warned of the short distance by the
Distance Warning* function instead.
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 324)
Change between cruise control and adap-
tive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 328)
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 327)
Standby mode for adaptive cruise
control*
65
Adaptive cruise control (ACC
66
) can be deac-
tivated and set to standby mode. This can
take place due to driver intervention or auto-
matically.
Standby mode means that the function is
selected in the driver display but not activated.
Adaptive cruise control does not then regulate
the speed or distance to the vehicle in front.
Standby mode on driver intervention
The adaptive cruise control is deactivated and
set in standby mode if any of the following
occurs:
The foot brake is used.
The gear selector is moved to N position.
The driver maintains a speed higher than
the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1
minute - applies to cars with manual gear-
box.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the setting - the car returns to the last
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
WARNING
With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must inter-
vene and regulate both speed and dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead.
When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too
close to a vehicle ahead, the driver may
be warned of the short distance by the
Distance Warning* function instead.
Automatic standby mode
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a mes-
sage on the driver display.
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehi-
cles.
65
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
66
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
327
Automatic standby mode may be engaged in
the event of one of the following:
One of the systems that Adaptive cruise
control is dependent on stops working,
e.g. stability control / anti-skid (ESC
67
).
The driver opens the door.
The driver takes off the seatbelt.
The engine speed is too low/high.
One or more wheels lose traction.
The brake temperature is high.
The parking brake is applied.
The camera and radar unit is covered by
e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/
radio waves are blocked).
The speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and
ACC is uncertain whether the vehicle
ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object,
such as a speed bump.
The speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and
the vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
Speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with man-
ual gearbox.
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 324)
Deactivating adaptive cruise control*
(p. 325)
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 327)
Limitations for adaptive cruise
control*
68
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
69
) may have
limitations in certain situations.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on
level road surfaces. The function may have dif-
ficulty in keeping the correct distance from the
vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill
slopes - in which case, be extra attentive and
ready to brake.
Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car
has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to
the car.
Drive mode unavailable
Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected
when the adaptive cruise control is activated.
67
Electronic Stability Control
68
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
69
Adaptive Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
328
WARNING
This is not a collision avoidance sys-
tem. The driver is always responsible
and must intervene if the system does
not detect a vehicle ahead.
The function does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy-
cles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
Do not use the function in demanding
situations, such as in city traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a
lot of water or slush on the road, in
heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads or on slip roads.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general lim-
itations.
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Change between cruise control
and adaptive cruise control*
70
in
the centre display
When the normal cruise control (CC
71
) is
selected in the driver display, it is possible to
change to adaptive cruise control (ACC
72
) in
the centre display's function view.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
GREEN button indication – adaptive
cruise control is deactivated and normal
cruise control is set in standby mode.
GREY button indication – normal cruise
control is deactivated and adaptive cruise
control is set in standby mode.
A symbol in the driver display shows which
cruise control is active:
Cruise control
(CC)
Adaptive cruise con-
trol (ACC)
A A
A
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby
mode
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Cruise control (p. 318)
70
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
71
Cruise Control
72
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
329
Symbols and messages for
adaptive cruise control*
73
A number of symbols and messages regar-
ding the adaptive cruise control (ACC
74
) can
be shown via the driver display and/or the
head-up display*.
Symbol Message Specification
The symbol is WHITE The car is maintaining the stored speed.
Adaptive Cruise Contr.
Unavailable
The symbol is GREY
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
Adaptive Cruise Contr.
Service required
The symbol is GREY
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
73
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
74
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
330
Pilot Assist*
75
Pilot Assist can help the driver to drive the
car between the lane's side markings as well
as to maintain an even speed, combined with
a preselected time interval to the vehicle
ahead.
Get to know Pilot Assist
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to
the vehicle ahead and detects side markings.
Camera and radar unit
Distance readers
Readers, side markings
Pilot Assist helps to control your car and you
may need to drive a few kilometres with Pilot
Assist before you feel completely at home
with the function. It is important to know
about all of the function's applications and lim-
itations in order to safely use all of the advan-
tages.
The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended
for use on motorways and similar major roads
where it can contribute to more comfortable
driving and a more relaxed driving experience.
The driver selects the desired speed and a
time interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist
scans the distance to the vehicle ahead and
the lane's side markings on the road surface
using the camera unit. The preset time interval
is maintained with automatic speed adjust-
ment whilst the steering assistance helps to
position the car in the lane.
If the cornering support* function is activated,
this may also affect the speed of the car.
Pilot Assist regulates the speed with accelera-
tion and braking. It is normal for the brakes to
emit a low sound when they are being used to
adjust the speed.
Pilot Assist strives to:
regulate the speed smoothly. In situations
that demand sudden braking the driver
must brake himself/herself. This applies in
cases of large speed differences or if the
car in front brakes suddenly. Due to the
limitations of the camera and radar unit,
braking may come unexpectedly or not at
all.
follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane
at a time interval set by the driver. If the
radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front
then the car will instead maintain the
speed set and stored by the driver. This
also takes place if the speed of the vehicle
ahead increases and exceeds the stored
speed.
Position of the car in the lane
When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it attempts to
place the car halfway between the visible lane
markings. For a smoother drive, it is a good
idea to allow the car to find a good position.
The driver can always adjust the position him/
herself by increasing the steering input. It is
important that the driver checks to make sure
the car is positioned safely in the lane.
If Pilot Assist does not position the car in an
appropriate way in the lane, it is recom-
mended to turn Pilot Assist off or switch to
adaptive cruise control*.
75
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
331
Steering assistance
The current status of steering
assistance is indicated by the
colour of the steering wheel's
symbol:
• GREEN steering wheel indi-
cates active steering assis-
tance
• GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indi-
cates deactivated steering assistance.
Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into
account the speed of the preceding car and
the lane markings. The driver can at any time
ignore the Pilot Assist steering recommenda-
tion and steer in another direction, e.g. to
change lane or avoid an obstruction on the
road.
If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unam-
biguously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit
does not see the lane's side markings, Pilot
Assist temporarily deactivates steering assis-
tance, but resumes it if the lane can be inter-
preted again - although the speed and dis-
tance control functions remain active. The
steering wheel vibrates slightly when deacti-
vated temporarily in order to alert the driver to
the change.
WARNING
Pilot Assist steering assistance is automati-
cally deactivated and is resumed without
prior warning.
Round bends and when the road splits
Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who
should therefore not wait for the steering
assistance from Pilot Assist but should always
be prepared to increase his/her own steering
input, especially in bends.
When the car approaches an exit or if the lane
splits, the driver should steer towards the
desired lane so that Pilot Assist can detect the
desired direction.
Hands on the steering wheel
In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver’s
hands must be on the steering wheel. It is also
important for the driver always to carry on
being active and alert when driving as Pilot
Assist is unable to read all situations and the
function may toggle between off and on with-
out prior warning.
If Pilot Assist detects that the
driver does not keep his/her
hands on the steering wheel,
the system gives a warning
with a symbol and text mes-
sage in the driver display in
order to prompt the driver to
actively steer the car.
If the driver's hands still cannot be detected
on the steering wheel after a few seconds, the
prompt to actively steer the car is repeated,
supplemented by an acoustic signal.
If Pilot Assist cannot detect the driver's hands
on the steering wheel after a further few sec-
onds, the warning signal becomes intensive
and the steering function is deactivated. Pilot
Assist must then be restarted using the steer-
ing wheel button
.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
332
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components
must only be performed at a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 335)
Display mode for Pilot Assist* (p. 333)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 338)
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 340)
Controls for Pilot Assist* (p. 332)
Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 344)
Change of target with driver support
(p. 345)
Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 347)
Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 346)
Automatic braking with driver support
(p. 348)
Overtaking Assistance* (p. 343)
Controls for Pilot Assist*
76
A summary of how Pilot Assist is controlled
using the left-hand keypad on the steering
wheel and how the function is shown in the
display.
Buttons and symbols for the function.
: Switches from adaptive cruise control*
to Pilot Assist
: From standby mode - activates Pilot
Assist and stores the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes Pilot Assist to standby mode
: Activates Pilot Assist from standby
mode and resumes the stored speed and
time interval
: Increases the stored speed
76
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
333
: Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles
ahead
Reduces the time interval to vehicles
ahead
: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive
cruise control
Function symbol
Symbols for target car
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
assistance
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Display mode for Pilot Assist*
77
The following image example shows how
Pilot Assist can be shown in the display in dif-
ferent contexts.
Speed
Indication of speeds.
Stored speed
Speed of vehicle ahead
Current speed of your car
Time interval
Pilot Assist only regulates the
time interval to the vehicle
ahead when the distance
symbol shows a vehicle (1)
above the steering wheel
symbol.
Pilot Assist steering assistance is only active
when the steering wheel symbol (2) has
changed from GREY to GREEN.
When driving
In the following illustrative example, the road
sign information (RSI
78
) function informs the
driver that the maximum permitted speed is
130 km/h (80 mph).
77
This function can come as either standard or an option depending on the market.
78
Road Sign Information
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
334
The previous illustration shows that Pilot
Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph)
and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance
since the lane's side markings cannot be
detected.
The previous illustration shows that Pilot
Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph)
and at the same time is following a vehicle
ahead which is keeping the same speed.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance
since the lane's side markings cannot be
detected.
The previous illustration shows that Pilot
Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph)
and at the same time is following a vehicle
ahead which is keeping the same speed.
Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assis-
tance since the lane's side markings can be
detected.
The previous illustration shows that Pilot
Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph)
and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides steering assistance as the
lane markings can be detected.
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 338)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
335
Selecting and activating Pilot
Assist*
79
Pilot Assist must first be selected and then
activated to be able to control speed and dis-
tance and to give steering assistance.
Green steering wheel indicates that Pilot Assist is
providing steering assistance.
In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required
that.
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
The lane's edge markings must be clear
and must be detected by the car.
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehi-
cle") within reasonable distance in front of
the car, or the current speed must be at
least 15 km/h (9 mph).
The speed must not exceed 140 km/h (87
mph).
The driver must keep his/her hands on the
steering wheel.
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehi-
cle") within reasonable distance in front of
the car, or the current speed must be at
least 15 km/h (9 mph).
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed
must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
1. Press (1) or (3) to scroll to the symbol
for Pilot Assist
(4).
> The symbol is grey – Pilot Assist is in
standby mode.
2. When Pilot Assist is selected – press the
steering wheel button
(2) to activate.
> The symbol is white – Pilot Assist is
started and the current speed is stored
as maximum speed.
Reactivating Pilot Assist to last stored
speed
When Pilot Assist is selected – press the
steering wheel button
to activate.
> The cruise control markings and sym-
bols in the driver display change colour
from GREY to WHITE — the car will
now follow the most recently stored
speed again.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 336)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 338)
79
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
336
Deactivate Pilot Assist*
80
Pilot Assist can be deactivated and switched
off.
1.
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The symbol and indicators turn grey –
Pilot Assist is set in standby mode. The
indicator for time interval and symbol
for target vehicle, if activated, are also
switched off.
2. Press the steering wheel button (1) or
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indica-
tor for Pilot Assist (4) are switched off
– which deletes the stored maximum
speed.
WARNING
With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the
driver must intervene and steer, regu-
lating both speed and distance to the
vehicle ahead.
When Pilot Assist is in standby mode
and the car comes too close to a vehi-
cle ahead, the driver is warned of the
short distance by the distance warn-
ing* function instead.
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 324)
Change between cruise control and adap-
tive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 328)
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 327)
Temporary disabling of steering assistance
with Pilot Assist* (p. 337)
Standby mode for Pilot Assist*
81
Pilot Assist can be deactivated and set in
standby mode. This can take place due to
driver intervention or automatically.
Standby mode means that the function is
selected in the driver display but not activated.
In this case, Pilot Assist does not regulate the
speed or distance to the vehicle in front, or
provide steering assistance.
Standby mode on driver intervention
Pilot Assist is deactivated and set in standby
mode if any of the following occurs:
The foot brake is used.
The gear selector is moved to N position.
The direction indicators are used for
longer than 1 minute.
The driver maintains a speed higher than
the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The clutch pedal is depressed for
approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with
manual gearbox.
80
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
81
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
337
Automatic standby mode
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a mes-
sage on the driver display.
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehi-
cles.
Automatic standby mode may be engaged in
the event of one of the following.
One of the systems that Pilot Assist is
dependent on stops working, e.g. stability
control / anti-skid
82
.
Hands not holding the steering wheel.
The driver opens the door.
The driver takes off the seatbelt.
The engine speed is too low/high.
One or more wheels lose traction.
The brake temperature is high.
The parking brake is applied.
The camera and radar unit is covered by
e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/
radio waves are blocked).
The speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and
Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the vehi-
cle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an
object, such as a speed bump.
The speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and
the vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot
Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with man-
ual gearbox.
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 335)
Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 336)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 338)
Temporary disabling of steering
assistance with Pilot Assist*
83
Pilot Assist steering assistance can be tem-
porarily disabled and resumed without prior
warning.
When the direction indicators are used, Pilot
Assist steering assistance is temporarily dis-
engaged. When the direction indicator is
switched off, steering assistance is reactivated
automatically if the lane's edge markings can
still be detected.
If Pilot Assist is unable to interpret the lane
clearly, e.g. if the camera or radar unit is
unable to see the side markings for the lane,
Pilot Assist temporarily disables steering
assistance – speed and distance regulation
functions remain active. Steering assistance is
resumed when the lane can be interpreted
again. In these situations, slight vibration in
the steering wheel may alert the driver to the
fact that steering assistance has been deacti-
vated temporarily.
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 335)
Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 336)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 338)
82
Electronic Stability Control
83
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
338
Limitations of Pilot Assist*
84
The Pilot Assist function may have limitations
in certain situations.
The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can
help the driver in many situations. But the
driver is at all times responsible for maintain-
ing a safe distance to surrounding objects and
a correct position in the lane.
WARNING
In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering
assistance may have difficulty helping the
driver in the right way or it may be auto-
matically deactivated - in which case, the
use of Pilot Assist is not recommended.
Examples of such situations may be that:
the lane markings are unclear, worn,
missing, or they cross each other, or if
there are several sets of lane markings.
the lane division is changed, e.g. when
the lanes split or merge, as well as on
slip roads.
at roadworks and sudden changes in
the roadway, e.g. when the lines may
stop marking the correct route.
edges or other lines than lane markings
are present on or near the road, e.g.
kerbs, joints or repairs to the road sur-
face, edges of barriers, roadside edges
or strong shadows.
the lane is narrow or winding.
the lane contains ridges or holes.
weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain,
snow or fog or slush or impaired view
with poor light conditions, back-light-
ing, wet road surface etc.
The driver should also note that Pilot Assist
has the following limitations:
High kerbs, roadside barriers, tempo-
rary obstacles (traffic cones, safety bar-
riers, etc.) are not detected. Alterna-
tively, they may be detected incorrectly
as lane markings, with a subsequent
risk of contact between the car and
such obstacles. The driver must ensure
him/herself that the car is at a suitable
distance from such obstacles.
The camera and radar sensor does not
have the capacity to detect all oncom-
ing objects and obstacles in traffic
environments, e.g. potholes, stationary
obstacles or objects which completely
or partially block the route.
Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.
The recommended steering input is
force limited, which means that Pilot
Assist cannot always help the driver to
steer and keep the car within the lane.
In cars equipped with Sensus
Navigation*, the function has the
option of using information from map
84
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
339
data, which may result in varied per-
formance.
Pilot Assist is switched off if the power
steering for speed related steering
force is working with reduced power –
e.g. during cooling due to overheating.
WARNING
Pilot Assist must only be used if there are
clear lane lines painted on each side of the
lane. All other use involves increased risk of
contact with surrounding obstacles that
cannot be detected by the function.
WARNING
This is not a collision avoidance sys-
tem. The driver is always responsible
and must intervene if the system does
not detect a vehicle ahead.
The function does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy-
cles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
Do not use the function in demanding
situations, such as in city traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a
lot of water or slush on the road, in
heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads or on slip roads.
The driver always has the possibility of cor-
recting or adjusting a steering intervention
imposed by Pilot Assist and can turn the steer-
ing wheel to the desired position.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily
intended for use when driving on level road
surfaces. The function may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes -
in which case, be extra attentive and ready to
brake.
Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy
load or a trailer is connected to the car.
NOTE
Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the
car's electrical system.
Drive mode unavailable
Off Road drive mode cannot be selected
when Pilot Assist is activated.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general lim-
itations.
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Drive modes (p. 461)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
340
Symbols and messages for
Pilot Assist*
85
A number of symbols and messages regar-
ding Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver
display and/or the head-up display*.
Symbol Message Specification
Grey steering wheel symbol Indicates deactivated steering assistance. When Pilot Assist provides steering assis-
tance, the steering wheel is green.
Symbol for hands on the steering wheel The system cannot detect whether the driver has his/her hands on the steering wheel.
Place your hands on the steering wheel and actively steer the car.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's man-
ual
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 338)
85
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
341
Cornering support*
86
Curve Speed Assist can help the driver to
reduce speed ahead of sharper bends if the
preset speed for the driver support adaptive
cruise control* or Pilot Assist* is estimated as
being too high.
In connection with the func-
tion reducing the car's speed,
this symbol is shown in the
driver display.
The calculation is made using information
from map data in the car's satellite navigator
Sensus Navigation*. After the bend has been
passed, the car resumes the previously preset
speed.
The driver can cancel the function at any time
by choosing to brake or by using the accelera-
tor pedal.
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Drive modes
Assistance during cornering depends on the
drive mode set. If the drive mode options are
unavailable, the function selects the
Comfort
option. Using the Dynamic option, the car
negotiates bends with sporty characteristics
and with slightly more powerful acceleration
out of the bends.
Related information
Activating or deactivating cornering sup-
port* (p. 342)
Limitations for cornering support* (p. 342)
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Drive modes (p. 461)
86
This function is only available in certain markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
342
Activating or deactivating
cornering support*
The cornering support function can be acti-
vated as a complement to the adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist*. The driver can also
choose to deactivate the function.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
During subsequent engine starting, the last
used setting is reactivated or settings are fol-
lowed that were made in the driver profile
linked to the key used
87
.
Related information
Cornering support* (p. 341)
Limitations for cornering support*
(p. 342)
Limitations for cornering
support*
88
The cornering support function may have lim-
itations in certain situations. A driver should
be aware about the following examples of
limitations.
Cornering support may have limited per-
formance on smaller roads and in built-up
areas.
On slip roads or intersections, the corner-
ing support may be switched off tempo-
rarily.
If the satellite navigator
89
map data is not
updated, cornering support may have lim-
ited functionality.
If the satellite navigator
89
does not have
contact with the satellite system, corner-
ing support may have limited functionality.
On new or rebuilt roads, map data may be
incorrect.
When calculating a suitable cornering
speed, any risk of reduced traction due to
adverse weather or road conditions is not
included.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general lim-
itations.
Related information
Cornering support* (p. 341)
Activating or deactivating cornering sup-
port* (p. 342)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
87
These options are market-dependent.
88
This function is only available in certain markets.
89
Only with Volvo's satellite navigator Sensus Navigation* installed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
343
Overtaking Assistance*
Overtaking Assistance can help the driver
when overtaking other vehicles. The function
can be used with adaptive cruise control* or
Pilot Assist*.
When adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist is
following another vehicle and the driver indi-
cates the intention to overtake by activating
the direction indicator
90
, the systems help by
accelerating the vehicle towards the vehicle
ahead before the driver's vehicle reaches the
overtaking lane.
The function then delays reducing speed in
order to avoid premature braking when the
driver’s car is approaching a slower vehicle.
The function remains active until the driver’s
vehicle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be acti-
vated in more situations than during over-
taking, e.g. when a direction indicator is
used to indicate a change of lane or exit to
another road – the car will then accelerate
briefly.
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Use Overtaking Assistance (p. 343)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Use Overtaking Assistance
Overtaking assistance can be used with
adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist*. There
are a number of criteria if Overtaking Assis-
tance is to be used.
The following conditions must exist for Over-
taking Assistance to be activated:
there must be a vehicle in front (the “tar-
get vehicle”)
your car's current speed is
at least 70 km/h (43 mph)
the stored speed must be high enough
for overtaking to take place safely.
To start the Overtaking Assistance:
Activate the direction indicator.
Use the left-hand direction indicator in a
left-hand drive car right in a right-hand
drive car.
> Overtaking Assistance is started.
90
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
344
WARNING
When using the Overtaking Assistance
System, the driver should be aware that
there may be undesired acceleration if the
conditions suddenly change.
Some situations should therefore be avoi-
ded, such as if:
the car is approaching an exit to turn-
off in the same direction as overtaking
would normally occur.
the vehicle ahead slows down before
the driver's car has crossed over into
the overtaking lane.
the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
down.
a right-hand drive car is driven in a
county with left-hand traffic (or vice
versa).
Situations of this kind can be avoided by
temporarily setting adaptive cruise control
or Pilot Assist in standby mode.
Related information
Overtaking Assistance* (p. 343)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Standby mode for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 326)
Standby mode for Pilot Assist* (p. 336)
Warning from driver support in the
event of a collision risk
The driver support systems of adaptive cruise
control* and Pilot Assist* can warn the driver
if the distance to the vehicle ahead suddenly
becomes too short.
Audio and symbol for collision warning
Acoustic signal in the event of a risk of col-
lision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of col-
lision
Distance measurement with the camera
and radar unit
Adaptive cruise control and Pilot Assist use
approx. 40% of the capacity of the foot brake.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily
than the driver support is capable of and the
driver does not brake, the warning lamp and
acoustic warning are activated to alert the
driver that immediate intervention is required.
WARNING
The driver support systems only warn of
vehicles which their radar unit has detected
– hence a warning may not be given, or it
may be given with a certain delay. Never
wait for a warning. Apply the brakes when
the situation requires.
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen
In cars equipped with a head up display*, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a
flashing symbol.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
345
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may
make the visual warning signal in the wind-
screen difficult to recognise.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Distance Warning* (p. 369)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Change of target with driver
support
The driver supports of adaptive cruise con-
trol* and Pilot Assist*, in combination with
automatic transmission, have a change of tar-
get function at certain speeds.
Change of target
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When the driver supports are following
another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h
(20 mph) and changes target vehicle – from a
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle – the
driver supports will slow down for the station-
ary vehicle.
WARNING
When the driver supports are following
another vehicle at speeds in excess of
approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target
is changed from a moving vehicle to a sta-
tionary vehicle, the driver supports will
ignore the stationary vehicle and instead
accelerate to the stored speed.
The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
The driver supports are disengaged and set in
standby mode:
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the driver supports are uncertain
whether the target object is a stationary
vehicle or another object, such as a speed
bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the vehicle ahead turns off so that the
driver supports no longer have a vehicle to
follow.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
346
Set the stored speed for driver
support
It is possible to set stored speed for the
speed limiter, cruise control, adaptive cruise
control* and Pilot Assist* functions.
: Increases the stored speed
: Reduces stored speed
Stored speed
Change a set speed with short presses on
the steering wheel buttons
(1) or
(2) or by pressing and holding them.
Short presses: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
Press and hold: Release the button
when the speed indicator (3) has
moved to the desired speed.
> The speed set after the last button
press is stored in the memory.
Effect of the accelerator pedal
If the driver increases the car's speed using
the accelerator pedal before pressing the
steering wheel button (1), the speed
stored will be the car's speed when the button
is depressed, provided the driver's foot is on
the accelerator pedal at the moment when the
button is depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the setting - the car returns to the last
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
Possible speed
Automatic gearbox
The driver support functions can follow
another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed is
30 km/h (20 mph) – even though it is capable
of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a
speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot
be selected/stored.
Manual gearbox
the driver support functions can follow
another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h
(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h (87 mph).
The lowest programmable speed is 30 km/h
(20 mph) – the maximum speed is 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Speed limiter (p. 311)
Cruise control (p. 318)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
347
Set time interval to vehicle ahead
It is possible to set the time interval to the
vehicle ahead to be maintained by the adap-
tive cruise control*, Pilot Assist* and Distance
Warning* functions.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
driver display as 15 horizon-
tal lines - the more lines the
longer the time interval. One
line represents about 1 sec-
ond to the vehicle in front, 5 lines represents
about 3 seconds.
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display
shows a car and a steering wheel, Pilot
Assist follows a vehicle in front at a preset
time gap.
When only one steering wheel is shown,
there is no vehicle within a reasonable dis-
tance ahead.
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display
shows two cars, adaptive cruise control is
following the vehicle in front at a pre-set
time interval.
When only one car is shown, there is no
vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead.
Control for time interval.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2)
to increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the
current time interval.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary significantly in certain situa-
tions in order to allow the car to follow the
vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably. At
low speed, when the distances are short, the
adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the
calculated distance in metres for a
given time interval.
Only use the time intervals permitted
by local traffic regulations.
If the driver supports do not seem to
respond with a speed increase when
activated, it may be because the time
window to the vehicle ahead is shorter
than the set time window.
WARNING
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action in an
unexpected traffic situation.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
348
Related information
Drive modes when using time interval to
vehicles (p. 348)
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Distance Warning* (p. 369)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Drive modes when using time
interval to vehicles
The driver can select different driving styles
for how driver support should maintain the
preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Selection is made via the drive mode control
DRIVE MODE.
Select one of the following options:
Pure – The driver support focuses on
good fuel economy, which means longer
time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Hybrid – The driver support focuses on
following the set time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead as smoothly as possible.
Power – The driver support focuses on
following the set time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead more closely, which in certain
cases may mean heavier acceleration and
braking.
Related information
Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 347)
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Drive modes (p. 461)
Automatic braking with driver
support
The driver supports of adaptive cruise con-
trol* and Pilot Assist* have a special brake
function in slow traffic and while stationary.
In certain situations, the parking brake is
applied in order to keep the car stationary.
Brake function in slow queues and
while stationary
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is auto-
matically resumed if the stops do not exceed
approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before
the vehicle in front starts moving again then
the driver support function is set in standby
mode with automatic braking.
The function is reactivated in one of the
following ways:
Press the steering wheel button
.
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The function resumes following the
vehicle ahead if it starts moving for-
ward within approx. 6 seconds.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
349
WARNING
Driver supports only warn of obstacles
which their radar unit has detected –
hence a warning may not be given, or it
may be given with a certain delay.
Never wait for a warning or interven-
tion. Apply the brakes when the situa-
tion requires.
NOTE
The driver supports can hold the car sta-
tionary for a maximum of 5 minutes – then
the parking brake is applied and the func-
tion is disengaged.
Before the driver supports can be reactiva-
ted, the parking brake must be released.
Cessation of automatic braking
In some situations, automatic braking ceases
on coming to a standstill and the function is
set in standby mode. This means that the
brakes are released and the car may start to
roll - the driver must therefore intervene and
brake the car himself/herself to keep it station-
ary.
This may take place in any of the following sit-
uations:
The driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal.
The parking brake is applied.
The gear selector is moved to P, N, or R
position.
The driver sets the adaptive cruise control
or Pilot Assist to standby mode.
Automatic activation of parking brake
The Parking brake is applied if the function is
holding the car stationary with the foot brake
and:
The driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seatbelt.
The function has kept the car stationary
for more than approx. 5 minutes.
The brakes have overheated.
The driver switches the engine off.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Brake functions (p. 445)
Lane assistance
The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA
91
)
is to help the driver to reduce the risk of the
car accidentally leaving its own lane on
motorways and similar major routes.
Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its
lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in
the steering wheel.
Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
range 65200 km/h (40125 mph) on roads
with clearly visible side lines.
On narrow roads the function may be unavail-
able, in which case it goes into standby mode.
The function becomes available again when
the road is wide enough.
A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
91
Lane Keeping Aid
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
350
Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane.
Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibra-
tions.
Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in
accordance with the following:
Assist activated: When the car is
approaching a lane line, the function will
actively steer the car back into its lane by
applying a slight torque to the steering
wheel.
Warning activated: If the car is about to
cross a lane line, the driver is warned by
means of vibrations in the steering wheel.
There is also an option where both steering
assistance and warning are activated simulta-
neously.
NOTE
When a direction indicator/flasher is
switched on, there are no steering correc-
tions or alerts from lane assistance.
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
DRIVER SUPPORT
351
Lane assistance does not intervene
Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside
curves.
In some situations, lane assistance allows lane
lines to be crossed without intervening with
either steering assistance or a warning – e.g.
when using the direction indicators or if the
car is allowed to cut the corners in bends.
Hands on the steering wheel
For steering assistance with lane assistance to
work, the driver must have his/her hands on
the steering wheel, which the system will con-
tinue to monitor.
If the driver does not keep
his/her hands on the steering
wheel, a warning signal is
heard and a message encour-
ages the driver to steer the
car actively:
Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering
If the driver follows the prompt to start steer-
ing, the function is set in standby mode and
this message is shown:
Lane Keeping Aid Standby until
steering applied
The function will then be unavailable until the
driver starts to steer the car again.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating lane assistance
(p. 351)
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 352)
Symbols and messages for lane assis-
tance (p. 353)
Activating or deactivating lane
assistance
The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) function (LKA
92
)
is optional – the driver can choose to activate
or deactivate this function.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
Related information
Lane assistance (p. 349)
Selecting assistance option for lane assis-
tance (p. 352)
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 352)
DRIVER SUPPORT
352
Selecting assistance option for
lane assistance
The driver can select how the Lane Keeping
Aid (LKA
93
) should react if the car leaves its
lane.
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
in the centre display's top view.
2.
In the event of
Lane Keeping Aid Mode,
select how the function should react:
Assist – the driver is given steering
assistance without a warning.
Warning – the driver is only warned by
steering wheel vibration.
Both – the driver is given a warning
both from the steering wheel vibrating
and from steering assistance.
Related information
Lane assistance (p. 349)
Limitations of Lane assistance
In certain demanding conditions lane assis-
tance (LKA
94
) may have difficulty helping the
driver correctly. In such cases it is recom-
mended to switch off this function.
Examples of such conditions are:
road works
winter road conditions
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility
roads with unclear or non-existent side
markings
sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
as the steering servo for speed-dependent
steering wheel resistance is working at
reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to
overheating.
The function is unable to detect barriers, rails
or similar obstacles at the side of the carriage-
way.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general lim-
itations.
Related information
Lane assistance (p. 349)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
92
Lane Keeping Aid
93
Lane Keeping Aid
94
Lane Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
353
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
A number of symbols and messages regar-
ding lane assistance (LKA
95
) can be shown
on the driver display. Here are some exam-
ples.
Symbol Message Specification
Driver support system
Reduced functionality Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted
A
.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
95
Lane Keeping Aid
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
354
Symbol Message Specification
Lane Keeping Aid
Apply steering
The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her
hands on the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car.
Lane Keeping Aid
Standby until steering applied
LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshop
A
.
Related information
Lane assistance (p. 349)
Display mode for lane assistance (p. 355)
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 352)
DRIVER SUPPORT
355
Display mode for lane assistance
Lane assistance (LKA
96
) is visualised by sym-
bols in the driver display depending on the
situation.
Here are some examples of
symbols and the situations in
which they are shown:
Available
Available — the lane lines in the symbol are WHITE.
Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane
lines.
Unavailable
Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are GREY.
The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane
lines, the speed is too low or the road is too
narrow.
Indication of steering assistance/warning
Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the
symbol are COLOURED.
Lane assistance indicates that the system is
giving a warning and/or attempting to steer
the car back into the lane.
Related information
Lane assistance (p. 349)
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 352)
96
Lane Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
356
Steering assistance at risk of
collision
The function
Collision avoidance assistance
can help the driver reduce the risk of the car
leaving its lane unintentionally and/or collid-
ing with another vehicle or obstacle by
actively steering the car back into its lane
and/or swerving.
The function consists of these subfunctions:
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision*
After automatic engagement, the driver dis-
play indicates that this has occurred via a text
message:
Collision avoidance assistance Automatic
intervention
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
NOTE
It is always the driver who decides how
much the car should steer – the car can
never take command.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating steering assis-
tance in the event of a collision risk
(p. 357)
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
(p. 357)
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 358)
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 359)
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 360)
Symbols and messages for steering assis-
tance upon risk of collision (p. 361)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
357
Activating or deactivating steering
assistance in the event of a
collision risk
The steering assistance function is optional –
the driver can choose to activate or deacti-
vate it.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
This function is activated automatically each
time the engine is started
97
.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance
assistance function is deactivated, all sub-
functions are switched off:
Steering assistance at risk of road
departure
Steering assistance at risk of oncom-
ing collision
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision*
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to
always have it activated since it improves
driving safety in most cases.
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 356)
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 360)
Steering assistance upon risk of
run-off
Steering assistance has a number of subfunc-
tions. Steering assistance in the event of run-
off risk can help the driver and reduce the risk
of the car accidentally leaving the road by
actively steering the car back onto the road.
The function has two activation levels on inter-
vention:
Steering assistance only
Steering assistance with brake interven-
tion
Steering assistance only
Intervention with steering assistance
97
In certain markets, the setting used when the engine is switched off is reactivated.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
358
Steering assistance with brake intervention
Intervention with steering assistance and braking
Brake intervention helps in situations where
steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The
brake force is adapted automatically depend-
ing on the situation at the time of road run-off.
The function is active within the speed range
65140 km/h (4087 mph) on roads with
clearly visible lane markings/lines.
A camera scans the edges of the road and the
painted side markings. If the car is about to
leave the side of the road, the car is steered
back onto the road and if the steering inter-
vention is not enough to avoid run-off, the
brakes are also activated.
However, the function does not intervene with
either steering assistance or brake interven-
tion if the direction indicators are used. And if
the function detects that the driver is actively
driving the car, activation of the function will
be delayed.
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 356)
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 360)
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
Steering assistance has a number of subfunc-
tions. Steering assistance upon risk of head-
on collision can help a distracted driver who
does not notice that the car is heading into
the opposite lane.
The function can assist by guiding the car back to its
own lane.
Oncoming vehicles
Your car
At the same time as steering intervention is
activated, collision warning for driver support
is also activated. However, the brake pulse
included in the collision warning will not be
activated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
359
The function is active within the speed range
60140 km/h (3787 mph) on roads with
clearly visible lane markings/lines.
If the car is about to leave its own lane while
an oncoming vehicle is approaching at the
same time, the function can help the driver to
steer the car back into its own lane.
However, the function does not intervene with
steering assistance if the direction indicator is
used. And if the function detects that the
driver is actively driving the car, activation of
the function will be delayed.
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 356)
Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 344)
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 360)
Steering assistance upon risk of
rear-end collision*
Steering assistance has a number of subfunc-
tions. Steering assistance if there is a risk of
rear-end collision can help a distracted driver
who does not notice that the car is about to
leave its own lane while an oncoming vehicle
is approaching at the same time, either from
behind or in the blind spot.
The function can assist by steering the car back to its
own lane.
Other vehicle in the blind spot
Your car
If the car is about to leave its own lane while
another vehicle is in the blind spot, or another
vehicle is approaching rapidly in an adjacent
lane at the same time, the function can help
the driver to steer the car back into its own
lane.
The function can even assist if the driver inten-
tionally changes lanes using direction indica-
tors without noticing that another vehicle is
approaching.
The function is active within the speed range
60140 km/h (3787 mph) on roads with
clearly visible lane markings/lines.
The lamps in the door mirrors flash during
steering intervention, regardless of whether
the BLIS
98
function is activated.
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 356)
BLIS* (p. 363)
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 360)
98
Blind Spot Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
360
Limitations for steering assistance
at risk of collision
In certain situations the function may have
limited functionality and fail to intervene in
the following cases, for example:
for small vehicles, such as motorcycles
if the majority of the car has steered into
the adjacent lane
on roads/in lanes with unclear or non-exis-
tent lane markings
outside the speed range 60140 km/h
(3787 mph)
as the steering servo for speed-dependent
steering wheel resistance is working at
reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to
overheating.
Other demanding situations can include:
road works
winter road conditions
narrow roads
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility.
In these demanding situations, the function
may have difficulty helping the driver correctly.
In such cases it is recommended to switch off
this function.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general lim-
itations.
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 356)
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
(p. 357)
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 358)
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 359)
DRIVER SUPPORT
361
Symbols and messages for
steering assistance upon risk of
collision
A number of symbols and messages regar-
ding steering assistance may be shown in the
driver display. Here are some examples.
Symbol Message Specification
Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the
system has been activated.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 356)
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 360)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
362
Rear Collision Warning*
99
The Rear Collision Warning
100
(RCW) func-
tion can help the driver to avoid being hit by a
vehicle approaching from behind.
Drivers in vehicles behind can be warned
about an imminent collision by the function
flashing intensively with the direction indica-
tors.
If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the
function detects that the car is in danger of
being hit from behind, the seatbelt tensioners
may tension the front seatbelts. The Whiplash
Protection System is also activated in the
event of a collision.
Immediately before a collision from behind,
this function may also activate the foot brake
in order to reduce the forward acceleration of
the car during the collision. However, the foot
brake is only activated if the car is stationary.
The foot brake releases immediately if the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
This function is activated automatically each
time the engine is started.
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning*
(p. 362)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 45)
Limitations of Rear Collision
Warning*
101
In certain cases the Rear Collision Warning
(RCW) may have difficulty helping the driver
in the event of a collision risk.
This can, for example, be if:
the vehicle approaching from behind is
detected too late
the vehicle approaching from behind
changes lane at the last moment
a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is con-
nected to the car's electrical system - the
function is then deactivated automatically.
NOTE
In certain markets, RCW does not give a
warning with the direction indicators due
to local traffic regulations - in such cases,
this part of the function is deactivated.
99
Rear collision warning.
100
The function is not available in all markets.
101
Rear collision warning.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
363
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for
Rear Collision Warning* is deactivated if
the warning distance for collision warning
in the City Safety function is set at the low-
est level "
Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general lim-
itations.
Related information
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 362)
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety (p. 292)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
BLIS*
The BLIS
102
function is intended to help the
driver detect vehicles diagonally behind and
to the side of the car so as to provide assis-
tance in heavy traffic on roads with several
lanes in the same direction.
Location of BLIS lamp
BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning
of:
vehicles in the car's blind spot
quickly approaching vehicles in the left
and right lanes closest to the car.
Principle of BLIS
Zone in blind spot
Zone for quickly approaching vehicle
The system is designed to react when:
your car is overtaken by other vehicles
another vehicle is quickly approaching
your car.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the
indicator lamp on the door mirror on the affec-
ted side illuminates with a constant glow. If
the driver activates the direction indicator on
the same side as the warning, the indicator
lamp will change over from a constant glow to
flashing with a more intense light.
102
Blind Spot Information
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
364
BLIS is active when the driver's vehicle is trav-
elling at a speed above 10 km/h (6 mph).
If passing vehicles drive more than 15 km/h
(9 mph) faster than the driver's vehicle, BLIS
will not react.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle.
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating BLIS (p. 364)
Limitations of BLIS (p. 365)
Messages for BLIS (p. 366)
Activating or deactivating BLIS
The BLIS
103
function can be activated or
deactivated.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
If BLIS is activated when starting the engine,
the function is confirmed by the door mirror
indicator lamps blinking once.
If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was
switched off, it will continue to be deactivated
when the engine is next started and no indica-
tor lights will then be illuminated.
Related information
BLIS* (p. 363)
Limitations of BLIS (p. 365)
103
Blind Spot Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
365
Limitations of BLIS
The BLIS
104
function may have limitations in
certain situations.
Keep the surface indicated clean – on both the left
and right-hand sides of the car
105
.
Examples of limitations:
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may reduce the functions and deactivate
alerts.
The BLIS function is automatically deacti-
vated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is
connected to the car's electrical system.
For good performance of BLIS, there
should be no bicycle rack, luggage carrier
or similar mounted on the car's towbar.
WARNING
BLIS does not work on sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is
reversing.
NOTE
This function uses the car's radar units,
which have certain general limitations.
Related information
BLIS* (p. 363)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
104
Blind Spot Information
105
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
366
Messages for BLIS
A number of messages regarding BLIS
106
can
be shown in the driver display. Here are some
examples.
Message Specification
Blind spot sensor
Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted
A
.
Blind spot system off
Trailer attached
BLIS and CTA
B
have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
B
Cross Traffic Alert*
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshop
A
.
Related information
BLIS* (p. 363)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 371)
106
Blind Spot Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
367
Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is
intended to help make the driver aware that
he or she is starting to drive less consistently,
e.g. if the driver becomes distracted or starts
to fall asleep.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete-
riorating driving ability and it is primarily
intended for major roads. The function is not
intended for city traffic.
The function is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long
as the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph).
DAC reads the position of the car in the lane.
A camera detects the edge markings painted
on the carriageway and compares the align-
ment of the road with the driver’s steering
wheel movements.
The car is being driven erratically in the lane.
If driving behaviour becomes
noticeably inconsistent, the
driver is alerted by this sym-
bol in the driver display, com-
bined with an acoustic signal
and the text message
Time
to take a break.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*
and has the function
Rest Stop Guidance
activated, suggestions for an appropriate
place for a break are also displayed.
The warning is repeated after a time if driving
behaviour has not improved.
WARNING
Driver Alert Control should not be used to
extend a period of driving. The driver
should instead plan for breaks at regular
intervals and make sure they are well
rested.
WARNING
An alarm from Driver Alert Control should
be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is
often not aware of his/her own condition.
If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued:
Stop the car safely as soon as possible
and rest.
Studies have shown that it is just as dan-
gerous to drive while tired as it is to drive
under the influence of alcohol or other
stimulants.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
368
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating Driver Alert
Control (p. 368)
Select rest stop guidance in the event of a
warning from Driver Alert Control (p. 368)
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
(p. 369)
Activating or deactivating Driver
Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can
be activated or deactivated.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Select
My Car IntelliSafe Driver
Alert
.
3.
Select or deselect
Alertness Warning to
activate or deactivate the function.
Related information
Driver Alert Control (p. 367)
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
(p. 369)
Select rest stop guidance in the
event of a warning from Driver
Alert Control
In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
the driver can activate a guide that can auto-
matically suggest an appropriate rest area
when Driver Alert Control (DAC) issues a
warning.
It is possible to select whether the Rest Stop
Guidance function should be activated or
deactivated.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Select
My Car IntelliSafe Driver
Alert
.
3.
Select or deselect
Rest Stop Guidance
to activate or deactivate the function.
Related information
Driver Alert Control (p. 367)
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
(p. 369)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
369
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
In some cases the system may issue a warn-
ing despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
in strong side winds
on rutted road surfaces.
WARNING
In some cases, driving behaviour is not
affected despite driver fatigue – e.g. when
using the Pilot Assist* function – resulting
in the driver not getting a warning from
DAC.
It is therefore important to always stop and
take a break at the slightest feeling of fati-
gue, regardless of whether the function has
given a warning.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general lim-
itations.
Related information
Driver Alert Control (p. 367)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Distance Warning*
107
The Distance Warning function can assist the
driver to notice that the time interval to the
vehicle ahead may be too short. This requires
the car to be equipped with a head-up dis-
play* to be able to display Distance Warning.
Distance Warning symbol on the windscreen with
head-up display.
In cars equipped with head-up display, a sym-
bol is shown on the windscreen for as long as
the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter
than the preset value. However, this assumes
that the
Show Driver Support function is
activated via the settings in the car's menu
system.
Distance warning is active at speeds
above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to
the vehicle ahead travelling in the same direc-
tion. No distance information is provided for
oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may
make the visual warning signal in the wind-
screen difficult to recognise.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the
time the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot
Assist* is active.
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the time
window to the vehicle ahead is shorter
than the preset value – the speed of the
driver's vehicle is not affected.
107
Distance Alert
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
370
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Related information
Activating or deactivating distance warn-
ing (p. 370)
Limitations of Distance Warning (p. 370)
Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 347)
Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 344)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Activating or deactivating distance
warning
108
The distance warning function can be deacti-
vated. The function is only available in cars
that can show information on the windscreen
with a so-called head-up display*.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
Distance Warning is activated automatically
each time the engine is started.
Related information
Distance Warning* (p. 369)
Limitations of Distance Warning (p. 370)
Limitations of Distance Warning
109
The distance warning function may have limi-
tations in certain situations. The function is
only available in cars that can show informa-
tion on the windscreen with a so-called head-
up display*.
WARNING
A vehicle's size may affect the ability to
be detected, e.g. motorcycles, which
could mean that the warning lamp illu-
minates at a shorter time window than
set or that the warning is temporarily
absent.
Extremely high speeds can cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter time
window than that set due to limitations
in radar unit range.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general lim-
itations.
Related information
Distance Warning* (p. 369)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
371
Cross Traffic Alert*
110
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a driver support
that supplements BLIS
111
and is designed to
help the driver detect traffic crossing behind
the car when it is reversing.
The auto-brake subfunction can help the
driver to stop the car in the event of a risk of
collision with an unobserved vehicle.
Examples of areas where CTA can assist the driver to
detect obstacles during reversing.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In
favourable conditions it may also be able to
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and
pedestrians.
The function is only active if the car rolls back-
wards or if reverse gear has been selected.
If CTA senses that something is approaching
from the side, this is also indicated with:
an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in
the left-hand or right-hand speaker
according to the direction from which the
object approaches.
an illuminated icon in the
Park Assist
System graphic on the screen.
an icon on the Park assist camera top
view.
Illuminated icon for Cross Traffic Alert in the Park
Assist System graphic on the screen.
If the driver does not observe the warning
from CTA and a collision is unavoidable, the
auto-brake function takes effect to stop the
car, after which the driver display shows an
explanatory text message on why the car was
braked.
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
108
Distance Alert
109
Distance Alert
110
Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
111
Blind Spot Information
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
372
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Activating or deactivating Cross Traffic
Alert* (p. 372)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 372)
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 374)
BLIS* (p. 363)
Park Assist* (p. 375)
Activating or deactivating Cross
Traffic Alert*
112
The driver can choose to switch off the Cross
Traffic Alert (CTA) function.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
The function is activated automatically each
time the engine is started.
Related information
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 371)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 372)
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 374)
Limitations of Cross Traffic
Alert*
113
The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function with
auto-brake may have limited functionality in
certain situations. Brake intervention is active
at speeds below 15 km/h.
WARNING
The auto-brake subfunction can only
detect and brake for other vehicles that are
moving – not for stationary obstacles, a
cyclist or a pedestrian, for example.
CTA has a certain limitation – the CTA sensors
cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or
obstructions, for example.
Here are some examples of situations where
CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited
and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
112
Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
113
Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
373
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely
“blind” on one side.
Blind CTA sector.
Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”.
However, as your car slowly reverses, the
angle it makes with the obstructing vehicle/
object changes and the blind sector rapidly
decreases.
Examples of further limitations
The auto-brake subfunction only detects
moving vehicles and therefore cannot
"see" and brake for stationary obstacles, a
cyclist or a pedestrian, for example.
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may reduce the functions and deactivate
alerts.
CTA is automatically deactivated if a
trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected
to the car's electrical system.
For good performance of CTA, there
should be no bicycle rack, luggage carrier
or similar mounted on the car's towbar.
NOTE
This function uses the car's radar units,
which have certain general limitations.
Related information
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 371)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
374
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert*
114
A number of messages regarding Cross
Traffic Alert (CTA) can be shown in the driver
display. Here are some examples.
Message Specification
Blind spot sensor
Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted
A
.
Blind spot system off
Trailer attached
BLIS
B
and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
B
Blind Spot Information System
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshop
A
.
Related information
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 371)
BLIS* (p. 363)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 372)
114
Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
375
Park Assist*
The Parking Assistance System (PAS
115
) uses
sensors to assist the driver when manoeu-
vring in tight spaces by indicating the dis-
tance to obstacles through acoustic signals
combined with a graphic in the centre dis-
play.
Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sec-
tors.
The centre display shows an overview of the
relationship between the car and detected
obstacles.
The highlighted sector indicates the location
of the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to
a highlighted sector box at the front/back, the
shorter the distance between the car and
detected obstacle.
The side sectors change colour as the distance
between the car and an object is reduced.
The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the
audio system is muted automatically.
The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to
the sides is active when the car is moving but
stops after the car has been stationary for
approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind is also active when the car is
stationary.
At a distance within approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from
an obstacle behind or in front of the car, the
tone is constant and the active sensor field
closest to the car symbol is filled.
At a distance within approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft)
from an obstacle To the sides, the tone pulses
intensively and the active sector field changes
colour from ORANGE to RED.
The volume of the parking assistance signal
can be adjusted while the signal is sounding
by means of the [>II] knob on the centre con-
sole. Adjustment can also be performed in the
top view's
Settings menu option.
NOTE
Except in the sector nearest to the car
symbol, audible warnings are only given for
objects directly in the path of the car.
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
115
Park Assist System
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
376
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the
sides* (p. 376)
Activating or deactivating the parking
assistance system* (p. 377)
Symbols and messages for Park Assist
Pilot (p. 380)
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 378)
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and
along the sides*
Parking Assistance System (PAS
116
) has dif-
ferent behaviour depending on which part of
the car is approaching an obstacle.
Forwards
The warning signal has a constant tone at less than
approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle.
The Parking Assistance System's front detec-
tors are activated automatically when the
engine is started. They are active at speeds
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range is approx. 80 cm (2.5 ft)
in front of the car.
NOTE
Parking assistance is deactivated when the
parking brake is used or P mode is
selected in a car with an automatic gear-
box.
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors -
the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived
as an obstacle.
Backwards
The warning signal has a constant tone at less than
approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle.
116
Park Assist System
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
377
The sensors for reverse are activated if the car
rolls backward without a gear engaged or
when the gear lever is moved to reverse posi-
tion.
The measuring range is approx. 1.5 metres
(5 ft) behind the car.
When reversing with a trailer connected to the
car's electrical system, parking assistance
backward is deactivated automatically.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike
carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genu-
ine trailer wiring - parking assistance may
need to be switched off manually in order
that the sensors do not react to them.
Along the sides
The warning signal pulses intensively at less than
approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from an obstacle.
Parking assistance side sensors are activated
automatically when the engine is started. They
are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range is approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft)
from the sides.
However, the detection range of the side sen-
sors increases significantly when the steering
angle of the front wheels is increased, and
obstacles of up to approx. 90 cm (3 ft) located
diagonally behind or in front of the vehicle are
detected when the steering wheel is turned.
Related information
Park Assist* (p. 375)
Sensor fields for parking assistance sys-
tem (p. 386)
Activating or deactivating the
parking assistance system*
The Parking Assistance System (PAS
117
) can
be activated or deactivated.
The front and side parking assistance detec-
tors are activated automatically when the
engine is started. The rear detectors are acti-
vated if the car rolls backwards or when
reverse gear is engaged.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
In cars equipped with a park assist camera*,
Park Assist Pilot can also be activated or deac-
tivated from the relevant camera view.
Related information
Park Assist* (p. 375)
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 378)
DRIVER SUPPORT
378
Limitations of Parking assistance
The Parking Assistance System (PAS
118
) can-
not detect everything in all situations and
may therefore have limited functionality in
some cases.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations:
WARNING
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
Pay particular attention if there are
people and animals near the car.
Bear in mind that the front of the car
may swing out towards oncoming traf-
fic during the parking manoeuvre.
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a
trailer, bicycle rack or sim-
ilar is mounted and electri-
cally connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward
are switched off and will not warn of any
obstacles.
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or
low barriers may be in the "signal shadow"
and are then temporarily not detected by
the sensors - the pulsating tone may then
unexpectedly stop instead of changing
over to the expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects,
such as projecting loading docks.
In such situations, pay extra attention
and manoeuvre/reposition the car par-
ticularly slowly or stop the current
parking manoeuvre - there may be a
high risk of damage to vehicles or
other objects since information from
the sensors is not always reliable in
such situations.
117
Park Assist System
118
Park Assist System
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
379
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning
signals that are caused by external sound
sources with the same ultrasonic frequen-
cies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,
exhaust noises from motorcycles, etc.
NOTE
Since a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, towbar protrusion is
included when the function measures the
distance to an object behind the car.
Related information
Park Assist* (p. 375)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
380
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot
Symbols and messages for Parking Assis-
tance System (PAS
119
) can be shown in the
driver display and/or the centre display. Here
are some examples.
Symbol Message Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warn-
ings for obstacles/objects.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning nee-
ded
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possi-
ble.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted
A
.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshop
A
.
Related information
Park Assist* (p. 375)
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 378)
119
Park Assist System
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
381
Park assist camera*
Park assist camera (PAC
120
) can assist the
driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by
indicating obstacles with a camera image and
graphics in the centre display.
The park assist camera is a support function
which is activated automatically when reverse
gear is selected or manually via the centre dis-
play.
Example of camera view.
Zoom
121
- zoom in/out
360° view* - activates/deactivates all
cameras
PAS
122
- activates/deactivates the parking
assistance sensors
Lines - activates/deactivates park assist
lines
Towbar* - activates/deactivates the tow-
bar park assist line*
123
CTA* - activates/deactivates Cross Traffic
Alert
Objects/obstacles may be closer to the car
than they appear to be on screen.
WARNING
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
Pay particular attention if there are
people and animals near the car.
Bear in mind that the front of the car
may swing out towards oncoming traf-
fic during the parking manoeuvre.
120
Park Assist Camera
121
The park assist lines are switched off when zooming in.
122
Park Assist System
123
Not available for all models and markets.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
382
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Park assist camera locations and surveil-
lance areas* (p. 382)
Park assist lines for park assist camera*
(p. 384)
Sensor fields for parking assistance sys-
tem (p. 386)
Activate park assist camera (p. 388)
Symbols and messages for Park assist
camera (p. 389)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Park Assist* (p. 375)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 371)
Park assist camera locations and
surveillance areas*
The Park assist cameras (PAC
124
) can display
a composite 360° view and separate views
for each of the four cameras: rear, front, left
or right camera view.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
383
360° view*
The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with
approximate coverage area.
The 360° view function activates all parking
cameras, whereupon the four sides of the car
are shown simultaneously in the centre dis-
play, which helps the driver to observe what is
around the car when manoeuvring at slow
speeds.
From the 360° view, each camera view can
be activated separately:
Press the screen for the desired “field of
vision” of the camera, e.g. on the surface
in front of/above the front camera.
A camera symbol on the cen-
tre display's car symbol indi-
cates which of the cameras is
active.
If the car is also equipped
with
Park Assist System*
then distance to detected obstacles is illus-
trated with fields in different colours.
The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually.
Backwards
The backwards-facing camera is fitted above the reg-
istration plate.
The backward-facing camera shows a wide
area behind the car. For certain models, part
of the bumper can be seen as well as the tow-
bar in some cases.
Objects shown in the centre display may
appear slightly tilted — this is normal.
Forwards
The forwards parking camera is located in the grille.
The front camera can be helpful on an exit
road with limited visibility to the sides, e.g.
when driving out of a garage. It is active at
speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph) - following
which, the front camera is switched off.
If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph)
and the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph)
within 1 minute after the forward-facing cam-
era has been extinguished, the camera is reac-
tivated.
124
Park Assist Camera
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
384
The sides
The side cameras are positioned in each door mirror.
The side cameras can show what is along
each side of the car.
Related information
Park assist camera* (p. 381)
Activate park assist camera (p. 388)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Park assist lines for park assist
camera*
The Park assist cameras (PAC
125
) indicate the
position of the car in relation to its surround-
ings by displaying lines on the screen.
Example of park assist lines
Park assist lines show the intended route for
the car's external dimensions with the current
steering wheel angle - this can facilitate paral-
lel parking, reversing into tight spaces and
when connecting a trailer.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and
respond directly to steering wheel move-
ments, showing the driver the path the car will
take - also when the car is turning.
These park assist lines include the car's most
protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and
corners.
NOTE
When reversing with a trailer which is
not connected electrically to the car,
the park assist lines on the display
show the route the car will take – not
the trailer.
The screen shows no park assist lines
when a trailer is connected electrically
to the car's electrical system.
Park assist lines are not shown when
zooming in.
125
Park Assist Camera
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
385
IMPORTANT
Remember, that with the rear camera
view selected, the monitor only dis-
plays the area behind the car. Be
aware of the sides and front of the car
when manoeuvring in reverse.
The same applies vice versa - note
what happens to the rear parts of the
car when the front camera view is
selected.
Note that the park assist lines show
the shortest route. Therefore, pay extra
attention to the car's sides so that they
do not go against/over something
when the steering wheel is turned
when driving forward or that the front
sweeps against/over something when
the steering wheel is turned when
reversing.
Park assist lines in 360° view*
360° view with park assist lines
With the 360° view, park assist lines are
shown behind, in front of and at the side of the
car (depending on the direction of travel):
When driving forwards: Front lines
When reversing: Side lines and reversing
lines
With front or rear camera selected, the park
assist lines appear regardless of the car's
direction of travel.
With one side camera selected, the park assist
lines only appear when reversing.
Towbar assist line*
Towbar with park assist line
Towbar - activates the towbar assist line.
Zoom - zoom in/out.
The camera can facilitate connecting up to a
trailer by showing an assist line representing
the towbar's intended "path" to the trailer.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
386
1.
Press
Towbar (1).
> The park assist lines for the towbar's
intended "path" appear - the car's park
assist lines disappear simultaneously.
Park assist lines for both car and tow-
bar cannot be shown at the same time.
2.
Press
Zoom (2) when a more precise
manoeuvring is required.
> The camera view zooms in.
Related information
Park assist camera* (p. 381)
Park assist camera locations and surveil-
lance areas* (p. 382)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Towbar* (p. 483)
Sensor fields for parking
assistance system
If the car is equipped with the Parking Assis-
tance System (PAS
126
) then the distance is
shown in the Parking Assistance Camera
(PAC
127
) 360° view with coloured fields for
each sensor that registers an obstacle.
Sensor fields backwards and forwards
The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the
car symbol.
The fields for the sensors for forwards and
reverse change colour as the distance to the
126
Park Assist System
127
Park Assist Camera
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
387
obstacle decreases – from AMBER through
ORANGE to RED.
Field colour
reverse
Distance in metres
(feet)
Yellow 0.61.5 (2.04.9)
Orange 0.30.6 (1.02.0)
Red 00.3 (01.0)
Field colour
forwards
Distance in metres
(feet)
Yellow 0.60.8 (2,02.6)
Orange 0.30.6 (1.02.0)
Red 00.3 (01.0)
For RED sensor fields, the pulsating acoustic
signal changes over to a constant tone.
Sensor field to the sides
Warning signals depend on the intended route
of the car. When the steering wheel is turned,
therefore, there may also be a warning for
obstacles diagonally in front of or diagonally
behind the car, not just straight ahead or
directly behind.
Parking sensor sectors where obstacles can be
detected.
Left-hand side front sensor field
Obstacle sector in the car's intended route
forwards – depending on steering wheel
angle
Sector with RED field colour and inten-
sively pulsing tone
Right-hand side rear sensor field
Obstacle sector in the car's intended route
in reverse – depending on steering wheel
angle.
The colour of the side fields changes with
reduced distance to the obstacle – from
AMBER to RED.
Colour of side
fields
Distance in metres
(feet)
Yellow 0.250.9 (0.83.0)
Red 00.25 (00.8)
In the case of RED sensor fields, the acoustic
signal changes from pulsing to intensively
pulsing.
Related information
Park Assist* (p. 375)
Park assist camera* (p. 381)
Park assist camera locations and surveil-
lance areas* (p. 382)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
388
Activate park assist camera
The park assist camera (PAC
128
) is activated
automatically when reverse gear is engaged
or manually with one of the centre display's
function buttons.
Camera view when reversing
When reverse gear is engaged, the screen
shows the 360° view if it or any of the side
views was the last used camera view, other-
wise the rear view is shown.
Camera view for manual camera
activation
Activate the parking camera
with this button in the centre
display's function view.
The screen then initially
shows the last used camera
view. However, after each
engine start, the previously shown side view is
replaced by the 360° view and the previously
shown zoomed rear view is replaced by the
rear view.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
Automatic deactivation of camera
The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h
(16 mph) to avoid distracting the driver – it
reactivates automatically if the speed drops to
22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute, on the con-
dition that the speed has not exceeded
50 km/h (31 mph).
Other camera views are extinguished at
15 km/h (9 mph) and not reactivated.
Related information
Park assist camera* (p. 381)
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 378)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
128
Park Assist Camera
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
389
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera
Symbols and messages for Park assist cam-
era (PAC
129
) can be shown in the driver dis-
play and/or the centre display. Here are some
examples.
Symbol Message Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings
and field marks for obstacles/objects.
The camera is disengaged.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning nee-
ded
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted
A
.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
129
Park Assist Camera
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
390
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshop
A
.
Related information
Park assist camera* (p. 381)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
391
Park Assist Pilot*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP
130
) can assist the
driver to manoeuvre the car while parking.
The function can also assist with steering
when driving out from parallel parking.
The function first checks if a space is large
enough and if so then assists the driver to
steer the car into the space.
The centre display indicates with symbols,
graphics and text the various operations to be
carried out and when to do so.
WARNING
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate dis-
tance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and reg-
ulations.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 392)
Using Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393)
Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist
Pilot* (p. 396)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 396)
Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 399)
130
Park Assist Pilot
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
392
Parking variants with Park Assist
Pilot*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP
131
) can be used for
both parallel and perpendicular parking.
Parallel parking
The principal of parallel parking.
The function parks the car using the following
steps:
1. A parking space is identified and meas-
ured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
3. The car is positioned in the space by
means of driving forward/backward.
With the
Park Out function, a parallel-parked
car can also get help from the function with
leaving the parking space.
Perpendicular parking
Principle for perpendicular parking.
The function parks the car using the following
steps:
1. A parking space is identified and meas-
ured.
2. The car is reversed into the space and
then positioned in the space by means of
driving forward/backward.
NOTE
When leaving a parking space, the Park
Out function must only be used for a paral-
lel-parked car - it does not work for a per-
pendicular-parked car.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 391)
Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist
Pilot* (p. 396)
131
Park Assist Pilot
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
393
Using Park Assist Pilot*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP
132
) helps the driver
park via three steps. The function can also
help the driver to leave a parking space.
This function measures space and steers the
car – the driver's job is to:
keep an eye on what is happening around
the car
follow the instructions in the centre dis-
play
select a gear (reverse/forward) – an
acoustic signal indicates when the driver
should change gear
regulate and maintain a safe speed
brake and stop.
Symbols, graphic and/or text appear on the
centre display when the different steps are to
be performed.
The function can be activated if the following
criteria are met once the engine has been
started:
No trailer is attached to the car
Speed is lower than 30 km/h (20 mph).
NOTE
The distance between the car and parking
spaces should be 0.51.5 metres
(1.65.0 ft) while the function is searching
for a parking space.
Parking with Park Assist Pilot
The function parks the car using the following
steps:
1. A parking space is identified and meas-
ured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
3. The car is positioned into the space - the
system may then request that the driver
changes gear and brakes.
Find and measure parking spaces
The function can be activated
in the centre display's func-
tion view.
It can also be accessed from
the camera views.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
Principle for searching before parallel parking.
Principle for searching before perpendicular parking.
Drive at a maximum of 30 km/h (20 mph)
before parking.
132
Park Assist Pilot
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
394
1.
Tap on the
Park In button in the function
view or in the camera view.
> The function searches for a parking
space and checks whether it is big
enough.
2. Be prepared to stop the car when the
graphic and message on the centre dis-
play state that a suitable parking space
has been found.
> A pop-up window is shown.
3.
Select
Parallel parking or Perpendicular
parking and select reverse gear.
NOTE
The function searches the area for parking,
displays instructions and guides the car in
on its passenger side. But if required the
car can also be parked on the driver's side
of the street:
Activate the direction indicator to the
driver's side - then the system
searches for a parking space on that
side of the car instead.
Reversing in to the parking space
Principle for reversing into parallel parking.
Principle for reversing into perpendicular parking.
1. Check that the area behind the car is clear,
then engage reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without
touching the steering wheel - and no
faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instruc-
ted by the graphic and message on the
centre display.
NOTE
Keep your hands away from the steer-
ing wheel when the function is acti-
vated.
Make sure that the steering wheel is
not hindered in any way and can rotate
freely.
To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned
before starting to drive backward/
forward.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
395
Positioning the car in the parking space
Principle for positioning during parallel parking.
Principle for positioning during perpendicular park-
ing.
1. Move the gear selector to the gear posi-
tion as instructed by the system, wait until
the steering wheel has been turned and
drive forward slowly.
2. Be prepared to stop the car when instruc-
ted by the graphic and message on the
centre display.
3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly back-
wards.
4. Be prepared to brake the car when
instructed by the graphic and message on
the centre display.
The function is deactivated automatically and
the graphics and message show that parking
is complete. It may be necessary for the driver
to correct the car’s position. Only the driver
can determine whether the car is properly
parked.
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by Park Assist Pilot
(PAP
133
) compared with when Park Assist
System uses the sensors.
Auto-brake during parking sequence
If the parking sensors detect a vehicle or
pedestrian within the intended route in front of
or behind the car during a parking manoeuvre,
the car is auto-braked to stationary.
The driver display then shows a pop-up mes-
sage where the driver can choose to cancel
the parking manoeuvre by tapping on
Cancel,
or tap Resume to continue the parking
sequence.
Proceed as follows after selecting
Resume:
Check that there is free space around the
car and follow the instructions in the cen-
tre display, such as:
To continueGently accelerate away
from object.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 391)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 396)
133
Park Assist Pilot
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
396
Leaving parallel parking with Park
Assist Pilot*
The
Park Out function can help the driver to
leave a parking space when the car is parallel
parked.
NOTE
When leaving a parking space, the Park
Out function must only be used for a paral-
lel-parked car - it does not work for a per-
pendicular-parked car.
The Park Out function is acti-
vated in the centre display's
function view or in the cam-
era view.
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
1.
Tap on the
Park Out button in the func-
tion view or in the camera view.
2. Use the direction indicator to select the
direction in which the car should leave the
parking space.
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instruc-
ted by the graphic and message on the
centre display - follow the instructions in
the same way as for the parking proce-
dure.
Note the steering wheel can "spring" back
when the function is completed - the driver
may then need to turn the steering wheel back
to the maximum steering angle in order to
leave the parking space.
If the function considers that the driver can
leave the parking space without any extra
manoeuvring then the function will be stop-
ped, even if the driver may consider that the
car is still in the parking space.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 391)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 396)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
The Park Assist Pilot (PAP
134
) function cannot
detect everything in all situations and may
therefore have limited functionality.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations.
WARNING
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
Pay particular attention if there are
people and animals near the car.
Bear in mind that the front of the car
may swing out towards oncoming traf-
fic during the parking manoeuvre.
IMPORTANT
Objects situated higher than the sensor
detection area are not included when cal-
culating the parking manoeuvre, which
could cause the function to swing into the
parking space too early – such parking
spaces should be avoided for this reason.
134
Park Assist Pilot
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
397
Parking is discontinued
A parking sequence will be discontinued:
if the driver moves the steering wheel
if the car is driven too quickly - above
7 km/h (4 mph)
if the driver presses
Cancel in the centre
display
when the anti-lock brakes or the Elec-
tronic stability control are engaged - e.g.
when a wheel loses grip on a slippery road
as the steering servo for speed-dependent
steering wheel resistance is working at
reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to
overheating
when the parking sensors detect a vehicle
or pedestrian within the intended route in
front of or behind the car during a parking
manoeuvre, the car is auto-braked to sta-
tionary.
Where applicable, a message in the centre
display states the reason for a parking
sequence being discontinued.
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, the function
is unable to find parking spaces - one rea-
son for this may be the fact that there is
interference with the sensors from external
sound sources which emit the same ultra-
sound frequencies as those with which the
system works.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes
and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
will reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.
Driver responsibility
The driver should bear in mind that the func-
tion is an aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic
function. The driver must therefore be pre-
pared to interrupt a parking step.
There are also a few details to bear in mind
while parking, e.g.:
The driver is always responsible for deter-
mining whether the space selected by the
function is suitable for parking.
Do not use the function if snow chains or
a spare wheel are fitted.
Do not use the function if cargo items are
protruding from the car.
Heavy rain or snow may cause the system
to measure the parking space incorrectly.
During the search and check-measure-
ment of the parking space, the function
may miss objects positioned deep in the
parking space.
Parking spaces on narrow streets are not
always feasible, since the space required
for manoeuvring may not be sufficient.
Use approved tyres
135
with the correct
tyre pressure - this affects the ability of
the function to park the car.
The function bases itself on the locations
of vehicles already parked nearby – if they
are inappropriately parked, your own car's
tyres and wheel rims may be damaged by
contact with the kerb.
Perpendicular parking spaces may be
missed or offered unnecessarily if one
135
"Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted on delivery from the factory.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
398
parked car is protruding more than other
parked cars.
The function is designed for parking on
straight streets – not sharp curves or
bends. For this reason, make sure the car
is parallel to the potential parking spaces
when the function measures the space.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 391)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
399
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
Messages for Park Assist Pilot (PAP
136
) can
be shown in the driver display and/or the
centre display. Here are some examples.
Message Specification
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted
A
.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshop
A
.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 391)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 396)
136
Park Assist Pilot
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
400
Radar unit
The radar unit is used by several driver sup-
port systems and has the task of sensing
other vehicles.
Radar unit location
The radar unit is used by the following func-
tions:
Distance Warning*
Adaptive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
Lane assistance
City Safety
Modification of the radar unit could result in its
use being illegal.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Recommended maintenance for camera
and radar unit (p. 412)
Type approval for radar device (p. 401)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
401
Type approval for radar device
Here you can find type approval for the car's
radar units for adaptive cruise control*
(ACC
137
), Pilot Assist* and BLIS*
138
.
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS Symbol Type approval
Botswana
Brazil
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência
a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Modelo: L2C0054TR
4122148645
EAN: (01)07897843840855
Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode
causar interferência em sistemas devidamente autorizados.
035631705364
137
Adaptive Cruise Control
138
Blind Spot Information
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
402
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS Symbol Type approval
Europe
Hereby, Delphi Electronics and Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
201453EU (RED). The original declaration of conformity can be accessed at the following
link www.delphi.com/automotive-homologation.
Frequency Band: 76GHz – 77GHz
Maximum Output Power: 55dBm EIRP
The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E.
Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
Hereby, Hella KgaA Hueck & Co. Declares that the radio equipment type RS4 is in
compliance with Directive 201453EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
www.hella.com/vcc.
Technical information: Frequency range: 24.05 ... 24.25 GHz Transmission power: 20 dBm
(maximum) EIRP
Manufacturer and Address: Manufacturer: Hella KGaA Hueck & Co. Address: Rixbecker
Straße 75, 59552 Lippstadt, Germany
The United
Arab Emirates
(UAE)
Registered No: ER3753615
Dealer No: DA3738015
Registered No: ER5387817
Dealer No: DA4493215
Ghana
NCA Approved: 1R31M7E10B7
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
403
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS Symbol Type approval
Indonesia
37295POSTEL2014
4927
Certificate number: 50459SDPPI2017
Country of origin Germany
Certificate number: 53578SDPPI2017
Country of origin China
PLG ID: 6051
Jamaica
This product contains a Type Approved Module by Jamaica: SMA – “RS4”.
Jordan
Type Approval No.: TRCLPD2014255
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Type Approval No.: TRCLPD201763
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Malaysia
CID F 15000578
Morocco
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26122014
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
404
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS Symbol Type approval
Mexico
IFETEL: RLVDEL2150299
Radar de corto alcance
RS4
Hella KGaA Hueck & Co
IFETEL: RLVHERS170286
La operación de este equipo esta sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que
este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo
debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
Moldova
Nigeria
Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the Nigerian
Communications Commission.
Oman
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
405
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS Symbol Type approval
Russia
Serbia
И011 14
И011 17
Singapore
DA 105753
DA 103238
South Africa
TA20141824
TA20163407
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
406
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS Symbol Type approval
South Korea
Certification No.
MSIPCMI- DPHL2C0054TR
RCMMHLARS4
기기는 󹚁무용(A) 전자파 적합기기로서 매자 또는 사용 자는 점을 주의하시기
, 가정외의 지역에서 사용 하는 것을 󸭥적으 합니다
Taiwan
CCAB15LP0560T3
CCAB17LP0470T5
警語 經型式認證合格之低󰀦率射頻電機,非經許可,公司商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率
󰀧 大󰀦率或變更原設計之特性及󰀦能 低󰀦率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法
通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應立即停用 ,並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用 前項合法通信,指依
電信法規定作業之無線電通信低󰀦率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波輻
射性電機設備之干擾
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
407
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS Symbol Type approval
Ukraine
Delphi  є, щ  RACAMSRR2 є  П
      
(ь)  (П КМ № 679  24  2009 .) 
 ь   Delphi  : Delphi.
 : 24,05 – 24,25 
Пь : 20 Б (.) EIRP
 HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA є, щ    RS4
є      
201453/Є. П    ь   :
www.hella.com/vcc
 : 24,05 – 24,25 
Пь : 20 Б (.) EIRP
Vietnam
Zambia
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
408
Type approval for radio equipment
Market Symbol Type approval
Europe
Hereby, Volvo cars, declares that all radio equipment's are in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 201453EU.
Japan
R 204750001
This device is granted pursuant to the Japanese Radio Law and the Japanese Telecommunications Business Law. This
device should not be modified (otherwise the granted designation number will become invalid).
For detailed information on type approval, go
to support.volvocars.com.
Related information
Radar unit (p. 400)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 321)
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
BLIS* (p. 363)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
409
Camera unit
The camera unit is used by several driver sup-
port systems and has the task of for example
detecting lane lines or traffic signs.
Location of the camera unit
The camera unit is used by the following func-
tions:
Adaptive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
Lane assistance*
Steering assistance at risk of collision
City Safety
Driver Alert Control*
Road Sign Information*
Active main beam*
Park Assist*
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Recommended maintenance for camera
and radar unit (p. 412)
Limitations for camera and radar
unit
The camera and radar unit has certain limita-
tions – which in turn also limit those func-
tions that use the unit. A driver should be
aware about the following examples of limita-
tions.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
410
Common limitations for camera and
radar
Blocked unit
The marked area must be cleaned regularly and kept
free from stickers, objects, shade film, etc.
The camera unit is placed inside the upper
section of the windscreen together with the
car's radar unit.
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
inside or outside of the windscreen, in front of
or around the camera and radar unit – this
may interfere with camera and radar-based
functions. This may result functions being
reduced, being switched off completely or giv-
ing incorrect function responses.
High temperature
At very high temperatures the camera and
radar unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The cam-
era and radar unit restarts automatically when
the temperature has fallen sufficiently.
Damaged windscreen
NOTE
If not rectified it can lead to reduced per-
formance for the driver support systems
that use the camera and radar unit. This
may result functions being reduced, being
switched off completely or giving incorrect
function responses.
The following is also applicable so as not to
risk incorrect function for the driver supports
that use the radar unit:
If a scratch, crack or stone chip appears
on the windscreen in front of any of the
"windows" for the camera and radar unit
and covers an area of
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
more, a workshop
139
must be contacted
so that the windscreen can be replaced.
Volvo recommends not repairing cracks,
scratches or stone chips in the area in
front of the camera and radar unit – the
entire windscreen should be replaced
instead.
Before replacing a windscreen, contact a
workshop
139
to verify that the correct
windscreen has been ordered and will be
fitted.
The same type of windscreen wipers or
windscreen wipers approved by Volvo
must be fitted when the windscreen is
replaced.
When replacing the windscreen, the cam-
era and radar unit must be recalibrated by
a workshop
139
to ensure the functionality
of all the camera and radar-based systems
in the car.
Further limitations for radar
Vehicle speed
The radar unit's ability to detect a vehicle
ahead is greatly reduced if the speed of the
vehicle ahead is very different to the speed of
your own car.
139
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
411
Limited field of vision
The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not
detected, or the detection is made later than
expected.
The radar unit's field of vision
Sometimes the radar unit is late at detect-
ing vehicles at close distances - e.g. a
vehicle that drives in between your car and
the vehicle ahead.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the
lane can remain undetected.
In bends, the radar unit may detect a dif-
ferent vehicle than intended or lose a
detected vehicle from view.
Low trailers
Low trailer in radar shadow
Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar
unit to detect, or are not detected at all - the
driver should therefore be particularly careful
when driving behind low trailers when the
adaptive cruise control
*
or Pilot Assist
*
is acti-
vated.
Further limitations for camera
Impaired vision
The cameras have limitations similar to the
human eye, i.e. may "see" worse in for exam-
ple intense snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy
dust storms and snow flurries. Under such
conditions, the functions of camera-depend-
ent systems could be significantly reduced or
temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car-
riageway, snow or ice on the road surface,
dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings
can also significantly reduce camera function
when it is used to scan the carriageway to
detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals and
other vehicles.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
412
Further limitations for Park assist
camera*
Blind sectors
There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields
of vision.
In the park assist camera's 360° view* obsta-
cles/objects may "vanish" in the gaps
between the individual cameras.
WARNING
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if
it only looks like a relatively small part of
the image is obscured, a relatively large
sector could be hidden from view. An
obstacle could thereby go undetected until
the car is very close to it.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions.
Because of this, the image may vary slightly in
brightness and quality. Poor light conditions
can result in reduced image quality.
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted
on the rear of the car could obscure the
camera's view.
Related information
Camera unit (p. 409)
Radar unit (p. 400)
Recommended maintenance for camera
and radar unit (p. 412)
Park assist camera* (p. 381)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 23)
Recommended maintenance for
camera and radar unit
In order that the camera and radar units shall
function correctly, they must be kept clear of
dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly
with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may cause incorrect warning signals,
reduced or no function.
Location of the parking sensors
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
413
Location of rear radar units. Keep the surface indi-
cated clean – on both the left and right-hand sides of
the car.
To ensure best possible functionality, the
surfaces in front of the sensors must be
kept clean.
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
the area of the sensors.
Clean camera lenses regularly with luke-
warm water and car shampoo - be careful
not to scratch the lenses.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components
must only be performed at a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Related information
Camera unit (p. 409)
Radar unit (p. 400)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Park assist camera* (p. 381)
DRIVER SUPPORT
414
Symbols and messages for camera
and radar unit
Here are examples of some of the display
messages and symbols regarding the camera
and radar units that can be shown in the
driver display.
Detector blocked
If the driver display shows this sym-
bol and the message
Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual, this means that
the camera and radar unit cannot detect other
vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and large ani-
mals in front of the car, and that the car's
camera-based and radar-based functions may
be disrupted.
The following table presents examples of pos-
sible causes for a message being shown,
along with the appropriate action:
Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is
dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera
and radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the
camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the
radar signals or camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered
road surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the
camera and radar unit.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Strong oncoming light No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light con-
ditions.
DRIVER SUPPORT
415
Defective camera
If a camera sector is black
and contains this symbol
then it means that the cam-
era is out of order.
The car's left-hand camera is out of order.
A black camera sector is also shown in the fol-
lowing instances, but then without the sym-
bol for defective camera:
open door
open boot lid
folded-in door mirror.
Rear parking camera
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a
trailer, bicycle rack or sim-
ilar is mounted and electri-
cally connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward
are switched off and will not warn of any
obstacles.
Related information
Camera unit (p. 409)
Radar unit (p. 400)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 409)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 23)
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
418
General information about Twin
Engine
Twin Engine runs like a regular car, but cer-
tain functions differ from a car that only runs
on petrol or diesel. The electric motor drives
the car mostly at low speeds, the petrol
engine at higher speeds, as well as during
more active driving.
The driver display shows some information
that is unique to the Twin Engine - charging
information, selected drive mode, distance to
empty battery as well as the hybrid battery's
charge level.
It is possible to set the car in different drive
modes while driving, e.g. electric operation
only or, when power is required, both electric
motor and petrol engine. The car calculates a
combination of drivability, driving experience,
environmental impact and fuel economy
according to the drive mode selected.
In order that the car should have optimal func-
tion it is important that the hybrid battery with
associated electrical drive systems, as well as
the petrol engine and its drive systems, have
the correct operating temperature. Battery
capacity may be reduced considerably if the
battery is too cold or too hot. Preconditioning
prepares the car's drive systems and the pas-
senger compartment before departure so that
both wear and energy needs during the jour-
ney are reduced. The range for the hybrid bat-
tery increases.
The hybrid battery which drives the electric
motor is charged via a charging cable but can
also be charged by gentle braking and engine
braking in gear position B. The hybrid battery
can also be charged by the car's engine.
Important to know
Car without power
Bear in mind that important functions such as
the brakes and power steering are inoperable
when the car is without power.
WARNING
In a de-energised car with the electric
motor and fuel-driven engine switched off
it is not possible to brake the car.
Towing not permitted
Towing the Twin Engine is not permitted since
this damages the electric motor.
Exterior engine noise
WARNING
Remember that the car does not emit any
engine noise when it is only powered by
the electric motor and may therefore be
difficult to notice by children, pedestrians,
cyclists and animals. This is especially true
at low speeds, such as in car parks.
High-voltage current
WARNING
Several components in the car work with
high-voltage current that could be danger-
ous in the event of incorrect intervention.
These components, and all orange-col-
oured cables, must only be handled by
qualified personnel.
Do not touch anything that is not clearly
described in the owner's manual.
Related information
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 419)
Hybrid gauge (p. 84)
Drive modes (p. 461)
Start and switch off preconditioning
(p. 224)
Hybrid battery (p. 618)
Factors that affect range when running on
electricity (p. 471)
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
Towing (p. 491)
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
}}
419
Charging the hybrid battery
In addition to the fuel tank, as in a conven-
tional car, the car is equipped with a
rechargeable battery - a so-called hybrid bat-
tery of the lithium-ion type.
The hybrid battery is charged using a charging
cable which is located in a storage compart-
ment in the cargo area.
NOTE
Volvo recommends a charging cable in
accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC
61851 which supports temperature moni-
toring.
The time it takes for the hybrid battery to be
charged is dependent on the charging current
that is used.
NOTE
The capacity of the hybrid battery decrea-
ses slightly with age and use, which may
result in increased use of the petrol engine
and thereby slightly increased fuel con-
sumption.
WARNING
Replacing the hybrid battery must only be
performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Charging cable handle and charging input socket.
Charging status is indicated in three ways:
Indicators on the charging cable's control
unit.
Indicator lamp in the car's charging input
socket.
Illustration and text in the driver display.
The starter battery is charged when the hybrid
battery is charging and terminated when the
hybrid battery is fully charged.
If the hybrid battery's temperature is below
-10 ºC (14 ºF) or above 40 ºC (104 ºF) then it
may mean that some of the car's functions are
changed or unavailable because the capacity
of the hybrid batteries is reduced outside this
temperature range.
Electric operation is not possible if the tem-
perature of the battery is too low or too high. If
drive mode PURE is then selected, the com-
bustion engine starts.
Charging with fixed control unit in
accordance with mode 3
1
In certain markets the control unit is installed
within a charging station connected to the
mains power circuit. In which case, the charg-
ing cable has no control unit of its own. There-
fore, use the charging station's charging cable
and follow the instructions at the charging sta-
tion.
1
European standard - EN 618511.
||
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
420
Charging with the petrol engine
The car generates current to the battery and the bat-
tery is charged, e.g. when the brake pedal is pressed
gently or during engine braking down a hill.
The car can also generate power for the hybrid
battery and the battery is charged.
The hybrid battery is recharged during
gentle braking with the brake pedal. The
car's kinetic energy is then converted to
electrical energy, which is used to charge
the hybrid battery.
In gear position B, the car uses electric
motor braking when the accelerator pedal
is released, while the hybrid battery is
recharged at the same time.
The hybrid battery can also be charged by
the car's engine.
Related information
Charging cable (p. 421)
Charging current (p. 420)
Opening and closing the hatch for the
charging input socket (p. 425)
Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 425)
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 434)
Charging status in the charging cable's
control unit (p. 429)
Charging status in the car's charging input
socket (p. 428)
Charging status in the car's driver display
(p. 432)
Symbols and messages relating to Twin
Engine in the driver display (p. 436)
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
Changing drive mode (p. 465)
Long-term storage of vehicles with hybrid
batteries (p. 438)
Charging current
Charging current is used for charging the
hybrid battery as well as preconditioning of
the car. Charging takes place with a charging
cable connected to the car's charging input
socket and a 230 V socket
2
(alternating cur-
rent).
When the charging cable is activated, the
driver display shows a message and a lamp in
the car's charging input socket illuminates.
The charging current is mainly used for battery
charging, but is also used for preconditioning
the car. When the car's hybrid battery is
charged, the starter battery is also charged.
IMPORTANT
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 V socket (alternating current) while
charging is in progress - there is then a risk
of damaging the 230 V socket. Always
stop charging first before unplugging the
charging cable from the car's charging
input socket and then from the 230 V
socket.
2
The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
}}}}
421
NOTE
If the weather is very hot or very cold,
some of the charging current is used to
heat/cool the hybrid battery and the
passenger compartment, which results
in a longer charging time.
The charging time is extended if pre-
conditioning has been selected. The
time required depends mainly on the
outside temperature.
Fuse
Normally several 230 V consumers are
included in a fuse circuit, so additional con-
sumers (e.g. lighting, vacuum cleaner, electric
drill, etc.) can be on the same fuse.
Related information
Charging cable (p. 421)
Charging status in the car's driver display
(p. 432)
Charging status in the car's charging input
socket (p. 428)
Start and switch off preconditioning
(p. 224)
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 434)
Charging cable
The charging cable with its control unit is
used to charge the car's hybrid battery.
The charging cable is located in the storage compart-
ment under the cargo area's floor hatch.
WARNING
Only use the charging cable provided with
your car or a replacement cable recom-
mended by Volvo.
Specifications, charging cable
Ambient tempera-
ture
-32 ºC to 50 ºC
(-25 ºF to 122 ºF)
WARNING
The charging cable has a built-in circuit
breaker. Charging must only take place
with grounded and approved sockets.
Children should be supervised when in
the vicinity of the charging cable when
it is plugged in.
High voltage in the charging cable.
Contact with high voltage can cause
death or serious personal injury.
Do not use the charging cable if it is
damaged in any way. A damaged or
inoperative charging cable must only
be repaired by a workshop - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Always position the charging cable so
that it will not be driven over, stepped
on, tripped over or damaged in some
other way, or cause personal injury.
Disconnect the charger from the wall
outlet before cleaning it.
||
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
422
Never connect the charging cable to an
extension cord or a multiple plug
socket.
Do not use one or more adapters
between the charging cable and the
electrical socket.
Also, refer to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions for using the charging cable and its
components.
IMPORTANT
Multiple plugs, adapters, extension cables,
overvoltage protection or similar devices
must not be used together with the charg-
ing cable since this may involve a risk of
fire, electric shocks, etc.
An adapter between the 230 V socket
(alternating current) and the charging cable
may only be used if the adapter is
approved in accordance with IEC 61851
and IEC 62196.
IMPORTANT
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 V socket (alternating current) while
charging is in progress - there is then a risk
of damaging the 230 V socket. Always
stop charging first before unplugging the
charging cable from the car's charging
input socket and then from the 230 V
socket.
IMPORTANT
Clean the charging cable with a clean
cloth, moistened with water or a mild
detergent. Do not use chemicals or sol-
vents.
WARNING
The charging cable and its associated parts
must not be swamped or immersed in
water.
IMPORTANT
Avoid exposing the control unit and its plug
to direct sunlight. In such cases, the over-
heating protection in the plug is at risk of
reducing or interrupting the charging of the
hybrid battery.
Related information
Ground fault breaker in the charging cable
(p. 423)
Temperature monitoring of the charging
cable (p. 424)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 419)
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
}}
423
Ground fault breaker in the
charging cable
The control unit for the charging cable charg-
ing cable has a built-in ground fault breaker
that protects the car and the user from elec-
tric shocks caused by system faults.
WARNING
Charging the hybrid battery must only take
place with grounded and approved 230 V
sockets (alternating current). If the capacity
for the socket or fuse circuit is unknown,
ask a licensed electrician to check the
capacity. Charging above the capacity of a
fuse circuit may lead to fire or damage the
fuse circuit.
WARNING
The charging cable's overvoltage pro-
tection helps to protect the car's
charging system, but cannot guarantee
that overload will never occur.
Never use visibly worn or damaged
electrical sockets. This could cause fire
or serious injury.
Never connect the charging cable to a
cable extension.
Maintenance or replacement of the
hybrid battery must only be performed
by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Do not use a charging cable that has
not been recommended.
An external timer must not be used
between the charging cable and the
electrical socket.
IMPORTANT
The ground fault breaker does not protect
the 230 V socket (alternating current)/
electrical installation.
Control unit LED
3
lamps.
LED lamp 1
LED lamp 2
If the control module's built-in ground fault
breaker is tripped, LED lamp 2 flashes red
while LED lamp 1 is extinguished - check the
230 V socket (alternating current).
3
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
||
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
424
IMPORTANT
Check the capacity of the socket.
Other electronic equipment connected
to the same fuse circuit must be dis-
connected if the total load is exceeded.
Do not connect the charging cable if
the socket is damaged.
Related information
Charging cable (p. 421)
Charging status in the charging cable's
control unit (p. 429)
Temperature monitoring of the
charging cable
For the car's hybrid battery to be charged
safely every time, the control unit for the
charging cable and the plug have built-in
monitoring devices for the temperature.
Temperature monitoring takes place in the
control unit and the plug.
NOTE
Volvo recommends a charging cable in
accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC
61851 which supports temperature moni-
toring.
Monitoring in the control unit
Charging is switched off if the temperature of
the control unit is too high. This is to protect
the electronics. This may take place at a high
outside temperature, for example, and/or
when strong sunlight shines directly on the
control unit.
Monitoring at the plug
If the temperature at the power source to
which the charging cable is connected is too
high, the charging current is reduced. If the
temperature exceeds a critical level, charging
is stopped completely.
IMPORTANT
If the temperature monitoring has auto-
matically lowered the charging current
repeatedly and charging has been interrup-
ted then the cause of the overheating must
be investigated and rectified.
Related information
Charging cable (p. 421)
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
}}
425
Opening and closing the hatch for
the charging input socket
The flap for the hybrid battery's charging
input socket is opened manually.
Press in the rear section of the cover and
release.
Open the cover.
Close the cover for the charging input socket
in reverse order.
Related information
Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 425)
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 434)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 419)
Start charging the hybrid battery
The car's hybrid battery is charged with a
charging cable between the car and a 230 V
socket
4
(alternating current).
Only use the charging cable supplied with the
car or a replacement cable recommended by
Volvo.
IMPORTANT
Never connect the charging cable when
there is a risk of thunderstorm or lightning
strike.
NOTE
Volvo recommends a charging cable in
accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC
61851 which supports temperature moni-
toring.
WARNING
The hybrid battery must only be
charged at maximum permitted charg-
ing current or lower in accordance with
applicable local and national recom-
mendations for hybrid charging from
230 V sockets (alternating current)/
plugs.
Charging the hybrid battery must only
take place from an approved grounded
230 V socket
5
or from a charging sta-
tion with a loose charging cable (Mode
3) supplied by Volvo.
The control unit's ground fault breaker
protects the car, but there may still be
a risk of overloading the 230 V mains
power circuit.
Avoid visible worn or damaged mains
sockets since they may lead to fire
damage and/or personal injury if used.
Never use an extension cable.
Never use an adapter.
4
The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.
5
Or equivalent sockets with a different voltage, depending on market.
||
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
426
WARNING
The charging cable has a built-in circuit
breaker. Charging must only take place
with grounded and approved sockets.
Children should be supervised when in
the vicinity of the charging cable when
it is plugged in.
High voltage in the charging cable.
Contact with high voltage can cause
death or serious personal injury.
Do not use the charging cable if it is
damaged in any way. A damaged or
inoperative charging cable must only
be repaired by a workshop - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Always position the charging cable so
that it will not be driven over, stepped
on, tripped over or damaged in some
other way, or cause personal injury.
Disconnect the charger from the wall
outlet before cleaning it.
Never connect the charging cable to an
extension cord or a multiple plug
socket.
Do not use one or more adapters
between the charging cable and the
electrical socket.
Also, refer to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions for using the charging cable and its
components.
IMPORTANT
Check that the 230 V socket (alternating
current) has adequate power capacity for
charging electric vehicles – in the event of
uncertainty, the socket must be checked
by a qualified professional.
Note that the car must be switched off
before charging.
Take the charging cable out from the storage
compartment on the right-hand side of the
cargo area.
Connect the charging cable to a 230 V
socket. Never use an extension cable.
Open the charging hatch. Remove the
charging handle's protective cover and
then press the handle the whole way into
the socket for the car.
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
427
Clamp the charging handle's cover in
place as illustrated.
IMPORTANT
To avoid damage to the paint, e.g. in the
event of high winds, position the charging
handle's protective cover so that it does
not touch the car.
3. The charging cable's charging handle is
fastened/locked in, and charging starts
within 5 seconds. When charging has
started, the LED lamp in the charging
input socket flashes with a green glow.
The driver display shows the remaining
estimated charging time or whether
charging is not working as intended.
Battery charging can be interrupted for a
while if the car is unlocked:
and the door is opened - charging
restarts within a few minutes.
without the door being opened - the car
is relocked automatically. Charging
restarts after 1 minute.
IMPORTANT
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 V socket (alternating current) while
charging is in progress - there is then a risk
of damaging the 230 V socket. Always
stop charging first before unplugging the
charging cable from the car's charging
input socket and then from the 230 V
socket.
Condensation from the air conditioning may
drip under the car during charging. This is nor-
mal and takes place due to cooling of the
hybrid battery.
Related information
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 419)
Opening and closing the hatch for the
charging input socket (p. 425)
Charging status in the car's charging input
socket (p. 428)
Charging status in the car's driver display
(p. 432)
Charging status in the charging cable's
control unit (p. 429)
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 434)
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
428
Charging status in the car's
charging input socket
The charging input socket shows the charg-
ing status using an LED lamp.
LED lamp location in the car's charging input socket.
The LED lamp shows the existing status while
charging is in progress. If the LED lamp does
not illuminate, check that the cable is firmly
plugged into the wall socket and the socket in
the car. The white, red or yellow lamps are
activated when the passenger compartment
lighting is switched on - they remain switched
on for a while after the passenger compart-
ment lighting has been switched off.
LED lamp's
glow
Specification
White LED light.
Yellow
Waiting mode
A
- waiting
for charging to start.
Flashing green
Charging in progress
B
.
Green
Charging complete
C
.
Red A fault has arisen.
A
For example, after a door has been opened or if the charg-
ing cable's handle is not locked in.
B
The slower the flashing, the closer to fully charged.
C
Extinguishes after a while.
Related information
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 419)
Charging status in the car's driver display
(p. 432)
Charging status in the charging cable's
control unit (p. 429)
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 434)
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
}}
429
Charging status in the charging
cable's control unit
Different indicators on the charging cable's
control unit show the status of ongoing
charging as well as status after completed
charging.
Control unit LED
6
lamps.
LED lamp 1
LED lamp 2
6
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
||
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
430
LED 1 LED 2 Status Specification Recommended action
Flashes blue,
amber and
red
Flashes blue,
amber and red
Initiation Self-test. Wait until the self-test is completed.
Illuminates in
blue
Extinguished Standby The charging cable is not connected to
the car.
Connect the charging cable to the car's charging
input socket.
Flashes blue Extinguished Standby Charging is possible but is not acti-
vated by the electronics in the car.
Wait until charging starts.
Flashes blue Flashes blue Charging in pro-
gress.
The car's electronics have started
charging.
Charging in progress.
Wait until the battery is fully charged.
Extinguished Flashes amber Charging in pro-
gress.
Temperature monitoring has detected
an increased temperature. Charging
continues with reduced power level.
Restart charging. If the problem persists - consult
a qualified professional.
Extinguished Illuminates in
amber
Charging is not
possible.
Temperature monitoring has triggered
for the 230 V socket.
Restart charging. If the problem persists - consult
a qualified professional.
Extinguished Flashes red Charging is not
possible.
The ground fault breaker on the charg-
ing cable has triggered.
1. Unplug the charging cable from the 230 V
socket.
2. The ground fault breaker is reset after 10 sec-
onds and the unit restarts.
3. Plug the charging cable into the 230 V
socket.
4. If the problem persists - consult a qualified
professional.
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
431
LED 1 LED 2 Status Specification Recommended action
Flashes red Illuminates in
red
Charging is not
possible.
Charging cable connected to ungroun-
ded 230 V socket.
Plug the charging cable into a grounded 230 V
socket. If the problem persists - consult a qualified
professional.
Flashes red Flashes red Charging is not
possible.
Internal fault. The charging cable is
damaged and must be repaired.
Contact a qualified professional.
Related information
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 419)
Charging status in the car's charging input
socket (p. 428)
Charging status in the car's driver display
(p. 432)
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 434)
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
432
Charging status in the car's driver
display
The driver display shows the status for charg-
ing with both image and text. The information
is shown for as long as the driver display is
operating.
Image Message Specification
Fully charged at: [Time] is shown together with an animation with
blue pulsating light through the charging cable.
Charging continues and an approximate time for when
the battery is estimated to be fully charged is shown.
The text Charging complete is shown. An illustration of the car is
shown with an LED indicator at the charging input socket that illumi-
nates in green.
The battery is fully charged.
The text Charging error is shown. The LED indicator at the charging
input socket illuminates in red.
A fault has occurred, check the connection of the
charging cable to the car's charging input socket and to
the 230 V socket
A
(alternating current).
A
The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
433
NOTE
If the driver display is not used for a while
then it is dimmed. Reactivate the display
by means of one of the following:
depress the brake pedal.
open one of the doors.
set the car in ignition position I by turn-
ing the START knob clockwise and
releasing.
Related information
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 419)
Symbols and messages relating to Twin
Engine in the driver display (p. 436)
Charging status in the car's charging input
socket (p. 428)
Charging status in the charging cable's
control unit (p. 429)
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 434)
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
* Option/accessory.
434
Stop charging of hybrid battery
Finish charging by unlocking the car, unplug-
ging the charging cable from the car's charg-
ing input socket and then from the 230 V
socket
7
(alternating current).
IMPORTANT
Before the charging cable is disconnected
from the car's charging input socket, the
car must be unlocked using the unlock but-
ton on the remote control key. This must
be carried out even if the doors on the car
are already unlocked. If the car is not
unlocked using the unlock button, this may
lead to damage to the charging cable or to
the system.
NOTE
Always unlock the car so that charging is
stopped before the connection to the
230 V socket (alternating current) is
unplugged. Note that the charging cable
must be unplugged from the car's charging
input socket before being unplugged from
the 230 V socket, partly to avoid damage
to the system and partly to avoid stopping
the charging unintentionally.
Unlock the car with the remote control key
- charging is finished and the charging
cable's locked handle releases/is
unlocked.
Unplug the cable from the car's charging
input socket and close the hatch.
Unplug the cable from the 230 V socket.
Return the charging cable to the car's
storage compartment on the right of the
cargo area.
The charging cable is locked
automatically
If the charging cable is not unplugged from
the charging input socket, it is locked in again
automatically shortly after unlocking in order
to maximise charging and range, as well as to
facilitate preconditioning prior to the journey.
The charging cable can be unplugged again if
the car is unlocked using the remote control
key. For cars with Passive Entry*, you can lock
and unlock using the handle again.
Related information
Opening and closing the hatch for the
charging input socket (p. 425)
Charging cable (p. 421)
7
The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
435
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 419)
Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 425)
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
436
Symbols and messages relating to
Twin Engine in the driver display
A number of symbols and messages regar-
ding Twin Engine can be shown in the driver
display. They may also be shown in combina-
tion with general indicator and warning sym-
bols and are then extinguished when the
problems have been rectified.
Symbol Message Specification
12 V Battery
Charging fault, service urgent. Drive
to workshop
Hybrid battery fault. Contact a workshop
A
to check the battery as soon as possible.
12 V Battery
Charging fault Stop safely
Hybrid battery fault. Stop the car safely and contact a workshop
A
to have the battery checked
as soon as possible.
12 V Battery
Fuse failure Service required
Hybrid battery fault. Contact a workshop
A
to check the function as soon as possible.
HV battery
Overheated, stop safely
The temperature of the hybrid battery seems to be rising abnormally. Stop the car and switch
off the engine. Wait at least 5 minutes before continuing to drive. Call a workshop
A
or check
from the outside that everything seems normal before continuing to drive.
Reduced performance
Max car speed limited
The hybrid battery is not sufficiently charged for driving at high speeds. Charge the battery as
soon as possible.
Propulsion system
Harsh behaviour at low speed, car
ok to use
The hybrid system does not function as intended. Contact a workshop
A
to check the function
as soon as possible.
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
437
Symbol Message Specification
Hybrid system failure
Service required
The hybrid system is disengaged. Contact a workshop
A
to check the function as soon as pos-
sible.
Charge cable
Remove before start
Shown when the driver tries to start the car and the charging cable is connected to the car.
Disconnect the charging cable and close the charging hatch.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 425)
Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 434)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 419)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 94)
Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 91)
Hybrid gauge (p. 84)
Hybrid battery gauge (p. 85)
ELECTRIC OPERATION AND CHARGING
438
Long-term storage of vehicles with
hybrid batteries
To minimise hybrid battery degradation dur-
ing prolonged storage (longer than 1 month)
of the vehicle a charge level of approximately
25% is recommended as indicated on the
driver display.
Proceed as follows:
1. If the state of charge is high – run the car
until approx. 25% remains. If the state of
charge is low – charge the battery until a
level of approx. 25% is reached.
2. If storage has lasted longer than 6 months
or the hybrid battery charge level is signifi-
cantly lower than 25% – charge the bat-
tery to approx. 25% again to compensate
for the natural self-discharge that occurred
during the prolonged storage. Continu-
ously check the charge level in the driver
display.
NOTE
Choose the coolest location possible for
the vehicle in order to minimise aging of
the battery during long-term storage. Dur-
ing summer the vehicle should preferably
remain indoors or outdoors in the shade,
depending on where the temperature is
lowest.
Related information
Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 425)
Hybrid battery gauge (p. 85)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 419)
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
440
Starting the car
The car is started using the start knob in the
tunnel console when the remote control key
is in the passenger compartment.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
WARNING
Before starting:
Fasten the seatbelt.
Adjust the seat, steering wheel and
mirrors.
Make sure that the brake pedal can be
fully depressed.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting the car since it is equipped with
support for keyless starting (Passive start).
To start the car:
IMPORTANT
The car cannot be started if the charging
cable is still engaged. Make sure the
charging cable is removed from the charg-
ing input socket before the starting the car.
1. The remote control key must be inside the
car. For cars with Passive Start, the key
needs to be located in the front part of the
passenger compartment. With the option
for keyless locking/unlocking* of the car,
the key can be anywhere in the car.
2. Hold the brake pedal depressed
1
fully. For
cars with automatic gear changing, make
sure that gear position P or N is selected.
For cars with a manual gearbox, make
sure that the gear lever is in neutral posi-
tion or that the clutch pedal is depressed.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and then
release it. The control automatically
returns to its starting position.
When the engine is started, the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its
overheating protection triggers.
When starting in normal conditions, the car's
electric drive motor is prioritised - the petrol
engine remains switched off. This means that
after the start knob has been turned clock-
wise, the electric motor has ”started” and the
car is ready to drive. A started car is indicated
by the driver display's indicator lamps extin-
guishing and its preset theme illuminating.
However there are situations where the petrol
engine is started instead e.g. in the event of
the temperature being too low or if the hybrid
battery needs charging.
Error messages
If the Car key not found message is shown in
the driver display when starting, place the
remote control key by the backup reader. Then
try to start the car again.
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
1
If the car is moving, the engine can be started by turning the start knob clockwise.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
441
NOTE
When the remote control key is positioned
by the backup reader, make sure that there
are no car keys, metal objects or electronic
apparatus by the backup reader, (e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or charg-
ers). Several car keys close to one another
by the backup reader may cause interfer-
ence with each other.
If the message Car start System check, wait
is shown in the driver display when starting,
wait until the message disappears and then
try to start the car again.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -
wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover.
NOTE
The car cannot be started if the hybrid bat-
tery is discharged.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving.
WARNING
Always take the remote control key out
from the car when leaving the car and
make sure the car's electrical system is in
ignition position 0 - especially if there are
children in the car.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal oper-
ating temperature as quickly as possible,
which minimises exhaust emissions and
protects the environment.
Related information
Switching off the car (p. 441)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 481)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 443)
Switching off the car
The car is switched off using the start knob in
the tunnel console.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
To switch off the car:
Turn the start knob clockwise and release
it - the car is switched off. The control
automatically returns to its starting posi-
tion.
If the gear selector for cars with an automatic
gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls:
Turn the knob clockwise and hold it until
the car is switched off.
Related information
Starting the car (p. 440)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
442
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 481)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 443)
Ignition positions
The car's electrical system can be set in dif-
ferent levels/positions and in this way make
the different functions available.
In order to facilitate the use of a limited num-
ber of functions with the engine switched off,
the car's electrical system can be set in three
different levels – 0, I and II. These levels are
described with the denomination "ignition
position" throughout the owner's manual.
The following table shows the functions avail-
able in each ignition position/level:
Level Functions
0
Odometer, clock and tempera-
ture gauge are illuminated
A
.
Power* seats can be adjusted.
The power windows can be
used.
The centre display is started
and can be used
A
.
The infotainment system can
be used
A
.
In this mode, the functions are con-
trolled by time and are switched off
automatically after a short while.
I
Panoramic roof, power win-
dows, 12V power socket in the
passenger compartment,
Bluetooth, navigation, phone,
ventilation fan and windscreen
wipers can be used.
Power seats can be adjusted.
12 V power sockets* in the
cargo area can be used.
Power is taken from the battery
in this ignition position.
STARTING AND DRIVING
443
Level Functions
II
The headlamps come on.
Warning/indicator lamps illumi-
nate for 5 seconds.
Several other systems are acti-
vated. However, heating in seat
cushions and the rear window
can only be activated after the
car has been started.
This ignition position consumes a
lot of current from the battery
and should therefore be avoided!
A
Also activated when the door is opened.
Related information
Starting the car (p. 440)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 481)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 443)
Selecting ignition mode
The car's electrical system can be set in dif-
ferent levels/positions and in this way make
the different functions available.
Selecting ignition position
Start knob in the tunnel console.
Ignition position 0 – Unlock the car and
store the remote control key inside the
car.
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or
the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear
changing, when these ignition positions
are to be selected.
Ignition position I – Turn the start knob
clockwise and release it. The control auto-
matically returns to its starting position.
Ignition position II – Turn the start knob
clockwise and hold it in position for
approx. 5 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting
position.
Back to ignition position 0 – To return to
ignition position 0 from position I and II
Turn the start knob clockwise and release.
The control automatically returns to its
starting position.
Related information
Starting the car (p. 440)
Switching off the car (p. 441)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 481)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
444
Alcohol lock*
The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent
the car from being driven by individuals under
the influence of alcohol. Before the engine
can be started the driver must take a breath
test that verifies that he/she is not under the
influence of alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration
takes place in accordance with each market's
limit value in force for driving legally.
The car has an interface for the electrical con-
nection of the different makes and models of
alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The
interface facilitates alcohol lock connection,
and gives the option of an integrated function
including messages related to the alcohol lock
in the car's main display. For information
about a specific alcohol lock, please refer to
the owner's manual from the respective alco-
hol lock manufacturer.
WARNING
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
Related information
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 444)
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock* (p. 445)
Starting the car (p. 440)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
In the event of an emergency situation or if
the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible
to bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive
the car.
For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see sup-
plier's manual.
Related information
Alcohol lock* (p. 444)
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock* (p. 445)
Starting the car (p. 440)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
445
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock*
The alcohol lock is activated automatically
and is then ready for use when the car is
opened.
To bear in mind
In order to obtain correct function and as
accurate a measurement result as possible:
Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes
before the breath test.
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an
incorrect measurement result.
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
Related information
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 444)
Alcohol lock* (p. 444)
Starting the car (p. 440)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Brake functions
The car's brakes are used to reduce the
speed or prevent the car from rolling.
In addition to the foot brake and parking
brake, the car is equipped with several auto-
matic brake assist functions. These can assist
the driver by not needing to keep his/her foot
on the brake pedal when at a traffic light, or
when starting on an uphill gradient.
Depending on the car's equipment, the follow-
ing auto braking functions are available:
Automatic brake when stationary (Auto
Hold)
Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist)
Auto braking after a collision
City Safety
Related information
Foot brake (p. 445)
Parking brake (p. 448)
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 451)
Auto braking after a collision (p. 453)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 453)
City Safety (p. 289)
Foot brake
The foot brake is part of the brake system.
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If
a brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal
may engage deeper. Higher pressure on the
pedal will therefore be needed to produce the
normal braking effect.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the elec-
tric motor or internal combustion engine is
running.
If the foot brake is used when the car is
switched off, greater pedal pressure is
required to brake the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a
heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using
engine braking in gearshift mode B.
Anti-lock braking system
The car has anti-lock brakes (ABS
2
), which
prevents the wheels from locking while brak-
ing and allows maintained steering control.
Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when
this is engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made auto-
matically after the car has been started when
the driver releases the brake pedal. A further
automatic test of the system may be made at
2
Anti-lock Braking System
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
446
low speed. The test may be felt as pulses in
the brake pedal.
Light braking charges the hybrid
battery
The electric motor's engine brake is used dur-
ing light braking. The car's kinetic energy is
then converted to electrical energy instead,
which is used to charge the hybrid battery.
Battery charging with electric motor braking is
indicated in the driver display.
The driver display indicates charging during electric
motor braking.
This function is active in the speed interval
1505 km/h (933 mph). During heavier brak-
ing, as well as outside the speed interval, brak-
ing is supplemented by the hydraulic brake
system. The driver's display shows this by the
indicator being down in the red zone.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
Check the brake fluid level. If the
level is low, fill with brake fluid
and check for the cause of the
brake fluid loss.
Fault in pedal sensor.
Constant glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started: Auto-
matic function check.
Constant glow for more than 2
seconds: Fault in the ABS sys-
tem. The car's normal brake sys-
tem is still working, but without
the ABS function.
If the message Brake pedal
Characteristics changed Serv-
ice required is shown, the sys-
tem for "Brake-by-wire" is disen-
gaged. A higher pedal pressure is
required to produce braking
effect.
WARNING
If both the warning lamps for brake fault
and ABS fault illuminate at the same time,
a fault has occurred in the brake system.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to
the nearest workshop and have the
brake system checked - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level
in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive
further before topping up the brake
fluid. The reason for the loss of brake
fluid must be investigated.
Related information
Brake assistance (p. 447)
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 451)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 453)
Braking on wet roads (p. 447)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 447)
Brake system maintenance (p. 448)
Brake lights (p. 159)
STARTING AND DRIVING
447
Brake assistance
The brake assist system (BAS
3
) helps to
increase brake force during braking, and can
thereby shorten the braking distance.
The system detects the way in which the
driver brakes and increases brake force where
necessary. The brake force can be boosted up
to the level when the ABS system is engaged.
The function is suspended when the pressure
on the brake pedal decreases.
Related information
Foot brake (p. 445)
Braking on wet roads
When driving for a prolonged period of time
in heavy rain without braking, the braking
effect may be delayed slightly when next
using the brakes.
This may also be the case after a car wash. It
is then necessary to depress the brake pedal
more forcefully. You should therefore maintain
a greater distance to the vehicles in front.
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads
or using a car wash. This warms up the brake
discs, enabling them to dry faster and protect-
ing them against corrosion. Bear in mind the
current traffic situation when braking.
Related information
Foot brake (p. 445)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 447)
Braking on gritted roads
When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt
may form on the brake discs and brake lin-
ings.
This may extend braking distance. You should
therefore maintain a greater safety distance to
vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do
the following:
Brake now and again to remove any layer
of salt. Make sure that other road users
are not put at risk by the braking.
Gently depress the brake pedal after fin-
ishing driving and before starting your next
trip.
Related information
Foot brake (p. 445)
Braking on wet roads (p. 447)
3
Brake Assist System
STARTING AND DRIVING
448
Brake system maintenance
Check brake system components regularly
for wear.
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-
ble, follow the Volvo service intervals as speci-
fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet. After
replacing brake linings and brake discs, brak-
ing effect is only adapted after they have been
"worn in" for a few hundred kilometres (miles).
Compensate for the reduced braking effect by
depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo rec-
ommends only fitting brake linings that are
approved for your Volvo.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's compo-
nents must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about
the procedure or engage a workshop to
carry out the inspection - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Foot brake (p. 445)
Parking brake
The parking brake prevents the car from roll-
ing away from stationary by means of
mechanically locking/blocking two wheels.
The control for the parking brake is located in the
tunnel console between the seats.
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the electrically-operated parking brake is
being applied. The noise can also be heard
during the automatic function checking of the
parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake
is activated, it only acts on the rear wheels. If
it is activated when the car is moving then the
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts
on all four wheels. Brake function changes
over to the rear wheels when the car is almost
stationary.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 449)
Parking on a hill (p. 450)
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 451)
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 451)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
449
Activating and deactivating the
parking brake
Use the parking brake to prevent the car from
rolling from stationary.
Activating the parking brake
1. Pull the control upward.
> The symbol in the driver display illumi-
nates when the parking brake is acti-
vated.
2. Check that the car is stationary.
Symbol in the driver display
Symbol Specification
The symbol is illuminated when
the parking brake is activated.
If the symbol flashes, it indicates
a fault has occurred. Read the
message in the driver display.
Automatic activation
The parking brake is activated automatically
when the car is switched off and the set-
ting for automatic activation of the parking
brake is activated in the centre display.
when gear position P is selected on a
steep hill.
if the Auto hold (Automatic brake when
stationary) function is activated and
the car has been stationary for a long
time (510 minutes)
the car is switched off
the driver leaves the car.
Emergency brake
In an emergency, the parking brake can be
activated when the car is in motion by pulling
and holding up the control. Braking stops
when the control is released, or if the accelera-
tor pedal is depressed.
NOTE
An acoustic signal sounds while emer-
gency braking is active at high speeds.
Deactivating the parking brake
Deactivate manually
To deactivate the parking brake, the engine
needs to be running.
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Press the control down.
> The parking brake releases and the
symbol in the driver display extin-
guishes.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
450
Deactivate automatically
1. Start the car.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. Select
gear position D or R and depress the
accelerator pedal.
> The parking brake releases and the
symbol in the driver display extin-
guishes.
NOTE
For automatic deactivation, either the
driver has to have put on their seatbelt or
the driver door has to be closed.
Related information
Automatic parking brake activation setting
(p. 450)
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 451)
Parking brake (p. 448)
Parking on a hill (p. 450)
Automatic parking brake activation
setting
Choose whether the parking brake is to be
activated automatically when the car is
switched off.
To change setting:
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
to select or deselect the
function
Auto Activate Parking Brake.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 449)
Parking brake (p. 448)
Parking on a hill
Always use the parking brake when parking
on a hill.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when park-
ing on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear
or the automatic transmission's P position
is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in
all situations.
If the car is parked facing uphill:
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
car to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline.
Avoid this by pulling the control upwards
while driving the car away. Release the control
when the engine achieves traction.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 449)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
451
In the event of a fault in the
parking brake
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is
not possible to deactivate or activate the
parking brake after several attempts.
An acoustic warning signal sounds when driv-
ing with the parking brake activated.
If the car must be parked before a possible
fault is rectified, then the wheels must be
turned as for parking on a hill and the gear
selector must be in position P.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the park-
ing brake can be neither deactivated nor acti-
vated. Connect a donor battery if the battery
voltage is too low.
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electrically-
operated parking brake - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
If the symbol flashes, it indicates
a fault has occurred. See the
message in the driver display.
Fault in brake system. See the
message in the driver display.
Information message in driver
display.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 449)
Parking on a hill (p. 450)
Starter battery (p. 616)
Volvo service programme (p. 600)
Automatic braking when stationary
Automatic brake when stationary (Auto hold)
means that the driver can release the brake
pedal while maintaining braking effect when
the car has stopped at traffic lights or a junc-
tion.
When the car has stopped, the brakes are
activated automatically. The function can use
either foot brake or parking brake to hold the
car stationary and it works on all gradients.
When driving off, the brakes are released
automatically if the driver is wearing the seat-
belt or the driver's door is closed.
NOTE
When braking to a standstill on an uphill or
downhill slope, the brake pedal should be
depressed a little harder before being
released to ensure the car does not roll.
The parking brake is activated if
the car is switched off
the driver's door is opened
the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled
the car has been stationary for a longer
time (510 minutes).
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
452
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
The symbol is illuminated when
the function uses the foot brake
to keep the car stationary.
The symbol is illuminated when
the function uses the parking
brake to keep the car stationary.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the automatic
brake at a standstill (p. 452)
Foot brake (p. 445)
Parking brake (p. 448)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 453)
Activating and deactivating the
automatic brake at a standstill
The automatic brake function at a standstill is
activated using the button in the tunnel con-
sole.
Press the button in the tunnel console to
activate or deactivate the function.
> The indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated. Acti-
vated function remains even when the
car is started next time.
Applicable when switching off
If the function is active and holds the
car with the foot brake (A-symbol
illuminated in the driver display), the
brake pedal must be depressed at
the same time as the button is depressed in
order to deactivate.
The function remains deactivated until it is
reactivated.
When the function is deactivated, hill start
assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the
car from rolling backwards when starting
on an uphill gradient.
Related information
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 451)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
453
Help when starting on a hill
Hill start assist (HSA
4
) prevents the car from
rolling backwards when starting on an uphill
gradient. When reversing uphill, it prevents
the car from rolling forwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake
pedal to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after
several seconds or when the driver starts to
drive away.
Hill start assist is available even when the
function for automatic brake when stationary
(Auto hold) is deactivated.
Related information
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 451)
Foot brake (p. 445)
Auto braking after a collision
In the event of a collision in which the activa-
tion level is reached for the pyrotechnic seat-
belt tensioners or airbags, or if a collision
with a large animal is detected, the car's
brakes are automatically applied. This func-
tion is to prevent or reduce the effects of any
subsequent collision.
After a serious collision there is a risk that it is
no longer possible to control and steer the car.
In order to avoid or mitigate a possible further
collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehi-
cle's path, the auto braking system is acti-
vated automatically and brakes the car in a
safe manner.
Brake lights and hazard warning lights are
activated during braking. When the car has
stopped, the hazard warning lights continue to
flash and the parking brake is applied.
If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a
risk of being hit by following traffic, the sys-
tem can be overridden by the driver depress-
ing the accelerator pedal.
The function assumes that the brake system is
intact after the collision.
Related information
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 362)
BLIS* (p. 363)
Brake functions (p. 445)
Regenerative braking*
The car recovers kinetic energy during brak-
ing in order to reduce fuel consumption and
emissions.
The battery symbol is shown in the
driver display when the car is gener-
ating power for the battery.
The function is available in all drive modes
together with gear position D or B.
Activating brake regeneration
Brake regeneration is activated by gentle pres-
sure on the brake pedal or during engine brak-
ing.
Regeneration increases during engine braking
when manual gearshift mode B is selected.
Related information
Drive modes (p. 461)
Changing gear with automatic gearbox
(p. 455)
4
Hill Start Assist
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
454
Gearbox
The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain
(power transmission) between engine and
drive wheels. The function of the gearbox is
to change the gear ratio depending on speed
and power requirements.
The car has an eight-speed automatic gear-
box, and an electric motor for rear-wheel drive.
The number of gear changes means that the
engine's torque and power range can be used
effectively.
Two of the gears are overdrive gears that save
fuel when driving at constant engine speed.
Both the gear lever and the shift paddles can
be used to shift up or down manually. The
driver display shows the selected gear posi-
tion.
Related information
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
Gear shift indicator (p. 459)
Automatic gearbox
Gears are selected automatically so that you
can drive as energy-efficiently as possible.
The gearbox also has a manual gearshift
mode.
Overview of gear lever and shift pattern in the driver
display.
The driver display shows the selected gear
position:
R, N, D or B. The P position is electrical.
Related information
Changing gear with automatic gearbox
(p. 455)
Changing gear with steering wheel pad-
dles* (p. 456)
Gear selector inhibitor (p. 458)
Kick-down function (p. 458)
Gear shift indicator (p. 459)
Symbols and messages for automatic
gearbox (p. 458)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
455
Changing gear with automatic
gearbox
Change gear position by pressing the spring-
loaded gear selector forwards or backwards,
or sideways for manual shifting.
Changing gear
Overview of gear lever and gear positions.
Gear positions
Parking – P
Overview of gear lever and position P.
Parking is activated with the P button located
next to the gear selector.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the
P position is engaged.
Select the P position when the car is parked or
when starting the engine. The car must be sta-
tionary when the P position is selected.
To select another gear position when the P
position is selected, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition position must be II.
To park - first apply the parking bake and then
select P position.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when park-
ing on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear
or the automatic transmission's P position
is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in
all situations.
NOTE
To be able to lock the car and arm the
alarm, the gear position must be in P.
Help functions
The system will change to the P position auto-
matically:
if the car is switched off in position D or R.
if the driver unfastens the seatbelt and
opens the driver's door when the car is
running in a mode other than P.
To park a car without wearing the seatbelt and
with the door open - exit the P position by
selecting R or D again.
If the car is switched off in N position there is
no automatic change-over to P position. This
makes it possible to wash the car in an auto-
matic car wash.
Reverse – R
Select position R to reverse. The car must be
stationary when the R position is selected.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
456
Neutral – N
Select N position when the car shall be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in the N posi-
tion.
In order to change from N position to another
gear position, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition position must be II.
Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up
and down takes place automatically based on
the level of acceleration and speed.
The car must be stationary when changing
gear from R position to D position.
Brake – B
Overview of brake positions in the driver display.
In B position, it is possible to change gear
manually. The car brakes using its electric
motor when the accelerator pedal is released,
while also charging the hybrid battery.
Position B is selected by moving the gear
selector backwards from the D position.
Press the gear selector to the right to "+"
(plus) to change up one step and release
it.
Press the gear selector to the left to ""
(minus) to change down one step and
release it.
Press the gear selector backwards to
return to the D position.
The gearbox automatically shifts down if the
speed decreases to a level lower than appro-
priate for the selected gear, in order to avoid
jerking and stalling.
Related information
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
Gear selector inhibitor (p. 458)
Changing gear with steering wheel pad-
dles* (p. 456)
Kick-down function (p. 458)
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
The steering wheel paddles are a comple-
ment to the gear selector and make it possi-
ble to change gear manually without releas-
ing hands from the steering wheel.
The function is available in position D or B.
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
Switch
To change gear:
Pull one of the paddles backwards -
towards the steering wheel - and release.
A gear change occurs at each pull of the pad-
dle, provided that the engine speed does not
leave the permitted range. The driver display
shows the current gear.
STARTING AND DRIVING
457
In B position the steering wheel paddles are
automatically activated.
Driver display when changing gear with steering
wheel paddles in manual gearshift mode.
Activating the steering wheel paddles
in position D
To be able to change gear with the steering
wheel paddles, they must be activated:
Pull one of the paddles toward the steer-
ing wheel.
> A figure in the driver display indicates
current gear.
Driver display when changing gear with steering
wheel paddles.
Deactivating the steering wheel
paddles in position D
Manual deactivation
Pull the right-hand paddle (+) toward the
steering wheel and hold in place until the
number in the driver display extinguishes.
> The gearbox returns to position D.
Automatic deactivation
The steering wheel paddles are deactivated
after a short time if they are not used. This is
indicated by means of the figure for the cur-
rent gear extinguishing. The exception is dur-
ing engine braking - then the paddles are acti-
vated for as long as engine braking is in pro-
gress.
Related information
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
Changing gear with automatic gearbox
(p. 455)
Gear shift indicator (p. 459)
STARTING AND DRIVING
458
Gear selector inhibitor
The gear selector inhibitor prevents acciden-
tal changing between different gear positions
in an automatic gearbox.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gear selector inhibitor has spe-
cial safety systems.
From park position – P or neutral position –
N
In order to move the gear selector from P or N
position to another gear position, the brake
pedal must be depressed and the ignition
position must be II. For some gearbox vari-
ants, the engine must be running.
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
Message in the driver display
If the gear selector is inhibited a message is
shown in the driver display e.g.
Gear lever
Press brake pedal to activate gear lever.
The gear selector is not inhibited mechanically.
Related information
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
Changing gear with automatic gearbox
(p. 455)
Kick-down function
Kick-down can be used when maximum
acceleration is needed such as for overtaking.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-
down position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Safety function
To prevent over-revving of the engine, the
gearbox control program has a protective
downshift inhibitor.
The gearbox does not permit downshifting/
kick-down which would result in an engine
speed high enough to damage the engine.
Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift
down in this way at high engine speed – the
original gear remains engaged.
On kick-down the car can shift down one or
more steps at a time, depending in engine
speed. The car shifts up when the engine has
reached is maximum engine speed in order to
prevent engine damage.
Related information
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
Symbols and messages for
automatic gearbox
If a fault should occur in the gearbox, a sym-
bol and a message are shown in the driver
display.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system
components, the working temperature of
the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of
overheating, a warning symbol illuminates
in the driver display and a text message is
shown - follow the recommendation given.
Symbol Specification
Information or error message for
gearbox. Follow the recommen-
dation given.
Hot or overheated gearbox. Fol-
low the recommendation given.
Reduced performance/Accel-
eration performance reduced
In the event of a temporary pow-
ertrain fault, the car can go into a
Limp home mode with reduced
engine power to prevent damage
to the powertrain.
STARTING AND DRIVING
459
Related information
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
Gear shift indicator
The gear shift indicator in the driver display
shows the current gear during manual gear-
shifting and when it is appropriate to engage
the next gear for optimum fuel economy.
For eco-driving during manual gear changing,
it is important to drive in the right gear and to
change gear in good time.
Gear shift indicator in the driver display
5
.
The gear shift indicator is shown in gear posi-
tion B. The gear shift indicator shows the cur-
rent gear in the driver display and indicates
recommended shifting to a higher gear by a
flashing plus sign.
Related information
Automatic gearbox (p. 454)
All-wheel drive
All-wheel drive (AWD
6
) means that the car is
driving all four wheels at the same time,
which improves traction.
The electric motor that drives the rear wheels
enables electric all-wheel drive functionality.
All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending
on the selected drive mode.
Related information
Drive modes (p. 461)
Gearbox (p. 454)
5
The figure is schematic – parts may vary depending on car model.
6
All Wheel Drive
STARTING AND DRIVING
460
Drive systems
Volvo's Twin Engine combines an internal
combustion engine that drives the front
wheels with an electric motor that drives the
rear wheels.
Two drive systems
Depending on the driver-selected drive mode
and available electric energy, the two drive
systems can be used either individually or in
parallel.
The electric motor is supplied its energy from
a hybrid battery fitted in the tunnel console.
The hybrid battery can be charged in a wall
socket, or in a special charging station. The
internal combustion engine can also charge
the hybrid battery with a special high-voltage
generator.
Both the internal combustion engine and elec-
tric motor can generate motive force directly
to the wheels. An advanced control system
combines the properties of both drive systems
in order to provide optimum driving economy.
Hybrid battery - The function of the hybrid
battery is to store energy. It receives
energy when charging from the mains
power circuit, during regenerative braking
or from the high-voltage generator. It pro-
vides energy for electric operation as well
as for temporarily operating the electric air
conditioning during the preconditioning of
the passenger compartment.
Internal combustion engine - The internal
combustion engine starts when the
energy level in the hybrid battery is insuffi-
cient for the engine power that the driver
requests.
High voltage generator
7
- Charges the
hybrid battery. Starter motor for the inter-
nal combustion engine. Can support the
internal combustion engine with extra
electrical energy.
Electric motor - Powers the car in electric
operation. If necessary, provides extra tor-
que and power during acceleration. Pro-
vides electrical all-wheel drive functional-
ity. Recycles brake energy to electrical
energy.
Related information
General information about Twin Engine
(p. 418)
Starting and stopping the combustion
engine in Twin Engine (p. 461)
Drive modes (p. 461)
Gearbox (p. 454)
Factors that affect range when running on
electricity (p. 471)
7
CISG (Crank Integrated Starter Generator) - Combined high-voltage generator and starter motor.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
461
Starting and stopping the
combustion engine in Twin Engine
An advanced control system determines the
extent to which the car is driven on internal
combustion engine, electric motor or both in
parallel. During electric operation, the car
may sometimes need to start the internal
combustion engine automatically due to
external circumstances, e.g. in low outside
temperatures, which is completely normal. In
addition, the internal combustion engine
always starts when the hybrid battery rea-
ches its lowest state of charge.
Climate settings at low temperatures
In low outside temperatures, the internal com-
bustion engine sometimes starts automatically
in order to achieve the desired passenger
compartment temperature and air quality. The
amount of time that the internal combustion
engine runs can be affected by
lowering the temperature
reducing the fan strength
activating drive mode
Pure.
Electric operation in low or high
temperatures
In low or high outside temperatures, the car's
range and output for electric operation may be
reduced and affect how often the internal
combustion engine is started automatically.
Emission control
To ensure that emission control operates as
energy-efficiently as possible, the internal
combustion engine must be run for several
minutes once it has been started. The duration
of the internal combustion engine's running
time varies depending on the temperature of
the catalytic converter.
Related information
Drive systems (p. 460)
Economical driving (p. 469)
Drive modes (p. 461)
Drive modes
Selection of drive mode affects the car's driv-
ing characteristics in order to enhance the
driving experience and facilitate driving in
special situations.
Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly
have access to the car's numerous functions
and settings for different driving needs. Each
drive mode is adapted to provide optimum
driving characteristics:
Steering
Engine/gearbox/all-wheel drive
Brakes
Shock absorption
Driver display
Climate settings
Select the drive mode adapted for the current
driving conditions. Remember that not all
drive modes are available in all situations.
Selectable drive modes
WARNING
Remember that the car does not emit any
engine noise when it is only powered by
the electric motor and may therefore be
difficult to notice by children, pedestrians,
cyclists and animals. This applies in partic-
ular at low speeds such as in car parks.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
462
WARNING
Do not leave the car in an unventilated area
with activated drive mode and the fuel-
driven engine switched off - automatic
engine start occurs at low energy level in
the hybrid battery, and the exhaust gases
could then cause serious injury to people
and animals.
Hybrid
This is the car's normal mode where the
electric motor and internal combustion
engine work together.
When the car starts, it is in the
Hybrid mode.
The control system uses both the electric
motor and internal combustion engine – indi-
vidually or in parallel – and adapts use with
regard to performance, fuel consumption and
comfort. The capacity to run solely with the
electric motor depends on the hybrid battery's
energy level and, for example, the need for
heating or cooling in the passenger compart-
ment.
If high power output is available, it is possible
to drive with electrical power alone. When the
accelerator pedal is depressed, only the elec-
tric motor is activated until a certain position is
reached. The internal combustion engine
starts when this position is exceeded and the
energy level in the battery is insufficient for the
engine power that the driver requests with the
accelerator pedal.
At low energy level (hybrid battery almost
empty) the battery's energy level must be
maintained, leading to the internal combustion
engine starting more often. Charge the hybrid
battery from a 230 VAC socket with the
charging cable, or activate
Charge in the func-
tion view in order to restore the capacity to
run on electricity alone.
The drive mode is designed for low energy
consumption with a mix of the electric motor
and the internal combustion engine, without
compromising the climate comfort and driving
experience. When higher acceleration is
required, maximum additional power from the
electric drive line is used.
The car also senses if the driving conditions
require all-wheel drive and automatically
engages it if necessary. All-wheel drive and
electric additional power are always available
regardless of the battery's state of charge.
Information in the driver display
When driving in hybrid mode the driver display
shows a hybrid gauge. The pointer in the
hybrid gauge indicates how much energy the
driver requests with the accelerator pedal. The
marking between the lightning bolt and the
drop shows how much energy is available.
The driver display for propulsion with both the elec-
tric motor and internal combustion engine.
The driver display also shows when
energy is returned to the battery
(regenerated) during light braking.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
463
Pure
Drive the car with electric motor, with
energy consumption as low as possible
and with lowest possible carbon dioxide
emissions.
The drive mode prioritises driving on the
hybrid battery. This means, for example, that
the output of certain climate settings is
reduced to provide the longest possible mile-
age on electric power alone.
The
Pure mode is available when the hybrid
battery has a sufficiently high energy level. The
internal combustion engine also starts in the
Pure mode if the energy level in the battery
falls too low. The internal combustion engine
also starts
if the speed exceeds 125 km/h (78 mph)
if the driver requests more motive force
than electric drive can provide
in the event of system/component limita-
tions e.g. low outside temperature.
The drive mode is adapted for maximum range
with electric propulsion and especially devel-
oped for urban traffic.
Pure means lowest
combustion even when the hybrid battery is
empty. The climate in the passenger compart-
ment is regulated to Eco climate, and in slip-
pery driving conditions, more wheel spin can
be permitted before all-wheel drive is acti-
vated automatically.
ECO climate control
In the Pure drive mode, eco climate control is
activated automatically in the passenger com-
partment in order to reduce energy consump-
tion.
NOTE
When the Pure drive mode is activated,
several parameters in the climate control
system's settings are changed, and several
electricity consumer functions are reduced.
Certain settings can be reset manually, but
full functionality is only regained by leaving
Pure drive mode or adapting Individual
drive mode with full climate functionality.
In the event of difficulties due to misting,
press the button for max. defroster which has
normal functionality.
Constant AWD
Improve the car's roadholding and traction
with enhanced all-wheel drive.
The drive mode locks the car in all-wheel drive.
An adapted distribution between the front and
rear axle torque provides good traction, stabil-
ity and roadholding, for example on slippery
roads, when driving with a heavy trailer, or
when towing.
Constant AWD drive mode is
always available regardless of the battery's
state of charge.
Both the internal combustion engine and elec-
tric motor are engaged in order to drive all four
wheels, which results in increased fuel con-
sumption.
In the car's other drive modes, the car auto-
matically adapts the need for all-wheel drive to
the road surface, and can engage the electric
motor or start the internal combustion engine
when necessary.
Power
The car has sportier characteristics and
faster response to accelerating.
The drive mode adapts the combined power
from the internal combustion engine and elec-
tric motor by means of the car being driven by
both front and rear wheels. The gear changes
become faster and more distinct, and the
gearbox prioritises a gear with greater trac-
tion. Steering response is faster and shock
absorption is harder.
Both the internal combustion engine and elec-
tric motor are engaged in order to drive all four
wheels, which results in increased fuel con-
sumption.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
464
The drive mode is adapted for maximum per-
formance and response on acceleration. It
changes the internal combustion engine's
accelerator pedal response, gear shift pattern
and boost pressure system. Chassis settings,
steering and brake response are also as good
as possible.
Power drive mode is always avail-
able regardless of the battery's state of
charge.
The
Power mode is also available in the
Polestar Engineered version*.
Individual
Adapting a drive mode according to indi-
vidual preferences.
Select a drive mode to start from, and then
adjust the settings according to the desired
driving characteristics. These settings are
saved in an individual driver profile.
An individual drive mode is only available if it is
first activated in the centre display.
Settings view
8
for individual drive mode.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Individual Drive Mode
and select Individual Drive Mode.
3.
In
Presets, select a drive mode to start
from: Pure, Hybrid, Power or Polestar
Engineered*.
Possible adjustments apply to settings for:
Driver Display
Steering Force
Powertrain Characteristics
Brake Characteristics
Suspension Control
ECO Climate
Using the electric motor or internal
combustion engine
An advanced control system determines the
extent to which the car is driven on internal
combustion engine, electric motor or both in
parallel.
The primary function is to use the engine or
motor and the available energy in the hybrid
battery as efficiently as possible, with regard
to the characteristics of the different drive
modes as well as the driver's request for
power via the accelerator pedal.
There are also cases where temporary limita-
tions in the system, or functions governed by
legal requirements aimed at maintaining a low
level of total emissions for the car, may use
8
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
465
the internal combustion engine to a greater
extent.
Related information
Changing drive mode (p. 465)
Economical driving (p. 469)
Energy distribution in hybrid drive using
map data* (p. 466)
Hybrid gauge (p. 84)
General information about Twin Engine
(p. 418)
Regenerative braking* (p. 453)
Changing drive mode
Select the drive mode adapted for the current
driving conditions.
Change the drive mode using the control in
the centre console.
Remember that not all drive modes are availa-
ble in all situations.
To change drive mode:
1. Press the drive mode control DRIVE
MODE.
> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
display.
2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until
the desired drive mode is highlighted.
3. Press the drive mode control or tap
directly on the touch screen to confirm the
selection.
> The selected drive mode is indicated in
the driver display.
Related information
Drive modes (p. 461)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
466
Energy distribution in hybrid drive
using map data*
The
Hybrid drive mode is the car's normal
mode where the electric motor and internal
combustion engine work individually or
together in hybrid drive. If a destination has
been selected in the navigation system*, the
Predictive Efficiency
9
function distributes the
electric energy consumption in an intelligent
way along the whole driving distance using
the map data.
Fuel consumption can then be reduced com-
pared with normal hybrid drive when the car is
first driven on electricity, to then change over
to being driven by the internal combustion
engine when the hybrid battery has been dis-
charged.
Function
If the distance to the selected destination is
greater than the estimated range when run-
ning on electricity, this function distributes the
electric energy for consumption that is as
energy-efficient as possible for the entire dis-
tance to be travelled. This makes it possible to
avoid situations where normal hybrid drive
would otherwise use a large proportion of the
electric energy, for example, to run electric
drive at high speed on a motorway and then
use the internal combustion engine at low
speed in urban driving.
The greatest fuel saving is achieved when
the distance to be travelled begins with
driving on a motorway
the distance to be travelled is between 50
and 100 km (30 and 60 miles)
the hybrid battery is fully charged at the
beginning.
Conditions for the function
For the function to work requires that a num-
ber of conditions are met:
A destination is set in the navigation sys-
tem and the driving distance to the desti-
nation is longer than the range possible
only on electric drive.
Hybrid drive mode is selected.
The
Hold and Charge functions are deac-
tivated.
The hybrid battery is charged.
Tips for use
If the car is used for commuting to work and it
is not possible to charge the car at the place of
work, specify the place of work as an inter-
mediate destination and your home as the
final destination. The discharging of the hybrid
battery will then take place over your runs
both to and from work.
Add similar commuting routes, i.e. the route
between two charging points, as
Favourites
in the navigation system to facilitate arrival.
Related information
Drive modes (p. 461)
Economical driving (p. 469)
9
Certain markets only.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
467
Level control* and shock
absorption
Level control and shock absorption are regu-
lated automatically in the car.
Shock absorption (Four-C)
On a car equipped with Four-C the shock
absorption is adapted according to the drive
mode selected and the speed of the car.
Shock absorption is normally set for optimum
comfort and is regulated continuously depend-
ing on the road surface, the car's acceleration,
braking and cornering.
Manually adjustable shock absorbers*
Polestar Engineered* variant cars have the
option to adjust the dampers manually. There
are three recommended positions: perform-
ance position, engineered and comfort posi-
tion.
Performance position
The performance position means that the car's
damping feels harder.
Engineered, factory setting
Engineered is adapted for daily driving.
Comfort position
Comfort position means that the car's damp-
ing feels softer.
Symbols and messages
If a fault arises with the level control, a mes-
sage is shown in the driver display.
Symbol Message Specification
Suspension
Service required
A fault has occurred. Visit a workshop
A
as soon as possible.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Drive modes (p. 461)
Adjusting the setting for damping Polestar
Engineered* (p. 468)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
468
Adjusting the setting for damping
Polestar Engineered*
It is possible to adjust the settings of the
shock absorbers for driving under other con-
ditions or on specific road surfaces.
Location of adjuster knobs
There are four adjuster knobs, two for the front
shock absorbers and two for the rear. The
adjuster knobs are located above each wheel.
For the front wheels, the adjuster knobs are
located under the bonnet. For the rear wheels,
the adjuster knobs are located above each
wheel in the wheel housing.
Location of adjuster knob, front wheel.
Location of adjuster knob, rear wheel.
NOTE
There is a total of 22 adjustment positions
for each adjuster knob. The closer to 0 for
the adjuster knob, the harder the shock
absorption.
Adjusting the setting for damping,
front
Make sure that the adjuster knob is set to 0
position before starting the adjustment. This
way it is easier to know which adjustment
position is set.
Turn the adjuster knob clockwise and anticlockwise
respectively to change adjustment position.
Turn the control clockwise until it has
stopped in order to access adjustment
position 0.
Turn the control anticlockwise to select
the desired adjustment position. Adjust-
ment positions are defined with an audible
and noticeable click.
> Then carry out the same procedure for
the other tyre.
Adjusting the setting for damping, rear
The rear adjuster knobs are located above the
tyre inside the wheel housing. The car must be
raised on a jack to access the rear adjuster
knobs, see separate section.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
469
The rubber cover is located above the adjuster knob.
Turn the adjuster knob clockwise and anticlockwise
respectively to change adjustment position.
Remove the protective rubber cover that
covers the adjuster knob.
Turn the control clockwise until it has
stopped in order to access adjustment
position 0.
Turn the adjuster knob anticlockwise to
select the desired adjustment position.
Adjustment positions are defined with an
audible and noticeable click.
> When the desired position has been
set, refit the protective rubber cover.
Then carry out the same procedure for
the other tyre.
NOTE
To achieve as good performance as possi-
ble, Volvo recommends that the adjuster
knobs are set at the same position for each
axle.
Recommended positions
Position Front Rear
Performance
position
adjustment
position 2
adjustment
position 4
Engineered,
factory setting
adjustment
position 6
adjustment
position 9
Comfort posi-
tion
adjustment
position 12
adjustment
position 15
Related information
Raise the car (p. 605)
Level control* and shock absorption
(p. 467)
Economical driving
Drive economically and in a more eco-friendly
way by driving gently and anticipating situa-
tions.
Adapt your driving style and speed to the pre-
vailing situation.
To achieve the longest driving distance possi-
ble and lowest energy consumption possible
with Twin Engine, note the following:
Charge
Charge the car regularly from the mains
power circuit. Make it a habit to always
start a journey with fully-charged hybrid
battery.
Find out where the charging stations are
located.
If possible, select a parking space with a
charging station.
NOTE
Charge the car from the mains power cir-
cuit as often as possible!
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
470
Precondition
Precondition the car before driving if pos-
sible using the charging cable connected
to the mains power circuit.
Avoid parking the car in a way that the
interior cools down or overheats while
parking. Park the car in an acclimated
garage, for example.
During a short drive after preconditioning
of the passenger compartment, switch off
the ventilation fan or air conditioning in a
hot climate, if possible.
If preconditioning is not possible when it
is cold outside, use seat heating and steer-
ing wheel heating first of all. Avoid warm-
ing up the whole of the interior which
takes energy from the hybrid battery.
Drive
For lowest energy consumption, activate
the
Pure drive mode.
Drive at a steady speed and keep a good
distance to other vehicles and objects in
order to avoid braking. This driving style
results in the lowest energy consumption.
Balance the power requirement using the
accelerator pedal. Use the indicator for
available electric motor power in the driver
display in order to avoid starting the inter-
nal combustion engine unnecessarily. The
electric motor is more efficient that the
internal combustion engine, in particular at
low speed.
In the event of braking being necessary -
brake gently with the brake pedal, this
recharges the hybrid battery. A regenera-
tive braking function is built into the brake
pedal and can be reinforced with electric
motor braking in gear position B.
High speed results in increased energy
consumption - the wind resistance increa-
ses with speed.
Activate the
Hold function in the function
view at higher speeds during journeys that
are longer than the range of the electricity.
If possible, avoid using the
Charge func-
tion to charge the hybrid battery. Charging
with the internal combustion engine
increases fuel consumption and involves
increased carbon dioxide emissions.
In a cold climate, reduce electrical heating
of windows, mirrors, seats and steering
wheel, if possible.
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for optimum results.
Choice of tyres can affect energy con-
sumption - seek advice on suitable tyres
from a dealer.
Remove unnecessary items from the car -
the greater the load the higher the con-
sumption.
A roof load and ski box increase air resis-
tance, leading to higher consumption -
remove the load carriers when not in use.
Avoid driving with open windows.
Do not hold the car stationary on a hill
with the accelerator pedal. Use the foot
brake instead.
Related information
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 30)
Energy distribution in hybrid drive using
map data* (p. 466)
Factors that affect range when running on
electricity (p. 471)
Hybrid gauge (p. 84)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 564)
STARTING AND DRIVING
471
Factors that affect range when
running on electricity
The car's range for electric operation depends
on several factors. The ability to achieve a
long range varies according to the circum-
stances and conditions under which the car is
being driven.
The certified value for the car's mileage on
electric power should not be interpreted as an
expected range. The certification value is a
comparative value obtained by means of spe-
cial EU drive cycles. The actual range is
dependent on a number of factors.
Factors that affect the range
The driver can influence some factors, but has
no influence over others.
The longest range is achieved under extremely
favourable conditions when all factors have a
positive impact.
Factors the driver cannot influence
There are several external factors that affect
the range in varying degrees:
traffic situation
short driving distances
topography
outside temperature and headwind
road condition and surface.
The table shows the approximate relationship
between outside temperature and range, both
in a car with deactivated passenger compart-
ment climate control, as well as in a car with
normal passenger compartment climate con-
trol.
A warmer outside temperature has a positive
effect on range to a certain extent.
Outside
tempera-
ture
Deactivated
passenger
compart-
ment cli-
mate con-
trol
Normal
passenger
compart-
ment cli-
mate con-
trol
30 °C
(86 °F)
95 % 80 %
20 °C
(68 °F)
100 % 90 %
10 °C (50 °F) 90 % 80 %
0 °C (32 °F) 80 % 60 %
-10 °C
(14 °F)
70 % 40 %
Factors the driver can influence
The driver should be aware that the following
factors affect the range so he/she can operate
the car in an energy-efficient manner:
regular charging
preconditioning
drive mode
Pure
climate settings
speed and acceleration
Hold function
tyres and tyre pressure.
The table shows the approximate relationship
between constant speed and range, where a
lower constant speed has a positive effect on
range.
Constant speed
100 km/h (62 mph) 50 %
80 km/h (50 mph) 70 %
60 km/h (37 mph) 90 %
50 km/h (31 mph) 100 %
NOTE
The values shown in the tables relate
to a new car.
These values are not absolute, but are
dependent upon driving behaviour,
environment and other circumstances.
Related information
Economical driving (p. 469)
Hold and Charge function (p. 472)
Drive modes (p. 461)
STARTING AND DRIVING
472
Hold and Charge function
In some situations, it can be useful to be able
to control the hybrid battery's state of charge
while driving is in progress. This is possible
with the functions
Hold and Charge.
Hold and Charge are available in all drive
modes. The functions are cancelled if
Pure
drive mode is activated.
Function buttons for Hold and Charge
The functions are activated in the centre dis-
play's function view.
Hold
Battery level sustained for
later use.
The function maintains the
charge in the hybrid battery
for electric drive and saves
available electricity for later
use e.g. for driving in an urban environment or
through a residential area.
The car works as for normal hybrid operation
with discharged battery where, in addition to
re-using brake-generated energy, for example,
the car starts the internal combustion engine
more often in order to maintain the charge in
the battery.
Charge
Engine charges hybrid
battery.
The function charges the
hybrid battery with assis-
tance from the internal com-
bustion engine for using
increased electric operation at a later time.
Symbols in the driver display
The symbol is shown in the hybrid battery
gauge when Hold is activated.
The symbol is shown in the hybrid battery
gauge when Charge is activated.
Related information
Economical driving (p. 469)
Hybrid gauge (p. 84)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
473
Preparations for a long trip
Before a driving holiday or some other type of
long journey, it is important to check the car's
functions and equipment particularly care-
fully.
Check that
the engine is working normally and that
fuel consumption is normal
there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
braking effect on braking works as
intended
the tyres have sufficient tread depth and
pressure. Change to winter tyres when
driving to areas where there is a risk of
snowy or icy road surfaces
starter battery charging is good
the wiper blades are in good condition
a warning triangle and high-visibility vest
are located in the car - legally required in
certain countries
Related information
Checking tyre pressure (p. 564)
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions
(p. 673)
Filling washer fluid (p. 654)
Winter driving (p. 473)
Economical driving (p. 469)
Settings for car modem* (p. 538)
Recommendations for loading (p. 593)
Driving with a trailer (p. 486)
Pilot Assist* (p. 330)
Speed limiter (p. 311)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 578)
Winter driving
For winter driving it is important to perform
certain checks of the car in order to ensure
that it can be driven safely.
Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
The engine coolant must contain 50%
glycol. This mixture protects the engine
against frost down to approx. -35°C
(-31°F). To avoid health risks, different
types of glycol must not be mixed.
The fuel tank must be kept filled to pre-
vent condensation.
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star-
ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
consumption while the engine is cold.
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the
starter battery and its capacity is reduced
by the cold.
Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid
ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
See the separate section for engine oil recom-
mendations.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
474
Slippery driving conditions
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom-
mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there
is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal require-
ment in certain countries. Studded tyres
are not permitted in all countries.
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
Related information
Engine oil – specifications (p. 667)
Winter tyres (p. 577)
Snow chains (p. 577)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 447)
Braking on wet roads (p. 447)
Filling washer fluid (p. 654)
Starter battery (p. 616)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 652)
Topping up coolant (p. 614)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 669)
Driving in water
Wading means the car being driven through
water e.g. on a flooded road. Driving in water
must be performed with great caution.
Observe the following to prevent damage to
the car when driving through water:
The water level must not be higher than
the floor of the car. If possible, check the
depth at the deepest point before starting
to drive through the water. Extra caution
should be exercised when passing
through flowing water.
Do not drive faster than walking pace.
Do not stop the car in the water. Drive for-
ward carefully or reverse the car back out
of the water.
Remember that waves created by oncom-
ing traffic may rise above the level for the
floor of the car.
Avoid driving through salt water (corrosion
risk).
IMPORTANT
Parts of the car (e.g. engine, gearbox,
driveline or electrical components) may be
damaged when driving through water with
a level higher than the floor of the car.
Damaged caused to a component caused
by submersion, hydrolock or lack of oil is
not covered by the warranty.
In the event of stalling in water, do not try
to restart. Instead, tow the car out of the
water and transported on a low loader to a
workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
When the water has been passed, depress the
brake pedal lightly and check that full brake
function is achieved. Water and mud for
example can make the brake linings wet
resulting in delayed brake function.
If necessary, clean the contact for the trailer
coupling after driving in water and mud.
Related information
Recovery (p. 493)
STARTING AND DRIVING
475
Opening and closing the fuel filler
flap
The fuel filler flap is unlocked by pressing a
button on the instrument panel.
In the driver display, the
arrow next to the tank symbol
indicates which side of the
car the fuel filler flap is
located.
1. Press the button on the instrument panel.
> Pressure equalisation of the fuel tank
involves a certain delay in opening the
flap. The message
Preparing for refuel
Fuel lid will be unlocked when ready
appears in the driver display, and when
the system is ready the message
Fuel
tank Ready for refuelling appears in
the driver display. If the internal com-
bustion engine is switched on when the
button is pressed, it is generally
switched off and the car switches to
electric mode.
NOTE
After the fuel filler flap has been opened,
refuelling must take place within about 15
minutes. After this, the valve that was
opened by pressing the button to open the
fuel filler cap is closed, and it is no longer
possible to refuel because the pump nozzle
cuts out.
If the valve is closed before refuelling is
complete - press the button again and wait
until the driver display shows the message
Fuel tank Ready for refuelling.
2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap
with a gentle press.
Related information
Filling fuel (p. 476)
STARTING AND DRIVING
476
Filling fuel
The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel
filler system.
Refuelling the car at a petrol station
It is important to feed the pump nozzle past the filler
pipe's two openable hatches before starting to fuel
the car.
Fuelling instruction:
1. Switch off the car and open the fuel filler
flap.
NOTE
After the fuel filler flap has been opened,
refuelling must take place within about 15
minutes. After this, the valve that was
opened by pressing the button to open the
fuel filler cap is closed, and it is no longer
possible to refuel because the pump nozzle
cuts out.
If the valve is closed before refuelling is
complete - press the button again and wait
until the driver display shows the message
Fuel tank Ready for refuelling.
2.
Choose fuel that is approved for use in the
car in accordance with the identifier
10
on
the inside of the fuel filler flap. See infor-
mation on approved fuels and identifier in
the section on "Petrol".
3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler
opening. The filler pipe has two opening
caps. The pump nozzle must be pushed
past both caps before refuelling is started.
10
The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout
Europe by 12 October 2018 at the latest.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
477
4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
pump nozzle cuts out the first time.
> The tank is full.
NOTE
Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in
hot weather.
Topping up fuel from a fuel can
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located in the foam block under the floor hatch
in the cargo area.
1. Open the fuel filler flap.
2. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening.
The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
funnel's pipe must be pushed past both
caps before filling can be started.
Applicable to cars with fuel-driven
auxiliary heater*
Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car
is in a filling station area.
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Related information
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
(p. 475)
Petrol (p. 478)
Handling of fuel
Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that
recommended by Volvo, as this will nega-
tively affect engine power and fuel consump-
tion.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get-
ting fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel
are highly toxic and could cause permanent
injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medi-
cal attention immediately if fuel has been
swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could
cause spark build-up and ignite petrol
fumes, leading to fire and injury.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
478
IMPORTANT
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of
fuels which are not recommended will
invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any sup-
plementary service agreements; this is
applicable to all engines.
Related information
Petrol (p. 478)
Petrol
It is important to use the correct fuel during
refuelling. Petrol is available with different
octane ratings that are adapted for different
types of driving.
Only use petrol from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol
must fulfil the EN 228 standard.
Identifier for petrol
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The identifier in accordance with the CEN
standard EN16942 is located on the inside of
the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding
fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe by 12 October 2018 at the
latest.
These are the identifiers that apply for current
standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the fol-
lowing identifiers may be used in cars with
petrol engine:
E5 is a petrol with maximum
2.7% oxygen and maximum
5 volume % ethanol.
E10 is a petrol with maximum
3.7% oxygen and maximum
10 volume % ethanol.
IMPORTANT
Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by
volume ethanol is permitted.
EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by
volume ethanol) is approved for use.
Ethanol higher than E10
(max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is
not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permit-
ted.
Octane rating
RON 95 can be used for normal driving.
RON 98 is recommended for good power
and low fuel consumption.
An octane rating lower than RON 95 must
not be used.
STARTING AND DRIVING
479
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C
(100 °F), fuel with the highest octane rating is
recommended for adapted performance and
fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid dam-
aging the catalytic converter.
Fuel containing metallic additives must
not be used.
Do not use any additives which have
not been recommended by Volvo.
Related information
Handling of fuel (p. 477)
Filling fuel (p. 476)
Petrol particle filter (p. 479)
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions
(p. 673)
Petrol particle filter
11
Petrol cars are fitted with particle filters for
more efficient emission control.
Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in
the petrol particle filter during normal driving.
In normal driving conditions, passive regenera-
tion takes place, which leads to the particles
being oxidised and burned away. The filter is
emptied in this way.
If the car is driven at low speed or with repea-
ted cold starts in low outside temperature,
active regeneration may be necessary. Regen-
eration of the particulate filter is automatic and
normally takes 1020 minutes. Fuel consump-
tion may temporarily increase during regenera-
tion.
When driving short distances at low
speeds in a petrol car
The capacity of the emissions system is affec-
ted by how the car is driven. Driving varying
distances and at different speeds is important
in order to achieve performance that is as
energy-efficient as possible.
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in
cold climates) frequently, where the engine
does not reach normal operating temperature,
can lead to problems that can eventually
cause a malfunction and trigger a warning
message. If the vehicle is mostly driven in city
traffic, it is important to regularly drive at
higher speeds to allow the emissions system
to regenerate.
The car should be driven on A-roads at
speeds in excess of 70 km/h (44 mph) for
at least 20 minutes between each refuel-
ling.
Related information
Petrol (p. 478)
11
Applicable to certain variants.
STARTING AND DRIVING
480
Overheating in the engine and
drive system
Under certain conditions, e.g. hard driving in
hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk
that the engine and drive system may over-
heat – in particular with a heavy load.
In the event of overheating, the engine's
power may be limited temporarily.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system becomes too high then a warning
symbol is illuminated and the driver dis-
play shows the message
Engine
temperature High temperature Stop
safely. Stop the car in a safe way and
allow the engine to run at idling speed for
several minutes and cool down.
If the message
Engine temperature
High temperature Turn off engine or
Engine coolant Level low, turn off
engine is shown, stop the car and switch
off the engine.
In the event of overheating in the gearbox,
an alternative gear shift program will be
selected. In addition, a built-in protection
function is activated that, amongst other
things, illuminates a warning symbol and
the driver display shows the message
Transmission warm Reduce speed to
lower temperature or Transmission hot
Stop safely, wait for cooling
. Follow the
recommendation given, reduce speed or
stop the car in a safe way and allow the
engine to run at idling speed for several
minutes to enable the gearbox to cool
down.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
Do not turn the engine off immediately
you stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has
been switched off.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
High engine temperature. Follow
the recommendation given.
Low level, coolant. Follow the
recommendation given.
Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled.
Follow the recommendation
given.
Related information
Topping up coolant (p. 614)
Driving with a trailer (p. 486)
Preparations for a long trip (p. 473)
Gear shift indicator (p. 459)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
481
Overloading the starter battery
The electrical functions in the car load the
starter battery to varying degrees. Avoid
using the ignition position II when the car is
switched off. Instead, use ignition position I -
which uses less power.
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use func-
tions which use a lot of power when the car is
switched off. Examples of such functions are:
ventilation fan
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low, a message
is shown in the driver display. The energy-sav-
ing function then shuts down certain functions
or reduces certain functions such as the venti-
lation fan and/or audio system.
In which case, charge the starter battery
by starting the car and then running it for
at least 15 minutes - starter battery charg-
ing is more effective during driving than
running the engine at idling speed while
stationary.
Related information
Starter battery (p. 616)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Using jump starting with another
battery
If the starter battery is discharged then the
car can be started with current from another
battery.
Charging point for jump-starting own car.
IMPORTANT
The car’s charging point is only intended
for jump-starting the car itself. The charg-
ing point is not intended for jump-starting
another car. Using the charging point to
jump start another car may cause a fuse to
blow, which means the charging point will
stop working.
When a fuse has blown the message 12 V
Battery Fuse failure Service required is
shown in the driver display. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo workshop is
contacted.
When jump-starting the car, the following
steps are recommended to avoid short circuits
or other damage:
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
482
1. Set the car's electrical system in ignition
position 0.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage
of 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine and
make sure that the two cars do not touch
each other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's positive ter-
minal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Open the positive jump-starting point's
cover (2).
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive jump-starting point
(2).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's negative ter-
minal (3).
8. Connect the black jump lead's other
clamp onto the car's negative jump-star-
ting point (4).
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are
affixed securely so that there are no sparks
during the starting attempt.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
11. Start your own car's engine. If the start
attempt fails then extend the charging
time to 10 minutes, and then make a new
start attempt.
NOTE
When starting the engine in normal condi-
tions the car's electric drive motor is priori-
tised - the petrol engine remains switched
off. This means that after the start knob
has been turned clockwise, the electric
motor has "started" and the car is ready to
move. A started motor is indicated by the
driver display's indicator lamps extinguish-
ing and its preset theme illuminating.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the connections between
cable and car during the starting attempt.
There is a risk of sparks forming.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -
first the black and then the red.
Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with the
car's positive jump-starting point/donor
battery's positive terminal or the clamp
connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is con-
nected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
Never smoke near the battery.
NOTE
The car cannot be started if the hybrid bat-
tery is discharged.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
483
Related information
Starting the car (p. 440)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 443)
Towbar*
The car can be equipped with a towbar that
makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer behind
the car.
There may be different towbar variants availa-
ble for the car. Contact a Volvo dealer for more
information.
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the con-
stant battery voltage to the trailer connec-
tor can be switched off automatically so as
not to drain the starter battery.
IMPORTANT
The towball needs regular cleaning and
lubrication with grease in order to prevent
wear.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is
used, the towball must not be lubricated.
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towbar, there
is no rear mounting for a towing eye.
Related information
Extendable and retractable towbar*
(p. 484)
Driving with a trailer (p. 486)
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* (p. 490)
Specifications for towbar* (p. 484)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
484
Specifications for towbar*
Dimensions and mounting points for towbar.
Dimensions, mounting points in mm
(inches)
A 1121.9 (44.2)
B 81.5 (3.2)
C 875 (34.4)
D 437.5 (17.2)
E See the image above
F 273.7 (10.8)
G Ball centre
Related information
Towbar* (p. 483)
Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 664)
Extendable and retractable
towbar*
The retractable tow hook is easy to retract or
extend as required. In the retracted position,
the towbar is completely concealed.
WARNING
Follow the instructions for retracting and
extending the towbar carefully.
WARNING
Do not press the extend/retract button if a
trailer is attached to the towbar.
Extending the towbar
WARNING
Avoid standing close to the bumper in the
centre behind the car when extending the
towing hitch.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
485
1.
Open the boot lid. A button for extending/
retracting the towbar is located on the
right-hand side at the rear of the cargo
area. An indicator lamp in the button must
illuminate with a constant orange glow for
the extension function to be active.
2. Press and release the button – extension
might not start if the button is pressed for
too long.
> The towbar extends out and down in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp
flashes orange. The tow hook is ready
to continue moving to the locked posi-
tion.
3.
Move the towbar to its end position,
where it is secured and locked in place -
the indicator lamp illuminates with a con-
stant orange glow.
> The towbar is ready for use.
NOTE
The towbar must finish the extension pro-
cedure before it can then be moved to
locked position. This procedure may take
several seconds. If the towbar is not fixed
in locked position, wait a few seconds and
try again.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety
cable in the intended bracket.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
486
NOTE
Power save mode activates after a while
and the indicator lamp goes out. The sys-
tem is reactivated by closing and reopen-
ing the boot lid. This applies when retract-
ing or extending the towbar.
If the car detects a connected trailer elec-
trically, the indicator lamp stops illuminat-
ing with a constant glow.
Retracting the towbar
IMPORTANT
Make sure that there is no plug or adapter
in the electrical socket when retracting the
towbar.
1. Open the boot lid. Press and release the
button on the right-hand side at the rear of
the cargo area - retraction might not start
if the button is pressed for too long.
> The towbar automatically lowers in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp
in the button flashes orange.
2.
Lock the towbar by moving it back to its
retracted position, where it is locked.
> The indicator lamp will now illuminate
with a constant glow if the towbar is
correctly retracted.
Related information
Driving with a trailer (p. 486)
Towbar* (p. 483)
Driving with a trailer
When driving with a trailer, there are a num-
ber of points that are important to think about
regarding the towbar, the trailer and how the
load is positioned in the trailer.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight.
The car is supplied with the necessary equip-
ment for towing a trailer.
The car's towbar must be of an approved
type.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that
the weight on the towbar complies with
the specified maximum towball load. Tow-
ball load is calculated as part of the car's
payload.
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
mended pressure for a full load.
The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km (620 miles).
The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear when shifting
manually and adjust your speed.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
487
Follow the regulations in force for the per-
mitted speeds and weights.
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
The maximum indicated trailer weight only
applies to heights up to 1000 metres
above sea level (3280 ft). At higher eleva-
tions, the engine output and the vehicle's
climbing ability are reduced due to the
reduced air density, and the maximum
trailer load must therefore be reduced. The
weight of the car and trailer must be
decreased by 10% for each additional
1000 m (3280 ft) or part thereof.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes, in combi-
nation with poorer fuel quality than recom-
mended, are factors that considerably
increase the car's fuel consumption.
Trailer connector
An adapter is required if the car's towbar has a
13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin
connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo.
Make sure the cable does not drag on the
ground.
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the con-
stant battery voltage to the trailer connec-
tor can be switched off automatically so as
not to drain the starter battery.
Trailer weights
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and
trailer may be difficult to control in the
event of sudden movement and braking.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further
limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars
can be certified for higher towing weights
than the car can actually tow.
Level control*
The car's system for level control endeavours
to maintain a constant height regardless of
load (up to the maximum permissible weight).
When the car is stationary the rear of the car
lowers slightly, which is normal.
When driving in hilly terrain and hot
climates
Under certain circumstances, there may be a
risk of overheating when towing a trailer. If the
engine and drive system overheats, a warning
symbol comes on in the driver display and a
message is displayed.
The automatic gearbox adapts the gears
depending on load and engine speed.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher
gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not
always a good idea to drive at a high gear with
low engine speed.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3. Select gear position P.
4. Release the brake pedal.
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a
car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2. Select gear position D.
3. Releasing the parking brake.
4. Release the brake pedal and start driving
off.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
488
Related information
Trailer stability assist* (p. 488)
Checking trailer lamps (p. 489)
Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 664)
Overheating in the engine and drive sys-
tem (p. 480)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 669)
Extendable and retractable towbar*
(p. 484)
Trailer stability assist*
The function of trailer stability assist (TSA
12
)
is to stabilise cars towing trailers in situations
where they begin snaking. The function is
included in the stability system ESC
13
.
Reasons for snaking
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally
occurs at high speeds. However, there is a risk
of it occurring at lower speeds if the trailer is
overloaded or the load is improperly distrib-
uted, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road
surface or in a pothole.
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or
even impossible to suppress. This makes the
car/trailer combination difficult to control and
there is a risk that you could, for example, end
up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
Trailer stability assist function
The trailer stability assist function continually
monitors the car's movements, particularly lat-
eral movements. If snaking is detected, the
front wheels are individually braked. This
serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination.
This is often enough to help the driver regain
control of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time that
trailer stability assist intervenes, the car/trailer
combination is braked with all wheels and
engine power is reduced. Once snaking has
been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer
combination is stable once again, the system
stops regulating and the driver once again has
full control of the car.
NOTE
The stability function is deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode by deactivating
ESC via the menu system in the centre
display.
Trailer stability assist may fail to intervene if
the driver uses severe steering wheel move-
ments to try to rectify the snaking because in
such a situation the system cannot determine
whether it is the trailer or the driver causing
the snaking.
12
Trailer Stability Assist
13
Electronic Stability Control
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
489
When Trailer Stability Assist
(TSA) is operating, the ESC
symbol flashes in the driver
display.
Related information
Driving with a trailer (p. 486)
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
Checking trailer lamps
When connecting a trailer - check that all the
trailer lamps work before departure.
Direction indicators and brake lights
on the trailer
If one or more of the trailer's direction indica-
tors or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver
display shows a symbol and a message. Other
lights on the trailer must be checked manually
by the driver before setting off.
Symbol Message
Trailer turn indicator Right
turn indicator malfunction
Trailer turn indicator Left
turn indicator malfunction
Trailer brake light Malfunc-
tion
If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators
is broken, the driver display symbol for direc-
tion indicators will also flash more quickly than
normal.
Rear fog lamp on trailer
When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp
may not light up on the car. In such cases, the
rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer.
Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check
therefore that the trailer is equipped with a
rear fog lamp to travel safely.
Checking trailer lamps*
Automatic checking
After a trailer is connected electrically, it is
possible to check that the trailer lamps are
working via an automatic lamp activation. The
function helps the driver check that the trailer
lamps are working before starting off.
The car must be switched off to perform the
check.
1. When a trailer is connected to the towbar,
the
Automatic Trailer Lamp Check mes-
sage is shown in the driver display.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the
right-hand steering wheel keypad's O but-
ton.
> The lamp check starts.
3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality.
> All trailer lamps start to flash - then the
lamps are switched on one at a time.
4. Visually check that all lamps available on
the trailer are operational.
5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer
flash again.
> The check is complete.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
490
Switching off automatic checking
The automatic checking function can be
switched off in the centre display.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Deselect
Automatic Trailer Lamp
Check.
Manual checking
If the automatic checking is switched off then
it is possible to start the check manually.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Select
Manual Trailer Lamp Check.
> The lamp check starts. Exit the car to
check lamp functionality.
Related information
Driving with a trailer (p. 486)
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
When using a bicycle rack, the bicycle racks
that Volvo has developed are recommended.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and
in order to achieve the maximum possible
safety during a journey. Volvo's bicycle racks
are available for purchase at authorised Volvo
dealers.
Carefully follow the instructions enclosed with
the bicycle rack.
Bicycle rack including load must weigh a
maximum of 75 kg (165 pounds).
The bicycle rack may be designed for a
maximum of three bicycles.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the bicycle rack may cause
damage to the towbar and car.
The bicycle rack can loosen from the tow-
bar if it
is incorrectly fitted on the towball
is overloaded, see the bicycle rack's
instructions for maximum load weight
is used for carrying something other
than bicycles.
The car's driving characteristics are affected
when a bicycle rack is fitted on the towbar.
For example due to:
increased weight
reduced acceleration capacity
reduced ground clearance
changed braking capacity.
Recommendations for loading
bicycles on the bicycle rack
The larger the distance between the load's
centre of gravity and the towball, the greater
the load on the towbar.
Load according to the following recommenda-
tions:
Fit the heaviest bicycle furthest in, closest
to the car.
Keep the load symmetrical and as close to
the centre of the car as possible e.g. by
loading the bicycles facing alternately if
several bicycles are loaded.
Remove loose objects from the bicycle for
transportation, e.g. bicycle basket, battery,
child seat. Partly to reduce the load on the
towbar and bicycle rack, and partly to
reduce the wind resistance, which affects
fuel consumption.
Do not use protective covers on the bicy-
cles. This may affect manoeuvrability,
impair visibility and increase fuel con-
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
491
sumption. It may also lead to an increased
load on the towbar.
Related information
Towbar* (p. 483)
Towing
During towing, the car is towed by another
vehicle by means of a towline.
Towing a Twin Engine is not permitted as this
will damage the electric motor. Instead, the
car must be transported raised with all the
wheels on a recovery vehicle's platform, nei-
ther of the wheel pairs may have road contact.
When towing another car
Towing a car requires a lot of energy - use the
Constant AWD drive mode. This then
charges the hybrid battery, in combination
with improving the car's driving characteristics
and roadholding.
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit
for towing before the towing begins.
Jump starting
Tow-starting the motor is not permitted as
this will damage the electric motor. Use a
donor battery if the starter battery is dis-
charged and the engine does not start.
IMPORTANT
The electric drive motor and the catalytic
converter may be damaged during
attempts to tow-start the car.
Related information
Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 492)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 160)
Recovery (p. 493)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 481)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 443)
Gearbox (p. 454)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
492
Fitting and removing the towing
eye
Use the towing eye if the car shall tow
another vehicle. The towing eye is screwed
into a threaded socket behind a cover on the
right-hand side of the rear bumper.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towbar, there
is no rear mounting for a towing eye.
Fitting the towing eye
Take out the towing eye from the foam
block under the floor in the cargo area.
Remove the cover – press on the marking
with a finger while you fold out the oppo-
site side/corner.
> The cover pivots around its centre line
and can then be removed.
3. Screw in the towing eye until it reaches its
end stop.
Screw the eye in firmly. For example,
thread through the wheel bolt wrench* and
use it as a lever.
IMPORTANT
It is important that the towing eye is firmly
screwed into place - right in until it stops.
Removing the towing eye
Unscrew and remove the towing eye after
use and return it to its place in the foam
block.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
493
Related information
Towing (p. 491)
Recovery (p. 493)
Tool kit (p. 573)
Recovery
For recovery, the car is taken away with the
help of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The towing eye can be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed plat-
form.
IMPORTANT
Note that cars with Twin Engine must
always be transported raised up with all
the wheels on the recovery vehicle's plat-
form.
The car's position and ground clearance deter-
mine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a
flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery
vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground
clearance under the car is inadequate, then
the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up.
The car should then be lifted using the recov-
ery vehicle's lifting device.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain
behind the recovery vehicle while the car
pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
Related information
Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 492)
HomeLink
®
*
14
HomeLink
®15
is a programmable remote con-
trol, integrated in the car's electrical system,
which can remotely control up to three differ-
ent devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm
system, outdoor and indoor lighting) and
thereby replace the remote controls for them.
General
The figure is schematic - the version may vary.
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Indicator lamp
HomeLink
®
is supplied built-in to the interior
rearview mirror. The HomeLink
®
panel con-
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
494
sists of three programmable buttons and one
indicator lamp in the mirror glass.
For more information about HomeLink
®
, visit
www.HomeLink.com or call
00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number
+49 6838 907 277)
16
.
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. when changing to another
car or for use in another vehicle).
IMPORTANT
The programming for the buttons should
be deleted when the car is sold.
Related information
Using HomeLink
®
* (p. 496)
Programming HomeLink
®
* (p. 494)
Type approval for HomeLink
®
* (p. 497)
Programming HomeLink
®
*
17
Follow these instructions to program
HomeLink
®
, reset all programming or repro-
gram individual buttons.
NOTE
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position"
before HomeLink
®
can be programmed or
used. If possible, fit new batteries in the
remote control that shall be replaced by
HomeLink
®
for faster programming and
improved transmission of the radio signal.
The HomeLink
®
buttons should be reset
before programming.
WARNING
While programming HomeLink
®
, the
garage door or gate being programmed
may activate. For this reason, make sure
that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or
gate while programming is in progress. The
car should be outside the garage while a
garage door opener is being programmed.
1. Aim the remote control towards the
HomeLink
®
button to be programmed and
hold it approx. 28 cm (approx. 13 inches)
from the button. Do not obstruct the indi-
cator lamp on HomeLink
®
.
Note: The ability of some remote controls
to program HomeLink
®
is improved at a
distance of approx. 1520 cm (approx.
612 inches). Bear this in mind if problems
occur with the programming.
2. Press and hold depressed both the button
on the remote control and the button to be
reprogrammed on HomeLink
®
.
14
Applies to certain markets.
15
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
16
Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
17
Applies to certain markets.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
495
3. Do not release the buttons until the indica-
tor lamp has switched from flashing
slowly (approx. once per second) to either
flashing quickly (approx. 10 times per sec-
ond) or illuminating with a constant glow.
> If the indicator lamp illuminates with
a constant glow: Indication that the
programming has finished. Press the
programmed button twice to activate.
If the indicator lamp flashes quickly:
The device to be programmed to
HomeLink
®
may have a security func-
tion that requires extra steps. Test by
pressing the programmed button twice
to see whether the programming is
working. Otherwise, continue with the
following steps.
4. Locate programming button
18
on the
receiver for the garage door or similar. It is
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver.
5. Depress and release the receiver's pro-
gramming button once. The programming
must be completed within 30 seconds of
the button being depressed.
6. Press and release the button on
HomeLink
®
that you want to program.
Repeat the sequence of pressing/holding/
releasing a second time and, depending
on the receiver model, even a third time.
> Programming is now be complete and
the garage door, gate or similar should
now be activated when the pro-
grammed button is depressed.
In the event of programming problems, con-
tact HomeLink
®
at www.HomeLink.com, or
call 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number
+49 6838 907 277)
19
.
Reprogramming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLink
®
button,
proceed as follows:
1. Press the desired button and hold it
depressed for approx. 20 seconds.
2.
Once the indicator lamp on HomeLink
®
starts to flash slowly, programming can
continue as normal.
Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is
not programmed with a new unit, it will
resume the previously saved program-
ming.
Resetting the HomeLink
®
buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink
®
buttons at the same time, not each button
individually. Individual buttons can only be
reprogrammed.
Press and hold depressed the outer but-
tons (1 and 3) on HomeLink
®
for approx.
10 seconds.
> When the indicator lamp changes over
from a constant glow to starting to
flash, the buttons are reset and ready to
be reprogrammed.
18
Button designation and colour varies between manufacturers.
19
Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
496
Related information
Using HomeLink
®
* (p. 496)
HomeLink
®
* (p. 493)
Type approval for HomeLink
®
* (p. 497)
Using HomeLink
®
*
20
When HomeLink
®
is fully programmed it can
be used in place of the separate original
remote controls.
Depress the programmed button. The garage
door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated
(may take a few seconds). If the button is
depressed for more than 20 seconds then the
reprogramming is started. The indicator lamp
illuminates or flashes when the button has
been depressed. Naturally the original remote
controls can still be used in parallel with
HomeLink
®
if required.
NOTE
When the ignition has been switched off,
HomeLink
®
works for at least 7 minutes.
NOTE
HomeLink
®
cannot be used if the car is
locked and the alarm is armed* from the
outside.
WARNING
If HomeLink
®
is used to control a
garage door or gate, ensure that
nobody is near the door or gate while it
is in motion.
Do not use HomeLink
®
for any garage
door that does not have safety stop
and safety reverse.
Related information
HomeLink
®
* (p. 493)
Programming HomeLink
®
* (p. 494)
Type approval for HomeLink
®
* (p. 497)
20
Applies to certain markets.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
497
Type approval for HomeLink
®
*
21
Type approval for EU
Gentex Corporation hereby declares that
HomeLink
®
Model UAHL5 complies with the
Radio equipment directive 201453EU.
Wavelength within which the radio equipment
functions:
433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.
868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.
868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.
869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.
869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.
Certificate holder address: Gentex Corpora-
tion, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI
49464, USA
For more information, search support informa-
tion on type approval at www.volvocars.com.
Related information
HomeLink
®
* (p. 493)
Compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows
the compass direction
22
in which the front of
the car is pointing.
Rearview mirror with compass.
Eight different compass directions are shown
by their English abbreviations:
N (north), NE
(north east), E (east), SE (south east), S
(south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW
(north west).
Related information
Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 497)
Calibrating the compass* (p. 498)
Activating and deactivating the
compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows
the compass direction
23
in which the front of
the car is pointing.
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started.
To deactivate/activate the compass manually:
Depress the button on the underside of
the rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.
> If the compass is deactivated when the
car is switched off, it will not be acti-
vated the next time the car is started. In
this case, the compass needs to be
activated manually.
Related information
Compass* (p. 497)
Calibrating the compass* (p. 498)
21
Applies to certain markets.
22
A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only.
23
A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
498
Calibrating the compass*
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass
24
should be calibrated if the car
is moved between several magnetic zones.
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power
lines.
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.)
and ensure that all doors are closed.
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if
electrical equipment is not switched off.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror depressed for
approx. 3 seconds (use a paper clip, for
example). The number for the current
magnetic zone is shown.
Magnetic zones.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (
115) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the
compass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing
the character C, or hold the button on the
underside of the rearview mirror
depressed for approx. 6 seconds until the
character C is shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a com-
pass direction is shown in the display,
indicating that calibration is complete.
Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune
calibration.
7.
Cars with heated windscreen*: If the
character
C is shown in the display when
the heated windscreen is activated, per-
form the calibration in accordance with
point 6 above with the heated windscreen
activated.
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Related information
Compass* (p. 497)
Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 497)
24
A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
500
Sound, media and Internet
The audio and media system consists of
media player and radio. You can also connect
a phone via Bluetooth to use handsfree func-
tions or play music wirelessly in the car.
When the car is connected to the Internet
you can also use apps for media playback.
Overview of audio and media
Control the functions with your voice, steering
wheel keypad or the centre display. The num-
ber of speakers and amplifiers depends on
which audio system the car is equipped with.
System updating
The audio and media system is continuously
improved. It is recommended to download
system updates when new ones are available.
Related information
Media player (p. 511)
Radio (p. 505)
Phone (p. 527)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Apps (p. 502)
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Driver distraction (p. 42)
Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 601)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 544)
Audio settings
The sound reproduction quality is preset, but
it can be adjusted as well.
The volume is normally adjusted with the vol-
ume control below the centre display or with
the right-hand steering wheel keypad. This
applies, for example, during playback of music,
radio, ongoing phone calls and active traffic
messages.
Sound reproduction
The sound system is pre-calibrated by means
of digital signal processing. This calibration
takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers,
passenger compartment acoustics, listener
position, etc., for each combination of car
model and audio system. There is also a
dynamic calibration that takes into account
the setting of the volume control and vehicle
speed.
Personal preferences
Various settings are available in the top view
under
Settings Sound depending on the
car's audio system.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
501
Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins)
Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
Balance – balance between right/left
loudspeakers and balance between front/
rear loudspeakers.
System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone
Ringtone.
High Performance Pro* (Harman
Kardon)
Equaliser – equalizer setting.
Balance – balance between right/left
loudspeakers and balance between front/
rear loudspeakers.
System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone
Ringtone.
High Performance
Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
Balance – balance between right/left
loudspeakers and balance between front/
rear loudspeakers.
System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control
, Park Assist and Phone
Ringtone.
Related information
Sound experience* (p. 501)
Media player (p. 511)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 148)
Settings for phone (p. 534)
Sound, media and Internet (p. 500)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Sound experience*
Sound experience is an app that provides
access to further audio settings.
Sound Experience is opened from the app
view in the centre display. The following set-
tings can be defined, depending on the audio
system fitted to the car:
Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins)
Studio – the sound can be adjusted so
that it can primarily be adapted for Driver,
All and Rear.
Individual stage – surround sound mode
with settings for intensity and enclosure.
Concert hall – reproduces the acoustics
from Gothenburg's Concert Hall.
Recreating the acoustics from Gothenburg Concert
Hall.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
502
High Performance Pro* (Harman
Kardon)
Seat Optimisation – the sound can be
adjusted so that it can primarily be adap-
ted for Driver, All and Rear.
Surround – surround sound mode with
level settings.
Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
Related information
Audio settings (p. 500)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
Apps
The app view contains apps that give access
to some of the car's services.
Swipe from right to left
1
across the centre dis-
play's screen in order to access the app view
from the home view. Apps that have been
downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for
embedded functions, such as
FM radio, are
found here.
App view (generic image, basic apps vary by market
and model)
Some basic apps are always available. More
apps such as web radio and music services
can be downloaded when the car is connected
to the Internet.
Certain apps are only available for use if the
car is connected to the Internet.
1
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
503
Start an app by pressing the app in the centre
display's app view.
All the apps used should be updated to the lat-
est version.
Related information
Downloading apps (p. 503)
Updating apps (p. 504)
Deleting apps (p. 504)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 520)
Android Auto* (p. 524)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Storage space on hard disk (p. 543)
User terms and conditions and data shar-
ing (p. 541)
Downloading apps
New apps can be downloaded when the car
is connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services
that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the
effect on other services is experienced as
disruptive then the download can be inter-
rupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate
to switch off or interrupt other services.
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay
extra attention to the data traffic costs.
1.
Open the
Download Centre app in the
app view.
2.
Select
New apps in order to open a list of
apps that are available but not installed in
the car.
3. Tap on the row for an app in order to
expand in the list and get more informa-
tion about the app.
4.
Select
Install in order to start the down-
load and installation of the desired app.
> The status of the download and instal-
lation is shown while it is in progress.
A message is shown if a download can-
not be started for the moment. The app
will remain in the list and it is possible
to try to start a download again.
Cancelling the download
Tap on Abort to cancel a download in pro-
gress.
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this
cannot be cancelled.
Related information
Apps (p. 502)
Updating apps (p. 504)
Deleting apps (p. 504)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 601)
Storage space on hard disk (p. 543)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
504
Updating apps
The apps can be updated when the car is
connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services
that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the
effect on other services is experienced as
disruptive then the download can be inter-
rupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate
to switch off or interrupt other services.
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay
extra attention to the data traffic costs.
If an app is being used during an ongoing
update, it will be restarted in order for the
installation to be completed.
Update all
1.
Open the
Download Centre app in the
app view.
2.
Select
Install all.
> Updating is started.
Update some
1.
Open the
Download Centre app in the
app view.
2.
Select
Application updates in order to
open a list of all available updates.
3.
Locate the desired app and select
Install.
> Updating is started.
Related information
Apps (p. 502)
Downloading apps (p. 503)
Deleting apps (p. 504)
Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 601)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Deleting apps
Apps can be uninstalled when the car is con-
nected to the Internet.
An app that is being used must be closed in
order for the uninstallation to be completed.
1.
Open the
Download Centre app in the
app view.
2.
Select
Application updates in order to
open a list of all installed apps.
3. Locate the desired app and select
Uninstall in order to start the uninstalla-
tion of the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it
disappears from the list.
Related information
Apps (p. 502)
Downloading apps (p. 503)
Updating apps (p. 504)
Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 601)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
505
Radio
It is possible to listen to the FM bands and to
digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is online, it
is also possible to listen to Internet radio.
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
Related information
Start radio (p. 505)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 506)
Save radio channels in the Radio Favour-
ites app (p. 508)
Settings for radio (p. 508)
Digital radio* (p. 510)
RDS radio (p. 510)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Media player (p. 511)
Start radio
The radio is started from the centre display
app view.
1. Open the required frequency band (e.g.
FM) from the app view.
2. Select a radio station.
Related information
Radio (p. 505)
Searching for radio stations (p. 507)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
506
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 506)
Save radio channels in the Radio Favour-
ites app (p. 508)
Settings for radio (p. 508)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Changing radio band and radio
station
There are instructions here for changing the
radio band, the list in the radio band and the
radio station in the selected list.
Changing radio band
Swipe to show the app view in the centre dis-
play and select the preferred radio band (e.g.
FM), or open the driver display's app menu
using the right-hand keypad on the steering
wheel and make your selection from there.
Changing lists within the frequency
band
1.
Press
Library.
2.
Select playback from
Stations,
Favourites, Genres or Ensembles
2
.
3. Tap on the desired station from the list.
Favourites - only plays back selected favour-
ite channels.
Genres - only plays back channels broadcast-
ing the selected genre/programme type, e.g.
pop or classical.
Changing stations within the selected
list
Press on or under the centre dis-
play or the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist.
You can also change radio station in the
selected list via the centre display.
Related information
Radio (p. 505)
Searching for radio stations (p. 507)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Save radio channels in the Radio Favour-
ites app (p. 508)
Settings for radio (p. 508)
App menu in the driver display (p. 101)
2
Only applies to digital radio (DAB*).
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
507
Searching for radio stations
The radio automatically compiles a station list
of the radio stations within the area that are
transmitting the strongest signals.
The parameters you can search on depend on
the frequency band selected:
FM - station, genre and frequency.
DAB* - ensembles and stations.
1.
Press
Library.
2.
Press .
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
3. Enter the search terms.
> Searching takes place with each input
of a character and the search results
are shown by category.
Manual tuning
Searching manually makes it possible to find
and tune to stations that are not on the auto-
matically compiled list of the strongest sta-
tions in the area.
On changing over to manual tuning, the radio
no longer changes frequency automatically
when reception is poor.
Press Manual tuning, pull the control or
press or . With a long press, the
search jumps to the next available station
in the frequency band. It is also possible to
use the right keypad on the steering
wheel.
Related information
Radio (p. 505)
Start radio (p. 505)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 506)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Settings for radio (p. 508)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
508
Save radio channels in the Radio
Favourites app
It is possible to add a radio channel to the
Radio favourites app and the favourites list
for the radio band (e.g. FM). Instructions on
how to add and remove radio channels can
be found below.
Radio Favourites
The Radio Favourites app
shows saved radio channels
from all frequency bands.
1.
Open the app
Radio favourites from the
app view.
2. Tap on the desired station in the list to
start listening.
Adding and removing radio favourites
1.
Tap on to add a channel to or from
frequency band favourites and the Radio
Favourites app.
2.
Tap on
Library, select Edit and tap on
to remove a radio channel from the favour-
ites.
When a radio channel is saved from a station
list, the radio will automatically search for the
best frequency. But if a radio channel is saved
from a manual station search, the radio does
not automatically change to a stronger fre-
quency.
If a radio channel is removed from the Radio
Favourite app, the channel will also be
removed from the favourites list for the rele-
vant frequency band.
Related information
Radio (p. 505)
Start radio (p. 505)
Searching for radio stations (p. 507)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 506)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Settings for radio (p. 508)
App menu in the driver display (p. 101)
Settings for radio
There are various radio functions to activate
and deactivate.
Cancelling traffic messages
The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be
temporarily interrupted by tapping on
in
the right-hand steering wheel keypad or by
tapping on
Cancel in the centre display.
Activating and deactivating radio
functions
Drag down the top view and select Settings
Media and the desired radio band to view
available functions.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
509
FM Radio
Show Broadcast Information: shows
information on programme content,
artists, etc.
Freeze Program Name: select to stop
the programme service name from scroll-
ing continuously. Instead it freezes after
20 seconds.
Select Announcements:
3
-
Local Interruptions: interrupts the cur-
rent media playback and broadcasts infor-
mation about traffic disruptions in the
neighbourhood. Playback of previous
media source is resumed when the mes-
sage is finished. The Local Interruptions
function is a geographically restricted ver-
sion of the
Traffic Announcements func-
tion. The Traffic Announcements func-
tion must be activated at the same time.
-
News : interrupts the current media
playback and broadcasts news. Playback
of previous media source is resumed
when the news broadcast is finished.
-
Alarm: interrupts the current media play-
back and sends alerts about major acci-
dents and disasters. Playback of previous
media source is resumed when the mes-
sage is finished.
-
Traffic Announcements: interrupts the
current media playback and broadcasts
information about traffic disruptions. Play-
back of previous media source is resumed
when the message is finished.
DAB* (digital radio)
Sort Services: option for how channels
will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by
service number.
DAB To DAB Handover: starts the func-
tion for linking within DAB. If reception of
a radio channel is lost, another channel is
found automatically in another channel
group (ensemble).
DAB To FM Handover: starts the func-
tion for linking between DAB and FM. If
reception of a radio channel is lost, an
alternative FM frequency is searched for
automatically.
Show Broadcast Information: select to
show radio text or selected types of radio
text, e.g. artist.
Show Program Related Images: select
whether or not to show images for pro-
grammes on the screen.
Select Announcements: select the types
of messages to be received while DAB is
playing. Selected messages will interrupt
the current media playback to play back
the message. Playback of previous media
source is resumed when the message is
finished.
-
Alarm: interrupts the current media play-
back and sends alerts about major acci-
dents and disasters. Playback of previous
media source is resumed when the mes-
sage is finished.
-
Traffic Flash: receives information about
traffic disruptions.
-
News Flash: receives news.
-
Transport Flash: receives information
about public transport, e.g. ferry and train
timetables.
-
Warning/Services: receives information
about incidents of lower significance than
the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.
Related information
Radio (p. 505)
Digital radio* (p. 510)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 122)
3
Not all stations support all message types.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
510
RDS radio
RDS (Radio Data System) means that the
radio automatically changes to the strongest
transmitter. RDS provides the ability to
receive e.g. traffic information and to search
for certain programme types.
RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An
FM transmitter in such a network sends infor-
mation that gives an RDS radio the following
functions:
Switch automatically to a stronger trans-
mitter if reception in the area is poor.
Search for programme category, e.g. pro-
gramme types or traffic information.
Receive text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or
only selected parts of its functionality.
When broadcasting news or traffic messages,
the radio can switch stations, interrupting the
audio source currently in use. For example, if
the CD player* is in use, it is paused. The radio
returns to the previous audio source and vol-
ume when the set programme type is no
longer broadcast. To go back earlier, press
on the right-hand steering wheel keypad
or tap Cancel in the centre display.
Related information
Radio (p. 505)
Settings for radio (p. 508)
Digital radio*
Digital radio (DAB
4
) is a digital broadcasting
system for radio. The radio supports DAB,
DAB+ and DMB
5
.
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
The digital radio app is
launched from app view in
the centre display.
Digital radio is played back in the same way as
other radio bands, such as FM. Besides the
option to select playback from
Stations,
Favourites and Genres, there is also the
option to select playback from subchannels
and Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio
channels (a channel group) broadcasting on
the same frequency.
In the cases where the radio channel transmits
its logotype, it is downloaded and shown
beside the station name (download time var-
ies).
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
511
DAB subchannel
Secondary components are usually named
subchannels. These are temporary and can
contain e.g. translations of the main pro-
gramme into other languages. Subchannels
are indicated with an arrow symbol in the
channel list.
Related information
Link between FM and digital radio*
(p. 511)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 506)
Searching for radio stations (p. 507)
Save radio channels in the Radio Favour-
ites app (p. 508)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Settings for radio (p. 508)
Link between FM and digital radio*
The function enables the digital radio (DAB)
to switch from a channel with poor or no
reception to the same channel in another
channel group (ensemble) with better recep-
tion, within DAB and/or between DAB and
FM.
DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press Media DAB.
3.
Tick/untick
DAB To DAB Handover
and/or DAB To FM Handover in order to
activate/deactivate the respective func-
tions.
Related information
Digital radio* (p. 510)
Radio (p. 505)
Settings for radio (p. 508)
Media player
The media player can play back audio from
the CD player* and from external audio
sources connected via the USB port or
Bluetooth. It can also play back video format
via the USB port.
When the car is connected to the internet, it is
also possible to listen to web radio, audio
books and music services via apps.
The media player is operated
from the centre display, but
several functions can be
operated using the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad or
voice control.
The radio is operated in the media player and
is described in a separate section.
4
Digital Audio Broadcasting
5
Digital Multimedia Broadcasting
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
512
Related information
Media playback (p. 512)
Controlling and changing media (p. 513)
Searching media (p. 514)
Apps (p. 502)
Radio (p. 505)
CD player* (p. 516)
Video (p. 516)
Media via Bluetooth
®
(p. 517)
Media via USB port (p. 518)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Media playback
The media player is controlled from the cen-
tre display. Several functions can also be
operated using the steering wheel's right-
hand keypad or voice control.
The media player also operates the radio,
which is described in a separate section.
Starting the media source
App view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by market
and model.)
CD*
1. Insert a CD.
2.
Open the app
CD from the app view.
3. Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
USB memory
1. Insert the USB memory.
2.
Open the app
USB from the app view.
3. Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
Mp3 player and iPod
®
NOTE
To start playback from iPod, use the iPod
app (not USB).
When an iPod is used as audio source, the
car's audio and media system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod player's
own menu structure.
1. Connect media source.
2. Start playback from the connected media
source.
3.
Open the app (
iPod, USB) from the app
view.
> Playback begins.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
513
Bluetooth connected device
1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.
2. Connect media source.
3. Start playback from the connected media
source.
4.
Open the app
Bluetooth from the app
view.
> Playback begins.
Media with Internet connection
Play back media from Internet-connected
apps:
1. Connect the car to the Internet.
2. Open the current app from the app view.
> Playback begins.
Read the separate section on how apps are
downloaded.
Video
1. Connect media source.
2.
Open the app
USB from the app view.
3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
Apple CarPlay
CarPlay is described in a separate section.
Android Auto
Android Auto is described in a separate sec-
tion.
Related information
Managing the app menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 102)
Radio (p. 505)
Controlling and changing media (p. 513)
Connecting a device via USB port
(p. 518)
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
(p. 518)
Downloading apps (p. 503)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Video (p. 516)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 520)
Android Auto* (p. 524)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Compatible media formats (p. 519)
Controlling and changing media
The playback of media can be controlled with
voice control, steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
The media player can be
operated by voice recogni-
tion, from the steering wheel
keypad or the centre display.
Volume - turn the control knob under the cen-
tre display or press
on the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad in order to increase
or decrease the volume.
Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to
the song being played back, the physical but-
ton under the centre display or
on the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
514
Change track/song - tap on the desired track
in the centre display, press on
or
under the centre display or on the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time
axis in the centre display and drag sideways,
or press and hold
or under the centre
display or on the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
Changing media - select from previous
sources in the app, in the app view, press on
the desired app or select with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad via the app menu
.
Library - tap on the button to
play back from the library.
Shuffle - tap on the button to
shuffle the playback order.
Similar - tap on the button in
order to use Gracenote to
search for similar music on
the USB device and to create
a playlist from it. The playlist
can contain a maximum of 50
songs.
Change device - tap on the
button in order to switch
between USB devices when
several are connected.
Related information
Media player (p. 511)
Searching media (p. 514)
Audio settings (p. 500)
Apps (p. 502)
Gracenote
®
(p. 515)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Searching media
It is possible to search by artist, composer,
song titles, album, video, audio book, playlist
and, when the car is connected to the Inter-
net, podcasts (digital media via Internet).
1.
Press .
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
2. Enter the search terms.
3.
Press
Search.
> Connected devices are searched and
the search results are listed by cate-
gory.
Swipe sideways across the screen to show
each category separately.
Related information
Media player (p. 511)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
515
Media playback (p. 512)
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 127)
Gracenote
®
Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles
and associated images, which are shown dur-
ing playback.
Gracenote MusicID
®
is a standard for music
recognition. Information on the music can be
presented by means of the identification and
analysis of the metadata in the music files.
Sometimes metadata from different sources
can be inconsistent or inadequate.
Gracenote has support for phonetic process-
ing of artist name, album titles and genres,
and in this way, voice control can be used to
play back music.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press Media Gracenote®.
3. Select settings for Gracenote data:
Gracenote® Online Search - searches in
Gracenote's online database for playing
media.
Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects
how to display Gracenote data if there are
more than one search results.
1 - the file's original data are used.
2 - Gracenote data are used.
3 - Gracenote or original data can be
selected.
None - no results are shown.
Updating Gracenote
The content of the Gracenote database is
updated continuously. Download the latest
update to take advantage of improvements.
For information and download, see
www.volvocars.com/intl/support.
Related information
Media playback (p. 512)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 544)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
516
CD player*
The media player can play back CD discs with
compatible audio files.
Disc insert and eject slot.
Disc eject button.
Related information
Media playback (p. 512)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 147)
Compatible media formats (p. 519)
Video
Videos on USB-connected devices can be
played back using the media player.
No picture is shown when the car starts to
move, but only the audio is played back. The
picture is shown again when the car is station-
ary.
Information on compatible formats for media
can be found in a separate section.
Related information
Playing a video (p. 516)
Playing back DivX
®
(p. 517)
Settings for video (p. 517)
Compatible media formats (p. 519)
Playing a video
Videos are played using the
USB app in the
app view.
1. Connecting a media source (USB device).
2.
Open the app
USB from the app view.
3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
Finding video files may be problematic if the
USB device also contains music and audio
tracks. In this case, it is possible to find them
by going to
Library and selecting the video
tab.
Related information
Video (p. 516)
Playing back DivX
®
(p. 517)
Settings for video (p. 517)
Compatible media formats (p. 519)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
517
Playing back DivX
®
This DivX Certified
®
device must be regis-
tered in order to play back purchased DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) films.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the
registration code.
3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information
and to complete the registration.
Related information
Video (p. 516)
Playing a video (p. 516)
Settings for video (p. 517)
Compatible media formats (p. 519)
Settings for video
Certain language settings can be changed for
video playback.
With the video player in full screen mode, or
by opening the top view and pressing
Settings Media Video, the following
can be adjusted:
Audio Language and
Subtitle Language.
Related information
Video (p. 516)
Media via Bluetooth
®
The car's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth and can wirelessly play audio files
from external Bluetooth devices, such as
mobile phones and tablets.
For the media player to be able to play back
audio files wirelessly from an external device,
the device must first be connected to the car
via Bluetooth.
Related information
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
(p. 518)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
Media playback (p. 512)
Compatible media formats (p. 519)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
518
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
Connect a Bluetooth
®
device to the car for
wireless playback of media and to provide the
car with an Internet connection where possi-
ble.
Many phones on the market now have wire-
less Bluetooth
®
technology, but not all of them
are fully compatible with the car.
For information on compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
The procedure for connecting a media device
is the same as for connecting a phone to the
car via Bluetooth
®
.
Related information
Media via Bluetooth
®
(p. 517)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
Media playback (p. 512)
Media via USB port
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio
system via the car's USB port.
Devices with rechargeable batteries are
recharged when connected via USB and the
ignition is in position I, II or the engine is run-
ning.
The content of the external source can be loa-
ded more quickly if it only consists of compati-
ble formats. Video files can also be played
back via the USB port.
Certain MP3 players have their own file sys-
tem that the car does not support.
Related information
Connecting a device via USB port
(p. 518)
Media playback (p. 512)
Video (p. 516)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 519)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 520)
Android Auto* (p. 524)
Connecting a device via USB port
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod
®
or
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio
system via one of the car's USB ports.
The phone must be connected to the USB
port with white frame (when there are two
USB ports) when using Apple CarPlay* and
Android Auto*.
USB inputs (type A) in the tunnel console. Allow the
cable to lie forwards so that it is not trapped when
the lid is closed.
Related information
Media playback (p. 512)
Media via USB port (p. 518)
Media player (p. 511)
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 519)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
519
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 519)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 520)
Android Auto* (p. 524)
Technical specifications for USB
devices
The following specifications must be met to
allow the contents of the USB devices to be
read.
No folder structure will be shown in the centre
display during playback.
Max number
Files 15 000
Folders 1 000
Folder levels 8
Playlists 100
Items in a playlist 1 000
Subfolders No limit
Technical specification for USB A
connector
Type A socket
Version 2.0
Voltage supply 5 V
Current supply max. 2.1 A
Related information
Media via USB port (p. 518)
Compatible media formats
The following file formats must be used for
media playback.
Audio files
For-
mat
File extension Codec
MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III,
MPEG2 Layer III,
MP3 Pro (mp3
compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3
compatible)
AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC
(MPEG4 part III
Audio), HEAAC
(aacPlus v1/v2)
WMA .wma WMA89,
WMA910 Pro
WAV .wav LPCM
FLAC .flac FLAC
Video files
Format File extension
MP4 .mp4, .m4v
MPEGPS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
520
Format File extension
AVI .avi
AVI (DivX) .avi, .divx
ASF .asf, .wmv
Subtitles
Format File extension
SubViewer .sub
SubRip .srt
SSA .ssa
DivX
®
DivX certified devices have been tested for
high-quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback.
When you see the DivX logo, you have the
freedom to play DivX films.
Profile DivX Home Theater
Video codec DivX, MPEG4
Resolution 720x576
Bit rate 4.8Mbps
Frame rate 30 fps
File extension .divx, .avi
Max file size 4 GB
Audio codec MP3, AC3
Subtitles XSUB
Special func-
tions
Multiple subtitles, multiple
audio, resume play
Reference Meets all requirements of
the DivX Home Theater
profile. Visit divx.com for
more information and soft-
ware tools to convert your
files into DivX Home
Theater video.
Related information
Media player (p. 511)
Video (p. 516)
Playing back DivX
®
(p. 517)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
CarPlay gives you the option to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions,
send/receive messages and use Siri, all while
you stay focused on your driving.
CarPlay works with selected
iOS devices. If the car does
not already support CarPlay
there is the option to install it
retroactively. Contact a Volvo
dealer to install CarPlay.
Information about which apps are supported
and which iOS devices are compatible is avail-
able on Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/
carplay/. Using apps that are not compatible
with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the
connection between the device and the car is
broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsi-
ble for the content in CarPlay.
When using map navigation via CarPlay, there
is no guidance in the driver display or head-up
display, but only in the centre display.
When navigation is started through Apple
CarPlay, ongoing native turn-by-turn route
guidance will be ended.
The CarPlay apps can be controlled via the
centre display, the iOS device or using the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to
certain functions). The apps can also be voice-
controlled using Siri. A long press on the
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
521
steering wheel button
starts voice control
using Siri and a short press activates the car's
own voice control. If Siri breaks off too early,
hold the steering wheel button
6
depressed.
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
features/applications. When using Apple
CarPlay, certain information from your car
(including its position) is transferred to
your iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you
are fully responsible for your and any
others person’s use of Apple CarPlay.
Related information
Using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 521)
Settings for Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 523)
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
Using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
To use CarPlay, Siri voice control must be
activated on your iOS device. The device also
needs an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the
mobile network for all functions to work.
Connect an iOS device and start
CarPlay
NOTE
CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is
deactivated. A phone or media player con-
nected to the car via Bluetooth will there-
fore not be available when CarPlay is
active. An alternative Internet source must
be used to connect to the Internet for the
car's apps. Use Wi-Fi or the car's built-in
modem*.
To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has
not been connected previously:
1. Connect an iOS device with support for
CarPlay to the USB port. In the cases
where there are two USB ports, the one
with the white frame around the port must
be used.
2. Read the terms and conditions and then
tap on
Accept to connect.
> The subview with CarPlay is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
3. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
6
Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
522
Starting CarPlay
To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has
been connected previously:
1. Connect an iOS device to the USB port. In
the cases where there are two USB ports,
the one with the white frame around the
port must be used.
> If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the name of the device will
be shown. The tile with CarPlay is
opened automatically in the cases
where the home view is shown when
connecting the iOS device.
2. If the tile with CarPlay does not open
automatically, tap on the device name.
The subview with CarPlay is opened and
compatible apps are shown.
3. If an app is active in the same tile, tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app view.
> The subview with CarPlay is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
4. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
CarPlay runs in the background if another app
is started, or is already active when connect-
ing, in the same tile. To show CarPlay in the
subview again - tap on the CarPlay icon in the
app view.
Switch the connection between
CarPlay and iPod
CarPlay to iPod
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Continue to Communication Apple
CarPlay
.
3. Untick the box for the iOS device that
shall no longer start CarPlay automatically
when the USB cable is connected.
4. Disconnect and connect the iOS device to
the USB port.
5.
Open the app
iPod from the app view.
iPod to CarPlay
1.
Tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app view.
2. Read the information in the pop-up win-
dow and then tap on
OK.
3. Disconnect and connect the iOS device to
the USB port.
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is
opened and compatible apps are
shown
7
.
Related information
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 518)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 520)
Settings for Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 523)
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 537)
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 538)
Voice recognition (p. 143)
7
Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
523
Settings for Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
Settings for iOS device connected with
CarPlay
8
.
Automatic start
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Continue to Communication Apple
CarPlay
and select setting:
Tick the box - CarPlay starts automati-
cally when the USB cable is connected.
Untick the box - CarPlay does not start
automatically when the USB cable is
connected.
If the car is shared by a lot of people, such as
in a car pool, it is worth noting that a maxi-
mum of 20 iOS devices can be stored simulta-
neously in the list. When the list is full and a
new device is connected the oldest one is
deleted.
To delete the list, the settings must be reset in
the centre display (factory reset).
System volumes
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
Voice Control
Navi Voice Guidance
Phone Ringtone
Related information
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 520)
Using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 521)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
Tips for using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
Here are some useful tips for using CarPlay
®
.
Update your iOS device with the latest
version of the iOS operating system and
ensure that the apps have been updated.
In the event of a problem with CarPlay,
disconnect the iOS device from the USB
port and reconnect. Otherwise, try to
close the app on the device that is not
working and then restart the app, or try
closing all apps and restart your device.
If the apps do not appear when CarPlay
starts (black screen), try minimising and
expanding the tile for CarPlay.
Using apps that are not compatible with
CarPlay may sometimes mean that the
connection between the iOS device and
the car is broken. Information about sup-
ported apps and compatible telephone
devices can be found on the Apple web-
site. You can also search for CarPlay in the
App Store to find information about apps
that are compatible with CarPlay on your
market.
Using Siri it is possible to write/dictate
and read out messages. Messages are
read out and dictated in the language
selected in the settings for Siri. When the
message is written/dictated, no text will
be shown in the centre display – instead,
8
Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
524
the text will appear on the iOS device.
When Siri is used, note that the tele-
phone's microphones are used and that
the quality is therefore dependent on the
position of the telephone.
If the device is connected to the car via
Bluetooth, the connection will be interrup-
ted when CarPlay is used. Resume the
Internet connection in the car by sharing
the Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot from the
device.
Some of the CarPlay functions (such as
voice call and messages) mean that use of
the car's own functions is stopped and
CarPlay is shown automatically instead. If
this behaviour is not wanted, deselect the
display of the equivalent function in
CarPlay under the phone's settings for
notifications.
CarPlay only works with iPhone
9
.
NOTE
Availability and functionality may vary
depending on market.
Related information
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 520)
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 537)
Android Auto*
Android Auto gives you the option to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions and
use car-adapted apps from an Android
device. Android Auto works with selected
Android devices.
Information about which apps are supported
and which Android devices are compatible is
available on the website: www.android.com/
auto/. For third-party apps, see Google Play.
Please note that Volvo is not responsible for
the content in Android Auto.
Android Auto is started from the app view.
After Android Auto has been started once, the
app will be started automatically the next time
the device is connected. Automatic start can
be deactivated under settings.
NOTE
When a device is connected to Android
Auto it is possible to stream via Bluetooth
to another media player. Bluetooth is
active while Android Auto is being used.
When using map navigation via Android Auto
there is no guidance in the driver display or
head-up display, but only in the centre display.
Android Auto can be controlled via the centre
display using the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad or voice control. Holding down the
steering wheel button
starts Google
Assistant and a short press deactivates it.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge
the following: Android Auto is a service
provided by Google Inc. under its terms
and conditions. Volvo Cars is not
responsible for Android Auto or its
features or applications. When you use
Android Auto, your car transfers certain
information (including its location) to your
connected Android phone. You are fully
responsible for your and any other
person’s use of Android Auto.
Related information
Using Android Auto* (p. 525)
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 525)
9
Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
525
Using Android Auto*
To use the
Android Auto app, the app must
be installed on your Android device and the
device must be connected to the car's USB
input.
NOTE
For installation of Android Auto to be pos-
sible, the car must be equipped with two
USB ports (USB hub)*. If the car only has
one USB port then it is not possible to use
Android Auto.
The first time an Android is connected
1. Connect your Android device to the USB
input with a white frame.
2. Read the information in the pop-up win-
dow and then tap on
OK.
3.
Tap on
Android Auto in the app view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then
tap on
Accept to connect.
> The subview with Android Auto is
opened and compatible apps are
shown.
5. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Previously connected Android
1. Connect your device to the USB input
with a white frame.
> If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the name of the device is
shown.
2. Tap on the device name – the tile with
Android Auto is opened and compatible
apps are shown.
3. If the setting for automatic start is not
selected - open the
Android Auto app
from the app view.
> The subview with Android Auto is
opened and compatible apps are
shown.
4. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Android Auto runs in the background if
another app is started in the same subview. To
show Android Auto in the subview again - tap
on the Android Auto icon in the app view.
Related information
Android Auto* (p. 524)
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 525)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 518)
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Settings for Android Auto*
Settings for an Android device that has been
connected the first time with Android Auto.
Automatic start
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication Android Auto
and select setting:
Tick the box - Android Auto starts auto-
matically when the USB cable is con-
nected.
Untick the box - Android Auto does not
start automatically when the USB cable
is connected.
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be
stored in the list. When the list is full and a
new device is connected the oldest one is
deleted.
A factory reset has to be executed in order to
clear the list.
System volumes
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
Voice Control
Navi Voice Guidance
Phone Ringtone
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
526
Related information
Android Auto* (p. 524)
Using Android Auto* (p. 525)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
Tips for using Android Auto*
Here are some useful tips for using Android
Auto.
Ensure that your apps are updated.
When starting the car, wait until the cen-
tre display has started, connect the device
and then open Android Auto from the app
view.
In the event of problems with Android
Auto, disconnect your Android device from
the USB port and then reconnect via USB.
Otherwise, try closing the app on the
device and then restarting the app.
When a device is connected to Android
Auto it is still possible to playback media
via Bluetooth to another media player. The
Bluetooth function is on when Android
Auto is used.
If the icon for Android Auto is greyed out,
this means no device is connected. When
you connect your device the icon will be
illuminated. If the icon is not visible at all
then the car does not have support for
connecting a device for this purpose.
If the device is connected to the car via
Bluetooth, the connection will be interrup-
ted when Android Auto is used. Resume
the Internet connection in the car by shar-
ing the Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot from
the device.
Related information
Android Auto* (p. 524)
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 537)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
527
Phone
A phone with Bluetooth can be connected
wirelessly to the car's built-in hands-free sys-
tem.
The audio and media system acts as hands-
free, with the facility to remotely control a
selection of the phone's functions. The phone
can still be operated with its own keys even if
it is connected to the car.
When a phone has been connected online and
connected with the car, it can be used make
calls, send/receive messages, play back media
wirelessly and be used as an Internet connec-
tion.
The phone is operated from the centre display,
but also via voice recognition and the app
menu, which are accessed from the right-hand
steering wheel keypad.
Overview
Microphone.
Phone.
Phone operation from centre display.
Keypad for operating phone functions that
are shown in the driver display and voice
recognition.
Driver display.
Related information
Managing phone calls (p. 531)
Managing the phone book (p. 534)
Managing text messages (p. 532)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth automatically (p. 529)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth manually (p. 530)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 530)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 531)
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 531)
Settings for phone (p. 534)
Voice recognition (p. 143)
Managing the app menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 102)
Audio settings (p. 500)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Blue-
tooth-enabled phone (p. 536)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
528
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
Connect a phone with Bluetooth activated to
then be able to make calls from the car, send/
receive messages, play back media wirelessly
and connect the car to the Internet.
It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices
connected at once, in which case one of them
can only play back wirelessly. The most
recently connected phone will automatically
be connected to make calls, send/receive
messages, play back media and provide an
Internet connection. It is possible to change
what the phone is to be used for under
Bluetooth Devices via the settings menu in
the centre display's top view. Your mobile
phone needs to be equipped with Bluetooth
and support tethering.
After the device has been connected/regis-
tered a first time via Bluetooth, it no longer
needs to be visible/discoverable, but only have
Bluetooth activated. A maximum of 20 con-
nected Bluetooth devices can be stored in the
car.
There are two options for connecting. Either
search the phone from the car or search the
car from the phone.
Option 1 - search phone from car
1. Make the phone searchable/visible via
Bluetooth.
2. Open the phone tile in the centre display.
If there is no phone connected to the
car, tap on
Add phone.
If there is a phone connected to the car,
tap on
Change . In the pop-up win-
dow, tap on
Add phone.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
The list is updated as new devices are
detected.
3. Tap on the name of the phone to be con-
nected.
4. Check that the specified number code in
the car matches that in the phone. In
which case, choose to accept in both pla-
ces.
5. On the phone, choose to accept or reject
any options for phone contacts and mes-
sages.
NOTE
The message function must be acti-
vated in certain phones.
Not all mobile phones are fully compat-
ible and may therefore not show con-
tacts and messages in the car.
Option 2 - search car from phone
1. Open the phone tile in the centre display.
If there is no phone connected to the
car, tap on
Add phone Make car
discoverable
.
If there is a phone connected to the car,
tap on
Change . In the pop-up win-
dow, tap on
Add phone Make car
discoverable
.
2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
3. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devi-
ces.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
4. Select the name of the car on the phone.
5. A pop-up window for the connection is
shown in the car. Confirm the connection.
6. Check that the specified number code in
the car matches the one shown in the
external device. In which case, choose to
accept in both places.
7. On the phone, choose to accept or reject
any options for phone contacts and mes-
sages.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
529
NOTE
The message function must be acti-
vated in certain phones.
Not all mobile phones are fully compat-
ible and may therefore not show con-
tacts and messages in the car.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is updated
then the connection may be broken. In
which case, delete the phone from the car
and then connect again.
Compatible phones
Many phones on the market now have wire-
less Bluetooth technology, but not all of them
are fully compatible with the car.
For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
Related information
Phone (p. 527)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth automatically (p. 529)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth manually (p. 530)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 530)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 531)
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 531)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 535)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Blue-
tooth-enabled phone (p. 536)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
It is possible to connect a phone to the car
automatically via Bluetooth. The phone has to
have been connected to the car for the first
time.
It is only the two last connected phones that
can be connected automatically.
1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before
setting the car in ignition position I.
2. Set the car in ignition position I or higher.
> The phone will connect.
Related information
Phone (p. 527)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth manually (p. 530)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 530)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 531)
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 531)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 535)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
530
Connect the car to the Internet via a Blue-
tooth-enabled phone (p. 536)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
It is possible to connect a phone to the car
manually via Bluetooth. The phone has to
have been connected to the car for the first
time.
1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
2. Open the subview for phone.
> Connected phones are listed.
3. Tap on the name of the phone to be con-
nected.
> The phone will connect.
Related information
Phone (p. 527)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth automatically (p. 529)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 530)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 531)
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 531)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 535)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Blue-
tooth-enabled phone (p. 536)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-
connected phone
It is possible to disconnect a phone con-
nected to Bluetooth, and it will then no
longer be connected to the car.
When the phone is out of range of the car
it is automatically disconnected. If discon-
nection occurs during an active call, then
the call will be continued on the phone.
It is also possible to disconnect the phone
by manually deactivating Bluetooth.
Related information
Phone (p. 527)
Settings for phone (p. 534)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 531)
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 531)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 535)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
531
Switch between Bluetooth-
connected phones
It is possible to switch between a number of
Bluetooth-connected phones.
1. Open the tile for the phone.
2.
Tap on
Change or drag down the top
view and tap on
Settings
Communication Bluetooth Devices
Add device.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
3. Tap on the phone to be connected.
Related information
Phone (p. 527)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 535)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 530)
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 531)
Removing devices connected to
Bluetooth
It is possible to remove phones from the list
of registered Bluetooth devices, for example.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
Communication Bluetooth
Devices
.
> Registered Bluetooth devices are listed.
3. Tap on the device to be removed.
4.
Tap on
Remove device and confirm your
selection.
> The device is no longer registered to
the car.
Related information
Phone (p. 527)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 530)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 531)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 535)
Managing phone calls
Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con-
nected phone.
Generic illustration.
Making phone calls
1. Open the subview for phone.
2. Select call from call history, enter number
using the keypad or via the contact list. It
is possible to search or browse in the con-
tact list. Tap on
in the contact list in
order to add a contact under
Favourites.
3.
Press
to make a call.
4.
Tap on
to end the call.
You can also make calls from the call log via
the app menu, which is accessed from the
right-hand steering wheel keypad
.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
532
Making multi-party calls
During a call:
1.
Press
Add call.
2. Choose to make a call from the call log,
favourites or the contact list.
3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap
on
alongside the contact in the con-
tact list.
4.
Tap on
Swap call to switch between the
parties.
5.
Tap on
to end the active call.
Conference calls
During an active multi-party call:
1.
Tap on
Join calls to merge the active
multi-party call.
2.
Tap on
to end the call.
Incoming phone calls
Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver
display and the centre display. Manage the
call on the right-hand steering wheel keypad
or in the centre display.
1.
Tap on
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap on
to end the call.
Incoming phone call during an active call
1.
Tap on
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap on to end the call.
Private call
During the current call, press Privacy and
select setting:
Switch to mobile phone - the hands-
free function is disconnected and the
call continues on your mobile phone.
Driver focused - the microphone in the
roof on the passenger side is switched
off and the call continues with the car's
handsfree function.
Related information
Phone (p. 527)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 146)
Managing the app menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 102)
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 127)
Managing the phone book (p. 534)
Managing text messages (p. 532)
Audio settings (p. 500)
Managing text messages
10
Message handling in the car for a Bluetooth-
connected phone.
In some phones, the message function must
be activated. Not all phones are compatible. In
such cases, they cannot display contacts and
messages in the car.
For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
Managing text messages in the centre
display
Text messages are only shown in the centre
display if the setting is selected.
Press
Messages in the app
view to manage text mes-
sages in the centre display.
Reading text messages in the centre
display
Press the icon to get the message
read aloud.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
533
Sending text messages in the centre
display
11
1. You can reply to a message or create a
new message.
Reply to message - tap on the contact
whose message you wish to reply to,
then tap on
Answer.
Create new message - tap on
Create
new. Select a contact or enter a num-
ber.
2. Compose the message.
3.
Press
Send.
Managing text messages in the driver
display
Text messages are only shown in the driver
display if the setting is selected.
Reading a new text message in the driver
display
To have the message read aloud – select
Read out with the steering wheel keypad.
Dictating a reply in the driver display
After the text message has been read out, it is
possible to reply briefly with dictation if the car
is connected to the Internet.
Press Answer with the steering wheel
keypad. A dictation dialogue starts.
Message notification
It is possible to activate and deactivate notifi-
cations in the text message settings.
Related information
Phone (p. 527)
Settings for text messages (p. 533)
Settings for phone (p. 534)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 146)
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 127)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
User terms and conditions and data shar-
ing (p. 541)
Settings for text messages
Settings for text messages on connected
phone.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
Communication Text Messages
and select settings:
Notification in centre display - shows
message notifications in the centre dis-
play's status bar.
Notification in driver display - dis-
plays notifications in the driver's display
and incoming messages can be man-
aged using the steering wheel's right-
hand keypad.
Text message tone - select tone for
incoming text messages.
Related information
Phone (p. 527)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
Managing text messages (p. 532)
Settings for phone (p. 534)
10
Valid in certain markets only. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
11
Only certain phones can send messages via the car. The connected phone must support the Bluetooth Message Access Profile (MAP).
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
534
Managing the phone book
When a phone is connected to the car with
Bluetooth, contacts can be managed directly
in the centre display.
Up to 3000 contacts can be shown from the
phone selected in the centre display.
Browse between the letters and to
find a matching contact. Depending on
existing contacts in the phone book, only
matching letters are shown.
Search contacts - tap on to search
for a phone number of name in the contact
list.
Favourites - tap on to add/remove a
contact to/from the favourites list.
Sorting
The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order
where special characters and numbers are
sorted under . It is possible to sort by first
name or surname, and this setting is adjusted
in the telephone setup.
Related information
Phone (p. 527)
Settings for phone (p. 534)
Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 146)
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 127)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
Settings for phone
When the telephone is connected to the car,
the following settings can be made:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
Communication Phone and
select settings:
Ringtones - selection of ring signal. It
is possible to use a ring signal from the
phone or the car. Some phones are not
fully compatible and their ring signals
may therefore not be available for use in
the car.
12
Sort Order - select sort order of con-
tact list.
Call notifications in head up display*
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options
.
3.
Select
Show Phone.
Related information
Phone (p. 527)
Settings for text messages (p. 533)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 535)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
535
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Audio settings (p. 500)
Settings for Bluetooth devices
Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
Communication Bluetooth
Devices
and select settings:
Add device - starts the pairing of a new
device.
Previously paired devices - lists regis-
tered/paired devices.
Remove device - removes the connected
device.
Allowed services for this device - sets
device usage options: calling, sending/
receiving messages, streaming media and
as Internet connection.
Internet connection - connects the car to
the Internet via the device's Bluetooth
connection.
Related information
Phone (p. 527)
Settings for phone (p. 534)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
Internet-connected car*
When the car is connected to the Internet, it
is possible – for example – to use web radio
and music services via apps, download soft-
ware and contact your retailer from the car.
The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or
with the car's built-in modem* (SIM card).
When the car is connected to the Internet, it is
possible to share the car's Internet connection
(Wi-Fi hotspot) so that other devices such as
tablets can access the Internet
13
.
The Internet status is indicated by a symbol in
the centre display's status bar.
12
For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
13
This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
536
NOTE
Data is transferred when using the internet
(data traffic), which can have a cost.
Activation of data roaming can result in fur-
ther charges.
Contact your network operator about the
cost for data traffic.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possi-
ble to connect the car to the Internet using
Wi-Fi or the car modem*.
NOTE
When using Android Auto, it is possible to
connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth or the car modem*.
Before connecting the car to the Internet,
search support information on terms and con-
ditions for services and privacy policy for cus-
tomers at www.volvocars.com.
Related information
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 122)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Blue-
tooth-enabled phone (p. 536)
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 537)
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 538)
Apps (p. 502)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 540)
Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 539)
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 541)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 541)
Volvo ID (p. 28)
User terms and conditions and data shar-
ing (p. 541)
Connect the car to the Internet via
a Bluetooth-enabled phone
Create an Internet connection via Bluetooth
by sharing your phone's Internet access and
access several online services in the car.
1. To be able to connect the car to the Inter-
net via a Bluetooth-connected phone, the
phone has to have already been con-
nected to the car via Bluetooth for a first
time.
2. Make sure that your phone supports teth-
ering and that this function is activated.
On an iPhone, this function is known as
"tethering". On Android phones, this func-
tion may have different names but is fre-
quently known as "hotspot". For iPhones,
the menu page "tethering" must also be
open until the Internet connection has
been established.
3. If the phone has been connected via Blue-
tooth previously, press
Settings in the
centre display top view.
4. Press
Communication Bluetooth
Devices
.
5.
Tick the box for
Bluetooth Internet
connection under the heading Internet
connection
.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
537
6. If another connection source has been
used, confirm the option to change con-
nection.
> Your car is now connected to the Inter-
net via the Bluetooth-connected phone.
NOTE
The telephone and network provider must
support tethering (Internet connection
sharing), and the subscription must include
data.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possi-
ble to connect the car to the Internet using
Wi-Fi or the car modem*.
Related information
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 538)
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 528)
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 537)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 520)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 540)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 535)
Connect the car to the Internet via
a phone (Wi-Fi)
Create an Internet connection via Wi-Fi by
tethering your phone and access online servi-
ces in the car.
1. Make sure that your phone supports teth-
ering and that this function is activated.
On an iPhone, this function is known as
"tethering". On Android phones, this func-
tion may have different names but is fre-
quently known as "hotspot". For iPhones,
the menu page "tethering" must also be
open until the Internet connection has
been established.
2.
Press
Settings in the top view.
3. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking
the box for Wi-Fi.
5. If another connection source has been
used, confirm the option to change con-
nection.
6. Tap on the network name of the network
to be connected.
7. Enter the network password.
> The car connects to the network.
Note that certain phones switch off tethering
after the contact with the car has been discon-
nected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the
next time it is used. The tethering in the phone
therefore needs to be reactivated the next
time it is used.
When a phone is connected to the car, it is
saved for future use. To show a list of saved
networks or manually delete saved networks,
go to
Settings Communication Wi-Fi
Saved networks.
NOTE
The telephone and network provider must
support tethering (Internet connection
sharing), and the subscription must include
data.
Technical and safety requirements for Wi-Fi
connection, are described in a separate sec-
tion.
Related information
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 541)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 540)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 541)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
538
Connect the car to the Internet via
car modem (SIM card)
It is possible to establish an Internet connec-
tion via the car modem and a personal SIM
card (PSIM)*.
Cars equipped with Volvo On Call will use the
Internet connection with car modem for the
services.
1.
Fit a personal SIM card into the holder by
the floor on the passenger side.
Note that a mini SIM is required to fit the
car's card reader.
2.
Press
Settings in the top view.
3. Press Communication Car Modem
Internet
.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking
the box for
Car modem Internet.
5. If another connection source has been
used, confirm the option to change con-
nection.
6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
> The car connects to the network.
NOTE
Note that the SIM card used for Internet
connection via PSIM cannot have the
same telephone number as the SIM card
that the phone uses. If this is disregarded,
it will not be possible to route calls cor-
rectly to the telephone. Therefore, use a
SIM card with a separate telephone num-
ber for the Internet connection, or a data
card that does not handle telephone calls
and is therefore unable to disrupt the func-
tion of the telephone.
Related information
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 540)
Settings for car modem* (p. 538)
Settings for car modem*
The car is equipped with a modem that can
be used to connect the car to the Internet. It
is also possible to share the Internet connec-
tion via Wi-Fi.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication Car Modem
Internet
and select settings:
Car modem Internet - select whether to
use the car modem as Internet connec-
tion.
Data usage - tap on Reset resets the
counters for received and sent data vol-
ume.
Network.
Select network operator - automatic or
manual selection of network operator.
Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the
car modem will attempt to connect to the
Internet when the car is abroad and out-
side its home network. Note that this may
result in heavy costs. Check your roaming
agreement for data traffic abroad with
your network provider in your home coun-
try.
SIM card PIN.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
539
Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can
be entered.
Disable PIN - select whether the PIN
code shall be required for access to the
SIM card.
Send request code — used e.g. to top up
or check the balance on a prepaid card.
Functionality depends on the provider.
NOTE
Note that the SIM card used for Internet
connection via PSIM cannot have the
same telephone number as the SIM card
that the phone uses. If this is disregarded,
it will not be possible to route calls cor-
rectly to the telephone. Therefore, use a
SIM card with a separate telephone num-
ber for the Internet connection, or a data
card that does not handle telephone calls
and is therefore unable to disrupt the func-
tion of the telephone.
Related information
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 538)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 540)
Sharing Internet access from the
car via a Wi-Fi hotspot
When the car is online, its Internet connec-
tion can be shared to allow other devices to
use it
14
.
The network operator (SIM card) must sup-
port tethering (sharing of the Internet connec-
tion).
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication Car Wi-Fi
Hotspot
.
3.
Tap on
Network name and name the
shared connection.
4.
Tap on Password and select a password
to be entered on connecting devices.
5.
Tap on
Frequency band and select the
frequency on which the hotspot is to
transmit data. Note that selection of fre-
quency band is not available in all markets.
6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking
the box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.
7. If Wi-Fi has been used as a connection
source, confirm the option to change con-
nection.
> It is now possible for external devices
to connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi
hotspot).
14
Does not apply when the car is online via Wi-Fi.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
540
NOTE
Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in
further charges from your network opera-
tor.
Contact your network operator about the
cost for data traffic.
Connection status is indicated by the symbol
in the centre display's status bar.
Press
Connected devices to see a list of the
currently connected devices.
Related information
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 122)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 540)
No or poor Internet connection
Factors that affect the Internet connection.
The amount of data transferred is dependent
on the services or apps in use in the car. For
example, streaming audio can require large
amounts of data which requires a good con-
nection and good signal strength.
Phone to car
The speed of the Internet connection may vary
depending on the location of the phone in the
car. Move the phone closer to the centre dis-
play in order to increase the signal strength.
Ensure that there is no source of interference
in between.
Phone to network operator
The speed of the mobile network varies
depending on the coverage in the present
location. Poor network coverage may occur,
for example in tunnels, in mountainous coun-
try, in deep valleys or indoors. The speed also
depends on the agreement you have with your
network.
NOTE
In the event of problems with data traffic,
contact your network operator.
Restarting the phone
If there are problems with the Internet con-
nection then it may help to restart the phone.
Related information
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 541)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
541
Remove Wi-Fi network
Removing a network that is not to be used.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Continue to
Communication Wi-Fi
Saved networks.
3.
Tap on
Forget alongside the network to
be removed.
4. Confirm the selection.
> The car will no longer connect to the
network in future.
Remove all networks
All networks can be removed simultaneously
by restoring factory settings. Please note that
all user data and system settings are reset to
original factory settings.
Related information
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 540)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 132)
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 537)
Wi-Fi technologies and security
Possible network types to connect to.
It is only possible to connect to the following
types of network:
Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz
15
.
Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n.
Security type — WPA2AESCCMP.
The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle
Wi-Fi devices inside the car.
If several devices operate on the frequency at
the same time then it may result in reduced
performance.
Related information
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
User terms and conditions and
data sharing
The first time certain services and apps are
started, a pop-up window with the headings
Terms and conditions and Data sharing
may be shown.
The purpose is to inform about Volvo's user
terms and conditions and policy for data shar-
ing. By accepting data sharing, the user
accepts that certain information is sent from
the car. This is required so that certain servi-
ces and apps can have full functionality.
The data sharing function for online services
and apps is deactivated as default
16
. Data
sharing needs to be activated so that certain
online services and apps in the car can be
used. Data sharing can be set from the centre
display's settings menu or in connection with
the services or apps being started in the cen-
tre display.
Privacy and data sharing
With the software update made available
November 2017, privacy and data sharing set-
tings were introduced for online services and
downloaded apps. The settings can be found
under
Privacy and data in the settings menu
in the car's centre display.
15
Selection of frequency is not available on all markets.
16
Does not apply to Volvo On Call*.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
542
There you can select the online services which
are allowed to share data. Data sharing for
downloaded apps can also be deactivated
there. Note that services and apps cannot be
used as intended if data sharing is deacti-
vated.
After a factory reset or e.g. a workshop visit or
software update, the data sharing settings
may have been reset to their default settings.
In which case, reactivate data sharing for
online services and for downloaded apps.
NOTE
Privacy and data sharing settings are
unique for every driver profile.
Related information
Activating and deactivating data sharing
(p. 542)
Activating and deactivating data
sharing
Data sharing for services and apps required
can be set in the centre display's settings
menu.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
System Privacy and data.
3. Select activation or deactivation of data
sharing for individual services and all apps.
If data sharing has not been activated for an
online service or downloaded apps, this can be
done when they are started in the centre dis-
play. If this is the first time a service is started,
or e.g. after a factory reset or certain software
updates, Volvo's terms and conditions for
online services need to be approved. Note that
data sharing will then also be activated for
other services or apps for which sharing has
already been approved.
NOTE
After a visit to a Volvo workshop, you may
need to reactivate data sharing so that the
online services and apps shall work again.
Related information
User terms and conditions and data shar-
ing (p. 541)
Data sharing for services
If you have not activated data sharing for an
online service or for downloaded apps, you
can do this in connection with starting them
in your centre display. If this is the first time
you are starting a service, or e.g. after a fac-
tory reset or certain software updates, you
also need to approve Volvo's terms and con-
ditions for online services.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
543
Activate data sharing when you start a
service
1. Select the function or service to be acti-
vated.
> If this is the first time you are using the
service and also after e.g. a factory
reset or certain software updates, you
first need to approve Volvo's terms and
conditions for online services in order to
continue.
2. Select to approve data sharing for the
service or to cancel.
If you select to approve, data sharing is acti-
vated and you can start to use the service.
Activate data sharing when you start
an app
To approve data sharing for an app that needs
the function, start the app and tap on Allow in
the pop-up window.
You can deactivate data sharing for services
and apps in the settings menu under
System
Privacy and data Data Sharing.
Storage space on hard disk
It is possible to view how much free space
there is on the car's hard disk.
Storage information for the car's hard disk,
including total capacity, available capacity and
how much space is used for installed apps can
be shown. The information is available under
Settings System System Information
Storage.
Related information
Apps (p. 502)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
544
License agreement for audio and
media
A license is an agreement for the right to
operate a certain activity or the right to use
someone else's entitlement according to the
terms and conditions in the agreement. The
following texts are Volvo's agreements with
manufacturers/developers.
Bowers & Wilkins
Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks
of the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trade-
mark of B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered
trademark of DuPont.
Dirac Unison
®
Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in
frequency, time and space for the best possi-
ble bass integration and clarity. It enables a
faithful reproduction of the acoustic characte-
ristics of specific performance venues. Using
advanced algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all
loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic high-
precision measurements. Like a conductor of
an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeak-
ers perform in perfect unison.
DivX
®
DivX
®
, DivX Certified
®
and associated logo-
types are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC
and are used under licence.
This DivX Certified
®
device can play back
DivX® Home Theater video files up to 576p
(including .avi, .divx). Download free software
on www.divx.com to create, play back and
stream digital video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEOONDEMAND: This DivX
Certified
®
device must be registered in order
to play back purchased DivX Video-on-
Demand (VOD) films. Get the registration
code by locating the DivX VOD section in the
device's settings menu. Go to vod.divx.com
for more information on how to complete the
registration.
Patent numbers
Protected by one or more of the following US
patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
Gracenote
®
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
545
Parts of the content are copyright © of
Gracenote or its suppliers.
Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote
MusicID are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the USA
and/or other countries.
Gracenote
®
End User License Agreement
This program or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA
("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote
("Gracenote software") activates this program
to perform disc and/or file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track and title ("Gracenote data")
from online servers or embedded databases
(together called "Gracenote servers") and in
order to perform other actions. You may only
use Gracenote data in accordance with the
intended end-user functions for this program
or this device.
You agree to only use Gracenote data, Grace-
note software and Gracenote servers for your
own personal non-commercial use. You agree
not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit this
Gracenote software or any Gracenote data to
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN
THIS AGREEMENT.
You agree that your non-exclusive right to use
Gracenote data, Gracenote software and
Gracenote servers will be terminated if you
violate these restrictions. If your license is ter-
minated you agree to cease all use of Grace-
note data, Gracenote software and Gracenote
servers. Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all
Gracenote data, all Gracenote software and all
Gracenote servers, including all ownership
rights. Gracenote will under no circumstances
have any obligation to pay you for any informa-
tion you provide. You agree that Gracenote,
Inc. may enforce the company's rights under
this agreement against you directly in its own
name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier
to track enquiries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric iden-
tifier is to enable the Gracenote service to
count enquiries without knowing anything
about who you are. Additional information is
available on the web page for Gracenote's pri-
vacy policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote software and everything
included in Gracenote data are licensed to you
"as is". Gracenote provides no undertakings or
warranties, express or implied, as to the accu-
racy of the Gracenote data contained in the
Gracenote servers. Gracenote reserves the
right to delete data from the Gracenote serv-
ers or to change data categories for any rea-
son that Gracenote deems sufficient. No war-
ranty is provided that the Gracenote software
or Gracenote servers are fault-free or that the
Gracenote software or Gracenote servers will
operate without interruption. Gracenote has
no obligation to provide you with new,
improved or additional data types or catego-
ries that Gracenote may provide in the future,
and the company reserves the right to discon-
tinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRAN-
TIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTA-
BILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
POSE, TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE
RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR A
GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE WILL
IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR REVENUES.
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2
and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
(Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
1993), The Regents of the University of
California. All or some portions are derived
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
546
from material licensed to the University of
California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories,
Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met: Redistributions of source
code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution. Neither the
name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL
Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1,
released January 26, 2000, developed by
Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is
Copyright (c) 19912000 Silicon Graphics,
Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third
parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All
Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [19912000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to the following conditions: The
above copyright notice including the dates of
first publication and either this permission
notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/
projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software. THE
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall
not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale, use or other dealings in this
Software without prior written authorization
from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of
the FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 19951998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
547
Linux software
This product contains software licensed under
GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
You have the right of acquisition, modification,
and distribution of the source code of the
GPLLGPL software.
You may download Source Code from the
following website at no charge: http://
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/TVM_8351_013
The website provides the Source Code "As Is"
and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code.
Please note that we cannot respond to any
inquiries regarding the source code.
camellia:1.2.0
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone
Corporation). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer as
the first lines of this file unmodified.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Unicode: 5.1.0
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright c 19912013 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use
in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode
data files and any associated documentation
(the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without
restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files
or Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Data Files or Software are furnished to do
so, provided that (a) the above copyright
notice(s) and this permission notice appear
with all copies of the Data Files or Software,
(b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this
permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
each modified Data File or in the Software as
well as in the documentation associated with
the Data File(s) or Software that the data or
software has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
548
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale,
use or other dealings in these Data Files or
Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
Declaration of Conformity
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
549
Country/
Area
Brazil:
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não
pode causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
EU:
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2333, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 6691513, Japan
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive
201453EU.
For more information, search support information at www.volvocars.com.
The Uni-
ted Arab
Emirates:
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
550
Country/
Area
Kazakh-
stan:
Model name: NR 0V
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Exporting country: Japan
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
551
Country/
Area
China:
1.
■ 使用频率2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
■ 最大率谱密度 天线增益 10dBi 时≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限20 ppm
■ 帯外发射率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
■ 杂散发射(辐射)率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2.不得擅自更改发射频率大发射率(包括额外装射频率放大器),不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业产生有害干扰一旦发现有干扰现象时,应立即停止使用,并采措施消除干扰后方可继续
使用
4.使用微率无线电设备,必须忍各种无线电业的干扰或工业科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
552
Country/
Area
Korea:
B 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)
기기는 가정용(B ) 전자파적합기기로서 주로
가정에서 사용하는 것을 󸭥적으로 하며, 󸭤든
지역에서 사용할 있습니다.
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 󹚂습니다.
Malaysia:
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical
Standards) Regulations 2000. To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (www.volvocars.com/intl/support) and search for
“SIRIM Label Verification”.
Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)
Model: NR0V
Type Approval No.:
RBAY18A1015S(154067)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
553
Country/
Area
Mexico:
Taiwan:
低󰀦率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司商號或使用者均不得擅自
變更頻率加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低󰀦率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應
立停用,改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線
電通信低󰀦率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備
之干擾
Related information
Sound, media and Internet (p. 500)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Media player (p. 511)
Gracenote
®
(p. 515)
Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 34)
ECALL
ECALL
* Option/accessory.
556
eCall
1
The car can detect an accident and contact
the nearest emergency call centre itself.
For cars without Volvo On Call* there is a
European legal requirement, Pan-European
eCall, that provides access to an automatic
collision alarm and urgent assistance in emer-
gency situations.
Related information
Automatic collision alarm with eCall
(p. 556)
Emergency assistance with eCall
(p. 557)
Roadside Assistance (p. 557)
Automatic collision alarm with
eCall
2
If a collision occurs, the car reports this auto-
matically to the closest emergency call cen-
tre, which can send out emergency assis-
tance.
When the car's safety system is triggered, e.g.
in an accident in which the activation level is
reached for the seatbelt tensioner or airbags, a
signal will be automatically sent to the closest
emergency call centre.
1. A message, containing car position
2
, etc.,
is sent automatically from the car to the
emergency call centre.
2. The emergency call centre establishes ver-
bal contact with the car's driver and tries
to find out the extent of the collision and
the need for help.
3. The emergency call centre sends the nec-
essary assistance (police, ambulance,
towing, etc.).
If verbal contact cannot be established, the
emergency call centre knows the car's posi-
tion and can assist with appropriate action.
Related information
eCall (p. 556)
Emergency assistance with eCall
(p. 557)
Roadside Assistance (p. 557)
1
Applies to certain markets.
2
Applies to certain markets.
ECALL
557
Emergency assistance with eCall
3
Press the SOS button to contact a service
centre, or the closest emergency call centre
in an emergency situation.
To summon help in case of illness, external
threats to the car or passengers, the closest
emergency call centre can be alerted manually
by depressing the SOS button for at least
2 seconds. The emergency call centre is noti-
fied and told of the car's position
3
, etc., and
attempts to establish verbal contact with the
driver in order to agree what assistance is nee-
ded.
NOTE
The SOS button is only designed for emer-
gencies and must only be used in the event
of an accident, illness or an external threat
to the car and its passengers. The ON
CALL button must be used in the event of
problems with the car.
Related information
eCall (p. 556)
Automatic collision alarm with eCall
(p. 556)
Roadside Assistance (p. 557)
Roadside Assistance
4
Summon assistance if you have problems
with the car by pressing the ON CALL button
in the car's roof.
Press the ON CALL button in the car's roof for
at least 2 seconds if you have a puncture, run
out of fuel or your battery runs out of charge,
for example. Verbal contact is established with
a roadside assistance company that can send
help to the car.
Related information
eCall (p. 556)
Automatic collision alarm with eCall
(p. 556)
Emergency assistance with eCall (p. 557)
3
Applies to certain markets.
4
Applies to certain markets.
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
560
Tyres
The function of the tyres is to carry load, pro-
vide grip on the road surface, dampen vibra-
tion and protect the wheel from wear.
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving cha-
racteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
pressure and speed rating are important for
how the car performs.
The car is fitted with tyres according to the
tyre information sticker found on the driver's
side door pillar (between the front door and
the rear door).
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
Recommended tyres
On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo
original tyres that have the VOL
1
marking on
the side of the tyres. These tyres are carefully
adapted to the car. In the event of changing
tyres, it is therefore important that the new
tyres also have this marking in order for the
car's driving characteristics, comfort and fuel
consumption to be maintained.
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the fric-
tion capacity/characteristics gradually deterio-
rate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres
as possible when you replace them. This is
especially important with regard to winter
tyres. The last four digits in the sequence
mean the week and year of manufacture. This
is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of
Transportation), and this is stated with four
digits, for example 0717. The tyre is then man-
ufactured in week 07, year 2017.
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
if they are hardly ever or never used. The func-
tion can therefore be affected. This applies to
all tyres that are stored for future use. Exam-
ples of external signs which indicate that the
tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or disco-
louration.
Tyre economy
Maintain the correct tyre pressure.
Avoid fast starts, heavy braking and
squealing tyres.
Tyre wear increases with speed.
Correct wheel alignment is very important.
Unbalanced wheels worsen tyre economy
and travelling comfort.
The tyres must have the same direction of
rotation during their entire service life.
When you change tyres, the tyres with the
best tread must be fitted on the rear
wheels to reduce the risk of oversteer dur-
ing heavy braking.
If you drive over kerbstones or deep holes
you can damage the tyres and/or wheel
rims permanently.
Tyre rotation
The car has no mandatory tyre rotation. Driv-
ing style, tyre pressure, climate and road con-
dition affect how quickly the tyres age and
1
There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
561
wear. Correct tyre pressure results in more
even wear.
To avoid differences in tread depth and to pre-
vent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the
front and rear wheels should be switched with
each other. A suitable distance for the first
change is approx. 5000 km (approx.
3100 miles) and then at 10000 km (approx.
6200 miles) intervals.
Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted for checking if you are
uncertain about tread depth. If significant dif-
ferences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread
depth) between tyres have already occurred,
then the least worn tyres must always be fit-
ted on the rear. Understeer is normally easier
to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car
continuing forwards in a straight line rather
than having the rear end skidding to one side,
resulting in possible complete loss of control
over the car. This is why it is important for the
rear wheels never to lose grip before the front
wheels.
Storing wheels and tyres
When you store complete wheels (tyres fitted
on wheel rims) they should be hung up or
positioned lying on their sides on the floor.
Tyres not fitted on rims must be stored lying
on their sides or standing upright, but not
hung up.
IMPORTANT
Tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and
dark place, and should never be stored
close to solvents, petrol, oils, etc.
WARNING
Wheel rim size and tyre size for your
Volvo are specified to meet stringent
requirements for stability and driving
characteristics. Unapproved combina-
tions of wheel rim size and tyre size
may have a negative effect on the car's
stability and driving characteristics.
Any damage caused by the fitting of
unapproved combinations of wheel rim
size and tyre size is not covered by the
new car warranty. Volvo accepts no lia-
bility for death, personal injury or any
costs caused by such installations.
Related information
Checking tyre pressure (p. 564)
Tyres' rotation direction (p. 563)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
(p. 564)
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
(p. 567)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 578)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 562)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 676)
Recommendations for loading (p. 593)
WHEELS AND TYRES
562
Dimension designation for tyre
Designations for tyre dimension, load index
and speed rating.
The car has an approval for the complete vehi-
cle with certain combinations of wheel rims
and tyres.
Designation of dimensions
All tyres have a dimension designation, such
as: 23545 R18 98 W.
235 Tyre width (mm)
45 Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
R Radial ply
18 Rim diameter in inches
98 Codes for the maximum permitted
tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
W Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this
case 270 km/h (168 mph).)
Load index
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a
load, a load index (LI). The car's weight deter-
mines the load capacity required of the tyres.
Speed rating
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol),
must at least correspond with the car's top
speed. The table below shows the maximum
permitted speed for each speed rating (SS).
The only exception to these regulations is win-
ter tyres
2
, where a lower speed rating may be
used. If such a tyre is selected, the car must
not be driven more quickly than the tyre is
rated for. For example, cars with Q rating tyres
must be driven at speeds not exceeding
160 km/h (100 mph). The road conditions and
applicable road traffic rules determine how
quickly the car can be driven, not the speed
rating of the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified
in the table.
Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on
winter tyres)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
WARNING
The lowest permitted tyre load index (LI)
and speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each
respective engine variant are shown in the
specifications, which can be found in the
printed owner's manual. If a tyre with too
low a load index or speed rating is used, it
may overheat and be damaged.
Related information
Tyres (p. 560)
Dimension designation for wheel rim
(p. 563)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 676)
Minimum permitted tyre load index and
speed rating for tyres (p. 677)
2
Both those with metal studs and those without.
WHEELS AND TYRES
563
Dimension designation for wheel
rim
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
The car has an approval for the complete vehi-
cle with certain combinations of wheel rims
and tyres.
All wheel rims have a dimension designation,
for example: 8Jx18x42.
8 Rim width in inches
J Rim flange profile
18 Rim diameter in inches
42 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface
against the hub)
Related information
Tyres (p. 560)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 562)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 676)
Tyres' rotation direction
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direc-
tion of rotation marked with an arrow.
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
The tyre must always rotate in the same
direction throughout its lifespan.
Tyres should only be switched between
front and rear positions, never between
left and right-hand sides, or vice versa.
If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to
force rain and slush out of the way are
adversely affected.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
NOTE
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have
the same type and dimension, and also the
same make.
Related information
Tyres (p. 560)
WHEELS AND TYRES
564
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
Tread wear indicators show the status of the
tyre's tread depth.
A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's
tread pattern. On the side of the tyre are the
letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the
tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm (116
inch), the tread will be level in height with the
tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as
soon as possible. Remember that tyres with
little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain
and snow.
Related information
Tyres (p. 560)
Checking tyre pressure
Correct tyre pressure helps to improve driv-
ing stability, save fuel and extend the service
life of the tyres.
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies
depending on ambient temperature. Driving
on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low
could result in the tyres overheating and being
damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling
comfort, road noise and driving characteris-
tics.
Check the tyre pressures monthly. Use the
recommended tyre pressure for cold tyres in
order to maintain good tyre performance. Tyre
pressure that is too low or too high may cause
uneven wear on the tyres.
WARNING
Tyre pressure that is too low is the
most common cause of tyre failure and
may result in serious cracks in the tyre,
the tread loosening or the tyre explod-
ing, with unexpected loss of control of
the car and increased risk of personal
injury.
Tyres with pressure that is too low
reduce the load capacity of the car.
Cold tyres
The tyre pressure must be checked when the
tyres are cold. Tyres are considered cold when
they have the same temperature as the sur-
rounding air. This temperature is normally
reached when the car has been parked for at
least three hours.
After having driven approximately 1.6 km
(1 mile) these tyres are considered as warm. If
you have to drive further than this to inflate the
tyres, first check and record the tyre pressure
and inflate to a suitable tyre pressure when
you arrive at the pump.
When the outside temperature changes, the
tyre pressure also changes. A decrease in tem-
perature of 10 degrees causes the tyre pres-
sure to decrease 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the tyre
pressure regularly and adjust to the correct
pressure, which is specified on the car's tyre
information decal or certification label.
If you check the tyre pressure when the tyres
are warm then you must never release any air.
The tyres are warm due to driving and it is nor-
mal for the pressure to increase above the rec-
ommended pressure for cold tyres. A warm
tyre with tyre pressure equal to or below the
recommendation for cold tyres may have a
pressure that is far too low.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
565
Related information
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 565)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
(p. 567)
Tyres (p. 560)
Adjusting tyre pressure
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. The tyre pressure must
therefore sometimes be adjusted in order to
maintain the recommended tyre pressure.
Use the recommended tyre pressure for cold
tyres in order to maintain good tyre perform-
ance and even tread wear.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pres-
sure should be checked on cold tyres.
"Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same
temperature as the ambient temperature
(approx. 3 hours after the car has been
driven). After a few kilometres of driving,
the tyres warm up and the pressure increa-
ses.
1. Remove the cap from the valve on one
tyre and then press the tyre pressure
gauge firmly down onto the valve.
2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure,
see the decal on the door pillar on the driv-
er's side showing the recommended pres-
sure for factory fitted tyres.
3. Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid dam-
age to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
4. Check the tyres visually for any implanted
nails or other objects that could puncture
the tyre and cause leakage.
5. Check the sidewalls for any cavities, cuts,
bumps or other irregularities.
6. Repeat this for all tyres, including the
spare tyre*.
NOTE
If you have over-inflated, release air by
pressing in the metal pin in the centre of
the valve. Then check the pressure again
using the tyre pressure gauge.
Some spare tyres require a higher tyre
pressure than other tyres. Check in the tyre
pressure table or on the tyre pressure label.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
566
Related information
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 564)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 583)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 678)
Recommended tyre pressure
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side
door pillar (between frame and rear door)
shows which pressures the tyres should have
at different loads and speed conditions.
Tyre pressure label location
The decal displays the designation for the fac-
tory-fitted tyres on the car, as well as load lim-
its and tyre pressure.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact rep-
licas of those in the car. They are included
to show their approximate appearance and
locations in the car. The information that
applies to your particular car can be found
on the decal on the car.
Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure
For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of
up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pres-
sures can be chosen for good fuel economy.
However, the lower comfort pressures are rec-
ommended instead if improved noise and trav-
elling comfort are desired.
Related information
Checking tyre pressure (p. 564)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 678)
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
567
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
The tyre pressure monitoring system
3
gives a
warning with an indicator symbol in the driver
display when the pressure in one or more of
the car's tyres is too low.
This symbol illuminates to indicate
low tyre pressure. Check the tyre
pressure in the
Car Status app in
the centre display.
If there is a fault in the system the tyre pres-
sure warning symbol flashes for approximately
one minute and then remains illuminated.
System description
The tyre pressure monitoring system meas-
ures differences in rotation speed between the
different wheels via the ABS system in order
to be able to determine whether they have the
correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pressure is too
low, the tyre's diameter is changed and, as a
result, so is its rotation speed. By comparing
the tyres with each other the system can
determine whether one or more tyres have
pressure that is too low.
General information on the tyre monitoring
system
In the information below, the tyre monitoring
system is referred to generically as TPMS.
Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be
checked once a month. When checking, the
tyre should be cold and have the air pressure
recommended by the car manufacturer speci-
fied on the tyre pressure label or in the tyre
pressure table. If the car has tyres of a differ-
ent size than that recommended by the manu-
facturer, find out what the correct air pressure
level is for these.
As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped
with a tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS), which shows when the air pressure in
one or more tyres is too low. When the indica-
tor symbol for low air pressure is lit, stop and
check the tyres as soon as possible and inflate
to the correct air pressure.
Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that
is too low may cause the tyre to overheat,
which can cause a tyre failure. Low tyre pres-
sure also reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre
service life, and can affect car handling and
stopping ability. Note that TPMS does not
replace regular tyre maintenance. It is the driv-
er's responsibility to maintain correct tyre
pressure, even if the limit for low tyre pressure
has not been reached so that the indicator
symbol illuminates.
The car is also equipped with a TPMS system
fault indicator, which indicates when the sys-
tem is not functioning correctly. The TPMS
system fault indicator is combined with the
indicator symbol for low tyre pressure. When
the system detects a fault, the symbol in the
driver display will flash for about one minute
and then remain illuminated. This procedure
will be repeated when the car is started until
the fault has been rectified. When the symbol
is illuminated, the system's ability to detect or
warn of low tyre pressure may be affected.
A TPMS system fault can occur for several
reasons, such as after changing to a spare
tyre, or changing tyres or wheels that prevent
TPMS from functioning correctly.
Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS
after changing one or more tyres in order to
ensure the new tyre or wheel is working cor-
rectly with TPMS.
To bear in mind
Always save a new tyre pressure in the
system after changing a wheel or adjust-
ing tyre pressure.
If you change to tyres of a different size to
the ones fitted at the factory, the system
must be reset by storing a new tyre pres-
sure for these tyres to avoid false warn-
ings.
If a spare wheel* is used, it is possible that
the tyre pressure monitoring system does
3
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
568
not work correctly due to the differences
between the wheels.
The system does not replace the need for
regular tyre inspection and maintenance.
It is not possible to switch off the tyre
pressure monitoring system.
WARNING
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
The system cannot indicate sudden
tyre damage in advance.
Related information
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
See tyre pressure status in the centre dis-
play* (p. 569)
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 570)
Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitor-
ing system* (p. 568)
Messages for tyre pressure monitoring*
(p. 571)
Saving a new tyre pressure in the
monitoring system*
In order for the system for tyre pressure
monitoring
4
to work correctly, a reference
value for the tyre pressure must be saved.
This must take place every time the tyres are
changed or the tyre pressure is changed so
that the system can warn about low pressure
correctly.
For example, when driving with a heavy load
or at high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph),
the tyre pressure should be adjusted in
accordance with Volvo's recommended tyre
pressure values. The system is then reset by
saving a new tyre pressure.
Perform the following procedure to store a
new tyre pressure as a reference value in the
system:
1. Switch off the car.
2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure,
see the decal on the door pillar on the driv-
er's side showing the recommended pres-
sure for factory fitted tyres.
3. Start the car.
4.
Open the
Car Status app in the app view.
5.
Press
TPMS.
NOTE
The car must be stationary for the Store
Pressure button to be selectable.
6.
Press
Store Pressure.
7.
Tap on
OK to confirm that the tyre pres-
sure in all four tyres has been checked and
adjusted.
8. Drive the car until the new tyre pressure
has been saved. The new tyre pressure is
stored when the car is driven at a speed
above 35 km/h (22 mph).
> When sufficient data has been collec-
ted for the system to be able to detect
low tyre pressure, the animation show-
ing storage progress disappears from
the centre display. The system does not
provide additional confirmation that a
new tyre pressure has been saved.
If storing fails, a message is shown:
Storing
pressure unsuccessful. Try again.
4
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
569
WARNING
The exhaust gases contain carbon monox-
ide, which is invisible and odourless, but
highly toxic. The procedure to save a new
tyre pressure must therefore always be
performed outdoors or in a workshop with
exhaust extraction.
Related information
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 565)
See tyre pressure status in the centre dis-
play* (p. 569)
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 570)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 567)
See tyre pressure status in the
centre display*
With the system for tyre pressure monitor-
ing
5
, tyre pressure status can be viewed in
the centre display.
Checking status
Several minutes driving above 35 km/h
(22 mph) are required for the system to
become active.
1.
Open the
Car Status app in the app view.
2.
Tap on
TPMS to show the status of the
tyres.
The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending
on car model or updated software.
Related information
Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitor-
ing system* (p. 568)
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 570)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 567)
Car status (p. 602)
Messages for tyre pressure monitoring*
(p. 571)
5
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
570
Action in the event of warning for
low tyre pressure
When the system for tyre pressure
6
warns
that tyre pressure is too low, action is
required.
Check and rectify the tyre pressure
when the indicator symbol for the
system is illuminated and the
Tyre
pressure low message is shown.
1. Switch off the car.
2. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres
with a tyre pressure gauge.
3. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure,
see the decal on the door pillar on the driv-
er's side showing the recommended pres-
sure for factory fitted tyres.
4. Always save a new tyre pressure in the
system via the centre display after the tyre
pressure has been adjusted.
Note that the indicator symbol does not
extinguish until the low tyre pressure has
been rectified and storing a new tyre pres-
sure has been started.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pres-
sure should be checked on cold tyres.
"Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same
temperature as the ambient temperature
(approx. 3 hours after the car has been
driven). After a few kilometres of driving,
the tyres warm up and the pressure increa-
ses.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
WARNING
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
The system cannot indicate sudden
tyre damage in advance.
Related information
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 565)
Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitor-
ing system* (p. 568)
See tyre pressure status in the centre dis-
play* (p. 569)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 567)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 583)
6
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
571
Messages for tyre pressure
monitoring*
A number of messages for the tyre pressure
monitoring system
7
can be shown. Here are
some examples.
Driver display:
Tyre pressure
low Check Car
Status app in
center display
The indicator symbol
switches on to indicate
that there is low tyre
pressure in one or more
tyres. See the
Car Sta-
tus app in the centre dis-
play for more informa-
tion.
Driver display:
Tyre pressure
system Tem-
porarily
unavailable
The indicator symbol
flashes and changes to
constant glow after
approx. 1 minute. The
system is currently
unavailable, activated
shortly.
Driver display:
Tyre pressure
system Serv-
ice required
The indicator symbol
flashes and changes to
constant glow after
approx. 1 minute. The
system is not working
correctly, contact a
workshop
A
.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 567)
Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitor-
ing system* (p. 568)
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 570)
Car status (p. 602)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 23)
Changing wheel
Wheel changes must always be performed
correctly. Instructions on how a wheel is
removed and mounted and what is important
to remember are provided below. Check that
the tyre dimension is approved for use on the
car.
WARNING
If a wheel must be changed in a traf-
ficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
Never crawl under the car or reach
under with a part of your body when it
is raised on a jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it
is raised on the jack.
7
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
572
IMPORTANT
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term
use, such as when changing a wheel
after a puncture. Only the jack belong-
ing to the specific model is to be used
to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer
time than is required just to change a
wheel, use of a garage jack is recom-
mended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
Removing a wheel
Read through all instructions before begin-
ning. Take out the tools needed before jacking
up the car.
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate
the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being
changed in a trafficked location.
2. Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench to the stop position.
3. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts with the intended tool.
4. With the car still on the ground, use the
wheel bolt wrench/towing eye to undo the
wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing down-
wards (anticlockwise). Always start with
the lockable wheel bolts*.
5. Follow the instructions for how to safely
raise the car with the jack.
6. Raise the car high enough to allow the
wheel to be removed to move freely.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
Mounting a wheel
1. Clean the surfaces between wheel and
hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
wheel bolts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tight-
ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm
(103 foot-pound). Check the tightening
torque with a torque wrench.
5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
6. Check the tyre pressure and save the new
tyre pressure in the system for tyre pres-
sure monitoring*.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
573
WARNING
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tight-
ened several days after the wheel change.
Temperature differences and vibration may
mean that they are not attached equally as
tightly.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
Related information
Warning triangle (p. 597)
Raise the car (p. 605)
Tool kit (p. 573)
Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitor-
ing system* (p. 568)
Tool kit
Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel
changes or similar are stored in the car's
cargo area.
All tools are located in the foam block under the
cargo area floor.
Jack*
Tool for removing the plastic caps from
the wheel bolts
Funnel for filling fluids
Wheel wrench* and towing eye
If the car is fitted with a spare wheel*, there is
a jack and a wheel bolt wrench.
Related information
Changing wheel (p. 571)
Jack* (p. 574)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 578)
Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 492)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
574
Jack*
The jack can be used to raise the car, for
example, to change to a wheel.
IMPORTANT
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term
use, such as when changing a wheel
after a puncture. Only the jack belong-
ing to the specific model is to be used
to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer
time than is required just to change a
wheel, use of a garage jack is recom-
mended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
The jack needs to be cranked together to the
correct position in order to have space.
Applies to cars with
Leveling Control*: If the
car is equipped with the air suspension option
then this function must be deactivated before
the car is raised with the jack.
Related information
Tool kit (p. 573)
Raise the car (p. 605)
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to
the hubs.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso-
ries.
Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
with a torque wrench.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
wheel bolts.
WARNING
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tight-
ened several days after the wheel change.
Temperature differences and vibration may
mean that they are not attached equally as
tightly.
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm. (103 foot-pound). Overtightening
or loose tightening may damage the nuts
and the bolts.
Lockable wheel bolt kit*
To loosen or tighten the lockable wheel bolts
– turn the wrench in the lock bolt until it fully
engages in the code grooves. Always start
with the lockable wheel bolts if the wheel shall
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
575
be removed. When fitting the wheel, finish
with the lock screw.
IMPORTANT
Remember not to use bending force when
you loosen/tighten the wheel bolts. This
could damage the code groove in the lock
bolt and the wheel wrench and so make it
impossible to fit/remove the wheel.
When the wheel wrench is not in use it must
be stored in its place in the foam block under
the cargo area floor. It is important to remem-
ber this if the car is due to visit a workshop in
order to have the tool available. If you lose the
wrench, contact your Volvo dealer.
Related information
Changing wheel (p. 571)
Tool kit (p. 573)
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel, the Temporary Spare type,
can be used to temporarily replace a punc-
tured normal wheel.
The spare wheel is only designed for tempo-
rary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as
soon as possible.
The car's driving characteristics can be
changed when the spare wheel is used and
the ground clearance is reduced. Do not wash
the car in an automatic car wash if the
Temporary Spare is being used.
Recommended tyre pressure must be main-
tained regardless of the position of the tempo-
rary spare wheel on the car.
If the spare wheel is damaged, a new one can
be purchased from a Volvo dealer.
WARNING
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) with a spare wheel fitted on
the car.
The car must never be driven fitted
with more than one "Temporary Spare"
wheel.
The car may have different driving cha-
racteristics while driving with the spare
wheel. The spare wheel must be
replaced with a normal wheel as soon
as possible.
The spare wheel is smaller than the
normal wheel, which affects the car's
ground clearance. Look out for high
kerbs and do not machine-wash the
car.
Follow the manufacturer's recom-
mended tyre pressure for the spare
wheel.
On all-wheel drive cars, the drive on
the rear axle can be disengaged.
If the spare wheel is fitted to the front
axle then it is not possible to use snow
chains at the same time.
The spare wheel must not be repaired.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
576
IMPORTANT
The car must not be driven with tyres of
different sizes or with a spare wheel other
than the one supplied with the car. Using
different-sized wheels can cause serious
damage to the car's transmission.
Related information
Changing wheel (p. 571)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
Handling the spare wheel*
Follow these instructions for handling the
spare wheel.
The illustration is generic and appearance may differ.
The spare wheel is stored in a bag and must
be secured with two straps on the floor of the
cargo area while driving. The straps must be
tensioned crosswise over the wheel and
attached in the car's four load retaining eye-
lets.
Tools for changing wheels are located under
the cargo area floor.
Polestar Engineered
If your car is Polestar Engineered then spare
wheels of the Temporary Spare type do not fit
on the front wheel axle due to the larger
brakes.
Tyres should only be switched between front
and rear positions, never between left and
right-hand sides, or vice versa. If one of the
front tyres needs to be replaced by the spare
wheel:
1. Replace the rear tyre on the same side of
the car as the punctured tyre with the
spare wheel.
2. Move the rear tyre forward and replace
the punctured tyre.
Related information
Spare wheel* (p. 575)
Tool kit (p. 573)
Changing wheel (p. 571)
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
577
Winter tyres
Winter tyres are adapted for winter road con-
ditions.
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particu-
lar dimensions. Tyre dimensions are depend-
ent on engine variant. When driving on winter
tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted
to all four wheels.
Tips for changing to winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are
changed, mark which side of the car they were
mounted on, for example L for left and R for
right.
Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which
wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently
for 5001000 km (300600 miles), so the
studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives
the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer
service life.
NOTE
Laws regarding the use of studded tyres
may vary. Always follow local laws and
regulations.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there-
fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres
that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm
(0.15 inches).
Related information
Changing wheel (p. 571)
Winter driving (p. 473)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 564)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 676)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 23)
Snow chains
Use of snow chains and/or winter tyres can
help to improve the traction in winter condi-
tions.
Volvo recommends that snow chains are not
used on wheel dimensions other than 7.5x18
ET 45 23545. Volvo recommends that snow
chains are not used for Polestar Engineered,
but AutoSock can be used as a complement
to winter tyres together with the wheel dimen-
sion 8x19 ET 42 23540.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-
lent chains designed for the car model, and
tyre and rim dimensions. Only single-sided
snow chains are permitted.
In the event of uncertainty about the show
chain, Volvo recommends that an author-
ised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
The wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to the car and lead to an accident.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
578
IMPORTANT
Snow chains can be used on the car with
the following restrictions:
Always follow the mounting instruc-
tions from the manufacturer carefully.
Fit the chains as tensioned as possible
and tension them at regular intervals.
Snow chains must only be used on the
front wheels (also applies to all-wheel
drive cars).
In some cases, snow chains must NOT
be used, such as if accessory, after-
market or "special" tyres and wheels
are fitted that have a different size to
the original tyres and wheels. Suffi-
cient distance must be maintained
between the chains and brakes, sus-
pension and body components.
Check local regulations with regard to
using snow chains before fitting them.
Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed. You must
never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) under
any circumstances.
Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
when driving with snow chains.
Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and
tyres.
Driving with snow chains may have a
negative effect on the car's driving
characteristics. Avoid fast or sharp
turns, as well as braking with locked
wheels.
Some types of chain that are firmly
tensioned affect brake components
and must therefore NOT be used.
You can obtain more information on snow
chains from a Volvo dealer.
Related information
Winter driving (p. 473)
Emergency puncture repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit
8
, is used
to seal a puncture as well as to check and
adjust the air pressure in the tyre.
Cars equipped with spare tyre* do not have
the puncture repair kit.
The puncture repair kit consists of a compres-
sor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing
works as a temporary repair.
NOTE
The sealing fluid is effective at sealing tyres
with tread punctures but has limited ability
to seal tyres with sidewall punctures. Do
not use the emergency puncture repair kit
on tyres displaying larger slits, cracks or
similar damage.
NOTE
The compressor is intended for temporary
emergency puncture repair and is
approved by Volvo.
Location
The puncture repair kit is located in the foam
block under the cargo area floor.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
579
Sealing fluid expiry date
The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if
the bottle's expiry date has passed (see the
decal on the bottle). Treat the old bottle as
environmentally hazardous waste.
Related information
Using a puncture repair kit (p. 579)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 583)
Tyres (p. 560)
Using a puncture repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit (TMK
9
)
can be used to seal a puncture. Read through
all instructions before use.
Overview
Electrical cable
Air hose
Pressure reducing valve
Protective cap
Label, maximum permitted speed
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Pressure gauge
Sealing fluid bottle
Switch
Connecting
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
8
Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK)
9
Temporary Mobility Kit
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
580
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tyre sealing system:
The sealing fluid bottle contains 1) rub-
ber latex, natural and 2) ethanediol.
These substances are harmful if swal-
lowed.
The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory
tract, the skin, the central nervous sys-
tem, and the eyes.
Precautions:
Store out of the reach of children.
Harmful if ingested.
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin. If sealing fluid has come
into contact with your clothes, remove
them.
Wash thoroughly after handling.
First aid:
Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention
if symptoms occur.
Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for
least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting
the upper and lower eyelids. Get medi-
cal attention if symptoms occur.
Inhalation: Move the exposed person
to fresh air. If irritation persists, get
medical attention.
Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical
personnel. Get medical attention.
Disposal: Dispose of this material and
its container at a hazardous or special
waste collection point.
WARNING
Do not remove the bottle or air hose when
the puncture repair kit is being used.
1. Preparations
Set up the warning triangle and activate
the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being
sealed in a trafficked location.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or
similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It
helps to seal the hole.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed that is affixed on one side of the
compressor. Affix it visibly on the wind-
screen as a reminder to observe the speed
limit. You should not drive faster than
80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency
tyre repair kit has been used.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0
(Off), and locate the electrical cable and
the air hose.
4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from
the compressor, and unscrew the cork
from the sealing fluid bottle.
5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the
bottle holder.
The bottle and the bottle holder are equip-
ped with a reverse catch to prevent seal-
ant leakage. When the bottle is screwed in
it cannot be unscrewed from the bottle
holder again. The bottle must be removed
at a workshop
10
.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
10
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
581
6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in
the air hose's valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed in.
7. Begin puncture repair
Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
NOTE
Make sure that none of the other 12 V
sockets is in use when the compressor is
operating.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suffi-
cient ventilation.
8. Start the compressor by flicking the
switch to position I (On).
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi), but the
pressure drops after about 30 seconds.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the
compressor is running. If cracks or uneven-
ness arise then the compressor must be
switched off immediately. The journey
should not be continued. Call roadside
assistance for recovery to a tyre centre.
Volvo recommends an authorised tyre cen-
tre.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheat-
ing.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
pressure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum
is 3.5 bar (51 psi). Release air using the
pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-
sure is too high.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi)
then the hole in the tyre is too big. The jour-
ney should not be continued. Call roadside
assistance for recovery to a tyre centre.
Volvo recommends an authorised tyre cen-
tre.
11. Switch off the compressor and detach the
electrical cable.
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve
and refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid dam-
age to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
582
13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in
order to avoid leakage of the remaining
sealing fluid. Place the equipment in the
cargo area.
14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km
(2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal
the tyre, and then perform a follow-up
check.
WARNING
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture dur-
ing the first few rotations of the tyre. Make
sure that nobody is standing near the car
and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto
them when the car is driven away. The dis-
tance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet).
15. Follow-up inspection
Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and
screw in the valve connection to the bot-
tom of the tyre valve's thread. The com-
pressor must be switched off.
16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the
tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey
should not be continued. Call roadside
assistance for recovery.
If the tyre pressure is higher than
1.3 bar (19 psi), the tyre must be infla-
ted to the pressure specified in accord-
ance with the tyre pressure label on the
driver's side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa
= 14.5 psi). Release air using the pres-
sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure
is too high.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
sealing fluid.
The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
these replacements be performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Maximum mileage with tyres containing
sealing fluid is 200 km (120 miles).
NOTE
The compressor is an electrical device. Fol-
low local regulations related to waste man-
agement.
Related information
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 578)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 583)
WHEELS AND TYRES
583
Inflating tyres with the compressor
from the puncture repair kit
The car's original tyres can be inflated using
the compressor in the emergency puncture
repair kit.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
(Off), and take out the electrical cable and
the air hose.
2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in
the air hose's valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed in.
3. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suffi-
cient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the
switch to position I (On).
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified
on the tyre pressure label on the driver
side door pillar. Release air using the pres-
sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is
too high.
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and the electrical cable.
7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid dam-
age to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The compressor is an electrical device. Fol-
low local regulations related to waste man-
agement.
Related information
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
Using a puncture repair kit (p. 579)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 578)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
586
Passenger compartment interior
Overview of the passenger compartment's
interior and storage locations.
Front seat
Storage compartment in the door panel, glovebox
and sun visor.
Storage spaces with cup holder, electrical socket and
USB port in the tunnel console.
Rear seat
Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holder*
in the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the
front seat backrest and also electrical sockets in the
tunnel console.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories,
etc. in the glove compartment or other
compartments. Otherwise they may injure
people in the car in the event of sudden
braking or a collision.
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
example, are easily scratched by metal
objects. Do not place keys, phones and
other items on sensitive surfaces.
Related information
Electrical sockets (p. 588)
Using the glovebox (p. 591)
Sun visors (p. 593)
Tunnel console (p. 587)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 518)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
587
Tunnel console
The tunnel console is located between the
front seats.
Storage compartment with cup holder.
Storage compartment with 12 V socket
and USB port under the armrest.
Climate controls for the rear seat climate
functions* or storage compartment.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories,
etc. in the glove compartment or other
compartments. Otherwise they may injure
people in the car in the event of sudden
braking or a collision.
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
example, are easily scratched by metal
objects. Do not place keys, phones and
other items on sensitive surfaces.
NOTE
One of the detectors for the alarm* is
located under the tunnel console's cup
holder. Avoid leaving coins, keys and other
metal objects in the cup holder, since this
may trigger the alarm.
Related information
Passenger compartment interior (p. 586)
Electrical sockets (p. 588)
Climate controls (p. 211)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
588
Electrical sockets
There are two 12 V electrical sockets and one
230 V electrical socket* in the tunnel con-
sole, and there is one 12 V electrical socket*
in the cargo area.
If a problem occurs with an electrical socket,
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
12 V electrical socket
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.
The 12 V sockets can be used for various
accessories designed for this, such as music
players, cooler boxes and mobile phones.
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.
High voltage socket*
Electrical socket in the tunnel console, rear seat.
The high-voltage socket* can be used for vari-
ous accessories designed for this, such as
chargers or laptops.
Status indication, high-voltage socket
An LED
1
lamp on the socket indicates the sta-
tus of the socket:
1
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
589
Status indication Reason Action
Steady green light The socket is delivering current to a connected device. None.
Blinking orange light The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because
for example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger
compartment is too warm).
Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool
down before reinserting the plug.
The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or
continuously) or is defective.
None. The accessory cannot be connected to the
socket.
Extinguished lamp The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted. Check that the plug is properly inserted into the
socket.
The socket is not active. Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest
ignition position I.
The socket has been active but is now deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery.
Related information
Passenger compartment interior (p. 586)
Using electrical sockets (p. 590)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
590
Using electrical sockets
12 V sockets can be used for various acces-
sories designed for this, such as music play-
ers, cooler boxes and mobile phones.
High-voltage sockets* can be used for various
accessories designed for this, such as charg-
ers and portable computers.
For the sockets to supply current, the car's
electrical system must be set in the lowest
ignition position I. The sockets are then active
as long as the starter battery level does not
become too low.
If the engine is switched off and the car is
locked, the sockets are deactivated. If the
engine is switched off and the car is not
locked, or is locked with double lock tempo-
rarily deactivated, then the sockets continue to
be active for a further seven minutes.
NOTE
Remember that use of the electrical socket
with the engine switched off entails a risk
of discharging the starter battery, which
can limit functionality.
Accessories that are connected to the elec-
trical sockets may be activated even when
the car's electrical system is disconnected
or if preconditioning is used. For this rea-
son, disconnect the connectors when they
are not in use in order to avoid the starter
battery being discharged.
WARNING
Do not use accessories with large or
heavy connectors - they can damage
the socket or come loose when driving.
Do not use accessories that can cause
interference to the car's radio receiver
or electrical system for example.
Position the accessory so that it is not
at risk of injuring the driver or passen-
gers in the event of heavy braking or
collision.
Keep an eye on connected accessories
as they can generate heat that can
burn passengers or the interior.
Using 12 V sockets
1. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel con-
sole) or fold down the cover (cargo area)
in front of the socket and plug in the
accessory's connector.
2. Unplug the accessory's connector and
refit the blanking plug (tunnel console) or
fold up the cover (cargo area) when the
socket is not in use or if the socket is left
unattended.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A)
per socket.
Using high-voltage sockets
1.
Pull down the socket cover and insert the
accessory's plug.
>
The LED
2
lamp on the socket indicates
the status.
2. Check that the lamp is illuminated with a
steady green light - only then is current
available at the socket.
2
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
591
3. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out
the plug - do not pull on the cable.
Pull up the cover when the socket is not
being used or the socket is left unatten-
ded.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 150 W.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the high-voltage
socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop should be con-
tacted.
WARNING
Only use accessories that are undam-
aged and fault-free. The accessories
must have a CE marking, UL marking
or an equivalent safety marking.
Accessories must be rated for 230 V
and 50 Hz with connectors designed
for the socket.
Never allow sockets, connectors or
accessories to come into contact with
water or other liquids. Do not touch or
use the socket if it appears to be dam-
aged or has come into contact with
water or other liquid.
Do not connect junction sockets,
adapters or extension cables to the
socket as these can override the sock-
et's safety features.
The socket is equipped with a protec-
tive cover, ensure that nothing pro-
trudes in or damages the socket pre-
venting the cover from doing its job.
Do not leave children in the car unsu-
pervised when the socket is active.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can lead to severe or fatal electric shocks.
Related information
Electrical sockets (p. 588)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 586)
Using the glovebox
The glovebox is located on the passenger
side. The printed owner's manual and maps
can be kept in the glovebox, for example.
There is also space for a pen and card holder.
Locking and unlocking the glovebox*
The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car
is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar.
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
with the accompanying key.
||
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
592
The key's designated storage space. The figure is
schematic - the design may vary.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylin-
der.
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.
Pull out the key.
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.
Using the glovebox as a cooled area*
The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g.
drinks or food. The cooling works when the
climate control system is active (i.e. when the
car is set in ignition position II or when the
engine is running).
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
Activating cooling.
Deactivating cooling.
Activate or deactivate the cooling by mov-
ing the control to the end position toward
the passenger compartment/glovebox.
Related information
Passenger compartment interior (p. 586)
Private locking (p. 274)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
593
Sun visors
There are sun visors in the roof in front of the
driver seat and the front seat passenger seat
which can be folded down and angled out to
the side when necessary.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
The mirror lighting* is switched on automati-
cally when the guard is lifted up.
The mirror frame incorporates a holder for e.g.
cards or tickets.
Related information
Passenger compartment interior (p. 586)
Cargo area
Inside the car's cargo area, it is possible to
secure the load so that it stays in place while
driving.
With folding* backrests in the rear seat, the
cargo area can be made more spacious. There
are load retaining eyelets and bag holders
available for holding the load securely in place.
If the car is equipped with a spare wheel then
this is attached on the cargo area floor. The
car's towing eye and puncture repair kit are
stored under the cargo area floor.
Related information
Recommendations for loading (p. 593)
Bag hooks (p. 595)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 596)
Recommendations for loading
There are a number of things that are impor-
tant to bear in mind when loading the car.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a
corresponding weight.
WARNING
The car’s driving properties change
depending on the weight and positioning
of the load.
Loading in the cargo area
Good things to remember when loading:
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-
lets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds)
can, in a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an
item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
||
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
594
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loa-
ded to above the top edge of the door win-
dows. Otherwise, the intended protection
of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed
in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy brak-
ing the load may otherwise shift, causing
injury to the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the park-
ing brake when loading/unloading long
items. Otherwise you may accidentally
knock the gear lever or gear selector with
the load into a drive position - and the car
could then move off.
Increasing the space in the cargo area
To expand the cargo area and simplify loading,
the rear seat's backrest can be lowered
*
. Note
that objects must not prevent the function of
the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of
the rear seat's backrests is folded down.
A through-load hatch* in the rear seat can be
folded down for carrying long and narrow
loads.
Related information
Load retaining eyelets (p. 596)
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat*
(p. 194)
Through-load hatch in the rear seat*
(p. 596)
Roof load and loading on load carriers
(p. 594)
Level control* and shock absorption
(p. 467)
Weights (p. 663)
Roof load and loading on load
carriers
For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers
that Volvo have developed are recommended.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and
in order to achieve the maximum possible
safety during a journey. Volvo's load carriers
are available for purchase at authorised Volvo
retailers.
Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
If the load is longer than the car at the
front, e.g. a canoe or kayak, fit the towing
eye to its front socket and attach the bun-
gee to this.
The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load.
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
595
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha-
racteristics are altered by roof loads.
Follow the car's specifications with regard
to weights and maximum permitted load.
Related information
Recommendations for loading (p. 593)
Weights (p. 663)
Bag hooks
Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and pre-
vent them from overturning and spreading
their contents across the cargo area.
Along the sides
There is a bag hook in the side panel on each
side of the cargo area.
IMPORTANT
The bag hooks may be loaded with a maxi-
mum of 5 kg (11 lbs).
Under the parcel shelf*
Lower the hook from beneath the parcel shelf.
Hang sufficiently deep bags with handles from
the hooks.
Related information
Recommendations for loading (p. 593)
Using the glovebox (p. 591)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
596
Load retaining eyelets
Use the load retaining eyelets to attach
straps in order to anchor items in the cargo
area.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which
protrude may cause injury under violent
braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information
Recommendations for loading (p. 593)
Weights (p. 663)
Through-load hatch in the rear
seat*
The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be
opened to transport long narrow items, e.g.
skis.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
1. In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle
and fold down the hatch.
2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat.
If the private locking function is used then the
through-load hatch must be closed.
Related information
Recommendations for loading (p. 593)
Private locking (p. 274)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 596)
First aid kit*
The first aid kit contains first aid equipment.
Store the first aid kit in an appropriate place in
the cargo area, e.g. in the space on the right-
hand side. The first aid kit has Velcro straps
and can be attached directly to the panel.
Related information
Cargo area (p. 593)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
597
Warning triangle
Use the warning triangle to warn other road
users if the car is stationary in traffic.
Also activate the hazard warning flashers.
Storage spaces
The warning triangle is fitted with two clips on
the inside of the boot lid.
Folding up the warning triangle
Remove the warning triangle's case by
opening both latches.
Remove the warning triangle from the
case, unfold it and put the ends together.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suit-
able place with regard to traffic.
Replace the warning triangle with case on the
inside of the boot lid after use.
Related information
Cargo area (p. 593)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 160)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
600
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-
ble, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Book-
let.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to perform the service and
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the
personnel, special tools and service literature
that can provide the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Service and repair
Service the car regularly. Follow Volvo's rec-
ommended service intervals.
If inspection and repair are required then only
an authorised Volvo workshop may carry out
the work.
WARNING
Do not carry out any repairs of your own on
this vehicle. Electrical cables and/or com-
ponents that have detached must only be
rectified by an authorised workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Charging cable with control unit
IMPORTANT
Do not modify the control unit in any way.
Related information
Car status (p. 602)
Book service and repair (p. 603)
Connection of equipment to the car's
diagnostic socket (p. 40)
Servicing the climate control system
(p. 608)
Brake system maintenance (p. 448)
Engine compartment overview (p. 610)
Data transfer between car and
workshop via Wi-Fi
Volvo's workshops have a specific Wi-Fi net-
work for data transfer between your car and
the workshop. Your workshop visit will be
simpler and more efficient when the transfer
of diagnostic information and software can
take place via the workshop's network.
During a workshop visit, your service techni-
cian may want to connect your car to the
workshop's network via Wi-Fi to perform
fault-tracing and software download. For this
type of communication, the car only connects
to a workshop's network. It is not possible to
connect the car to another Wi-Fi network,
such as at home, in the same way as to a
workshop's network.
Connection with the remote control
key
Connection is normally handled by the service
technician who then uses the remote control
key buttons. That's why it's important to take
a key with buttons with you for the workshop
visit. Press three times on the lock button on
the remote control key to connect the car to
the workshop's network via Wi-Fi.
When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi net-
work, the symbol appears in the centre
display.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
601
WARNING
The car must not be driven when con-
nected to the workshop's networks and
systems.
Related information
Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 601)
Book service and repair (p. 603)
Download Center
Several of the car's systems can be updated
from the centre display with an online car
1
.
The Download Centre app is
started from app view in the
centre display and enables:
searching for and updating system soft-
ware
updating map data for Sensus Navigation*
downloading, updating and uninstalling
apps.
Related information
Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 601)
Downloading apps (p. 503)
Updating apps (p. 504)
Deleting apps (p. 504)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
Managing system updates via the
Download Centre
Functions for online car and infotainment can
be updated via the Download Centre.
Updates can be made one at a time or all at
once.
Searching for update
If an update is available, the
message
New software
updates available See
Download Center is shown
in the centre display's status
bar.
For system updates to be possible, the car
must be connected to the Internet
2
.
Go to Download Centre in the centre dis-
play's app view.
> If no search has been performed since
the last time the infotainment system
was started, a search is performed. No
search is performed if a software instal-
lation is in progress.
A number on
System updates shows
how many updates are available. One
tap shows a list of the updates that can
be installed in the car.
1
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
2
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
602
NOTE
Data download may affect other services
that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the
effect on other services is experienced as
disruptive then the download can be inter-
rupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate
to switch off or interrupt other services.
NOTE
An update can be interrupted when the
ignition is switched off and the car is left.
However, the update does not have to be
completed before the car is left, this is
because the update is resumed the next
time the car is used.
Update all system software
Select Install all at the bottom of the list.
If no list is desired, then the
Install all option
can be selected at
System updates
.
Update individual system software
programs
Select Install for the software required.
Cancelling software download
Tap on X in the activity indicator that has
replaced
Install at the start of the down-
load.
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this
cannot be cancelled.
Deactivating the background search
for software update
Automatic search for software updates is acti-
vated when the car is delivered from the fac-
tory, but this function can be deactivated.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press
System Download Centre.
3.
Deselect
Auto Software Update.
Related information
Download Center (p. 601)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
Car status
The general status of the car can be shown in
the centre display.
The Car Status app is started
from app view in the centre
display and has four tabs:
Messages - status messages
Status - checking engine oil level and
AdBlue level
3
TPMS - checking the tyre pressure
Appointments - appointment information
and car information
4
Related information
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 105)
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 613)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 567)
Book service and repair (p. 603)
Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 604)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
603
Book service and repair
5
This service provides a way to send a booking
request for service and workshop visit
directly in the car.
When it is time for service, and in some cases
when the car is in need of repair, a message
will appear in the driver display and at the top
of the centre display. The service date is deter-
mined by how much time has passed, hours
that the engine has been running, or distance
driven since the last service.
Before the service can be used
Create a Volvo ID and register it to the car.
Select the Volvo retailer you would like to
contact by going to www.volvocars.com
and logging in.
To send and receive booking information,
the car must be connected to the Inter-
net
6
.
Book a service
Fill in a booking request when so required or
when a message indicating that the car needs
a service or repair is shown.
1.
Open the
Car Status app from the app
view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Appointments.
3.
Press
Request appointment.
4.
Make sure that the correct
Volvo ID is
filled in.
5.
Make sure that the desired
Workshop is
filled in.
6.
Fill in the field Tap to write information
to the workshop if there is anything you
would like done during the workshop visit
or any other important information to your
workshop.
7.
Press
Send appointment request.
> You will receive an appointment sug-
gestion via e-mail within a couple of
days
7
.
You will also receive the same commu-
nication via e-mail and when you go to
www.volvocars.com and log in.
In certain markets, once you have sent
the appointment request, the message
that the car needs service is extin-
guished in the driver display.
8.
Tap on
Cancel request to cancel your
request.
The booking enquiry sent from the car
includes car information that facilitates work-
shop planning.
The retailer comes back with a digital booking
proposal. Information about your dealer is also
available in the car so that you can contact
your workshop.
Accept the appointment suggestion
When the car has received an appointment
suggestion, a message will be shown at the
top of the centre display.
3
AdBlue Applies to cars with diesel engines.
4
Applies to certain markets.
5
Applies to certain markets.
6
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
7
This time frame may vary depending on market.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
604
1. Tap the message.
2. If the suggested booking is acceptable,
tap on
Accept. Otherwise, tap on Send
new proposal or Decline.
For certain markets, the system reminds you
of a scheduled appointment time as it
approaches and the navigation system
8
can
also guide you to the workshop when the time
comes.
Related information
Car status (p. 602)
Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 604)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
Volvo ID (p. 28)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
Sending car information to a
workshop
9
It is possible to send information for the car
at any time, e.g. if you book a workshop
appointment and want to help your workshop
by providing them with better data so that
your visit can be planned. Sending car infor-
mation is not the same as booking a service
appointment.
1.
Open the
Car Status app from the app
view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Appointments.
3.
Press
Send car data.
> A message that vehicle data are being
sent is shown at the top of the centre
display. You can cancel data transmis-
sion by tapping the X in the activity
indicator.
The information is sent via the car's
Internet connection
10
.
This car information can be accessed by any
retailer if they have the car's identification
number (VIN
11
).
Car information content
The data sent is the last information saved (the
last time the car was running) and includes
information in the following areas:
service requirement
time since last service
function status
fluid levels
meter reading
the car's vehicle identification number
(VIN
11
)
the car's software version
the car's diagnostics data.
Related information
Book service and repair (p. 603)
Car status (p. 602)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 113)
Internet-connected car* (p. 535)
8
Applies to Sensus Navigation*.
9
Applies to certain markets.
10
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
11
Vehicle Identification Number.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
605
Raise the car
When raising the car, it is important that the
jack is fitted in the intended points on the
car's underbody.
The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).
NOTE
Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If
the car is equipped with air suspension,
this must be disabled before the car is
raised.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack is selected other than the one recom-
mended by Volvo, follow the instructions
supplied with the equipment.
The normal car jack is only designed for
occasional, short-term use, such as when
changing a wheel after a puncture. If the
car is to be jacked up more often, or for a
longer time than is required just to change
a wheel, use of a garage jack is recom-
mended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
606
WARNING
Apply the parking brake and set the
gear selector in Park position (P).
Chock the wheels standing on the
ground using solid wood blocks or
large stones.
Check that the jack is not damaged,
that the threads are thoroughly lubri-
cated and that it is free from dirt.
Check that the jack is resting on a firm,
level surface that is not slippery and is
not slanted.
The jack must be correctly attached in
the jack's bracket.
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the
jack and the car's jacking point.
Passengers must leave the car when it
is raised on the jack.
If a wheel must be changed in a traf-
ficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
Never crawl under the car or reach
under with a part of your body when it
is raised on a jack.
WARNING
If the car is raised using a workshop jack,
this must be placed beneath one of the
four jacking points. Take care to position
the workshop jack so that the car cannot
slip off. Make sure that the jack plate is fit-
ted with a rubber guard so that the car
remains stable and is not damaged. Always
use axle stands or similar.
When not in use, the jack* should be stored in
its stowage space under the cargo area floor.
Read through all instructions before begin-
ning. Take out the tools needed before jacking
up the car.
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate
the hazard warning lights if, for example, a
tyre is being changed in a trafficked loca-
tion.
2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear
position P, or engage first gear if the car
has a manual gearbox.
If the car is equipped with
Leveling
Control*, this must be disabled before the
car is raised.
3. Chock in front of and behind the wheels
that remain on the ground. Use, for exam-
ple, heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
4. Position the jack or the lift arms at the
designated spots of the car's undercar-
riage. The triangle markings in the plastic
cover indicate the locations of the jacking/
lifting points. There are two jacking points
on each side of the car. There is a recess
for the jack at each point.
5. Position the jack on level, firm and non-
slippery ground under the jacking point
that will be used.
6. Crank up until it is correctly aligned and so
that it makes contact with the car's jack-
ing point. Check that the head of the jack
(or lifting arms at a workshop) is correctly
positioned in the jacking point so that the
bump in the centre of the head fits into the
jacking point hole, and check that the
base of the jack is positioned vertically
below the jacking point.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
607
7. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far
away from the side of the car as possible,
at which point the jack's arms are perpen-
dicular to the direction of the car.
8. Raise the car high enough to perform the
intended measure.
Related information
Jack* (p. 574)
Wheel bolts (p. 574)
Tool kit (p. 573)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
608
Servicing the climate control
system
The air conditioning system must only be
serviced and repaired by an authorised work-
shop.
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluores-
cent tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be
used during leak detection.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pres-
surised refrigerant R134a. This system
must only be serviced and repaired by an
authorised workshop.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pres-
surised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance
with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for
Safe Service and Containment of Refriger-
ants Used in Mobile AC System), service
and repair of the refrigerant system must
only be performed by trained and certified
technicians in order to ensure the safety of
the system.
Related information
Volvo service programme (p. 600)
Head up display when replacing
the windscreen*
Cars with head-up display are equipped with
a special type of windscreen that meets the
requirements for displaying the projected
image.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop when replacing
the windscreen. The correct version of the
windscreen must be fitted in order that the
head-up display's graphics shall be displayed
correctly.
Related information
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Cleaning the head up display* (p. 640)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
609
Opening and closing the bonnet
The bonnet can be opened using the handle
in the passenger compartment and a handle
under the bonnet.
Open the bonnet
Pull the handle near the foot pedals to
release the bonnet from its fully closed
position.
Sweep from left to right in the opening
under the bonnet, move the handle up and
to the side to release the bonnet from the
bonnet lock's catch and lift the bonnet.
Warning - bonnet not closed
When the bonnet is released, a
warning symbol and graphics in the
driver display will light up and an
acoustic reminder will sound. If the
car starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal
will repeat.
NOTE
If the warning symbol is lit or the warning
signal is heard despite the bonnet being
closed properly, contact an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Close the bonnet
1. Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall
from its own weight.
2. When the bonnet stops against the lock
catch, push the bonnet to close it com-
pletely.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing
path under the bonnet is not obstructed,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed. The bonnet must engage at both
sides audibly.
Bonnet not completely closed.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
610
Bonnet completely closed.
WARNING
Never drive with an open
bonnet!
If this symbol is visible –
or something else indi-
cates that the bonnet is
not fully closed while driv-
ing – stop immediately
and close it properly.
Related information
Engine compartment overview (p. 610)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 51)
Engine compartment overview
The overview shows some service-related
components.
Some of the components included in the car's
electric drive system are located under the
bonnet. Exercise caution in this area and only
touch anything that is related to normal main-
tenance.
WARNING
Orange-coloured cables must only be han-
dled by qualified personnel.
WARNING
Several components in the car work with
high-voltage current that could be danger-
ous in the event of incorrect intervention.
Do not touch anything that is not
clearly described in the owner's man-
ual.
Exercise caution when checking/refill-
ing fluids in the engine compartment.
The appearance of the engine compartment may dif-
fer depending on model and engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the
driver's side)
Washer fluid filler pipe
Central electrical unit
Air filter
Engine oil filler pipe
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
611
Location of warning decal for the engine compart-
ment. The appearance of the engine compartment
may differ depending on model and engine variant.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact rep-
licas of those in the car. They are included
to show their approximate appearance and
locations in the car. The information that
applies to your particular car can be found
on the decal on the car.
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment,
behind the radiator) may start or continue
to operate automatically for up to approx.
6 minutes after the engine has been
switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. There is a risk of fire if the
engine is hot.
WARNING
The ignition system works at a very high
and hazardous voltage. The car's electrical
system must always be in ignition position
0 when work is being performed in the
engine compartment.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition
coil when the car's electrical system is in
ignition position II or when the engine is
hot.
Related information
Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 609)
Filling washer fluid (p. 654)
Topping up coolant (p. 614)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 621)
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 613)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Engine oil
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals and
warranty can be applied.
Volvo recommends:
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
612
If the engine oil cannot be checked on a regu-
lar basis and the level falls too low, there is a
risk that this will cause serious damage to the
engine.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact rep-
licas of those in the car. They are included
to show their approximate appearance and
locations in the car. The information that
applies to your particular car can be found
on the decal on the car.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise there is a risk of the service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact of the car being
affected.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and
viscosity is not used, engine related com-
ponents may become damaged. Volvo dis-
claims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Symbols for low oil level
Volvo uses different systems to warn about
the oil level if it is too low/high, or in the event
of low oil pressure. The driver display's warn-
ing symbol for low oil pressure is used for the
oil pressure sensor . For oil level sensor,
the driver is informed via the driver display's
warning symbol
and display texts. Cer-
tain variants have both systems. Contact a
Volvo dealer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord-
ance with the intervals specified in the Service
and Warranty Booklet. Using oil of a higher
than specified grade is permitted. If the car is
driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recom-
mends using an oil of a higher grade than the
one specified.
Related information
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 613)
Engine oil – specifications (p. 667)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 669)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 23)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
613
Checking and filling with engine oil
The oil level is detected with the electronic oil
level sensor.
See oil level in the centre display
Example of graphic for oil level in the centre display
The oil level is visualised using the electronic
oil level gauge in the centre display when the
car has been started. The oil level should be
checked regularly.
1.
Open the
Car Status app from the app
view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Status to show the oil level.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The car
must have been driven approx. 30 km
(approx. 20 miles) and have been station-
ary for 5 minutes with the engine switched
off and on level ground before the oil level
indication is correct.
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
level (time after engine shutdown, the car's
inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are
not met, then the message
No value
available will be shown in the centre dis-
play. This does not mean that there is
something wrong in the car's systems.
IMPORTANT
If this symbol is shown then the
oil pressure may be too low. Stop
the car as quickly as possible and
have the car recovered to a work-
shop – an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Fill the engine oil
Filler pipe
12
,
13
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up
between service intervals. No action with
regard to engine oil level needs to be taken
until a message is shown in the driver display.
WARNING
If the Engine oil level Service required
message is shown, visit a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended. The oil level may be too high.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani-
fold due to the risk of fire.
12
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
13
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
614
IMPORTANT
If the Engine oil level low Refill 1 litre
message is shown, fill only with the speci-
fied volume, e.g. 1 litre (1 quart).
Related information
Engine oil (p. 611)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 669)
Engine oil – specifications (p. 667)
Ignition positions (p. 442)
Car status (p. 602)
Topping up coolant
The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature.
The heat that is transferred from the engine
to the coolant can be used to heat the pas-
senger compartment.
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. Never top up
with water only. The risk of freezing increases
with both too little and too much coolant con-
centrate.
If there is coolant under the car, if there is
coolant smoke, or if more than 2 litres (approx.
2 quarts) have been filled, always call for
recovery to avoid the risk of engine damage
due to a defective cooling system when
attempting to start the car.
WARNING
The coolant may be very hot. Never open
the cap when the coolant is hot. If a top-up
is required, unscrew the expansion tank
cap slowly to allow any overpressure to
disappear.
Coolant expansion tank
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
615
Open the lid on the plastic cover.
Screw off the cap and top up with coolant
if necessary. The coolant level must not
exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the
expansion tank.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
IMPORTANT
Harmful if ingested. May cause organ
(kidney) damage.
Use ready-mixed coolant as recom-
mended by Volvo. If concentrated liq-
uid is used, make sure that the ratio is
50 % coolant to 50 % water of an
approved quality.
Do not mix different coolants.
Only new coolant should be used
when replacing major cooling system
components to ensure the system has
sufficient corrosion protection.
The engine must only be run with a
well-filled cooling system. Otherwise,
temperatures that are too high may
occur resulting in the risk of damage
(cracks) in the cylinder head.
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
Related information
Engine compartment overview (p. 610)
Coolant – specifications (p. 670)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
616
Starter battery
The starter battery is used to start up the
electrical system and drive electrical equip-
ment in the car. The hybrid battery is used
when the internal combustion engine is
started.
The electrical system is single-pole and uses
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The starter battery is a 12 V AGM battery
(Absorbed Glass Mat), designed for regenera-
tive charging, and to support the functionality
of the car's different systems.
The service life and function of the starter bat-
tery is influenced by factors such as the num-
ber of starts, discharging, driving style, driving
conditions, climatic conditions etc.
Never disconnect the starter battery when
the engine is running.
Check that the cables to the starter bat-
tery are correctly connected and properly
tightened.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is con-
nected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
Never smoke near the battery.
The service life and capacity of the
starter battery
The service life of the battery is affected by
several factors, including factors such as the
number of starts, discharging, driving style,
driving conditions, climatic conditions, etc.
Battery starting capacity decreases gradually
with time and therefore needs to be recharged
if the car is not used for a long time or when it
is only driven short distances. Extreme cold
further limits starting capacity. If the starter
battery is discharged a large number of times,
it will negatively affect the service life.
In order to maintain the starter battery in good
condition, it is recommended that there is at
least 15 minutes driving/week or that the bat-
tery is connected to a battery charger with
automatic trickle charging. A starter battery
that is kept fully charged has a maximum serv-
ice life.
Location
The starter battery is located in the cargo area.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function
must be reset to work properly. A reset
must take place for pinch protection to
work.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
617
IMPORTANT
On certain models, the battery is attached
with a retaining strap. Make sure the
retaining strap is properly tightened.
Specifications for starter battery
Battery type H8 AGM
Voltage (V) 12
Cold start capacity
A
- CCA
B
(A)
850
Size, L×B×H 353×175×190 mm (13.9×6.9×7.5 inches)
Capacity (Ah) 95
A
According to EN standard.
B
Cold Cranking Amperes.
Volvo recommends entrusting battery replace-
ment to an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, make sure you
replace it with a battery with the same
size, cold starting capacity and type as the
original battery (see the decal on the bat-
tery).
Related information
Symbols on the batteries (p. 618)
Hybrid battery (p. 618)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 481)
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 167)
Battery recycle (p. 619)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
618
Hybrid battery
The car is equipped with a hybrid battery for
electric motor operation - a maintenance-free
rechargeable Lithium-ion type battery.
NOTE
The car cannot be started if the hybrid bat-
tery is discharged.
If both the starter battery and the hybrid bat-
tery are discharged then both batteries must
be charged. In such a case, charging only the
hybrid battery is not possible. In order for the
hybrid battery to be charged, the starter bat-
tery must have a certain state of charge.
WARNING
The hybrid battery must only be replaced
by a workshop - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
The service life and capacity of the
hybrid battery
The capacity of the hybrid battery diminishes
with age and use, which may result in
increased use of the internal combustion
engine and, as a consequence, reduced fuel
economy and reduced range during electric
operation.
Coolant
The hybrid battery's cooling system has a sep-
arate expansion tank.
IMPORTANT
The hybrid battery's coolant must only be
topped up by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Specifications for hybrid battery
Type: Lithium-ion
Total amount of energy: 11.6 kWh.
Related information
Symbols on the batteries (p. 618)
Starter battery (p. 616)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 419)
Battery recycle (p. 619)
Symbols on the batteries
There are information and warning symbols
on the batteries.
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual for the
car.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
The battery contains cor-
rosive acid.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
619
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Risk of explosion.
Must be taken for recy-
cling.
Related information
Starter battery (p. 616)
Hybrid battery (p. 618)
Battery recycle (p. 619)
Battery recycle
A used starter battery must be recycled in an
environmentally sound manner.
Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty
about how this type of waste should be dis-
carded - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
Related information
Starter battery (p. 616)
Hybrid battery (p. 618)
Symbols on the batteries (p. 618)
Fuses and central electrical units
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to
protect the car's electrical system from dam-
age by short circuiting or overloading.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi-
cant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
WARNING
Orange-coloured cables must only be han-
dled by qualified personnel.
WARNING
Several components in the car work with
high-voltage current that could be danger-
ous in the event of incorrect intervention.
Do not touch anything that is not clearly
described in the owner's manual for the
car.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault
in the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting
an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
620
Location of central electrical units
The figure is schematic - appearance may vary
depending on car model.
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
electrical units under the glovebox change
sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Cargo area
Related information
Replacing a fuse (p. 620)
Fuses in cargo area (p. 633)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 621)
Fuses under glovebox (p. 628)
Replacing a fuse
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to
protect the car's electrical system from dam-
age by short circuiting or overloading.
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the
fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new
fuse of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi-
cant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
WARNING
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop
about the fuses not mentioned in the
owner's manual. If replacing the fuse is not
performed correctly, it can cause serious
damage to the electrical systems.
Related information
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 619)
Fuses in cargo area (p. 633)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 621)
Fuses under glovebox (p. 628)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
621
Fuses in engine compartment
Fuses in the engine compartment protect
engine and brake functions, amongst other
things.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
622
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
The fuse box also provides space for several
spare fuses.
Positions
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
Function Ampere Type
Micro
Micro
Micro
Control module for actuator for engagement/change of automatic gearbox gear positions 5 Micro
Control module for the high-voltage heater of the internal combustion engine's coolant 5 Micro
Control module for air conditioning; Shut-off valve for heat exchanger; Shut-off valve for coolant that passes through the
climate control system
5 Micro
Control module for hybrid battery; High voltage converter for combined high-voltage generator/starter motor with volt-
age converter 500 V12 V
5 Micro
Micro
Converter for control of the supply to the rear axle's electric motor 10 Micro
Control module for hybrid battery; High voltage converter for combined high-voltage generator/starter motor with volt-
age converter 500 V12 V
10 Micro
Charging unit 5 Micro
Shut-off valve for the hybrid battery's coolant; Coolant pump 1 for hybrid battery 15 Micro
Coolant pump for electric drive system 15 Micro
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
623
Function Ampere Type
Cooling fan for hybrid components 25
MCase
A
MCase
A
MCase
A
MCase
A
Calculation unit 5 Micro
Micro
Micro
Micro
Micro
Micro
12 V socket in tunnel console, front 15 Micro
12 V socket in tunnel console, by legroom for second seat row 15 Micro
12 V socket in cargo area*
USB ports in head restraints right/left
15 Micro
Micro
Left-hand headlamp, LED
B
15 Micro
Right-hand headlamp, LED
B
15 Micro
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
624
Function Ampere Type
Micro
Heated windscreen* left-hand side
Shunt
MCase
A
Heated windscreen* left-hand side
40
MCase
A
Headlamp washers*
25
MCase
A
Windscreen washers 25
MCase
A
Micro
Horn 20 Micro
Siren*
5 Micro
Control module for brake system (valves, parking brake) 30
MCase
A
Windscreen wipers 30
MCase
A
MCase
A
Heated windscreen* right-hand side
40
MCase
A
Parking heater*
20
MCase
A
MCase
A
MCase
A
Heated windscreen* right-hand side
Shunt
MCase
A
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
625
Function Ampere Type
Supplied when the ignition is switched on: Engine control module; Transmission components; Electric steering servo;
Central electronic module
5 Micro
Exterior car noise (certain markets) 5 Micro
Right-hand headlamp, LED
B
15 Micro
Alcohol lock*
5 Micro
Micro
Micro
Airbags; Passenger weight sensor 5 Micro
Left-hand headlamp, LED
B
15 Micro
Accelerator pedal sensor 5 Micro
Transmission control module; Control module for gear selector 15 Micro
Engine Control Module (ECM) 5 Micro
Micro
Micro
Micro
Micro
Engine control module; Actuator; Throttle unit; Valve for turbocharger 20 Micro
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
626
Function Ampere Type
Solenoids; Valves; Overpressure connection 10 Micro
Vacuum regulators; Valve for electric bypass: Valve for ventilation 7,5 Micro
Control unit, spoiler damper; Control unit, radiator damper 5 Micro
Micro
Lambda probe, front and rear 15 Micro
Solenoid for engine oil pump; Solenoid clutch AC; Lambda probe, front, centre and rear 15 Micro
Micro
Engine Control Module (ECM) 20 Micro
Ignition coils; Spark plugs 15 Micro
MCase
A
MCase
A
Control module for transmission fluid pump 30
MCase
A
MCase
A
Actuator for transmission 25
MCase
A
MCase
A
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
627
Function Ampere Type
MCase
A
MCase
A
A
This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
B
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Related information
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 619)
Replacing a fuse (p. 620)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
628
Fuses under glovebox
Fuses under the glovebox protect, amongst
other things, electrical sockets, displays and
door modules.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
629
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment
also provides space for several spare fuses.
Positions
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
Function Ampere Type
Micro
MCase
A
Micro
Movement detector*
5 Micro
Media player 5 Micro
Driver display 5 Micro
Keypad in centre console 5 Micro
Sun sensor 5 Micro
Micro
Micro
Steering wheel module 5 Micro
Module for start knob and for parking brake control 5 Micro
Steering wheel module for heated steering wheel*
15 Micro
Micro
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
630
Function Ampere Type
Micro
Micro
Micro
Control module for climate control system 10 Micro
Steering lock 7,5 Micro
Diagnostic socket OBDII 10 Micro
Centre display 5 Micro
Fan module for climate control system, front 40
MCase
A
USB HUB 5 Micro
Controls lighting; Interior lighting; Dimming of interior rearview mirror*; Rain and light sensor*; Keypad in tunnel con-
sole, by legroom for rear seat*; Power front seats*; Control panels in rear doors; Fan module for climate control left/right
7,5 Micro
Control module for driver support functions 5 Micro
Panoramic roof with sun blind*
20 Micro
Head-up display*
5 Micro
Passenger compartment lighting 5 Micro
Micro
Display in roof console (Seatbelt reminder/Indicator for airbag on the front passenger seat) 5 Micro
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
631
Function Ampere Type
Micro
Micro
Micro
Micro
Control module for online car; Control module for Volvo On Call 5 Micro
Micro
Audio control device (amplifier) 40
MCase
A
MCase
A
Module for multi-band antenna 5 Micro
Modules for seat comfort (massage) front*
5 Micro
Alcohol lock*
5 Micro
Micro
Control module for fuel pump 15 Micro
Relay coils in central electrical unit in engine compartment; Relay coil for transmission fluid pump 5 Micro
Opening the boot lid/tailgate with foot motion*
5 Micro
Seat heating, driver's side front 15 Micro
Seat heating, passenger side front 15 Micro
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
632
Function Ampere Type
Coolant pump 7,5 Micro
Micro
Power driver's seat*
20 Micro
Control module for suspension (active chassis)*
20 Micro
Micro
Sensus control module 10 Micro
MCase
A
Micro
Electrically operated front passenger seat*
20 Micro
Micro
TV* (certain markets)
5 Micro
Primary fuse for fuses 52, 53, 57 and 58 15 Micro
A
This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 619)
Replacing a fuse (p. 620)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
633
Fuses in cargo area
Fuses in the cargo area protect, amongst
other things, power seats*, airbags and seat-
belt tensioners.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
634
The central electrical unit is located on the right-hand side.
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment
also provides space for several spare fuses.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
635
Positions
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
Function Ampere Type
Rear window defroster 30
MCase
A
MCase
A
Compressor for air suspension*
40
MCase
A
Lock motor for backrest on rear right-hand side 15
MCase
A
MCase
A
Lock motor for backrest on rear left-hand side 15
MCase
A
Door module right-hand side rear
B
20
MCase
A
Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 30
MCase
A
MCase
A
Electrically operated front passenger seat*
Door module right-hand side front
20
MCase
A
Towbar control module*
40
MCase
A
Seatbelt pretensioner module, right-hand side 40
MCase
A
Internal relay coils 5 Micro
Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 15 Micro
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
636
Function Ampere Type
Door module left-hand side rear 20 Micro
Alcohol lock*, USB hub/accessory port
5 Micro
Micro
Towbar control module*
25
MCase
A
Accessory module 40
Power driver seat*
Door module left-hand side front
20
MCase
A
Seatbelt pretensioner module, left-hand side 40
MCase
A
Parking camera*
5 Micro
Micro
Micro
Micro
Micro
Micro
Micro
Seat heating left-hand side rear*
15 Micro
Micro
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
637
Function Ampere Type
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*: control module, exterior reversing sound
5 Micro
Micro
Seatbelt pretensioner modules 5 Micro
Actuator for exhaust gases (petrol, certain engine variants) 5 Micro
Micro
All Wheel Drive (AWD) control module*
15 Micro
Seat heating right-hand side rear*
15 Micro
MCase
A
A
This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
B
Applicable only to cars with hybrid motors or a 48V support battery.
Related information
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 619)
Replacing a fuse (p. 620)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
638
Bulb replacement
This car is equipped only with LED
15
lamps
and therefore no replaceable bulbs. Contact a
workshop
14
if a fault occurs in the lighting.
If a fault occurs in LED
15
lamps, the entire
lamp unit usually must be replaced.
NOTE
For information about bulbs not covered in
this Owner's Manual, contact a Volvo
dealer or an authorised Volvo workshop.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and
rear lamps may temporarily have conden-
sation on the inside of the lens. This is nor-
mal, all exterior lighting is designed to
withstand this. Condensation is normally
vented out of the lamp housing when the
lamp has been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the interior
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and
deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is
important prior to using cleaning agents.
IMPORTANT
Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.
dark jeans and suede garments) may
stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
important to clean and treat these
parts of the upholstery as soon as pos-
sible.
Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit
or concentrated alcohol to clean the
interior, since this may damage the
upholstery as well as other interior
materials.
Never spray the cleaning agent directly
onto components that have electrical
buttons and controls. Wipe them
instead using a moistened cloth con-
taining the cleaning agent.
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage
the fabric upholstery.
Only use cleaning agents on the type
of material for which they were
intended.
Related information
Cleaning the centre display (p. 639)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 640)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 641)
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 642)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 643)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 643)
15
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
14
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
639
Cleaning the centre display
Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect
the centre display's performance and reada-
bility. Clean the screen frequently with a
microfibre cloth.
1. Turn off the centre display with a long
press on the home button.
2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth
supplied or use another microfibre cloth of
equivalent quality. Wipe the screen with a
clean and dry microfibre cloth using small
circular movements. If necessary, lightly
moisten the microfibre cloth with clean
water.
3. Activate the display with a short press on
the home button.
IMPORTANT
The microfibre cloth used to clean the cen-
tre display must be free from sand and dirt.
IMPORTANT
When cleaning the centre display, only use
gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pres-
sure can damage the screen.
IMPORTANT
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemi-
cals directly on the centre display. Do not
use window cleaning agent, other cleaning
agents, aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol,
ammonia or cleaning agent containing
abrasive.
Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or
tissue paper, since they may scratch the
centre display.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 638)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 640)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 641)
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 642)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 643)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 643)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
640
Cleaning the head up display*
Gently wipe the display's cover glass with a
clean and dry microfibre cloth. If necessary,
lightly moisten the microfibre cloth.
Never use strong stain removers. A special
cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers
can be used for more difficult cleaning.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the head-up
display* (p. 142)
Head-up display* (p. 140)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and
headlining
It is recommended to use a fabric cleaning
agent when cleaning textile fabric. Clean if
necessary, and treat stains straight away.
IMPORTANT
Never scrape or rub a stain since this may
damage the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Never use stain removing agent or strong
solvents, they could damage the uphols-
tery.
Cleaning fabric upholstery
1. Start by vacuum cleaning the upholstery.
2. Follow the instructions for the fabric
cleaning agent.
3. When cleaning fabric, a spray extraction
cleaner is recommended for suction of the
washing fluid and subsequent water rins-
ing.
IMPORTANT
Some coloured clothing (such as jeans and
suede garments) may stain the fabric
upholstery. Heavy stains such as oil may
be difficult to remove.
IMPORTANT
Always clean the entire upholstery, even
there are only individual stains. This is to
avoid water rings.
NOTE
Do not remove the upholstery for cleaning.
Cleaning the headlining
1. Brush the headlining carefully using a soft
brush.
2. Follow the instructions for the fabric
cleaning agent.
3. Then use a soft and lint-free cloth to wipe
the headlining.
IMPORTANT
Careless cleaning can damage the headlin-
ing.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 638)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 639)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 641)
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 642)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
641
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 643)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 643)
Cleaning the seatbelts
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and
deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is
important prior to using cleaning agents.
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo
retailers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before
allowing it to retract.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 638)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 639)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 640)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 641)
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 642)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 643)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 643)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and
deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is
important prior to using cleaning agents.
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Each
inlay mat is secured with pins.
1. Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of
the inlay mat at each pin and lifting the
mat straight up.
2. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and
dirt.
NOTE
The inlay mats must not be swung around
without care or hit against objects to
remove dirt since this can crack the inlay
mats.
3. A special textile cleaner is recommended
for stains on the floor mat after vacuum-
ing. Use cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
4. After cleaning, fit the inlay mat in place by
pressing it in at each pin.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
642
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
the pins so that it does not get caught
adjacent to and under the pedals.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 638)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 639)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 640)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641)
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 642)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 643)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 643)
Cleaning leather upholstery*
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and
deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is
important prior to using cleaning agents.
Volvo's leather upholstery* is treated to pre-
serve its original appearance.
Leather upholstery* is a natural product that
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
time. Regular cleaning and treatment are
required in order that the properties and col-
ours of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo
offers a comprehensive product, Volvo Leather
Care KitWipes, for cleaning and treatment of
leather upholstery. The protective outer layer
of the leather is preserved when this is used
according to the instructions.
To achieve results that are as good as possi-
ble, Volvo recommends cleaning and applica-
tion of the protective cream one to four times
per year (or more frequently if required). Volvo
Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available from Volvo
dealers.
Cleaning the leather upholstery
1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp
sponge and squeeze until a foam is cre-
ated.
2. Use the sponge on the stain in a circular
motion.
3. Thoroughly dampen the stain using the
sponge, allow the sponge to absorb the
stain without scrubbing.
4. Wipe the stain with a soft cloth and allow
the leather to dry thoroughly.
Protecting the leather upholstery
1. Apply a small amount of leather protective
agent to a cloth and then apply it to the
leather in light circular motions.
2. Allow to dry for about 20 minutes.
> Protecting the leather upholstery
makes it more resistant to the stresses
from the sun's UV radiation.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 638)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 639)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 640)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 641)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 643)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 643)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
643
Cleaning the leather steering
wheel
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and
deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is
important prior to using cleaning agents.
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plastic.
We recommend Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes
for cleaning the leather steering wheel. First
remove dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or
cloth.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects, e.g. rings, can damage the
leather on the steering wheel.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 638)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 639)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 640)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 641)
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 642)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 643)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood parts
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and
deal with stains straight away.
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
moistened with water, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers, either.
IMPORTANT
Do not use solvent that contains alcohol
when cleaning the glass for the driver dis-
play.
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces are
easily scratched. Clean these surfaces with
a clean, dry microfibre cloth using small,
circular motions. If needed, dampen the
microfibre cloth with a little clean water.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 638)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 639)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 640)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 641)
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 642)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 643)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
644
Cleaning the exterior
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is eas-
ier to clean since the dirt does not attach as
firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches
and keeps the car fresh. Perform the cleaning
in a car wash with oil separator. Use car
shampoo that is recommended by Volvo.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 644)
Polishing and waxing (p. 644)
Handwashing (p. 645)
Automatic car wash (p. 646)
High-pressure washing (p. 648)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 648)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 649)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 650)
Rustproofing (p. 650)
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection. The
car does not need to be polished until it is at
least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight, the surface being
polished should be a maximum of 45 °C
(113 °F).
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before
you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off
asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or
white spirit. More stubborn stains can be
removed using fine rubbing paste
designed for car paintwork. Use cleaning
agent recommended by Volvo.
Polish first with a polish and then wax
with liquid or solid wax. Follow the
instructions on the packaging carefully.
Many preparations contain both polish
and wax.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rub-
ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec-
essary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could
wear away or damage the glossy surface
layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive
must not be used.
IMPORTANT
Use cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo. Other treatment such as preserving,
sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar
could damage the paintwork. Paintwork
damage caused by such treatments is not
covered by Volvo warranty.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 644)
Handwashing (p. 645)
Automatic car wash (p. 646)
High-pressure washing (p. 648)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 648)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 649)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
645
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 650)
Rustproofing (p. 650)
Handwashing
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is eas-
ier to clean since the dirt does not attach as
firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches
and keeps the car fresh. Carry out cleaning in
a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use
car shampoo. Use cleaning agents and car
care products recommended by Volvo.
Important points to remember when
handwashing the car
Avoid washing the car in direct sunlight.
This can cause the detergent or wax to dry
and have an abrasive effect.
Remove bird droppings from the paint-
work as soon as possible. They contain
substances that damage and discolour
paintwork very quickly. For example, use
soft paper or sponge soaked in plenty of
water. An authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended for the removal of any dis-
colouration.
Wash the underbody, including wheel
housings and bumpers.
Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
has been removed so as to reduce the risk
of scratches from washing. Do not spray
directly onto the locks.
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case,
the surfaces must not be hot from the sun.
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
soap solution or car shampoo.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing
drops of water to dry in strong sunlight,
you reduce the risk of water drying stains
which may need to be polished out.
After the car has been washed, tar from
asphalt may remain. Use tar remover that
is recommended by Volvo to get rid of the
last spots.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional-
ity. Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuel-
ling.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents
but use water and a non-scratching
sponge instead.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
646
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and
rear lamps may temporarily have conden-
sation on the inside of the lens. This is nor-
mal, all exterior lighting is designed to
withstand this. Condensation is normally
vented out of the lamp housing when the
lamp has been switched on for a time.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the panoramic roof*
and sun visor are closed before wash-
ing the car.
Never use polishing agent with abra-
sive properties on the panoramic roof.
Never use wax on the rubber mould-
ings around the panoramic roof.
IMPORTANT
Remember to remove dirt from the drain
holes in the doors and in the sills after
washing the car.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 644)
Polishing and waxing (p. 644)
Automatic car wash (p. 646)
High-pressure washing (p. 648)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 648)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 649)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 650)
Rustproofing (p. 650)
Automatic parking brake activation setting
(p. 450)
Automatic car wash
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty,
the more difficult it will be to get it com-
pletely clean and there is a risk of scratching
the paintwork.
Washing the car in an automatic car wash is a
simple and quick way of getting it clean, but it
cannot reach everywhere. Volvo recommends
washing your car by hand or using an auto-
matic car wash supplemented with washing
by hand.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the car is not
washed in an automatic car wash during
the first few months (this is because the
paintwork has not fully hardened).
IMPORTANT
Before driving the car into an automatic car
wash, deactivate the functions for auto-
matic braking when stationary and auto-
matic parking brake application. If these
functions are not deactivated, the brake
system will jam when the car is stationary
and the car will not be able to move.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
647
IMPORTANT
For car washes where the car is pulled for-
ward with rolling wheels, the following
applies:
1. Before washing the car, make sure that
the automatic rain sensor is deacti-
vated, otherwise there is the risk of it
starting and damaging the wiper arms.
2. Make sure that the door mirrors are
retracted, any auxiliary lamps secured,
antennas retracted or removed, other-
wise they risk being damaged by the
automatic car wash.
3. Drive into the car wash.
4. Switch off the "Automatic braking at
standstill" function using the button
on the tunnel console.
5. Switch off the "Automatic parking
brake application" function via the top
view of the centre display.
6. Switch off the engine by turning the
start knob in the tunnel console clock-
wise. Hold the knob in place for at
least 2 seconds.
The car is ready for the car wash.
IMPORTANT
The system will automatically switch to P
mode unless the above step is followed.
The wheels are locked in P mode, which
they should not be when putting the car
through an automatic car wash.
NOTE
Be aware that if the car has the keyless
locking and unlocking function*, the car
can be locked/unlocked when the car is
being washed if the remote control key is
within range.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 644)
Polishing and waxing (p. 644)
Handwashing (p. 645)
High-pressure washing (p. 648)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 648)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 649)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 650)
Rustproofing (p. 650)
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 451)
Automatic parking brake activation setting
(p. 450)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 267)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
648
High-pressure washing
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty,
the more difficult it will be to get it com-
pletely clean and there is a risk of scratching
the paintwork. Wash the car in a car wash
with oil separator. Use car shampoo that is
recommended by Volvo.
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm
(13 in.) to the surface of the car. Do not spray
directly onto the locks.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 644)
Polishing and waxing (p. 644)
Handwashing (p. 645)
Automatic car wash (p. 646)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 648)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 649)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 650)
Rustproofing (p. 650)
Cleaning the wiper blades
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty,
the more difficult it will be to get it com-
pletely clean and there is a risk of scratching
the paintwork. Wash the car in a car wash
with oil separator. Use car shampoo that is
recommended by Volvo.
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service
position.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen
regularly with a lukewarm soap solution or
car shampoo. Do not use any strong sol-
vents.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 644)
Polishing and waxing (p. 644)
Handwashing (p. 645)
Automatic car wash (p. 646)
High-pressure washing (p. 648)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 649)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 650)
Rustproofing (p. 650)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
649
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber
and trim components
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty,
the more difficult it will be to get it com-
pletely clean and there is a risk of scratching
the paintwork. Use car shampoo that is rec-
ommended by Volvo.
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings.
When using such a cleaning agent the instruc-
tions must be followed carefully.
Avoid washing the car with detergent with a
pH value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This can
cause discolouration of anodised aluminium
components*, as illustrated. We advise
against use of abrasive polishing agents, as
illustrated.
Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent
with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rub-
ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec-
essary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could
wear away or damage the glossy surface
layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive
must not be used.
IMPORTANT
Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent
with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher
than 11.5. This may result in discolouration
of anodised aluminium parts such as roof
rack and around the side windows.
Never use metal polishing agent on ano-
dised aluminium parts, this can result in
discolouration and destroy the surface
treatment.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 644)
Polishing and waxing (p. 644)
Handwashing (p. 645)
Automatic car wash (p. 646)
High-pressure washing (p. 648)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 648)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 650)
Rustproofing (p. 650)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
650
Cleaning wheel rims
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty,
the more difficult it will be to get it com-
pletely clean and there is a risk of scratching
the paintwork. Perform the cleaning in a car
wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo
that is recommended by Volvo.
Use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
aluminium rims.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 644)
Polishing and waxing (p. 644)
Handwashing (p. 645)
Automatic car wash (p. 646)
High-pressure washing (p. 648)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 649)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 650)
Rustproofing (p. 650)
Rustproofing
The car has protection against corrosion.
Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists
of metallic protective coatings on the sheet
metal, a high-quality painting process, corro-
sion-protected and minimised metal overlap,
and shielding plastic components, abrasion
protection and supplemental rust inhibitor on
exposed areas. In the chassis, exposed com-
ponents of the wheel suspension are made of
corrosion-resistant cast aluminium.
Inspection and maintenance
The car's anti-corrosion protection normally
requires no maintenance, but a good way to
reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the car
clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solu-
tions must be avoided on glossy trim compo-
nents. Any stone chips should be rectified as
soon as they are discovered.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 644)
Polishing and waxing (p. 644)
Handwashing (p. 645)
Automatic car wash (p. 646)
High-pressure washing (p. 648)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 648)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 649)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 650)
Car paintwork
The paintwork consists of several layers and
is an important part of the car's rustproofing,
and should therefore be checked regularly.
The most common types of paintwork dam-
age are stone chips, scratches, and marks on
the edges of wings, doors and bumpers. To
avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork
should be rectified immediately.
Related information
Touching up minor paintwork damage
(p. 651)
Colour codes (p. 652)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
651
Touching up minor paintwork
damage
Paint is an important part of the car's rust-
proofing and should therefore be checked
regularly. The most common types of paint-
work damage are stone chips, scratches, and
marks on e.g. the edges of wings, doors and
bumpers.
To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork
should be rectified immediately.
NOTE
When paint is repaired the surface must be
clean and dry. The temperature of the sur-
face should be at least 15 °C (59 °F).
Materials that may be needed
Primer – a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plastic-
coated bumpers.
Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray
cans or as touch-up pens/sticks
16
.
Masking tape.
Fine sand paper.
Applying touch-up paint to the
damaged surface
If the damage has not reached down to the
metal, the touch-up paint can be applied
directly after the surface has been cleaned.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape
to remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use of
a primer is appropriate. In the event of
damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive
primer should be used to give better
results - spray into the lid of the spray can
and brush on thinly.
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a
very fine polishing agent may be carried
out locally if required (e.g. if there are any
uneven edges). The surface is cleaned
thoroughly and left to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off
with a basecoat and clearcoat once the
primer has dried.
For scratches, implement the same procedure
but mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
Touch-up pens and spray paints for touching
up paintwork are available from Volvo dealers.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of
paint remains in place, fill in with base coat
and clear coat as soon as the surface has
been cleaned.
Related information
Car paintwork (p. 650)
Colour codes (p. 652)
16
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
652
Colour codes
Colour code
The decal for the colour code is positioned on
the car's right-hand door pillar between the
front and rear door and will be visible when
the right-hand rear door is opened.
Exterior colour code
Any secondary exterior colour code
Related information
Car paintwork (p. 650)
Touching up minor paintwork damage
(p. 651)
Replacing windscreen wiper
blades
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
windscreen. Together with washer fluid, they
aim to clean the windscreen and ensure visi-
bility while driving. The wiper blades can be
replaced.
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service
position. Service position is activated/deacti-
vated via the function view in the centre dis-
play when the car is stationary and the wind-
screen wipers are not on.
Set the wiper blade in removal position by
angling it out from the arm until a click
sound can be heard.
Press and hold the lock button located on
the wiper blade mounting.
At the same time, pull the blade straight
out parallel with the wiper arm.
4. Slide in the new wiper blade until the lock
button engages.
5. Angle the blade in towards the arm until a
click sound is heard. The blade is then no
longer in the removal position and can be
moved again.
6. Check that the wiper blade is firmly instal-
led.
7. Fold the wiper arm back towards the
windscreen.
The wiper blades are different lengths
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
653
NOTE
When replacing the wiper blades, note that
they have different lengths. The blade on
the driver's side is longer than on the pas-
senger side.
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 179)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 180)
Filling washer fluid (p. 654)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 653)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 178)
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 177)
Set the wiper blades in service
position
In some situations, the windscreen's wiper
blades must be set in service position (verti-
cal position), e.g. when they shall be
replaced.
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper
blades (e.g. for scraping off ice from the wind-
screen) they must be in service position.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the
service position, make sure that they are
not frozen down.
Activating/deactivating service mode
Service mode can be activated/deactivated
when the car is stationary and the windscreen
wipers are not on. Service mode is activated/
deactivated via the function view in the centre
display:
Press the Wiper Service
Position button. The light
indicator in the button illumi-
nates when service mode is
activated. When activated,
the wipers move to the serv-
ice position. To deactivate the
service mode, press Wiper Service Position
again. The light indicator in the button extin-
guishes when service mode is deactivated.
The wiper blades also exit the service position
if:
Windscreen wiping is activated.
Windscreen washing is activated.
The rain sensor is activated.
The car is driven away.
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the wind-
screen before the activation of wiping,
washing or the rain sensor, as well as
before driving. This is to avoid scraping the
paint on the bonnet.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
654
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 179)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 180)
Filling washer fluid (p. 654)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 652)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 178)
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 177)
Filling washer fluid
Washer fluid is used for cleaning the head-
lamps and windscreen. Washer fluid with
antifreeze must be used when the tempera-
ture is under the freezing point.
Washer fluid is filled into the reservoir with the
blue cap. The reservoir is used for both wind-
screen washer and headlamp washers*
NOTE
When approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir, the message
Washer fluid Level low, refill is shown in
the driver display, together with the
symbol.
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recom-
mended by Volvo – with frost protection dur-
ing cold weather and for temperatures below
freezing point.
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equiva-
lent with a recommended pH of between 6
and 8, in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with
neutral water).
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the
temperature is below freezing to avoid the
fluid freezing inside the pump, reservoir
and hoses.
Volume:
Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres
(5.8 qts).
Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5
litres (3.7 qts).
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 179)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 180)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 180)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 653)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
655
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 652)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 178)
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 177)
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
658
Type designations
The decals in the car contain information
such as chassis number, type designation,
colour code, etc.
Label location
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facili-
tate all contact with an authorised Volvo
dealer regarding the car and when ordering
spare parts and accessories.
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
659
Decal for type designation, vehicle identifi-
cation number, permissible maximum weights
and code designation for exterior colour and
type approval number. The decal is positioned
on the door pillar, and will be visible when the
right-hand rear door is opened.
Decal AC system for cars with refrigerant
R1234yf.
Decal AC system for cars with refrigerant
R134a.
Label for parking heater.
Decal for engine code and the engine's
serial number.
Label for engine oil.
||
SPECIFICATIONS
660
Decal for gearbox type designation and
serial number.
Decal for the car's identification number -
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact rep-
licas of those in the car. They are included
to show their approximate appearance and
locations in the car. The information that
applies to your particular car can be found
on the decal on the car.
Related information
Air conditioning – specifications (p. 671)
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
661
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can
be read in the table.
Dimensions mm inches
A
Ground clearance
A
136 5.4
B Wheelbase 2872 113.1
C Length 4761 187.4
D Load length, floor,
folded seat
1797 70.7
E Load length, floor 1005 39.6
F
Height
B
1437 56.6
Dimensions mm inches
G Load height 485 19.1
H Front track
1603
C
1600
D
1593
E
63.1
C
63.0
D
62.7
E
I Rear track
1603
C
1600
D
1593
E
63.1
C
63.0
D
62.7
E
Dimensions mm inches
J Load width, floor 867 34.1
K Width 1850 72.8
||
SPECIFICATIONS
662
Dimensions mm inches
L Width including
door mirrors
2040 80.3
M Width including
folded-in door mir-
rors
1916 75.4
A
At kerb weight + 2 people. (Varies slightly depending on
tyre dimension, chassis option, etc.)
B
Including roof antenna, for kerb weight.
C
Applies to cars with 17 inch wheels.
D
Applies to cars with 1819 inch wheels.
E
Applies to cars with 20 inch wheels.
Related information
Weights (p. 663)
SPECIFICATIONS
663
Weights
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read
on a label in the car.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full, plus and all oils and fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched)
influence the load capacity and are not
included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight -
Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car
without extra equipment or accessories.
This means that for every accessory added
the loading capacity of the car is reduced
correspondingly by the weight of the
accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load
capacity are the different equipment levels
(e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as
well as other accessories such as towbar,
load carrier, space box, audio system, auxil-
iary lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety
grille, carpets, cargo cover, power seats,
etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-
taining the kerb weight of your own partic-
ular car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be
visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
Related information
Type designations (p. 658)
Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 664)
SPECIFICATIONS
664
Towing capacity and towball load
Towing capacity and towball load for driving
with a trailer can be read in the tables.
Max. weight braked trailer
NOTE
Use of vibration dampers on the towbar is
recommended for trailers heavier than
1800 kg.
Engine
Engine code
A
Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
T6 Twin Engine B4204T46 Automatic 2000 100
T6 Twin Engine B4204T45 Automatic 2000 100
T8 Twin Engine B4204T35 Automatic 2000 100
T8 Twin Engine B4204T34 Automatic 2000 100
T8 Twin Engine B4204T28 Automatic 2000 100
T8 Twin Engine Polestar B4204T39 Automatic 2000 100
T8 Twin Engine Polestar B4204T48 Automatic 2000 100
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
IMPORTANT
When driving with a trailer, it is permitted
to exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle
weight (including towball load) by a maxi-
mum of 100 kg (220 lbs), provided that
speed is limited to 100 km/h (62 mph).
National legal requirements for the vehicle
combination, such as speed, etc. must be
observed.
SPECIFICATIONS
* Option/accessory.
665
Max. weight unbraked trailer
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
750 50
Related information
Type designations (p. 658)
Weights (p. 663)
Driving with a trailer (p. 486)
Trailer stability assist* (p. 488)
SPECIFICATIONS
666
Engine specifications
Engine specifications (power, etc.) for each
respective engine alternative can be found in
the table below.
The Twin Engine variant is driven both by a
petrol engine and an electric drive motor
(ERAD – Electric Rear Axle Drive).
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
NOTE
If there is no engine data in the table, this
is available in an enclosed supplement.
Engine
Engine code
A
Output
(kW/rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Max. rated
power
(kW/rpm)
Max. rated
power
(hp/rpm)
Torque
(Nm/rpm)
No. of cyl-
inders
T6 Twin Engine B4204T46 1865500 2535500 35017005000 4
T6 Twin Engine B4204T45 1865500 2535500 35017005000 4
T8 Twin Engine B4204T35 2355700 3205700 40022005400 4
T8 Twin Engine B4204T34 2236000 3036000 2486000 3376000 40022004800 4
T8 Twin Engine B4204T28 2336000 3186000 40022005400 4
T8 Twin Engine
Polestar
B4204T39 2456000 3336000 4304500 4
T8 Twin Engine
Polestar
B4204T48 2335800
6100
3185800
6100
4304500 4
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
Electric drive motor
Max. power output: 65 kW (87 hp).
Torque: 240 Nm.
Related information
Type designations (p. 658)
Engine oil – specifications (p. 667)
Coolant – specifications (p. 670)
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
667
Engine oil – specifications
Engine oil grade and volume for each respec-
tive engine alternative can be read in the
table.
Volvo recommends:
Engine
Engine code
A
Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres, approx.)
T6 Twin Engine B4204T46 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W20 or VCC RBS02AE 0W20 5.6
T6 Twin Engine B4204T45 5.6
T8 Twin Engine B4204T35 5.6
T8 Twin Engine B4204T34 5.6
T8 Twin Engine B4204T28 5.6
T8 Twin Engine Polestar B4204T39 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W20 or VCC RBS02AE 0W20 5.6
T8 Twin Engine Polestar B4204T48 5.6
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
||
SPECIFICATIONS
668
Related information
Type designations (p. 658)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 669)
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 613)
Engine oil (p. 611)
SPECIFICATIONS
669
Adverse driving conditions for
engine oil
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-
mally high oil temperature or oil consump-
tion. Below are some examples of adverse
driving conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C
(-22 °F) or hotter than +40 °C (+104 °F).
The above also apply to shorter driving dis-
tances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends:
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise there is a risk of the service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact of the car being
affected.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and
viscosity is not used, engine related com-
ponents may become damaged. Volvo dis-
claims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Related information
Engine oil – specifications (p. 667)
Engine oil (p. 611)
SPECIFICATIONS
670
Coolant – specifications
Prescribed grade: Ready-mixed coolant
approved by Volvo. If concentrated coolant is
used, mix with 50% water (of approved
water quality, not salt water, etc.). Consult a
Volvo dealer if unsure.
Only coolant approved by Volvo should be
used in order to prevent impairment of the
cooling system, engine problems, etc.
WARNING
Swallowing coolant is hazardous, it may
cause damage to organs (kidneys). The
product contains ethylene glycol, inhibitor,
water, etc.
Related information
Topping up coolant (p. 614)
Transmission fluid – specifications
Under normal driving conditions, the trans-
mission fluid does not need to be changed
during the service life of the gearbox. How-
ever, it may be necessary in adverse driving
conditions.
Automatic gearbox
Prescribed transmission fluid: AW1
Related information
Type designations (p. 658)
Brake fluid – specifications
Brake fluid is the medium in a hydraulic brake
system that is used to transfer pressure from
e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake cylinder,
which in turn acts on the brake callipers.
Prescribed grade: Volvo Original or equiva-
lent fluid compliant with a combination of
Dot 4, 5.1 and ISO 4925 class 6.
NOTE
It is recommended that brake fluid is
changed or filled by an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Related information
Engine compartment overview (p. 610)
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
671
Fuel tank - volume
The fuel tank's filling capacity can be read in
the table below.
All models
Litres (approx) 60
US gallons (approx) 15.9
Related information
Filling fuel (p. 476)
Air conditioning – specifications
The car's climate control system uses a freon-
free refrigerant either R1234yf or R134a
depending on market. Information about
which refrigerant the car's climate control
system uses is printed on a decal located on
the inside of the bonnet.
Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and
lubricants in the air conditioning system can
be read below.
AC decal
Decal for R134a
Decal for R1234yf
||
SPECIFICATIONS
672
Symbol explanation R1234yf
Symbol Meaning
Caution
Mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Lubricant type
A trained and certified technician
is required in order to service the
mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Flammable refrigerants
Refrigerant
Refrigerant amount is printed on the decal
located on the inside of the bonnet.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
Refrigerant amount.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pres-
surised refrigerant R134a. This system
must only be serviced and repaired by an
authorised workshop.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
Refrigerant amount.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pres-
surised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance
with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for
Safe Service and Containment of Refriger-
ants Used in Mobile AC System), service
and repair of the refrigerant system must
only be performed by trained and certified
technicians in order to ensure the safety of
the system.
Compressor oil
Volume Prescribed grade
100 ml (3.38 fl. oz.) PAG SPA2
Evaporator
IMPORTANT
The AC system's evaporator must never
be repaired or replaced with a previously
used evaporator. A new evaporator must
be certified and labelled in accordance
with SAE J2842.
Related information
Servicing the climate control system
(p. 608)
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
673
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions
The information in the tables below is in
accordance with WLTP (Worldwide Harmon-
ised Light-Duty Vehicles Test Procedure),
which is an international test method for
vehicles equivalent to a passenger car
designed for laboratory testing.
The fuel consumption for a vehicle is meas-
ured in litres per 100 km and carbon dioxide
emissions (CO
2
) are measured in gram CO
2
per km.
Explanation
Weighted combined value. The
value is weighted between elec-
tric mode and fuel mode over the
entire drive cycle.
gram CO
2
/km
litres/100 km
Certified value for the car's
potential range ("up to") in km in
electric mode. The value should
not be interpreted as an expected
range, and the range is difficult to
achieve during normal driving.
Urban and suburban driving
Average value over all four drive
cycle phases (urban, suburban,
extra-urban and motorway driv-
ing)
Automatic gearbox
Low value
High value
NOTE
If there is no consumption and emissions
data in the table, this is available in an
enclosed supplement.
NOTE
The capacity of the hybrid battery dimin-
ishes with age and use, which may result
in increased use of the internal combustion
engine and, as a consequence, reduced
fuel economy and reduced range during
electric operation.
T6 Twin Engine (B4204T46)
36 1.5
61
A
58
A
51 2.3
52
A
49
A
||
SPECIFICATIONS
674
T8 Twin Engine (B4204T34)
36 1.5
61
A
58
A
51 2.3
52
A
49
A
T8 Twin Engine Polestar (B4204T48)
61 2.7
50
A
43
A
A
Drive mode PURE
The values in the table above for fuel con-
sumption, CO
2
emissions, and range for elec-
tric mode are based on special drive cycles
(see below). The car's weight may increase
depending on its equipment level. Together
with how heavily the car is loaded, this affects
fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions, and
reduces its range in electric mode. According
to WLTP, each car has unique fuel consump-
tion, CO
2
emission values and electric range
values, depending on how the car is equipped.
These values range between the low value and
high value in the table above. In many mar-
kets, you can find your car's unique fuel con-
sumption, CO
2
emission values and electric
range values in the car's registration docu-
ment.
The certified values for the car should not be
interpreted as the expected values. The certifi-
cation values are the comparative values
obtained during special drive cycles (see
below).
There are several reasons for fuel consumption
that is higher and an electric range that is
shorter than the values in the table. Examples
of these include:
If the car is not regularly charged from the
mains.
If the car is equipped with extra equip-
ment that affects its weight.
Driving style.
If the customer chooses wheels other than
those mounted as standard on the basic
version of the model, this could increase
rolling resistance.
High speed causes increased air resis-
tance.
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
A combination of the examples above could
increase consumption considerably.
There may be huge deviations in fuel con-
sumption if comparing to the drive cycle pro-
files (see below), which are used in the certifi-
cation of the car and on which consumption
figures in the table are based. For further infor-
mation, please refer to the referenced regula-
tions.
SPECIFICATIONS
675
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes, in combi-
nation with poorer fuel quality than recom-
mended, are factors that considerably
increase the car's fuel consumption.
WLTP standard
From and including 1 September 2018, a new
standard was introduced for calculating con-
sumption values in the car. The WLTP stand-
ard (Worldwide Harmonised Light-Duty Vehi-
cles Test Procedure) represents the average
driving conditions for everyday driving. In
comparison with the previous standard
(NEDC), WLTP takes into account more varied
traffic situations and speeds, but also equip-
ment and weight classes. Optional equipment
that affects consumption is deactivated during
testing, e.g. air conditioning, seat heating, etc.
The new standard should provide more realis-
tic figures when it comes to fuel consumption,
carbon dioxide and emissions, as well as
range for electric operation. The values are
intended to allow comparison between differ-
ent cars and not to represent your typical nor-
mal consumption and range for electric mode.
Drive cycle profiles
A drive cycle simulates actual average driving
of the car. The standard is based on four differ-
ent drive cycle profiles. The four drive cycle
profiles are:
Urban driving – slow driving
Suburban driving – average driving
Extra-urban driving – fast driving
Motorway driving – very fast driving.
Every drive cycle is determined by different
conditions such as speed, time and mileage,
for example.
The official value for combined driving, which
is shown in the table, is a combination of the
results from the four drive cycles, in accord-
ance with legal requirements.
The exhaust gases are collected in order to
extrapolate the carbon dioxide emissions (CO
2
emissions) during the four drive cycles. These
were then analysed to determine the value for
CO
2
emissions.
Related information
Type designations (p. 658)
Weights (p. 663)
Economical driving (p. 469)
Factors that affect range when running on
electricity (p. 471)
SPECIFICATIONS
676
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
In certain countries not all approved sizes are
indicated by the registration document or
other documents. The following table shows
all approved combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
= Approved
Engine man/
aut
23545 R18
A
8x18x42
7.5x18x45
B
23540 R19
8x19x42
24535R20
C
8x20x45.5
T6 Twin Engine
T8 Twin Engine
aut
T8 Twin Engine Polestar aut
A
23545 R18 is not approved when the car is equipped with 19" brakes. Check with your Volvo dealer how your car is equipped.
B
Snow chains are only permitted in combination with the 7.5x18x45 rim.
C
24535 R20 is only approved for cars originally sold with 20" tyres in combination with sport chassis. Check with your Volvo dealer how your car is equipped.
Related information
Minimum permitted tyre load index and
speed rating for tyres (p. 677)
Type designations (p. 658)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 562)
Dimension designation for wheel rim
(p. 563)
Snow chains (p. 577)
SPECIFICATIONS
677
Minimum permitted tyre load
index and speed rating for tyres
The table below shows the minimum permit-
ted load index (LI) and speed rating (SS).
Engine man/
aut
Minimum permitted load index (LI)
A
Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)
B
T6 Twin Engine aut 96 V
T8 Twin Engine aut 96 W
T8 Twin Engine Polestar aut 95 W
A
The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
B
The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
Related information
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 676)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 678)
Type designations (p. 658)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 562)
Dimension designation for wheel rim
(p. 563)
SPECIFICATIONS
678
Approved tyre pressures
Approved tyre pressures for each engine
alternative can be found in the table.
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
Engine Tyre size Speed Load, 13 persons Max. load
ECO pressure
A
Front
(kPa)
B
Rear
(kPa)
Front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
T6 Twin Engine
T8 Twin Engine
23545 R18
23540 R19
0160 km/h (0100 mph) 250 250 270 270 270
160+ km/h (100+ mph) 310 310 340 340
T8 Twin Engine Polestar
23540 R19
0160 km/h (0100 mph) 250 250 270 270 270
160+ km/h (100+ mph) 310 310 340 340
24535 R20
0160 km/h (0100 mph) 260 260 280 280 280
160+ km/h (100+ mph) 310 310 340 340
Temporary Spare Tyre max 80 km/h (max 50 mph) 420 420 420 420
A
Economical driving.
B
In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
Related information
Type designations (p. 658)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 564)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 676)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 566)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
679
1, 2, 3 ...
4WD 459
A
AC (Air conditioning) 222
ABS
anti-lock brakes 445
Accessories and extra equipment 39
installation 40
Active bending lights 157
Active main beam 155
Active Park Assist 391
Limitations 396
Symbols and messages 399
Active Yaw Control 283
Adapting driving characteristics 461
Adaptive Cruise Control 321
activate 324
Auto brake 348
change cruise control functionality 328
change of target 345
controls 322
deactivate 325
display mode 323
fault tracing 327
Limitations 327
overtaking 343
setting the time interval 347
standby mode 326
stored speed 346
Symbols and messages 329
WARNING 344
Additional heater (Auxiliary heater) 235
Adjusting headlamp pattern/headlamp
beam 152
Adjusting the steering wheel 198
Aerial
location 269
Airbag 53
Activating/deactivating 56
driver's side 53
passenger side 54, 56
Airbag, see Airbag 53
Air conditioning 222
Air conditioning, fluid
volume and grade 671
Air conditioning system 200, 211
repair 608
Air distribution 205
Air vents 205, 207
change 206
defrosting 217
Recirculation 216
table of options 208
Air quality 202, 204
allergies and asthma 204
passenger compartment filter 205
Air recirculation 216
Alarm 275
deactivation 277
motion and tilt sensors 276
reduced alarm level 278
Alarm for hazard warning flashers 287
Alarm for slippery driving conditions 287
Alcohol lock 444, 445
Allergy and asthma inducing sub-
stances. 204
All Wheel Drive (AWD) 459
Ambience lights
adapt 163
Android Auto 524, 525, 526
Apple CarPlay 520, 521, 523
Approach lighting 161
Apps 502
Assistance at risk of collision 356
activate/deactivate 357
Limitations 360
Symbols and messages 361
upon risk of head-on collision 358
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
680
upon risk of rear-end collision 359
upon risk of run-off 357
Audio and media 500
Audio settings 500, 533
phone 534
play media 512, 513
Text message 533
Auto climate control 215
Auto hold 451
Automatic brake 451
activate/deactivate 452
after collision 453
Driver support 282
Automatic car wash 646
Automatic car washes 646
Automatic gearbox 454, 455
kickdown 458
oil 670
trailer 486
Automatic locking 273
Automatic relocking 242, 268
Automatic speed limiter 314
activate/deactivate 316
Limitations 317
tolerance 317
Auxiliary heater 235
AWD, All Wheel Drive 459
B
Backrest
front seat, adjusting 184, 185, 188,
189, 190, 191, 192
rear seat, lowering 194
Bag holder 595
Battery 481, 616
Battery 616
Hybrid battery 618
jump starting 481
maintenance 616
overload 481
recycling 619
symbols on the battery 618
Bicycle rack
towbar mounted 490
Blind Spot Information 363
BLIS 363
activate/deactivate 364
Limitations 365
Symbols and messages 366
Bluetooth
connect 518
connect car to Internet 536
phone 527
settings 535
Bonnet, opening 609
Book service and repair 603
Boot lid
opening with foot movement 273
unlock from inside 271
Brake assist
after collision 453
Brake energy 446, 460
Brake fluid
grade 670
Brake functions 445
Brake mode 455
Brakes 445
Anti-lock braking system, ABS 445
autobrake with adaptive cruise con-
trol 348
auto brake with Pilot Assist 348
automatic when stationary 451
brake assist system, BAS 447
brake light 159
brake system 445
emergency brake lights 160
maintenance 448
on gritted roads 447
on wet roads 447
Parking brake 448
Brake system
fluid 670
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
681
Bulbs
change 638
Bypass alcohol lock 444
C
Camera sensor
see Camera unit 409
Camera unit 409
Limitations 409
maintenance and cleaning 412
Symbols and messages 414
Car care 644, 645, 646, 648, 649, 650
Leather upholstery 642
Car functions
in centre display 120
Cargo area 593
electrical socket 588, 590
lighting 163
mounting points 596
Car holiday 473
Car key battery low 244
Car modem
connect car to Internet 538
settings 538
Car status 602
Tyre pressure 569
Car upholstery 638, 640, 641, 642, 643
Car washing 644, 645, 646, 648, 649,
650
Catalytic converter
Recovery 491
CD player 516
central locking 270
Centre display
change appearance 129
cleaning 639
climate control 211
function view 120
Keyboard 124
messages 138, 139
operation 110, 113, 117, 122
overview 107
settings 130, 131
switch off and change volume 129
symbols in status bar 122
views 113
Change of owner 132
Charge
car function 472
Charge current 420
Charging
finish charging 434
Hybrid battery 419
open and close charging flap 425
start charging 425
Status 428, 429, 432
Charging cable 421
Checking the engine oil level 613
Child safety 61
Child safety locks 271
Child seat 61, 62, 64, 65
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 64
lower mounting points 63
overview table 68
positioning/fitting 64, 65
table for location 69
table of i-Size 71
table of ISOFIX 72
Upper mounting points 62
City Safety 289
brakes for oncoming vehicles 299
cross traffic 296
evasive manoeuvre prevented 298
evasive manoeuvres 297
Limitations 300
limitations in the case of cross traf-
fic 297
limitations in the case of evasive
manoeuvres 298
obstacle detection 294
set warning distance 292
subfunctions 291
Symbols and messages 303
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
682
Cleaning 641, 643
automatic car wash 646
car washing 644, 645, 646, 648,
649, 650
centre display 639
Fabric upholstery 638, 640, 642
rims 650
Seatbelts 641
upholstery 638, 640, 641, 642, 643
Cleaning wheel rims 650
Cleaning wiper blades 648
Clean Zone 203
Clean Zone Interior Package 204
Climate control 200, 211
auto-regulation 215
centre display 211
experienced temperature 201
fan control 220
Parking 223
rear seat 211
sensors 200
temperature control 221, 222
voice control 201
zones 200
Climate control system
Refrigerant 671
Clock, adjustment 90
CO2 emissions 673
Collision 44, 48, 53, 59
Collision warning
from behind 362
with adaptive cruise control 344
with Pilot Assist 344
Collision warning system
cross traffic rear 371
see City Safety 289
Colour code, paint 652
Colour codes 652
Combined instrument panel 81
settings 83
Compass 497
calibration 498
Condensation in headlamps 645, 646,
648, 649
Connect car to Internet
no or poor connection 540
via a mobile device (WiFi) 537
via car modem 538
via telephone (Bluetooth) 536
Connected Safety 287
activate/deactivate 288
Limitations 289
Connect phone 528
Controls lighting 163
Control unit
charging status 429
Coolant 670
filling 614
Cooling system
overheating 480
Cornering lights 158
Cornering support 341
activate/deactivate 342
Limitations 342
Corner Traction Control 283
Crash, see Collision 44
Cross Traffic Alert 371
activate/deactivate 372
Limitations 372
messages 374
Cruise control 318
activate 319
deactivate 320
standby mode 320
stored speed 346
Customer privacy policy 39
CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 204
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
683
D
Data
recording 37
transfer between car and workshop 600
Data link connector 40
Data sharing 541, 542
Daytime running lights 153
Deadlock 278
deactivation 279
Defrosting 217
Diagnosis
via the workshop's Wi-Fi 600
Digital radio (DAB) 510
Dimensions 661
Towbar 484
dipped beam 153
Dipstick, electronic 613
Direction indicator 156
Direction indicators 156
direction of rotation 563
Display
driver information 81
Display lighting 163
Distance Warning 369
activate/deactivate 370
Limitations 370
Set time interval 347
DivX
®
517
Door mirrors 170
Dipping 170
resetting 171
store position 186, 187
Download Centre 601
using 601
Drive-E
Environmental philosophy 30
Driver Alert Control 367
activate/deactivate 368
guide to rest stops 368
Limitations 369
Driver display 81
app menu 101, 102
hybrid-related symbols and mes-
sages 436
messages 103
settings 83
Driver performance 89
settings 90
Driver profile 134
edit 135, 136, 138
select 135
driver support system 282
Driving mode 348
Drive systems 460
Drivetrain
Gearbox 454
Driving
cooling system 480
with a tailer 486
Driving economy 469
Driving in water 474
Driving mode 461
change 465
when using driver support 348
Driving with a trailer
towball load 664
towing capacity 664
E
eCall 556
Economical driving 469
ECO pressure 566, 678
Electrically operated parking brake 448
Electrical socket 588
using 590
Electrical system 616
Electric drive motor
specifications 666
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
684
Electric motor 460
Electric operation
range 471
emergency brake lights 160
Emergency equipment
first aid kit 596
warning triangle 597
Emergency puncture repair kit 578
Pump up tyre 583
using 579
Emissions of carbon dioxide 673
Energy distribution
assisted by map data 466
Engine
automatic start and stop of internal
combustion engine 461
deactivate 441
overheating 480
start 440
Engine braking 445, 455
Engine compartment
coolant 614
Engine oil 611
overview 610
Engine drag control 283
Engine oil 611, 669
adverse driving conditions 669
check and top up 613
grade and volume 667
Engine specifications 666
Engine temperature
high 480
Environment 30
Ethanol content 478
External dimensions 661
F
Fan
Air distribution 206
Air vents 207
Control 220
Fault tracing
Adaptive Cruise Control 327
City Safety 300
Ferry transport 467
First aid 596
First aid kit 596
Flooded road 474
Fluids, capacities 654, 671
Fluids and oils 670, 671
Fog lamp
front 158
rear 159
Foot brake 445
Four-C 467
Front seat
Climate control 211
Fan 220
heating 212, 213
Temperature 221
Ventilation 214
Front seat, manual 184
Front seat, power 185
adjusting seat 185
adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat 193
Lumbar support 192
massage 188, 189, 190
multi-function control 188, 189,
190, 191, 192
Side supports 191
store position 186, 187
FSC, ecolabelling 26
Fuel 477, 478
fuel consumption 673
identifier 478
fuel gauge 84
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
685
Fuelling
filling 476
fuel filler flap 475
Fuel tank
volume 671
Fuel vapour 477
Fuse box 620
Fuses 619
changing 620
in cargo area 633
in engine compartment 621
under glovebox 628
G
Gearbox 454
automatic 454, 455, 458
Gear positions
automatic gearbox 455
Gear selector inhibitor 458
Gear shift indicator 459
Glass, laminated/reinforced 166
Glovebox 591
Gracenote® 515
Gross vehicle weight 663
Ground fault breaker 423
GSI - Gear selector assistance 459
H
Handbrake 448
Handwash 645
Hard disk
space 543
Hazard warning flashers 160
Headlamp beam
adaptation 152
Headlamp control 150, 163
Headlamp pattern, adjusting 152
head restraint 195
Head up display
activate/deactivate 142
cleaning 640
Distance Warning 369
settings 142
store position 142, 186, 187
windscreen replacement 608
Head-up display 140
Heated wiper blades 177
Heater 233
auxiliary heater 235
parking heater 234
Heating
seats 212, 213
steering wheel 215
Windows 218, 219
High engine temperature 480
High-pressure washing 648
Hill start assist
Hill Start Assist (HSA) 453
Hill Start Assist 453
Hold
car function 472
HomeLink® 493
program 494
Type approval 497
using 496
Home safe lighting, Homesafe Lighting,
Follow me home lighting, follow-me-
home lighting 161
Horn 197
Hybrid battery 618
charging 419
Hybrid battery meter 85
Hybrid meter 84
Hybrid operation 461, 466
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
686
I
IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 204
IC (Inflatable Curtain) 59
ID, Volvo 28
Identification number 41
Ignition position 442, 443
Immobiliser 253
Immobilizer
Immobiliser 253
Indicator symbols 91
Individual drive mode 461
Inflatable curtain 59
Inflatable Curtain 59
Information display 81, 83
Infotainment system (Audio and
media) 500
Instrument lighting 163
Instrument overview
left-hand drive car 78
right-hand drive car 79
Instruments and controls 78, 79
IntelliSafe
Driver support 33
Interior Air Quality System 204
Interior lighting 161
adapt 163
Interior rearview mirror 170
Dipping 170
Intermittent wiping 178
Internet, see Internet-connected car 535
Internet-connected car
book service and repair 603
send car information 604
system updates 601
iPod®, connection 518
ITPMS - Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitor-
ing System 567
J
Jack 574
Journey statistics 89
Jump starting 481
K
Kerb weight 663
Key 239
Keyboard 124, 127
change language 127
Keyless
Locking/unlocking 268
settings 269
touch-sensitive surfaces 267
Keypad in the steering wheel 197
Key tag 239
L
Labels
location 658
Laminated glass 166
Lamps
change 638
trailer 489
Lane assistance 349
activate/deactivate 351
display mode 355
Limitations 352
select assistance option 352
Symbols and messages 353
Lane Keeping Aid
see Lane assistance 349
Language 130
Large Animal Detection (LAD) 294
Leather upholstery, washing instruc-
tions 642
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
687
Level control
damping 467
License agreement 95, 544
Lifting tool 574
Lighting
active bending lights 157
approach lighting 161
Automatic main beam 155
brake light 159
controls 150, 161
controls, instruments, display 163
cornering lights 158
daytime running lights 153
dipped beam 153
direction indicators 156
emergency brake lights 160
fog lamp 158
Hazard warning flashers 160
home safe lighting 161
in the passenger compartment 161
main beam 154, 155
position lamps 152
rear fog lamp 159
settings 151
Lighting, bulb replacement 638
Limp home 454
Load carriers 594
Loading
General 593
load retaining eyelets 596
long load 594
Loading hooks 595
Load retaining eyelets
cargo area 596
Lock
Locking/unlocking 242
Lockable wheel bolts 574
Lock confirmation 238
setting 239
Long-term storage 438
Low battery voltage
Battery 481
M
Main beam 154, 155
Maintained climate comfort 229
start/shut-off 229
maintenance
Rustproofing 650
Max. roof load 663
Media player 511, 512, 513
compatible file formats 519
voice control 147
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control 329
Assistance at risk of collision 361
BLIS 366
camera and radar unit 414
City Safety 303
Cross Traffic Alert 374
Lane assistance 353
Park Assist 380
Park assist camera 389
Park Assist Pilot 399
Pilot Assist 340
stability and traction control system 286
Messages in displays 103, 138
manage 104, 139
saved 105, 139
Meters
fuel gauge 84
Hybrid battery 85
Mileage 86
Electric operation 471
Misting
condensation in headlamps 644, 646
Mobile phone, see Phone 528
Mood lighting 163
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
688
Motion sensor 276
O
Obstacle detection
City Safety 294
octane rating 478
Oil, see also Engine oil 667, 669
Oil filter 611
Oil level 613
Online car 535
no or poor connection 540
Option/accessory 24
Output 666
electric motor 666
outside temperature gauge 91
Overheating 480, 486
Overtaking Assistance 343
activate 343
Owner's information 18
Owner's manual
ecolabelling 26
in centre display 19, 21
in mobile 23
OWNER'S MANUAL 24
P
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
Switch) 56
Paddle on the steering wheel 197
Paintwork
colour code 652
damage and touch-up 650, 651, 652
Panorama roof
pinch protection 166
Panoramic roof 173
opening and closing 174
sun blind 177
ventilation position 175
Parallel parking 391
Park Assist 375
activate/deactivate 377
forward, backward and along the
sides 376
Limitations 378
Symbols and messages 380
Park assist camera 381
activate 388
Limitations 409
locations and views 382
park assist lines 384
sensor fields 386
Symbols and messages 389
Park Assist Pilot 391
leave parking 396
parallel parking 392
perpendicular parking 392
using 393
Park Assist System 375
Parking
on hill 450
Parking brake 448
activate/deactivate 449
automatic activation 450
low battery voltage 451
Parking climate 223
Symbols and messages 231
Parking heater 234
Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch 56
Passenger compartment filter 205
Passenger compartment heater (Parking
heater) 234
Passenger compartment interior 586
electrical socket 588
glovebox 591
Sun visor 593
tunnel console 587
Passenger compartment lighting
automatic 162
Pedestrian Protection System 47
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
689
Personal information (Customer privacy
policy) 39
petrol 478
Petrol particle filter 479
Phone 527
Calls 531, 534
change to another 531
connect 528
connect automatically 529
connect manually 530
disconnect 530
remove 531
text message 532
voice control 146
Pilot Assist 330
activate 335
Auto brake 348
change of target 345
controls 332
deactivate 336
disabled steering assistance 337
display mode 333
Limitations 338
overtaking 343
setting the time interval 347
standby mode 336
stored speed 346
Symbols and messages 340
WARNING 344
Pinch protection 166
resetting 167
PIN code 538
Private locking 274
Polestar Engineered 467, 468
Polishing 644
Position lamp 152
Power panoramic roof 173
Power save mode 481
Power seat 185
Power windows 167, 168
opening and closing 168
pinch protection 166
PPS (Pedestrian Protection System) 47
Preconditioning 223
start/shut-off 224
Timer 225
Privacy policy (Customer privacy policy) 39
Private locking 274
activate/deactivate 274
Pump up tyre 583
R
Radar unit 400
Limitations 409
maintenance and cleaning 412
Symbols and messages 414
Type approval 401
Radio 505
change radio frequency and radio sta-
tion 506
DAB 510
search for radio station 507
settings 508
start 505
voice control 147
Radio favourites 508
Rain sensor 179, 180
Rain sensor memory function 180
Raising the car 605
Range
during electric operation 673
Rear Collision Warning 362
Limitations 362
Rear seat
Climate control 211
head restraint 195
heating 213
lowering the backrest 194
Rearview and door mirrors
angle external mirrors 171
compass 497, 498
Dipping 170
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
690
door 170
electrically retractable 171
heating 219
interior 170
rear window
heating 219
sun blind 169
Recommendations during driving 473
Recommendations for loading 593
Recovery 493
Red Key
restricted remote control key 248
settings 249
Refrigerant 608
climate control system 671
Refuelling 476
Regeneration 479
Remote control, HomeLink®
programmable 493
Remote control immobiliser 253
Remote control key 239
battery replacement 244
connect to driver profile 136
detachable key blade 250
loss 248
range 243
Remote control key system, type appro-
val 254
Remote updates 601
Resetting, trip meter 89
Resetting the door mirrors 171
Restore settings 132
change of owner 132
Driver profile 138
Retractable power door mirrors 171
Reversing camera 381
Rims
dimensions 563
Road run-off protection 357
Road sign information
Limitations 310
Road Sign Information 304
activate/deactivate 305
activating / deactivating warnings 309
display mode 306
Sensus Navigation 308
speed camera information 308
Speed warning 308
Rollover protection 283
Roll Stability Control 283
Roof load, max. weight 663
Rustproofing 650
S
Safety 44
pregnancy 45
Safety mode 59
start/movement 60
Sealing fluid 578
Seat, see Seats 184
Seatbelt 48
buckle/unbuckle 48
pregnancy 45
seatbelt reminder 51
seatbelt tensioner 50
Seatbelt, see Seatbelts 48
Seatbelt reminder 51
seatbelt tensioner
Resetting 51
Seatbelt tensioner 50
Seats
heating 212, 213
manual front seat 184
power front seat 185
store position 186, 187
Ventilation 214
whiplash protection 45
Security code 274
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
691
sensors
Air quality 205
Camera unit 409
Climate control 200
Radar unit 400
Sensus
connection and entertainment 34
Sensus Navigation
Road Sign Information 308
Service position 653
Service programme 600
Settings
Categories 133
contextual 131
Resetting 132
Side airbag 58
Side Impact Protection System 58, 59
SIM card 538
SIPS (Side Impact Protection Sys-
tem) 58, 59
Skidding 473, 474
Ski hatch 596
slippery driving conditions 474
Snow chains 577
Software updates 37
Sound experience 501
spare wheel 575
manage 576
Speed camera information 308
activate/deactivate 309
Speed limiter 311
activate 312
automatic 314
deactivate 313
Limitations 314
stored speed 346
temporary deactivation 314
Speed ratings, tyres 562
Spin control 283
Stabiliser
trailer 488
Stability and traction control system 283
sport mode 284, 285
Symbols and messages 286
Stains 638, 640, 641, 642, 643
Starting the engine 440
after collision 60
Start the car 440
State of charge
car function 472
Steering assistance at risk of collision 356
Steering force, speed related 282
Steering force level, see Steering force 282
Steering lock 197
Steering wheel 197, 198
heating 215
keypad 197
paddle 197
steering wheel adjustment 198
Steering wheel paddles 456
Stickers
location 658
Stone chips and scratches 650, 651, 652
Storage spaces 586
glovebox 591
Sun visor 593
tunnel console 587
Stored speed 346
Sun blind
panoramic roof 173, 177
pinch protection 166
rear window 169
Sunroof
pinch protection 166
Sun visor 593
mirror lighting 162
Switching off the engine 441
Switch off engine 441
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
692
Symbols
dynamic 81
indicator symbols 91
warning symbols 94
Symbols and messages
centre display status field 122
hybrid related 436
parking climate 231
system updates 601
T
Target vehicle change 345
Temperature
Control 221, 222
experienced 201
Temperature monitoring 424
Temporary Spare 575
Terms and conditions
services 38
user 541
Through-load hatch 596
Tilt detector 276
Time interval to the vehicle ahead 347
Tools 573
Top view 130
Total airing function 239
Towbar 483
foldable 484
specifications 484
Towing 491, 493
Towing capacity and towball load 664
Towing eye 492
Traction control 283
Traffic information 508
Trailer
cable 487
driving with a trailer 486
Lamps 489
snaking 488
Trailer stability assist 284, 488
Trailer Stability Assist 284
Transmission 454
Transmission oil
grade 670
Tread 564
Tread depth 564
winter tyres 577
Tread wear indicators 564
Trip computer 86
show in driver display 88
Trip meter 86
Trip meter, resetting 89
Trip statistics
settings 90
TSA - trailer stability assist 488
Tunnel console 587
Tunnel detection 153
Twin Engine
General 418
Type approval
HomeLink® 497
radar system 401
radio equipment 408
remote control key system 254
Type designations 658
Tyre load index 562
Tyre pressure
Adjust 565
Check 564
label showing recommended pres-
sure 566
Tyre pressure monitoring 567
action 570
save a new tyre pressure 568
Status 569
Tyre pressure table 678
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
693
Tyres
age 560
designation of dimensions 562
dimensions 676
direction of rotation 563
economy and wear 560
pressure 678
recommended 560
remove and mount 571
rotation during replacement 560
specifications 676, 677, 678
speed rating 562
Storage 560
tread wear indicators 564
tyre pressure table 678
winter tyres 577
U
Units 130
Unlocking
settings 243
with key blade 251
USB
jack for connecting media 518
V
Ventilation 205, 206, 207
seats 214
Vibration damper 483
Video 516, 518
settings 517
Voice control 143
Climate control 201
phone 146
radio and media 147
settings 148
using 144, 146, 147, 148
VOL marking 560
Volvo ID 28
create and register 28
W
Warning lamps
Adaptive Cruise Control 344
Airbags – SRS 94
alternator not charging 94
Fault in brake system 94
Low oil pressure 94
Parking brake applied 94
Pilot Assist 344
seatbelt reminder 94
stability and traction control system 283
starter battery not charging 94
system error 94
Warning 94
Warning sound
Parking brake 451
Warning symbols 94
Safety 44
Warning triangle 597
Washer fluid 177, 654
Washers
Headlamps 180
washer fluid, filling 654
windscreen 180
Waxing 644
Weights
kerb weight 663
Wheel bolts 574
Wheel rims
cleaning 650
Wheels
remove and mount 571
snow chains 577
Wheels and tyres
approved dimensions 676
tyre load index and speed rating 677
whiplash protection 45
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
694
Whiplash Protection System 45
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 45
Wi-Fi
connect car to Internet 537
delete network 541
share internet connection, hotspot 539
technology and security 541
Windows and glass 166
Windscreen
heating 218
projected image 140, 142
Windscreen washing 180
Windscreen wiper 178
rain sensor 179, 180
Winter driving 473
snow chains 577
winter tyres 577
Wiper blades 177
changing 652
Service position 653
Wiper blades, heated 177
Wiper blades and washer fluid 177
TP 31625 (English), AT 1946, MY20, Copyright © 20002019 Volvo Car Corporation
680

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Volvo S60 Twin Engine 2020 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Volvo S60 Twin Engine 2020 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 15,22 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Volvo S60 Twin Engine 2020

Volvo S60 Twin Engine 2020 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 722 pagina's

Volvo S60 Twin Engine 2020 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 740 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info